3UHIDFH 7DEOH RI &RQWHQWV ,QWURGXFWLRQ )XQFWLRQV

L Y

SIPROTEC Differential Protection 7UT612

V4.0

,QVWDOODWLRQ DQG &RPPLVVLRQLQJ 7HFKQLFDO 'DWD $SSHQGL[ ,QGH[

Manual

1 2 3 4 A

C53000G1176C1481

Liability statement We have checked the contents of this manual against the described hardware and software. Nevertheless, deviations may occur so that we cannot guarantee the entire harmony with the product. The contents of this manual will be checked in periodical intervals, corrections will be made in the following editions. We look forward to your suggestions for improvement. We reserve the right to make technical improvements without notice. 4.00.01

Copyright Copyright SIEMENS AG 2002. All rights reserved. Copying of this document and giving it to others and the use or communication of the contents thereof, are forbidden without express authority. Offenders are liable to the payment of damages. All rights are reserved, especially in the event or grant of a patent or registration of a utility model or design. Registered trademarks SIPROTEC, SINAUT, SICAM, and DIGSI are registered trademarks of SIEMENS AG. Other names and terms can be trademarks the use of which may violate the rights of thirds.

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Buch-Nr. C53000G1176C1481

Preface
Aim of This Manual This manual describes the functions, operation, installation, and commissioning of the device. In particularly, you will find: Description of the device functions and setting facilities Chapter 2, Instruction for installation and commissioning Chapter 3, List of the technical data Chapter 4, As well as a compilation of the most significant data for experienced users in the Appendix. General information about design, configuration, and operation of SIPROTEC devices are laid down in the SIPROTEC 4 system manual, order no. E50417H1176 C151. Target Audience Protection engineers, commissioning engineers, persons who are involved in setting, testing and service of protection, automation, and control devices, as well as operation personnel in electrical plants and power stations. This manual is valid for SIPROTEC 7UT612 differential protection; firmware version 4.0. Indication of Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws of the member states relating to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC Council Directive 89/336/EEC) and concerning electrical equipment for use within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage Directive 73/23/EEC). This conformity has been proved by tests conducted by Siemens AG in accordance with Article 10 of the Council Directive in agreement with the generic standards EN 50081 and EN 50082 (for EMC directive) and the standards EN 60255-6 (for lowvoltage directive). This product is designed and manufactured for application in industrial environment. The product conforms with the international standards of IEC 60255 and the German standards DIN 57435 part 303 (corresponding to VDE 0435 part 303).

Applicability of this Manual

Further Standards

ANSI C37.90.*.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

Preface

Additional Support

Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchasers purpose, the matter should be referred to the local Siemens representative. Individual course offerings may be found in our Training Catalogue, or questions may be directed to our training center. Please contact your Siemens representative. The warnings and notes contained in this manual serve for your own safety and for an appropriate lifetime of the device. Please observe them! The following terms are used:

Training Courses

Instructions and Warnings

DANGER
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions are not taken.

Warning
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Caution
indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. This particularly applies to damage on or in the device itself and consequential damage thereof.

Note indicates information about the device or respective part of the instruction manual which is essential to highlight.

Warning!
Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation. Non observance of the safety rules can result in severe personal injury or property damage. Only qualified personnel shall work on and around this equipment after becoming thoroughly familiar with all warnings and safety notices of this manual as well as with the applicable safety regulations. The successful and safe operation of this device is dependent on proper handling, installation, operation, and maintenance by qualified personnel under observance of all warnings and hints contained in this manual. In particular the general erection and safety regulations (e.g. IEC, DIN, VDE, EN or other national and international standards) regarding the correct use of hoisting gear must be observed. Nonobservance can result in death, personal injury or substantial property damage.

QUALIFIED PERSONNEL
For the purpose of this instruction manual and product labels, a qualified person is one who is familiar with the installation, construction and operation of the equipment and the hazards involved. In addition, he has the following qualifications: Is trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, ground and tag circuits and equipment in accordance with established safety practices.

ii

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

Preface
Is trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in accordance with established safety practices. Is trained in rendering first aid. Typographic and Symbol Conventions The following text formats are used when literal information from the device or to the device appear in the text flow: 3DUDPHWHU QDPHV, i.e. designators of configuration or function parameters which may appear word-for-word in the display of the device or on the screen of a personal computer (with operation software DIGSI 4), are marked in bold letters of a monospace type style. 3DUDPHWHU RSWLRQV, i.e. possible settings of text parameters, which may appear word-for-word in the display of the device or on the screen of a personal computer (with operation software DIGSI 4), are written in italic style, additionally. $QQXQFLDWLRQV, i.e. designators for information, which may be output by the relay or required from other devices or from the switch gear, are marked in a monospace type style in quotation marks. Deviations may be permitted in drawings when the type of designator can be obviously derived from the illustration. The following symbols are used in drawings:
Earth fault

device-internal logical input signal device-internal logical output signal internal input signal of an analogue quantity external binary input signal with function number Fno external binary output signal with function number Fno

Earth fault
UL1L2
FNo 567

>Release
FNo 5432

Dev. Trip
Parameter address Parameter name

!"# AVI8UDPI 2Q 2II

Parameter options

example of a parameter switch designated )81&7,21 with the address  and the possible settings 2Q and 2II

Besides these, graphical symbols are used according to IEC 6061712 and IEC 6061713 or similar. Some of the most frequently used are listed below:

Input signal of an analogue quantity

1

OR gate

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

iii

Preface

&
signal inversion

AND gate

=1

ExclusiveOR gate (antivalence): output is active, if only one of the inputs is active Coincidence gate (equivalence): output is active, if both input are active or inactive at the same time Dynamic inputs (edgetriggered) above with positive, below with negative edge Formation of one analogue output signal from a number of analogue input signals (example: 3)

!%  Du33

Iph>

Limit stage with setting address and parameter designator (name)

!%
T

UDu33
0

Timer (pickup delay T, example adjustable) with setting address and parameter designator (name)

Timer (dropout delay T, example non-adjustable)

Dynamic triggered pulse timer T (monoflop)

S R

Q Q

Static memory (RSflipflop) with setting input (S), resetting input (R), output (Q) and inverted output (Q)

Furthermore, the graphic symbols according IEC 6061712 and IEC 6061713 or similar are used in most cases. n

iv

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

Table of Contents
Preface................................................................................................................................................... i

Table of Contents ................................................................................................................................ v

Introduction.......................................................................................................................................... 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 Overall Operation ................................................................................................................... 2 Applications ............................................................................................................................ 5 Features ................................................................................................................................. 7

Functions............................................................................................................................................ 13 2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.2.1 2.1.2.2 2.1.3 2.1.3.1 2.1.3.2 2.1.4 2.1.4.1 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.2.6 2.2.7 2.2.8 2.2.9 General................................................................................................................................. 14 Configuration of the Scope of Functions .............................................................................. 14 Power System Data 1........................................................................................................... 20 Setting Overview .................................................................................................................. 28 Information Overview............................................................................................................ 30 Setting Groups ..................................................................................................................... 30 Setting Overview .................................................................................................................. 31 Information Overview............................................................................................................ 31 General Protection Data (Power System Data 2)................................................................. 32 Information Overview............................................................................................................ 32 Differential Protection ........................................................................................................... 33 Fundamentals of Differential Protection ............................................................................... 33 Differential Protection for Transformers................................................................................ 42 Differential Protection for Generators, Motors, and Series Reactors ................................... 48 Differential Protection for Shunt Reactors ............................................................................ 49 Differential Protection for Mini-Busbars, Branch-Points and Short Lines ............................. 50 Single-Phase Differential Protection for Busbars ................................................................. 52 Setting the Function Parameters .......................................................................................... 56 Setting Overview .................................................................................................................. 61 Information Overview............................................................................................................ 62

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

Table of Contents

2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4 2.4 2.4.1 2.4.1.1 2.4.1.2 2.4.1.3 2.4.1.4 2.4.1.5 2.4.1.6 2.4.2 2.4.2.1 2.4.2.2 2.4.3 2.4.4 2.5 2.5.1 2.5.1.1 2.5.1.2 2.5.1.3 2.5.1.4 2.5.1.5 2.5.2 2.5.3 2.5.4 2.6 2.6.1 2.6.2 2.6.3 2.6.4 2.7 2.7.1 2.7.2 2.7.3 2.7.4 2.7.5 2.7.6

Restricted Earth Fault Protection.......................................................................................... 64 Function Description ............................................................................................................. 66 Setting the Function Parameters .......................................................................................... 71 Setting Overview................................................................................................................... 72 Information Overview............................................................................................................ 72 Time Overcurrent Protection for Phase and Residual Currents ........................................... 73 Function Description ............................................................................................................. 73 Definite Time Overcurrent Protection ................................................................................... 73 Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection.................................................................................... 76 Manual Close Command ...................................................................................................... 79 Dynamic Cold Load Pickup................................................................................................... 79 Inrush Restraint .................................................................................................................... 79 Fast Busbar Protection Using Reverse Interlocking ............................................................. 81 Setting the Function Parameters .......................................................................................... 82 Phase Current Stages .......................................................................................................... 82 Residual Current Stages....................................................................................................... 88 Setting Overview................................................................................................................... 92 Information Overview............................................................................................................ 94 Time Overcurrent Protection for Earth Current..................................................................... 97 Function Description ............................................................................................................. 97 Definite Time Overcurrent Protection ................................................................................... 97 Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection.................................................................................... 99 Manual Close Command .................................................................................................... 101 Dynamic Cold Load Pickup................................................................................................. 101 Inrush Restraint .................................................................................................................. 101 Setting the Function Parameters ........................................................................................ 102 Setting Overview................................................................................................................. 106 Information Overview.......................................................................................................... 107 Dynamic Cold Load Pickup for Time Overcurrent Protection ............................................. 108 Function Description ........................................................................................................... 108 Setting the Function Parameters ........................................................................................ 111 Setting Overview................................................................................................................. 111 Information Overview.......................................................................................................... 112 Single-Phase Time Overcurrent Protection ........................................................................ 113 Function Description ........................................................................................................... 113 High-Impedance Differential Protection .............................................................................. 115 Tank Leakage Protection.................................................................................................... 117 Setting the Function Parameters ........................................................................................ 118 Setting Overview................................................................................................................. 121 Information Overview.......................................................................................................... 122

vi

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

Table of Contents

2.8 2.8.1 2.8.1.1 2.8.1.2 2.8.2 2.8.3 2.8.4 2.9 2.9.1 2.9.2 2.9.3 2.9.4 2.9.5 2.10 2.10.1 2.10.2 2.10.3 2.10.4 2.11 2.11.1 2.11.2 2.11.3 2.11.4 2.12 2.12.1 2.12.2 2.12.3 2.12.4 2.13 2.13.1 2.13.1.1 2.13.1.2 2.13.1.3 2.13.1.4 2.13.1.5 2.13.1.6 2.13.1.7 2.13.2 2.13.3 2.13.4

Unbalanced Load Protection .............................................................................................. 123 Function Description........................................................................................................... 123 Definite Time Stages .......................................................................................................... 123 Inverse Time Stage ............................................................................................................ 124 Setting the Function Parameters ........................................................................................ 126 Setting Overview ................................................................................................................ 129 Information Overview.......................................................................................................... 130 Thermal Overload Protection.............................................................................................. 131 Overload Protection Using a Thermal Replica ................................................................... 131 Hot-Spot Calculation and Determination of the Ageing Rate ............................................. 133 Setting the Function Parameters ........................................................................................ 137 Setting Overview ................................................................................................................ 141 Information Overview.......................................................................................................... 142 Thermoboxes for Overload Protection................................................................................ 143 Function Description........................................................................................................... 143 Setting the Function Parameters ........................................................................................ 143 Setting Overview ................................................................................................................ 145 Information Overview.......................................................................................................... 150 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection....................................................................................... 152 Function Description........................................................................................................... 152 Setting the Function Parameters ........................................................................................ 155 Setting Overview ................................................................................................................ 156 Information Overview.......................................................................................................... 156 Processing of External Signals........................................................................................... 157 Function Description........................................................................................................... 157 Setting the Function Parameters ........................................................................................ 158 Setting Overview ................................................................................................................ 158 Information Overview.......................................................................................................... 159 Monitoring Functions .......................................................................................................... 160 Function Description........................................................................................................... 160 Hardware Monitoring .......................................................................................................... 160 Software Monitoring............................................................................................................ 161 Monitoring of Measured Quantities..................................................................................... 161 Trip Circuit Supervision ...................................................................................................... 162 Fault Reactions .................................................................................................................. 165 Group Alarms ..................................................................................................................... 166 Setting Errors ..................................................................................................................... 167 Setting the Function Parameters ........................................................................................ 167 Setting Overview ................................................................................................................ 168 Information Overview ......................................................................................................... 169

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

vii

Table of Contents

2.14 2.14.1 2.14.2 2.14.3 2.14.4 2.14.5 2.15 2.15.1 2.15.1.1 2.15.1.2 2.15.1.3 2.15.1.4 2.15.1.5 2.15.1.6 2.15.2 2.15.3 2.15.4 2.15.5 2.15.6 2.16 2.16.1 2.16.2

Protection Function Control ................................................................................................ 171 Fault Detection Logic of the Entire Device.......................................................................... 171 Tripping Logic of the Entire Device..................................................................................... 172 Setting the Function Parameters ........................................................................................ 173 Setting Overview................................................................................................................. 174 Information Overview.......................................................................................................... 174 Ancillary Functions.............................................................................................................. 175 Processing of Messages..................................................................................................... 175 General ............................................................................................................................... 175 Event Log (Operating Messages) ....................................................................................... 177 Trip Log (Fault Messages).................................................................................................. 177 Spontaneous Annunciations ............................................................................................... 178 General Interrogation.......................................................................................................... 178 Switching Statistics ............................................................................................................. 178 Measurement during Operation .......................................................................................... 179 Fault Recording .................................................................................................................. 183 Setting the Function Parameters ........................................................................................ 183 Setting Overview................................................................................................................. 184 Information Overview.......................................................................................................... 185 Processing of Commands................................................................................................... 189 Types of Commands........................................................................................................... 189 Steps in the Command Sequence ...................................................................................... 190

2.16.3 Interlocking ......................................................................................................................... 191 2.16.3.1 Interlocked/Non-Interlocked Switching ............................................................................... 191 2.16.4 2.16.5 Recording and Acknowledgement of Commands............................................................... 194 Information Overview.......................................................................................................... 195

Installation and Commissioning..................................................................................................... 197 3.1 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3 3.1.3.1 3.1.3.2 3.1.3.3 3.1.3.4 3.1.3.5 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 Mounting and Connections ................................................................................................. 198 Installation .......................................................................................................................... 198 Termination Variants........................................................................................................... 201 Hardware Modifications ...................................................................................................... 205 General ............................................................................................................................... 205 Disassembling the Device .................................................................................................. 207 Jumper Settings on Printed Circuit Boards......................................................................... 209 Interface Modules ............................................................................................................... 213 To Reassemble the Device................................................................................................. 217 Checking the Connections.................................................................................................. 218 Data Connections of the Serial Interfaces .......................................................................... 218 Checking Power Plant Connections ................................................................................... 220

viii

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

Table of Contents

3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 3.3.5 3.3.6 3.3.7 3.3.8 3.3.9 3.3.10 3.3.11 3.4

Commissioning ................................................................................................................... 222 Testing Mode and Transmission Blocking.......................................................................... 223 Checking the System (SCADA) Interface........................................................................... 223 Checking the Binary Inputs and Outputs ............................................................................ 225 Checking the Setting Consistency...................................................................................... 227 Checking for Breaker Failure Protection............................................................................. 228 Symmetrical Current Tests on the Protected Object .......................................................... 230 Zero Sequence Current Tests on the Protected Object ..................................................... 236 Checking for Busbar Protection.......................................................................................... 240 Checking for Current Input I8 ............................................................................................. 242 Testing User Specified Functions....................................................................................... 243 Stability Check and Triggering Oscillographic Recordings................................................. 243 Final Preparation of the Device .......................................................................................... 245

Technical Data ................................................................................................................................. 247 4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.1.5 4.1.6 4.1.7 4.1.8 4.1.9 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 General Device Data .......................................................................................................... 248 Analog Inputs ..................................................................................................................... 248 Power Supply ..................................................................................................................... 248 Binary Inputs and Outputs .................................................................................................. 249 Communications Interfaces ................................................................................................ 250 Electrical Tests ................................................................................................................... 253 Mechanical Stress Tests .................................................................................................... 255 Climatic Stress Tests.......................................................................................................... 256 Service Conditions.............................................................................................................. 256 Construction ....................................................................................................................... 257 Differential Protection ......................................................................................................... 258 General............................................................................................................................... 258 Transformers ...................................................................................................................... 259 Generators, Motors, Reactors ............................................................................................ 261 Busbars, Branch-Points, Short Lines.................................................................................. 262 Restricted Earth Fault Protection........................................................................................ 263 Time Overcurrent Protection for Phase and Residual Currents ......................................... 264 Time Overcurrent Protection for Earth Current................................................................... 271 Dynamic Cold Load Pickup for Time Overcurrent Protection ............................................. 272 Single-Phase Time Overcurrent Protection ........................................................................ 273 Unbalanced Load Protection .............................................................................................. 274

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

ix

Table of Contents

4.9 4.9.1 4.9.2 4.10 4.11 4.12 4.13 4.14 4.15

Thermal Overload Protection.............................................................................................. 275 Overload Protection Using a Thermal Replica.................................................................... 275 Hot Spot Calculation and Determination of the Ageing Rate.............................................. 277 Thermoboxes for Overload Protection................................................................................ 277 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection....................................................................................... 278 External Trip Commands .................................................................................................... 278 Monitoring Functions .......................................................................................................... 279 Ancillary Functions.............................................................................................................. 280 Dimensions ......................................................................................................................... 282

Appendix........................................................................................................................................... 285 A.1 A.1.1 A.2 A.2.1 A.2.2 A.3 A.4 A.5 A.6 A.7 A.8 A.9 Ordering Information and Accessories ............................................................................... 286 Accessories ........................................................................................................................ 288 General Diagrams............................................................................................................... 291 Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Mounting ........................................................................ 291 Panel Surface Mounting ..................................................................................................... 292 Connection Examples......................................................................................................... 293 Assignment of the Protection Functions to Protected Objects............................................ 304 Preset Configurations ......................................................................................................... 305 Protocol Dependent Functions .......................................................................................... 307 List of Settings .................................................................................................................... 308 List of Information ............................................................................................................... 323 List of Measured Values .................................................................................................... 340

Index.................................................................................................................................................. 343 n

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

Introduction

1
The SIPROTEC 4 devices 7UT612 are introduced in this chapter. An overview of the devices is presented in their application, features, and scope of functions. 1.1 1.2 1.3 Overall Operation Applications Features 2 5 7

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

1 Introduction

1.1

Overall Operation
The numerical differential protection device SIPROTEC 7UT612 is equipped with a powerful microcomputer system. This provides fully numerical processing of all functions in the device, from the acquisition of the measured values up to the output of commands to the circuit breakers. Figure 1-1 shows the basic structure of the device.

Analog Inputs

The measuring inputs MI transform the currents derived from the instrument transformers and match them to the internal signal levels for processing in the device. The device includes 8 current inputs.

MI
IL1S1 IL2S1 IL3S1 IL1S2 IL2S2 IL3S2

IA

AD

OA
ERROR RUN

Output relays userprogrammable

LEDs on the front panel, userprogrammable

I7 I8

Display on the front panel

Operator control panel

(6&

(17(5

7 4 1 .

8 5 2 0

9 6 3 +/-

Front serial operating- interface

to PC

Time synchronization

radio clock

Binary inputs, programmable

Rear serial service interface

PC/modem/ thermobox

PS
Uaux
Power supply Serial system interface

to SCADA

Figure 1-1

Hardware structure of the numerical differential protection 7UT612 example for a twowinding transformer with sides S1 and S2

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

1.1 Overall Operation

Three current inputs are provided for the input of the phase currents at each end of the protected zone, a further measuring input (I7) may be used for any desired current, e.g. the earth current measured between the starpoint of a transformer winding and ground. The input I8 is designed for highly sensitive current detection thus allowing, for example, the detection of small tank leakage currents of power transformers or reactors, or with an external series resistor processing of a voltage (e.g. for highimpedance unit protection). The analog signals are then routed to the input amplifier group IA. The input amplifier group IA ensures a high impedance termination for the measured signals. It contains filters which are optimized in terms of band width and speed with regard to the signal processing. The analog/digital converter group AD has a multiplexer, analog/digital converters and memory modules for the data transfer to the microcomputer system C. Microcomputer System Apart from processing the measured values, the microcomputer system C also executes the actual protection and control functions. In particular, the following are included: Filtering and conditioning of measured signals. Continuous supervision of measured signals. Monitoring of the pickup conditions of each protection function. Conditioning of the measured signals, i.e. conversion of currents according to the connection group of the protected transformer (when used for transformer differential protection) and matching of the current amplitudes. Formation of the differential and restraint quantities. Frequency analysis of the phase currents and restraint quantities. Calculation of the RMS-values of the currents for thermal replica and scanning of the temperature rise of the protected object. Interrogation of threshold values and time sequences. Processing of signals for the logic functions. Reaching trip command decisions. Storage of fault messages, fault annunciations as well as oscillographic fault data for system fault analysis. Operating system and related function management such as e.g. data recording, real time clock, communication, interfaces etc. The information is provided via output amplifier OA. Binary Inputs and Outputs The microcomputer system obtains external information through binary inputs such as remote resetting or blocking commands for protective elements. The C issues information to external equipment via the output contacts. These outputs include, in particular, trip commands to circuit breakers and signals for remote annunciation of important events and conditions.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

1 Introduction

Front Elements

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) and a display screen (LCD) on the front panel provide information such as targets, measured values, messages related to events or faults, status, and functional status of the 7UT612. Integrated control and numeric keys in conjunction with the LCD facilitate local interaction with the 7UT612. All information of the device can be accessed using the integrated control and numeric keys. The information includes protective and control settings, operating and fault messages, and measured values (see also SIPROTEC System Manual, order-no. E50417H1176C151). The settings can be modified as are discussed in Chapter 2. If the device incorporates switchgear control functions, the control of circuit breakers and other equipment is possible from the 7UT612 front panel.

Serial Interfaces

A serial operating interface on the front panel is provided for local communications with the 7UT612 through a personal computer. Convenient operation of all functions of the device is possible using the SIPROTEC 4 operating program DIGSI 4. A separate serial service interface is provided for remote communications via a modem, or local communications via a substation master computer that is permanently connected to the 7UT612. DIGSI 4 is required. All 7UT612 data can be transferred to a central master or main control system through the serial system (SCADA) interface. Various protocols and physical arrangements are available for this interface to suit the particular application. Another interface is provided for the time synchronization of the internal clock via external synchronization sources. Via additional interface modules further communication protocols may be created. The service interface may be used, alternatively, for connection of a thermobox in order to process external temperatures, e.g. in overload protection.

Power Supply

The 7UT612 can be supplied with any of the common power supply voltages. Transient dips of the supply voltage which may occur during short-circuit in the power supply system, are bridged by a capacitor (see Technical Data, Subsection 4.1.2).

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

1.2 Applications

1.2

Applications
The numerical differential protection 7UT612 is a fast and selective short-circuit protection for transformers of all voltage levels, for rotating machines, for series and shunt reactors, or for short lines and mini-busbars with two feeders. It can also be used as a single-phase protection for busbars with up to seven feeders. The individual application can be configured, which ensures optimum matching to the protected object. The device is also suited for two-phase connection for use in systems with 162/3 Hz rated frequency. A major advantage of the differential protection principle is the instantaneous tripping in the event of a short-circuit at any point within the entire protected zone. The current transformers limit the protected zone at the ends towards the network. This rigid limit is the reason why the differential protection scheme shows such an ideal selectivity. For use as transformer protection, the device is normally connected to the current transformer sets at the higher voltage side and the lower voltage side of the power transformer. The phase displacement and the interlinkage of the currents due to the winding connection of the transformer are matched in the device by calculation algorithms. The earthing conditions of the starpoint(s) can be adapted to the users requirements and are automatically considered in the matching algorithms. For use as generator or motor protection, the currents in the starpoint leads of the machine and at its terminals are compared. Similar applies for series reactors. Short lines or mini-busbars with two feeders can be protected either. Short means that the connection from the CTs to the device do not cause an impermissible burden for the current transformers. For transformers, generators, motors, or shunt reactors with earthed starpoint, the current between the starpoint and earth can be measured and used for highly sensitive earth fault protection. The seven measured current inputs of the device allow for a single-phase protection for busbars with up to seven feeders. One 7UT612 is used per phase in this case. Alternatively, (external) summation transformers can be installed in order to allow a busbar protection for up to seven feeders with one single 7UT612 relay. An additional current input I8 is designed for very high sensitivity. This may be used e.g. for detection of small leakage currents between the tank of transformers or reactors and earth thus recognizing even high-resistance faults. For transformers (including auto-transformers), generators, and shunt reactors, a high-impedance unit protection system can be formed using 7UT612. In this case, the currents of all current transformers (of equal design) at the ends of the protected zone feed a common (external) high-ohmic resistor the current of which is measured using the high-sensitive current input I8 of 7UT612. The device provides backup time overcurrent protection functions for all types of protected objects. The functions can be enabled for any side. A thermal overload protection is available for any type of machine. This can be complemented by the evaluation of the hot-spot temperature and ageing rate, using an external thermobox to allow for the inclusion of the oil temperature.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

1 Introduction

An unbalanced load protection enables the detection of unsymmetrical currents. Phase failures and unbalanced loads which are especially dangerous for rotating machines can thus be detected. A version for 162/3 Hz two-phase application is available for traction supply (transformers or generators) which provides all functions suited for this application (differential protection, restricted earth fault protection, overcurrent protection, overload protection). A circuit breaker failure protection checks the reaction of one circuit breaker after a trip command. It can be assigned to any of the sides of the protected object.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

1.3 Features

1.3

Features
Powerful 32-bit microprocessor system. Complete numerical processing of measured values and control, from sampling and digitizing of the analog input values up to tripping commands to the circuit breakers. Complete galvanic and reliable separation between internal processing circuits of the 7UT612 and external measurement, control, and power supply circuits because of the design of the analog input transducers, binary inputs and outputs, and the DC/DC or AC/DC converters. Suited for power transformers, generators, motors, branch-points, or smaller busbar arrangements. Simple device operation using the integrated operator panel or a connected personal computer running DIGSI 4.

Differential Protection for Transformers

Current restraint tripping characteristic. Stabilized against in-rush currents using the second harmonic. Stabilized against transient and steady-state fault currents caused e.g. by overexcitation of transformers, using a further harmonic: optionally the third or fifth harmonic. Insensitive against DC offset currents and current transformer saturation. High stability also for different current transformer saturation. High-speed instantaneous trip on high-current transformer faults. Independent of the conditioning of the starpoint(s) of the power transformer. High earth-fault sensitivity by detection of the starpoint current of an earthed transformer winding. Integrated matching of the transformer connection group. Integrated matching of the transformation ratio including different rated currents of the transformer windings.

Differential Protection for Generators and Motors

Current restraint tripping characteristic. High sensitivity. Short tripping time. Insensitive against DC offset currents and current transformer saturation. High stability also for different current transformer saturation. Independent of the conditioning of the starpoint.

Differential Protection for MiniBusbars and Short Lines

Current restraint tripping characteristic. Short tripping time. Insensitive against DC offset currents and current transformer saturation.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

1 Introduction
High stability also for different current transformer saturation. Monitoring of the current connections with operation currents. Bus-Bar Protection Single-phase differential protection for up to seven feeders of a busbar. Either one relay per phase or one relay connected via interposed summation current transformers. Current restraint tripping characteristic. Short tripping time. Insensitive against DC offset currents and current transformer saturation. High stability also for different current transformer saturation. Monitoring of the current connections with operation currents. Restricted Earth Fault Protection Earth fault protection for earthed transformer windings, generators, motors, shunt reactors, or starpoint formers. Short tripping time. High sensitivity for earth faults within the protected zone. High stability against external earth faults using the magnitude and phase relationship of through-flowing earth current. High-Impedance Unit Protection Highly sensitive fault current detection using a common (external) burden resistor. Short tripping time. Insensitive against DC offset currents and current transformer saturation. high stability with optimum matching. Suitable for earth fault detection on earthed generators, motors, shunt reactors, and transformers, including auto-transformers. Suitable for any voltage measurement (via the resistor current) for application of high-impedance unit protection. Tank Leakage Protection For transformers or reactors the tank of which is installed isolated or high resistive against ground. Monitoring of the leakage current flowing between the tank and ground. Can be connected via a normal current input of the device or the special highly sensitive current input (3 mA smallest setting). Time Overcurrent Protection for Phase Currents and Residual Current Two definite time delayed overcurrent stages for each of the phase currents and the residual (threefold zero sequence) current, can be assigned to any of the sides of the protected object. Additionally, one inverse time delayed overcurrent stage for each of the phase currents and the residual current. Selection of various inverse time characteristics of different standards is possible, alternatively a user defined characteristic can be specified.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

1.3 Features
All stages can be combined as desired; different characteristics can be selected for phase currents on the one hand and the residual current on the other. External blocking facility for any desired stage (e.g. for reverse interlocking). Instantaneous trip when switching on a dead fault with any desired stage. Inrush restraint using the second harmonic of the measured currents. Dynamic switchover of the time overcurrent parameters, e.g. during cold-load startup of the power plant. Time Overcurrent Protection for Earth Current Two definite time delayed overcurrent stages for the earth current connected at current input I7 (e.g. current between starpoint and earth). Additionally, one inverse time delayed overcurrent stage for the earth current. Selection of various inverse time characteristics of different standards is possible, alternatively a user defined characteristic can be specified. The stages can be combined as desired. External blocking facility for any desired stage (e.g. for reverse interlocking). Instantaneous trip when switching on a dead fault with any desired stage. Inrush restraint using the second harmonic of the measured current. Dynamic switchover of the time overcurrent parameters, e.g. during cold-load startup of the power plant. Single-Phase Time Overcurrent Protection Two definite time delayed overcurrent stages can be combined as desired. For any desired single-phase overcurrent detection. Can be assigned to the current input I7 or the highly sensitive current input I8. Suitable for detection of very small current (e.g. for high-impedance unit protection or tank leakage protection, see above). Suitable for detection of any desired AC voltage using an external series resistor (e.g. for high-impedance unit protection, see above). External blocking facility for any desired stage. Unbalanced Load Protection Processing of the negative sequence current of any desired side of the protected object. Two definite time delayed negative sequence current stages and one additional inverse time delayed negative sequence current stage. Selection of various inverse time characteristics of different standards is possible, alternatively a user defined characteristic can be specified. The stages can be combined as desired. Thermal Overload Protection Thermal replica of current-initiated heat losses. True RMS current calculation. Can be assigned to any desired side of the protected object.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

1 Introduction
Adjustable thermal warning stage. Adjustable current warning stage. Alternatively evaluation of the hot-spot temperature according to IEC 60354 with calculation of the reserve power and ageing rate (by means of external temperature sensors via thermobox). Circuit Breaker Failure Protection With monitoring of current flow through each breaker pole of the assigned side of the protected object. Supervision of the breaker position possible (if breaker auxiliary contacts available). Initiation by each of the internal protection functions. Initiation by external trip functions possible via binary input. External Direct Trip Tripping of either circuit breaker by an external device via binary inputs. Inclusion of external commands into the internal processing of information and trip commands. With or without trip time delay. Processing of External Information Combining of external signals (user defined information) into the internal information processing. Pre-defined transformer annunciations for Buchholz protection and oil gassing. Connection to output relays, LEDs, and via the serial system interface to a central computer station. User Defined Logic Functions (CFC) Freely programmable linkage between internal and external signals for the implementation of user defined logic functions. All usual logic functions. Time delays and measured value set point interrogation. Commissioning; Operation Comprehensive support facilities for operation and commissioning. Indication of all measured values, amplitudes and phase relation. Indication of the calculated differential and restraint currents. Integrated help tools can be visualized by means of a standard browser: Phasor diagrams of all currents at all ends of the protected object are displayed as a graph. Connection and direction checks as well as interface check.

10

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

1.3 Features
Monitoring of the internal measuring circuits, the auxiliary voltage supply, as well as the hard- and software, resulting in increased reliability. Supervision of the current transformer secondary circuits by means of symmetry checks. Check of the consistency of protection settings as to the protected object and the assignment of the current inputs: blocking of the differential protection system in case of inconsistent settings which could lead to a malfunction. Trip circuit supervision is possible. Further Functions Battery buffered real time clock, which may be sychronized via a synchronization signal (e.g. DCF77, IRIG B via satellite receiver), binary input or system interface. Continuous calculation and display of measured quantities on the front of the device. Indication of measured quantities of all sides of the protected object. Fault event memory (trip log) for the last 8 network faults (faults in the power system), with real time stamps (ms-resolution). Fault recording memory and data transfer for analog and user configurable binary signal traces with a maximum time range of 5 s. Switching statistics: counter with the trip commands issued by the device, as well as record of the fault current and accumulation of the interrupted fault currents; Communication with central control and data storage equipment via serial interfaces through the choice of data cable, modem, or optical fibres, as an option. n

Monitoring Functions

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

11

1 Introduction

12

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

Functions

2
This chapter describes the numerous functions available on the SIPROTEC 7UT612 relay. The setting options for each function are explained, including instructions to determine setting values and formulae where required. 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11 2.12 2.13 2.14 2.15 2.16 General Differential Protection Restricted Earth Fault Protection Time Overcurrent Protection for Phase and Residual Currents Time Overcurrent Protection for Earth Current Dynamic Cold Load Pickup for Time Overcurrent Protection Single-Phase Time Overcurrent Protection Unbalanced Load Protection Thermal Overload Protection Thermoboxes for Overload Protection Circuit Breaker Failure Protection Processing of External Signals Monitoring Functions Protection Function Control Ancillary Functions Processing of Commands 14 33 64 73 97 108 113 123 131 143 152 157 160 171 175 189

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

13

2 Functions

2.1

General
A few seconds after the device is switched on, the initial display appears in the LCD. In the 7UT612 the measured values are displayed. Configuration settings (Subsection 2.1.1) may be entered using a PC and the software program DIGSI 4 and transferred via the operating interface on the device front, or via the serial service interface. Operation via DIGSI 4 is described in the SIPROTEC 4 System Manual, order no. E50417H1176C151. Entry of password No. 7 (for setting modification) is required to modify configuration settings. Without the password, the settings may be read, but cannot be modified and transmitted to the device. The function parameters, i.e. settings of function options, threshold values, etc., can be entered via the keypad and display on the front of the device, or by means of a personal computer connected to the front or service interface of the device utilising the DIGSI 4 software package. The level 5 password (individual parameters) is required.

2.1.1
General

Configuration of the Scope of Functions

The 7UT612 relay contains a series of protective and additional functions. The scope of hardware and firmware is matched to these functions. Furthermore, commands (control actions) can be suited to individual needs of the protected object. In addition, individual functions may be enabled or disabled during configuration, or interaction between functions may be adjusted. Example for the configuration of the scope of functions: 7UT612 devices should be intended to be used for busbars and transformers. Overload protection should only be applied on transformers. If the device is used for busbars this function is set to 'LVDEOHG and if used for transformers this function is set to (QDEOHG. The available function are configured (QDEOHG or 'LVDEOHG. For some functions, a choice may be presented between several options which are explained below. Functions configured as 'LVDEOHG are not processed by the 7UT612. There are no messages, and associated settings (functions, limit values, etc.) are not displayed during detailed settings.

Note:
Available functions and default settings are depending on the ordering code of the relay (see ordering code in the Appendix for details). Configuration settings may be entered using a PC and the software program DIGSI 4 and transferred via the operating interface on the device front, or via the serial service interface. Operation via DIGSI 4 is described in the SIPROTEC system manual, order number E50417H1176C151 (Section 5.3).

Determination of Functional Scope

14

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.1 General

Entry of password No. 7 (for setting modification) is required to modify configuration settings. Without the password, the settings may be read, but cannot be modified and transmitted to the device. Special Cases Many of the settings are self-explanatory. The special cases are described below. Appendix A.4 includes a list of the functions with the suitable protected objects. First determine which side of the protected object will be named side 1 and which one will be named side 2. Determination is up to you. If several 7UT612 are used, the sides should be denominated consistently to be able to assign them more easily later on. For side 1 we recommend the following: for transformers the upper voltage side, but, if the starpoint of the lower voltage side is earthed this side is preferred as side 1 (reference side); for generators the terminal side; for motors and shunt reactors the current supply side; for series reactors, lines and busbars there is no side which is preferred. Side determination plays a role for some of the following configuration settings. If the setting group change-over function is to be used, the setting in address  *US &KJH 237,21 must be set to (QDEOHG. In this case, it is possible to apply up to four different groups of settings for the function parameters. During normal operation, a convenient and fast switch-over between these setting groups is possible. The setting 'LVDEOHG implies that only one function parameter setting group can be applied and used. The definition of the protected object (address  3527 2%-(&7) is decisive for the possible setting parameters and for the assignment of the inputs and outputs of the device to the protection functions: For normal power transformers with isolated windings set 3527 2%-(&7 =  SKDVH WUDQVI regardless of the connection group (winding interconnection) and the earthing conditions of the starpoint(s). This is even valid if an earthing reactor is situated within the protected zone (cf. Figure 2-18, page 45). The option $XWRWUDQVI is selected for auto-transformers. This option is also applicable for shunt reactors if current transformers are installed at both sides of the connection points (cf. Figure 2-25 right side, page 50). For a  SKDVH WUDQVI, the phase input L2 is not connected. This option is suited especially to single-phase power transformers with 162/3 Hz (traction transformers). Equal setting is valid for generators and motors. The option *HQHUDWRU0RWRU also applies for series reactors and shunt reactors which latter are equipped with current transformers at both sides. Select the option SK %XVEDU if the device is used for mini-busbars or branchpoints with two ends. This setting applies also for short lines which are terminated by two sets of current transformers. Short means that the current transformer leads between the CTs and the device do not form an impermissible burden for the CTs. The device can be used as single-phase differential protection for busbars with up to 7 feeders, either using one device per phase or one device connected via external summation CTs. Select the option SK %XVEDU in this case. You must inform the device about the number of feeders under address  180%(5 2) (1'6.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

15

2 Functions

The measuring input I7 serves often to acquire a starpoint current. Carrying out configurations in address  ,&7 &211(&7 the device will be informed on the side the current is assigned to. For transformers select the side where the starpoint is earthed and where the starpoint current is to be measured. For earthed generators and motors it is the side which is looking towards the earthed starpoint. For auto-transformers any side can be selected since there is only one starpoint current for both sides. If the starpoint current is not used for differential protection or for restricted earth fault protection, pre-set the following: QRW XVHG. If restricted earth fault protection is applied, it must be assigned to an earthed side in address  5() 3527. Otherwise this protection function has to be set to 'LVD EOHG. For auto-transformers any side can be used. The overcurrent time protection functions must also be assigned to a specific side of the protected object. For phase overcurrent time protection select the side relevant for this protection in address  '07,'07 3KDVH. For generators usually the starpoint side is selected, for motors the terminal side. Otherwise, for single-side infeed we recommend the feeding side. Often, however, an external overcurrent time protection is used for the feeding side. The internal overcurrent time protection of 7UT612 should then be activated for the outgoing side. It is then used as backup protection for faults beyond the outgoing side. To select the characteristic group according to which the phase overcurrent time protection is to operate use address  '07,'07 3+ &+. If it is only used as definite time overcurrent protection (DMT), set 'HILQLWH 7LPH. In addition to the definite time overcurrent protection an inverse time overcurrent protection may be configured, if required. The latter operates according to an IEC-characteristic (72& ,(&), to an ANSI-characteristic (72& $16,) or to a user-defined characteristic. In the latter case the trip time characteristic (8VHU 'HILQHG 38) or both the trip time characteristic and the reset time characteristic (8VHU GHI 5HVHW) are configured. For the characteristics please refer to the Technical Data. In address  the zero sequence (residual) current time overcurrent protection '07,'07 , can be assigned to any side of the protected object. This does not have to be the same side as for phase overcurrent protection (address , see above). For characteristics the same options are available as for the phase overcurrent protection using address  '07,'07 , &+. However, for zero sequence current time overcurrent protection the settings may be different to the settings selected for phase time overcurrent protection. This protection function always acquires the residual current 3I0 of the supervised side. This current is calculated from the sum of the corresponding phase currents. There is another earth current time overcurrent protection which is independent from the before-described zero sequence time overcurrent protection. This protection, to be configured in address  '07,'07 (DUWK, acquires the current connected to the current measuring input I7. In most cases, it is the starpoint current of an earthed starpoint (for transformers, generators, motors or shunt reactors). No assignment to a specific side is necessary since this type of protection always acquires the I7 current, no matter where it originates from. For this protection you may select one of the characteristic groups using address  '07,'07 ( &+5, the same way as for the phase time overcurrent protection. No matter which characteristic has been selected for the latter. A single-phase definite-time overcurrent protection '07 3+$6( for different userrequirements is available in address . The protection function offers two options.

16

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.1 General
It either acquires the measured current at the normal input I7 (XQVHQV &7) or at highly sensitive input I8 (VHQV &7). The latter case is very interesting since input I8 is able to detect even very small currents (from 3 mA at the input). This protection function is very suited e.g. for highly sensitive tank leakage protection (see also Subsection 2.7.3) or high-impedance unit protection (see also Subsection 2.7.2). This protection is not bound to a specific side or application. Usage is up to the users requirements. In address  81%$/$1&( /2$' the unbalanced load protection can be assigned to a specific side of the protected object, i.e. it supervises the negative sequence current and checks if there is any unbalanced load. The trip time characteristics can be set to definite time ('HILQLWH 7LPH) according to address  81%$/ /2$' &+5, additionally operate according to an IECcharacteristic (72& ,(&) or to an ANSI characteristic (72& $16,). For overload protection select the side whose currents are relevant for overload detection. Use address  7KHUP2YHUORDG. Since the cause for overload comes from outside of the protected object, the overload current is a traversing current. Therefore it does not necessarily have to be effective at the infeeding side. For transformers with tap changer the overload protection is assigned to the nonregulated side as it is the only side where we have a defined relation between rated current and rated power. For generators the overload protection usually is on the starpoint side. For motors and shunt reactors the overload protection is connected to the current transformers of the feeding side. For series reactors, lines and busbars there any side can be selected. Busbars and sections of overhead lines usually do not require overload protection since it is not reasonable to calculate the temperature rise. Climate and weather conditions (temperature, wind) change to quick. On the other hand, the current alarm stage is able to warn of menacing overload. In address  7KHUP2/ &+5 the user can additionally choose between two methods of overload detection: Overload protection with thermal replica according to IEC 60255-8 (FODVVLFDO), Overload protection with calculation of hot-spot temperature and the aging rate according to IEC 60354 (,(&), The first method is characterized by its easy handling and a low number of setting values. The second method requires detailed knowledge about the protected object, the environment it is located in and cooling. The latter one is useful for transformers with integrated temperature detectors. For more information see also Section 2.9. If overload protection with calculation of hot-spot temperature is used according to IEC 60354 (address  7KHUP2/ &+5 = ,(&), at least one thermobox must be connected to the service interface. The thermobox informs the device about the temperature of the coolant. The interface is set in address  57'%2; ,1387. For 7UT612 this is 3RUW &. The number of resistance temperature detectors and the way the thermobox(es) transmit information is set in address  57' &211(&7,21:  57' VLPSOH[ or  57' +'; (with 1 thermobox) or  57' +'; (with 2 thermoboxes). This must comply with the settings at the thermobox(es).

Note: The temperature measuring point relevant for the calculation of the hot-spot temperature should be fed via the first thermobox.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

17

2 Functions
For the circuit breaker failure protection set in address  %5($.(5 )$,/85( which side is to be monitored. This has to be the side feeding onto an internal fault. For the trip circuit supervision select in address  7ULS &LU 6XS whether it shall operate with 2 ( %LQDU\ ,QSXWV) or only 1 binary input ( %LQDU\ ,QSXW). The inputs have to be isolated.

Addr. 103 105

Setting Title Grp Chge OPTION PROT. OBJECT

Setting Options Disabled Enabled 3 phase Transformer 1 phase Transformer Autotransformer Generator/Motor 3 phase Busbar 1 phase Busbar 2

Default Setting Disabled 3 phase Transformer

Comments Setting Group Change Option Protection Object

106 107

NUMBER OF SIDES

2 7

Number of Sides for Multi Phase Object Number of Ends for 1 Phase Busbar

NUMBER OF ENDS 3 4 5 6 7 I7-CT CONNECT. not used Side 1 Side 2 Disabled Enabled Disabled Side 1 Side 2 Disabled Enabled Disabled Side 1 Side 2 Definite Time only Time Overcurrent Curve IEC Time Overcurrent Curve ANSI User Defined Pickup Curve User Defined Pickup and Reset Curve Disabled Side 1 Side 2

108

not used

I7-CT connected to

112 113

DIFF. PROT. REF PROT.

Enabled Disabled

Differential Protection Restricted earth fault protection

117 120

Coldload Pickup DMT/IDMT Phase

Disabled Disabled

Cold Load Pickup DMT / IDMT Phase

121

DMT/IDMT PH. CH

Definite Time only

DMT / IDMT Phase Pick Up Characteristic

122

DMT/IDMT 3I0

Disabled

DMT / IDMT 3I0

18

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.1 General

Addr. 123

Setting Title DMT/IDMT 3I0 CH

Setting Options Definite Time only Time Overcurrent Curve IEC Time Overcurrent Curve ANSI User Defined Pickup Curve User Defined Pickup and Reset Curve Disabled unsensitive Current Transformer I7 Definite Time only Time Overcurrent Curve IEC Time Overcurrent Curve ANSI User Defined Pickup Curve User Defined Pickup and Reset Curve Disabled unsensitive Current Transformer I7 sensitive Current Transformer I8

Default Setting Definite Time only

Comments DMT / IDMT 3I0 Pick Up Characteristic

124

DMT/IDMT Earth

Disabled

DMT / IDMT Earth

125

DMT/IDMT E CHR.

Definite Time only

DMT / IDMT Earth Pick Up Characteristic

127

DMT 1PHASE

Disabled

DMT 1Phase

140

UNBALANCE LOAD Disabled Side 1 Side 2 UNBAL. LOAD CHR Definite Time only Time Overcurrent Curve IEC Time Overcurrent Curve ANSI Therm.Overload Disabled Side 1 Side 2 classical (according IEC60255) according IEC354 Disabled Side 1 Side 2 Disabled Enabled Disabled with 2 Binary Inputs with 1 Binary Input Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Port C

Disabled

Unbalance Load (Negative Sequence) Unbalance Load (Neg. Sequ.) Characteris. Thermal Overload Protection

141

Definite Time only

142

Disabled

143 170

Therm.O/L CHR. BREAKER FAILURE M.V. SUPERV Trip Cir. Sup.

classical (according IEC60255) Disabled

Thermal Overload Protec. Characteristic Breaker Failure Protection

181 182

Enabled Disabled

Measured Values Supervision Trip Circuit Supervision

186 187 190 191

EXT. TRIP 1 EXT. TRIP 2 RTD-BOX INPUT

Disabled Disabled Disabled 6 RTD simplex operation

External Trip Function 1 External Trip Function 2 External Temperature Input Ext. Temperature Input Connection Type

RTD CONNECTION 6 RTD simplex operation 6 RTD half duplex operation 12 RTD half duplex operation

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

19

2 Functions

2.1.2
General

Power System Data 1

The device requires some plant and power system data in order to be able to adapt its functions accordingly, dependent on the actual application. The data required include for instance rated data of the substation and the measuring transformers, polarity and connection of the measured quantities, if necessary features of the circuit breakers, and others. These data can only be changed from a PC running DIGSI 4 and are discussed in this Subsection. The rated frequency of the power system is set under address  5DWHG )UHTXHQ F\. The default setting is made in the factory in accordance with the design variant and needs to be changed only if the device is to be used for a different purpose than ordered for. Address  3+$6( 6(4 is used to establish the phase sequence. The preset phase sequence is / / / for clockwise phase rotation. For systems with counterclockwise phase rotation, set / / /. This setting is irrelevant for single-phase application.

Rated Frequency

Phase sequence

L1

L1

L3
Clockwise G

L2

L2
Counter-clockwise G

L3

G!G"

G"G!

Figure 2-1

Phase sequence

Temperature Unit

The temperature of the hot-spot temperature calculation can be expressed in degrees &HOVLXV or )DKUHQKHLW. If overload protection with hot-spot temperature is used, set the desired temperature unit in address  7(03 81,7. Otherwise this setting can be ignored. Changing temperature units does not mean that setting values which are linked to these temperature units will automatically be converted. They have to be re-entered into their corresponding addresses. Transformer data are required if the device is used for differential protection for transformers, i.e. if the following was set with the configuration of the protection functions (Subsection 2.1.1, margin heading Special Cases): 3527 2%-(&7 (address )  SKDVH WUDQVI or $XWRWUDQVI or  SKDVH WUDQVI. In cases other than that, these settings are not available. Please observe the assignment of the sides when determining winding 1, as abovementioned (Subsection 2.1.1, margin heading Special Cases). Generally, side 1 is the reference winding having a current phase angle of 0 and no vector group indicator. Usually this is the higher voltage winding of the transformer.

Object Data with Transformers

20

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.1 General

The device needs the following information: The rated voltage UN in kV (phase-to-phase) under address  8135, 6,'( . The starpoint condition under address  67$5317 6,'( : 6ROLG (DUWKHG or ,VRODWHG. If the starpoint is earthed via a current-limiting circuit (e.g. low-resistive) or via a Petersen-coil (high-reactive), set 6ROLG (DUWKHG, too. The mode of connection of the transformer windings under address  &211(& 7,21 6. This is normally the capital letter of the vector group according to IEC. If the transformer winding is regulated then the actual rated voltage of the winding is not used as UN but rather the voltage which corresponds to the average current of the regulated range. The following applies: U max U min 2 U N = 2 ------------------------------- = ------------------------------U max + U min 1 1 ------------ + ----------U max U min where Umax, Umin are the voltages at the limits of the regulated range. Calculation example: Transformer YNd5 35 MVA 110 kV/20 kV Ywinding with tap changer 20 %

This results for the regulated winding (110 kV) in: maximum voltage Umax = 132 kV minimum voltage Umin = 88 kV Setting voltage (address ) 2 2 UN-PRI SIDE 1 = ------------------------------- = ---------------------------------------- = 105.6 kV 1 1 1 1 ------------ + --------------------------- + -------------132 kV 88 kV U max U min For the side 2, the same considerations apply as for the side 1: The rated voltage U N in kV (phase-to-phase) under address  8135, 6,'( , the starpoint condition under address  67$5317 6,'( , and the mode of connection of the transformer windings under address  &211(&7,21 6. Additionally, the vector group numeral is set under address  9(&725 *53 6 which states the phase displacement of side 2 against the reference winding, side 1. It is defined according to IEC as the multiple of 30. If the higher voltage side is the reference (side 1), you may set the numeral directly, e.g.  for vector group Yd5 or Dy5. Every vector group from 0 to 11 can be set provided it is possible (for instance, Yy, Dd and Dz allow only even, Yd, Yz and Dy allow only odd numerals). If not the higher voltage side is used as reference winding (side 1) it must be considered that the vector group changes: e.g. a Yd5 transformer is regarded from the lower voltage side as Dy7 (Figure 2-2).

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

21

2 Functions

Winding 1
L1 L2 L3
UL1N

Winding 2
L1 L2 L3
uL2N

uL3N UL3N uL1N UL2N

Yd5
uL23 uL31 uL12 uL1N

Dy7
UL31

UL1N UL12

UL23

Winding 2
Figure 2-2

Winding 1

Change of the transformer vector group if the lower voltage side is the reference side example

The primary rated power 61 75$16)250(5 (address ) is the direct primary rated apparent power for transformers. The power must always be entered as a primary value, even if the device is generally configured in secondary values. The device calculates the rated current of the protected winding from this power. This is the reference for all referred values. The device automatically computes from the rated data of the protected transformer the current-matching formulae which are required to match the vector group and the different rated winding currents. The currents are converted such that the sensitivity of the protection always refers to the power rating of the transformer. Therefore, no circuity is required for matching of the vector group and no manual calculations for converting of rated current are normally necessary. Object Data with Generators, Motors and Reactors Using the 7UT612 for protection of generators or motors, the following must have been set when configuring the protection functions (see Subsection 2.1.1, address ): 3527 2%-(&7 = *HQHUDWRU0RWRU. These settings also go for series and shunt reactors if a complete set of current transformers is connected to both sides. In cases other than that, these settings are not available. With address  81 *(102725 you inform the device of the primary rated voltage (phase-to-phase) of the machine to be protected. The primary rated power 61 *(102725 (address ) is the direct primary rated apparent power of the machine. The power must always be entered as a primary value, even if the device is generally configured in secondary values. The device calculates the rated current of the protected object from this power and the rated voltage. This is the reference for all referred values. Object Data with Mini-Busbars, Branch-Points, Short Lines These data are only required if the device is used for differential protection of mini busbars or short lines with two ends. When configuring the protection functions (see Subsection 2.1.1, address ) the following must have been set: 3527 2%-(&7 = SK %XVEDU. In cases other than that, these settings are not available. With address  81 %86%$5 you inform the device of the primary rated voltage (phase-to-phase). This setting has no effect on the protective functions but influences the display of the operational measured values. 22

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.1 General

Since both sides or feeders may be equipped with current transformers of different rated primary currents, a uniform rated operational current , 35,0$5< 23 is defined as rated object current (address ) which will then be considered as a reference value for all currents. The currents are converted such that the settings of the protection function always refer to the rated operational current. In general, if current transformers differ, the higher rated primary current is selected for operational rated current. Object Data with Busbars with up to 7 Feeders Busbar data are only required if the device is used for single-phase busbar differential protection for up to 7 feeders. When configuring the protection functions (see Subsection 2.1.1, address ) following must have been set: 3527 2%-(&7 = SK %XV EDU. In cases other than that, these settings are not available. With address  81 %86%$5 you inform the device of the primary rated voltage (phase-to-phase). This setting has no effect on the protective functions but influences the displays of the operational measured values. Since the feeders of a busbar may be equipped with current transformers of different rated primary currents, a uniform operational nominal current , 35,0$5< 23 is defined as rated busbar current (address ) which will then be considered as a reference value for all currents. The feeder currents are converted such that the settings of the protection functions always refer to the rated operational current. Usually no external matching equipment is required. In general, if current transformers differ, the higher rated primary current of the feeders is selected for rated operational current. If the device is connected via summation transformers, the latter are to be connected between the current transformer set of each feeder and the device inputs. In this case the summation transformers can also be used for matching of currents. For the rated operational current of the busbar also use the highest of the rated primary currents of the feeders. Rated currents of each individual feeder are matched later on. If one 7UT612 is used per phase, set the same currents and voltages for all three devices. For the identification of the phases for fault annunciations and measured values each device is to be informed on the phase it is assigned to. This is to be set in address 3+$6( 6(/(&7,21, address . Current Transformer Data for 2 Sides The rated primary operational currents for the protected object derive from the object data before-described. The data of the current transformer sets at the sides of the protected object generally differ slightly from the object data before-described. They can also be completely different. Currents have to have a clear polarity to ensure that the differential protection applies the correct function. Therefore the device must be informed on the current transformer data. If there are 2 sides (i.e. all applications, except for single-phase busbar protection for up to 7 feeders), this is ensured by indication of rated currents and the secondary starpoint formation of the current transformer sets. In address  ,135, &7 6 the rated primary current of the current transformer set of side 1 of the protected object is set. In address  ,16(& &7 6 the rated secondary current is set. Please make sure that the sides were defined correctly (see Subsection 2.1.1, margin heading Special Cases, page 15). Please also make sure that the rated secondary transformer currents match the setting for the rated currents of the device (see also Subsection 3.1.3.3, margin heading Input/Output Board AI/ O3. Otherwise the device will calculate incorrect primary data, and malfunction of the differential protection may occur.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

23

2 Functions

Indication of the starpoint position of the current transformers determines the polarity of the current transformers. To inform the device on the location of the starpoint in relation to the protected object use address  675317!2%- 6. Figure 2-3 shows some examples for this setting.

Side 2

Side 1

L1 L2 L3
 675317!2%- 6 = 12  675317!2%- 6 = <(6

L1 L2 L3

Side 2

Side 1

L1

G
 675317!2%- 6 = <(6  675317!2%- 6 = 12

L2 L3

Side 2

Side 1

L1

M
 675317!2%- 6 = <(6 Figure 2-3 Position of the CT starpoints example  675317!2%- 6 = <(6

L2 L3

For side 2 of the protected object the same applies. For side 2 set the nominal primary current ,135, &7 6 (address ), nominal secondary current ,16(& &7 6 (address ) and the position of the current transformer starpoint 675317!2%- 6 (address ). Side 2 requires the same considerations as side 1. If the device is applied as transverse differential protection for generators or motors, special considerations must be observed for the CT connections: In a healthy operational state all currents flow into the protected object, i.e. in contrast to the other applications. Therefore you have to set a wrong polarity for one of the current transformer sets. The part windings of the machine windings correspond to the sides.

24

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.1 General

Figure 2-4 gives you an example: Although the starpoints of both current transformer sets are looking towards the protected object, the opposite setting is to be selected for side 2: 675317!2%- 6 = 12.

Side 2

Side 1

L1

L2

L3
 675317!2%- 6 = 12 Figure 2-4

 675317!2%- 6 = <(6

Definition of current direction for transverse differential protection - example

Current Transformer Data for Single-phase Busbar Protection

Current transformer sets in the feeders of a busbar can have different rated currents. Therefore, a uniform rated operational object current has been determined in the before-described paragraph Object Data with Busbars with up to 7 Feeders. The currents of each individual feeder have to be matched to this rated operational current. Indicate the rated primary transformer current for each feeder. The interrogation only applies to data of the number of feeders determined during the configuration according to 2.1.1 (address  180%(5 2) (1'6). If rated currents have already been matched by external equipment (e.g. by matching transformers), the rated current value, used as a base value for the calculation of the external matching transformers, is to be indicated uniform. Normally, it is the rated operational current. The same applies if external summation transformers are used. Hereinafter the parameters for rated primary currents: Address  ,135, &7 , = rated primary transformer current for feeder 1, Address  ,135, &7 , = rated primary transformer current for feeder 2, Address  ,135, &7 , = rated primary transformer current for feeder 3, Address  ,135, &7 , = rated primary transformer current for feeder 4, Address  ,135, &7 , = rated primary transformer current for feeder 5, Address  ,135, &7 , = rated primary transformer current for feeder 6, Address  ,135, &7 , = rated primary transformer current for feeder 7. For rated secondary currents please make sure that rated secondary transformer currents match with the rated currents of the corresponding current input of the device. Rated secondary currents of a device can be matched according to 3.1.3.3 (see margin heading Input/Output Board AI/O3). If summation transformers are used, the rated current at the outgoing side is usually 100 mA. For rated secondary currents a value of  A is therefore set for all feeders. Hereinafter the parameters for rated secondary currents: Address  ,16(& &7 , = rated secondary transformer current for feeder 1, Address  ,16(& &7 , = rated secondary transformer current for feeder 2,

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

25

2 Functions
Address  ,16(& Address  ,16(& Address  ,16(& Address  ,16(& Address  ,16(& &7 &7 &7 &7 &7 , , , , ,

= rated secondary transformer current for feeder 3, = rated secondary transformer current for feeder 4, = rated secondary transformer current for feeder 5, = rated secondary transformer current for feeder 6, = rated secondary transformer current for feeder 7.

Indication of the starpoint position of the current transformers determines the polarity of the current transformers. Set for each feeder if the starpoint is looking towards the busbar or not. Figure 2-5 shows an example of 3 feeders in which the transformer starpoint in feeder 1 and feeder 3 are looking towards the busbar, unlike feeder 2.

Feeder 1

Feeder 2

Feeder 3 L1 L2 L3

I3 I2

7UT612 for L1

 675317!%86 , = <(6 Figure 2-5

 675317!%86 , = 12

 675317!%86 , = <(6

I1

Position of the CT starpoints example for phase L1 of a busbar with 3 feeders

Hereinafter the parameters for the polarity: Address  675317!%86 , = transformer starpoint versus busbar for feeder 1, Address  675317!%86 , = transformer starpoint versus busbar for feeder 2, Address  675317!%86 , = transformer starpoint versus busbar for feeder 3, Address  675317!%86 , = transformer starpoint versus busbar for feeder 4, Address  675317!%86 , = transformer starpoint versus busbar for feeder 5, Address  675317!%86 , = transformer starpoint versus busbar for feeder 6, Address  675317!%86 , = transformer starpoint versus busbar for feeder 7. Current Transformer Data for Current Input I7 The current measuring input I7 is normally used for the detection of the starpoint current of an earthed winding of a transformer, shunt reactor, generator or motor. Only for single-phase busbar protection this is not available since I7 is reserved for feeder currents. I7 can be used for zero sequence current compensation when performing differential protection for transformers and/or restricted earth fault protection. It can be processed by the earth current time overcurrent protection, as an alternative or additionally. For matching the current magnitude set in address  ,135, &7 , the rated primary current of the current transformer which is powered at this measuring input. The rated secondary current of this current transformer in address  ,16(& &7 , has to be in correspondence with the rated device current for this measuring input.

26

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.1 General
Address  ($57+ (/(&752' is relevant for the polarity of the current. In this address, set to which device terminal the side of the current transformer facing the earth electrode is connected, i.e. not the side facing the starpoint itself. Figure 2-6 shows the alternatives using an earthed transformer winding as an example.

IL1 IL2 IL3

K k

L1 L2 L3 Q7 I7 Q8

IL1 IL2 IL3

K k

L1 L2 L3

Q8 I7 Q7

7UT612
L l

7UT612

 ($57+ (/(&752' = 7HUPLQDO 4 Figure 2-6

 ($57+ (/(&752' = 7HUPLQDO 4

Polarity setting for the measured current input I7

Note:
For devices in panel surface mounted case: Terminal Q7 corresponds to housing terminal 12 Terminal Q8 corresponds to housing terminal 27

Current Transformer Data for Current Input I8

The current measuring input I8 is a very sensitive input which enables to also acquire very weak currents (beginning with 3 mA at input). To also be able to indicate primary values for this measuring input (e. g. for setting in primary currents, for output of primary measured values), the conversion factor INprim/INsec of the current transformer connected is set in address  )DFWRU ,. The minimum trip command duration 70LQ 75,3 &0' is set in address $. This duration is valid for all protection functions which can issue a trip command. This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings. Various protection and ancillary functions require information on the status of the circuit breaker for faultless operation. For the circuit breaker of side 1 of the protected object a current threshold %UHDNHU 6 ,! is to be set in address . When the circuit breaker is open, this threshold is likely to be undershot. The threshold may be very small if stray currents (e. g. due to induction) are excluded when the protected object is switched off. Otherwise the threshold value must be increased. Normally the pre-setting is sufficient. For the circuit breaker of side 2 of the protected object setting is done in address  %UHDNHU 6 ,!.

Trip Command Duration

Circuit Breaker Status

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

27

2 Functions

2.1.2.1

Setting Overview

Note: The setting ranges and presettings listed in this table refer to a nominal current value IN = 1 A. For a secondary nominal current value IN = 5 A the current values are to be multiplied by 5. For setting primary values, the transformation ratio of the transformers must also be taken into consideration.
The presetting of the nominal frequency corresponds to the nominal frequency according to the device version.
Addr. 270 Setting Title Rated Frequency Setting Options 50 Hz 60 Hz 16 2/3 Hz L1 L2 L3 L1 L3 L2 Degree Celsius Degree Fahrenheit 0.4..800.0 kV Solid Earthed Isolated Y (Wye) D (Delta) Z (Zig-Zag) 0.4..800.0 kV Solid Earthed Isolated Y (Wye) D (Delta) Z (Zig-Zag) 0..11 0.20..5000.00 MVA 0.4..800.0 kV 0.20..5000.00 MVA 0.4..800.0 kV 1..100000 A Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 YES NO 1..100000 A Default Setting 50 Hz Comments Rated Frequency

271 276 240 241 242

PHASE SEQ. TEMP. UNIT UN-PRI SIDE 1 STARPNT SIDE 1 CONNECTION S1

L1 L2 L3 Degree Celsius 110.0 kV Solid Earthed Y (Wye)

Phase Sequence Unit of temparature measurement Rated Primary Voltage Side 1 Starpoint of Side 1 is Transf. Winding Connection Side 1

243 244 245

UN-PRI SIDE 2 STARPNT SIDE 2 CONNECTION S2

11.0 kV Solid Earthed Y (Wye)

Rated Primary Voltage side 2 Starpoint of side 2 is Transf. Winding Connection Side 2

246 249 251 252 261 265 266

VECTOR GRP S2 SN TRANSFORMER UN GEN/MOTOR SN GEN/MOTOR UN BUSBAR I PRIMARY OP. PHASE SELECTION STRPNT->OBJ S1 IN-PRI CT S1

0 38.10 MVA 21.0 kV 70.00 MVA 110.0 kV 200 A Phase 1

Vector Group Numeral of Side 2 Rated Apparent Power of the Transformer Rated Primary Voltage Generator/ Motor Rated Apparent Power of the Generator Rated Primary Voltage Busbar Primary Operating Current Phase selection

201 202

YES 200 A

CT-Strpnt. Side1 in Direct. of Object CT Rated Primary Current Side 1

28

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.1 General

Addr. 203 206 207 208 211 212 213

Setting Title IN-SEC CT S1 STRPNT->OBJ S2 IN-PRI CT S2 IN-SEC CT S2 STRPNT->BUS I1 IN-PRI CT I1 IN-SEC CT I1 1A 5A YES NO

Setting Options

Default Setting 1A YES 2000 A 1A YES 200 A 1A

Comments CT Rated Secondary Current Side 1 CT-Strpnt. Side2 in Direct. of Object CT Rated Primary Current Side 2 CT Rated Secondary Current Side 2 CT-Starpoint I1 in Direction of Busbar CT Rated Primary Current I1 CT Rated Secondary Current I1

1..100000 A 1A 5A YES NO 1..100000 A 1A 5A 0.1A YES NO 1..100000 A 1A 5A 0.1A YES NO 1..100000 A 1A 5A 0.1A YES NO 1..100000 A 1A 5A 0.1A YES NO 1..100000 A 1A 5A 0.1A YES NO 1..100000 A 1A 5A 0.1A

214 215 216

STRPNT->BUS I2 IN-PRI CT I2 IN-SEC CT I2

YES 200 A 1A

CT-Starpoint I2 in Direction of Busbar CT Rated Primary Current I2 CT Rated Secondary Current I2

217 218 219

STRPNT->BUS I3 IN-PRI CT I3 IN-SEC CT I3

YES 200 A 1A

CT-Starpoint I3 in Direction of Busbar CT Rated Primary Current I3 CT Rated Secondary Current I3

221 222 223

STRPNT->BUS I4 IN-PRI CT I4 IN-SEC CT I4

YES 200 A 1A

CT-Starpoint I4 in Direction of Busbar CT Rated Primary Current I4 CT Rated Secondary Current I4

224 225 226

STRPNT->BUS I5 IN-PRI CT I5 IN-SEC CT I5

YES 200 A 1A

CT-Starpoint I5 in Direction of Busbar CT Rated Primary Current I5 CT Rated Secondary Current I5

227 228 229

STRPNT->BUS I6 IN-PRI CT I6 IN-SEC CT I6

YES 200 A 1A

CT-Starpoint I6 in Direction of Busbar CT Rated Primary Current I6 CT Rated Secondary Current I6

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

29

2 Functions

Addr. 230 231 232 233

Setting Title EARTH. ELECTROD STRPNT->BUS I7 IN-PRI CT I7 IN-SEC CT I7

Setting Options Terminal Q7 Terminal Q8 YES NO 1..100000 A 1A 5A 0.1A 1.0..300.0 0.01..32.00 sec 0.04..1.00 A 0.04..1.00 A 0.04..1.00 A

Default Setting Terminal Q7 YES 200 A 1A

Comments Earthing Electrod versus CT-Starpoint I7 in Direction of Busbar CT Rated Primary Current I7 CT Rated Secondary Current I7

235 280A 283 284 285

Factor I8 TMin TRIP CMD Breaker S1 I> Breaker S2 I> Breaker I7 I>

60.0 0.15 sec 0.04 A 0.04 A 0.04 A

Factor: Prim. Current over Sek. Curr. I8 Minimum TRIP Command Duration Clos. Breaker Min. Current Thresh. S1 Clos. Breaker Min. Current Thresh. S2 Clos. Breaker Min. Current Thresh. I7

2.1.2.2

Information Overview

F.No. 05145 >Reverse Rot. 05147 Rotation L1L2L3 05148 Rotation L1L3L2

Alarm >Reverse Phase Rotation Phase Rotation L1L2L3 Phase Rotation L1L3L2

Comments

2.1.3

Setting Groups
In the 7UT612 relay, four independent setting groups (A to D) are possible. The user can switch between setting groups locally, via binary inputs (if so configured), via the operator or service interface using a personal computer, or via the system interface. A setting group includes the setting values for all functions that have been selected as (QDEOHG during configuration (see Subsection 2.1.1). Whilst setting values may vary among the four setting groups, the scope of functions of each setting group remains the same. Multiple setting groups allows a specific relay to be used for more than one application. While all setting groups are stored in the relay, only one setting group may be active at a given time.

Purpose of Setting Groups

30

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.1 General

If multiple setting groups are not required, Group A is the default selection, and the rest of this subsection is of no importance. If multiple setting groups are desired, address  *US &KJH 237,21 must have been set to (QDEOHG in the relay configuration. Refer to Subsection 2.1.1. Each of these sets (A to D) is adjusted one after the other. You will find more details how to navigate between the setting groups, to copy and reset setting groups, and how to switch over between the setting groups during operation, in the SIPROTEC System Manual, order number E50417H1176C151. The preconditions to switch from one setting group to another via binary inputs is described in Subsection 3.1.2.

2.1.3.1

Setting Overview

Addr. 302

Setting Title CHANGE

Setting Options Group A Group B Group C Group D Binary Input Protocol

Default Setting Group A

Comments Change to Another Setting Group

2.1.3.2

Information Overview

F.No. 00007 >Set Group Bit0 00008 >Set Group Bit1 Group A Group B Group C Group D

Alarm >Setting Group Select Bit 0 >Setting Group Select Bit 1 Group A Group B Group C Group D

Comments

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

31

2 Functions

2.1.4

General Protection Data (Power System Data 2)

No settings are necessary for the general protection data in 7UT612. The following table shows the possible information. Only the applicable information can appear, depending on the version and the selected protected object.

2.1.4.1

Information Overview

F.No. 00311 Fault Configur. 00356 >Manual Close

Alarm

Comments Fault in configuration of the Protection >Manual close signal Manual close signal detected >CB1 aux. 3p Closed >CB1 aux. 3p Open >CB2 aux. 3p Closed >CB2 aux. 3p Open Relay PICKUP Relay GENERAL TRIP command >Quitt Lock Out: General Trip Lock Out: General TRIP Protection ON/OFF (via system port) Primary fault current IL1 side1 Primary fault current IL2 side1 Primary fault current IL3 side1 Primary fault current IL1 side2 Primary fault current IL2 side2 Primary fault current IL3 side2 Primary fault current I1 Primary fault current I2 Primary fault current I3 Primary fault current I4 Primary fault current I5 Primary fault current I6 Primary fault current I7

00561 Man.Clos.Detect 00410 >CB1 3p Closed 00411 >CB1 3p Open 00413 >CB2 3p Closed 00414 >CB2 3p Open 00501 Relay PICKUP 00511 Relay TRIP >QuitG-TRP G-TRP Quit 00126 ProtON/OFF 00576 IL1S1: 00577 IL2S1: 00578 IL3S1: 00579 IL1S2: 00580 IL2S2: 00581 IL3S2: 00582 I1: 00583 I2: 00584 I3: 00585 I4: 00586 I5: 00587 I6: 00588 I7:

32

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.2 Differential Protection

2.2

Differential Protection
The differential protection represents the main feature of the device. It is based on current comparison. 7UT612 is suitable for unit protection of transformers, generators, motors, reactors, short lines, and (under observance of the available number of analog current inputs) for branch points (smaller busbar arrangements). Generator/transformer units may also be protected. 7UT612 can be used as a single-phase differential protection relay for protected objects with up to 7 sides, e.g. as busbars protection with up to 7 feeders. The protected zone is limited selectively by the current transformer sets.

2.2.1

Fundamentals of Differential Protection

The formation of the measured quantities depends on the application of the differential protection. This subsection describes the general method of operation of the differential protection, independent of the type of protected object. The illustrations are based on single-line diagrams. The special features necessary for the various types of protected object are covered in the following subsections.

Basic Principle with Two Sides

Differential protection is based on current comparison. It makes use of the fact that a protected object (Figure 2-7) carries always the same current i (dashed line) at its two sides in healthy operation. This current flows into one side of the considered zone and leaves it again on the other side. A difference in current marks is a clear indication of a fault within this section. If the actual current transformation ratio is the same, the secondary windings of the current transformers CT1 and CT2 at the line ends can be connected to form a closed electric circuit with a secondary current I; a measuring element M which is connected to the electrical balance point remains at zero current in healthy operation.

i CT1

i1

i2

i CT2

Protected object
I I1 i1 + i2 I I2

M I1 + I 2 Figure 2-7 Basic principle of differential protection for two ends (single-line illustration)

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

33

2 Functions

When a fault occurs in the zone limited by the transformers, a current I1 + I2 which is proportional to the fault currents i1 + i2 flowing in from both sides is fed to the measuring element. As a result, the simple circuit shown in Figure 2-7 ensures a reliable tripping of the protection if the fault current flowing into the protected zone during a fault is high enough for the measuring element M to respond. Basic Principle with more than Two Sides For protected objects with three or more sides or for busbars, the principle of differential protection is extended in that the total of all currents flowing into the protected object is zero in healthy operation, whereas in case of a fault the total is equal to the fault current (see Figure 2-8 as an example for four ends).

Protected object CT1 I1 i1 Figure 2-8 i2 CT2 I2 i3 CT3 I3 i4 CT4 I4 M I1 + I 2 + I 3 + I4

Basic principle of differential protection for four ends (single-line illustration)

Current Restraint

When an external fault causes a heavy current to flow through the protected zone, differences in the magnetic characteristics of the current transformers CT1 and CT2 under conditions of saturation may cause a significant current to flow through the measuring element M. If the magnitude of this current lies above the response threshold, the protection would issue a trip signal. Current restraint prevents such erroneous operation. In differential protection systems for protected objects with two terminals, a restraining quantity is normally derived from the current difference |I1 I2| or from the arithmetical sum |I1| + |I2|. Both methods are equal in the relevant ranges of the stabilization characteristics. The latter method is used in 7UT612 for all protected objects. The following definitions apply: a tripping effect or differential current IDiff = |I1 + I2| and a stabilization or restraining current IRest = |I1| + |I2| IDiff is calculated from the fundamental wave of the measured currents and produces the tripping effect quantity, IRest counteracts this effect. To clarify the situation, three important operating conditions should be examined (refer also to Figure 2-9):

34

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.2 Differential Protection

i1 CT1
I1

i2 Protected object
I2

CT2

M I 1 + I2
Figure 2-9 Definition of current direction

a) Through-fault current under healthy conditions or on an external fault: I2 reverses its direction i.e. thus changes its sign, i.e. I2 = I1, and consequently |I2| = |I1| IDiff = |I1 + I2| = |I1 I1| = 0 IRest = |I1| + |I2| = |I1| + |I1| = 2|I1| no tripping effect (IDiff = 0); restraint (IRest) corresponds to twice the through flowing current. b) Internal fault, fed from each end e.g. with equal currents: In this case, I2 = I1, and consequently |I2| = |I1| IDiff = |I1 + I2| = |I1 + I1| = 2|I1| IRest = |I1| + |I2| = |I1| + |I1| = 2|I1| tripping effect (IDiff) and restraining (IRest) quantities are equal and correspond to the total fault current. c) Internal fault, fed from one end only: In this case, I2 = 0 IDiff = |I1 + I2| = |I1 + 0| = |I1| IRest = |I1| + |I2| = |I1| + 0 = |I1| tripping effect (IDiff) and restraining (IRest) quantities are equal and correspond to the fault current fed from one side. This result shows that for internal fault IDiff = IRest. Thus, the characteristic of internal faults is a straight line with the slope 1 (45) in the operation diagram as illustrated in Figure 2-10 (dash-dotted line).

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

35

2 Functions

I Diff ------------I N

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

Fault characteristic

Tripping
D C

Blocking

Add-on stabilization B Saturation inception A 1

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
I Rest ----------------I N

a 1 a

Figure 2-10

Operation characteristic of differential protection and fault characteristic

Add-on Stabilization during External Fault

Saturation of the current transformers caused by high fault currents and/or long system time constants are uncritical for internal faults (fault in the protected zone), since the measured value deformation is found in the differential current as well in the restraint current, to the same extent. The fault characteristic as illustrated in Figure 2-10 is principally valid in this case, too. Of course, the fundamental wave of the current must exceed at least the pickup threshold (branch a in Figure 2-10). During an external fault which produces a high through-flowing fault current causing current transformer saturation, a considerable differential current can be simulated, especially when the degree of saturation is different at the two sides. If the quantities IDiff/IRest result in an operating point which lies in the trip area of the operating characteristic (Figure 2-10), trip signal would be the consequence if there were no special measures. 7UT612 provides a saturation indicator which detects such phenomena and initiates add-on stabilization measures. The saturation indicator considers the dynamic behaviour of the differential and restraint quantity. The dashed line in Figure 2-10 shows an example of the shape of the instantaneous quantities during a through-fault current with current transformer saturation at one side. Immediately after fault inception (A) the fault currents increase severely thus producing a high restraint quantity (twice the through-flowing current). At the instant of CT saturation (B) a differential quantity is produced and the restraint quantity is reduced. In consequence, the operating point IDiff/IRest may move into the tripping area (C). In contrast, the operating point moves immediately along the fault characteristic (D) when an internal fault occurs since the restraint current will barely be higher then the differential current.

36

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.2 Differential Protection

Current transformer saturation during external faults is detected by the high initial restraining current which moves the operating point briefly into the add-on stabilization area (Figure 2-10). The saturation indicator makes its decision within the first quarter cycle after fault inception. When an external fault is detected, the differential protection is blocked for an adjustable time. This blocking is cancelled as soon as the operation point moves steadily (i.e. over at least one cycle) near the fault characteristic. This allows to detect evolving faults in the protected zone reliably even after an external fault with current transformer saturation. Harmonic Restraint When switching unloaded transformers or shunt reactors on a live busbar, high magnetizing (inrush) currents may occur. These inrush currents produce differential quantities as they seem like single-end fed fault currents. Also during paralleling of transformers, or an overexcitation of a power transformer, differential quantities may occur due to magnetizing currents cause by increased voltage and/or decreased frequency. The inrush current can amount to a multiple of the rated current and is characterized by a considerable 2nd harmonic content (double rated frequency) which is practically absent in the case of a short-circuit. If the second harmonic content exceeds a selectable threshold, trip is blocked. Besides the second harmonic, another harmonic can be selected to cause blocking. A choice can be made between the third and fifth harmonic. Overexcitation of the transformer iron is characterized by the presence of odd harmonics in the current. Thus, the third or fifth harmonic are suitable to detect such phenomena. But, as the third harmonic is often eliminated in power transformers (e.g. by the delta winding), the use of the fifth is more common. Furthermore, in case of converter transformers odd harmonics are found which are not present during internal transformer faults. The differential quantities are examined as to their harmonic content. Numerical filters are used to perform a Fourier analysis of the differential currents. As soon as the harmonic contents exceed the set values, a restraint of the respective phase evaluation is introduced. The filter algorithms are optimized with regard to their transient behaviour such that additional measures for stabilization during dynamic conditions are not necessary. Since the harmonic restraint operates individually per phase, the protection is fully operative even when e.g. the transformer is switched onto a single-phase fault, whereby inrush currents may possibly be present in one of the healthy phases. However, it is also possible to set the protection such that not only the phase with inrush current exhibiting harmonic content in excess of the permissible value is restrained but also the other phases of the differential stage are blocked (so called crossblock function). This crossblock can be limited to a selectable duration. Fast Unstabilized Trip with HighCurrent Faults High-current faults in the protected zone may be cleared instantaneously without regard of the magnitude of the restraining current, when the magnitude of the differential currents can exclude that it is an external fault. In case of protected objects with high direct impedance (transformers, generators, series reactors), a threshold can be found above which a through-fault current never can increase. This threshold (prima1 ry) is, e.g. for a power transformer, ---------------------------- I 1 t UD nsf . u
sc transf

The differential protection 7UT612 provides such unstabilized high-current trip stage. This can operate even when, for example, a considerable second harmonic is present in the differential current caused by current transformer saturation by a DC component

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

37

2 Functions

in the fault current which could be interpreted by the inrush restraint function as an inrush current. This high-current stage evaluates the fundamental wave of the currents as well as the instantaneous values. Instantaneous value processing ensures fast tripping even in case the fundamental wave of the current is strongly reduced by current transformer saturation. Because of the possible DC offset after fault inception, the instantaneous value stage operates only above twice the set threshold. Increase of Pickup Value on Startup The increase of pickup value is especially suited for motors. In contrast to the inrush current of transformers the inrush current of motors is a traversing current. Differential currents, however, can emerge if current transformers still contain different remanent magnetization before energization. Therefore, the transformers are energized from different operation points of their hysteresis. Although differential currents are usually small, they can be harmful if differential protection is set very sensitive. An increase of the pickup value on startup provides additional security against overfunctioning when a non-energized protected object is switched in. As soon as the restraining current of one phase has dropped below a settable value ,5(67 67$5783, the pickup value increase is activated. The restraint current is twice the traversing current in normal operation. Undershooting of the restraint current is therefore a criterion for the non-energized protected object. The pickup value ,',))! is now increased by a settable factor (see Figure 2-11). The other branches of the IDiff> stage are shifted proportionally. The return of the restraint current indicates the startup. After a settable time 7 67$57 0$; the increase of the characteristic is undone.

I Diff ------------ 9 I Nobj

8 !" D9DAA33 7 6 5 4 3 2
!! D9DAA3

10

Startup characteristic

Tripping
Steady-state characteristic Increase of pickup

Blocking

1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

I Rest -----------I Nobj

Figure 2-11 Increase of pickup value of the stage on startup

38

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.2 Differential Protection

Tripping Characteristic

Figure 2-12 illustrates the complete tripping characteristic of the differential protection. The branch a represents the sensitivity threshold of the differential protection (setting ,',))!) and considers constant error current, e.g. magnetizing currents. Branch b takes into consideration current-proportional errors which may result from transformation errors of the main CTs, the input CTs of the relay, or from erroneous current caused by the position of the tap changer of the voltage regulator. In the range of high currents which may give rise to current transformer saturation, branch c causes stronger stabilization. Differential currents above the branch d cause immediate trip regardless of the restraining quantity and harmonic content (setting ,',))!!). This is the area of Fast Unstabilized Trip with High-Current Faults (see above). The area of Add-on stabilization is the operation area of the saturation indicator as described above under margin Add-on Stabilization during External Fault.

I Diff ------------IN

10 9

Fault characteristic

8 !" D9DAA33 7 6

Tripping
5 4 3 2
!! D9DAA3

!#" TGPQ@!

Blocking
!# TGPQ@

a 1 2

b 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Add-on stabilization

!#! 76T@QPDIU

!## 76T@QPDIU!

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
I Rest ----------------I N

!$% D699PITU67

Figure 2-12

Tripping characteristic of differential protection

The quantities IDiff and IRest are compared by the differential protection with the operating characteristic according to Figure 2-12. If the quantities result into a locus in the tripping area, trip signal is given. Fault Detection, Drop-off Normally, a differential protection does not need a pickup or fault detection function since the condition for a fault detection is identical to the trip condition. But, 7UT612 provides like all SIPROTEC 4 devices a fault detection function which has the task to define the fault inception instant for a number of further features: Fault detection indicates the beginning of a fault event in the system. This is necessary to open the trip log buffer and the memory for oscillographic fault record data. But, also internal functions need the instant of fault inception even in case of an external fault, e.g. the saturation indicator which has to operate right in case of an external fault.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

39

2 Functions

As soon as the fundamental wave of the differential current exceeds 70 % of the set value or the restraining current reaches 70 % of the add-on stabilization area, the protection picks up (Figure 2-13). Pickup of the fast high-current stage causes a fault detection, too.

I Diff --------------I NObj

Fault detection
D9DAA3
0.7 D9DAA3

Steady-state characteristic

Start of add-on stabilization

0.7

D699PITU67

I Rest ----------------I NObj

Figure 2-13

Fault detection area of the differential protection

If the harmonic restraint is effective, the harmonic analysis is carried out (approx. one AC cycle) in order to examine the stabilizing conditions. Otherwise, tripping occurs as soon as the tripping conditions are fulfilled (tripping area in Figure 2-12). For special cases, the trip command can be delayed. Figure 2-14 shows a simplified tripping logic. Reset of pickup is initiated when, during 2 AC cycles, pickup is no longer recognized in the differential values, i.e. the differential current has fallen below 70 % of the set value, and no further trip conditions are present. If a trip command has not been initiated, the fault is considered to be over after reset. If a trip command has been formed, this is sealed for at least the minimum trip duration which is set under the general protection data, common for all protection function (refer to Subsection 2.1.2 under margin header Trip Command Duration, page 27).

40

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.2 Differential Protection

FNo 05631

Diff picked up

Character.
1) Inrush restraint (2nd harmon.)
FNo 05644...05646

&
 UD9DAA3
T

FNo 05681...05683

Diff> L1 Diff> L2 Diff> L3

FNo 05691

Diff> TRIP

Diff 2.Harm L1 Diff 2.Harm L2 Diff 2.Harm L3

1 1 1 1

FNo 05672

Diff

TRIP

FNo 05673

Diff

TRIP

FNo 05647...05649

Harmonic restraint (3rd or 5th)

FNo 05674

Diff

TRIP

1)

Add-on stabilization (ext. fault)

FNo 05651...05653

Diff Bl. exF.L1 Diff Bl. exF.L2 Diff Bl. exF.L3

Diff n.Harm L1 Diff n.Harm L2 Diff n.Harm L3

FNo 05684...05686

Fast trip (high current)

2)

&

 UD9DAA33
T

Diff>> L1 Diff>> L2 Diff>> L3

Diff current monitor

FNo 05662...05664

1
L1 L2
Meas. release Meas. release Meas. release

FNo 05692

Diff>>

Block Iflt.L1 Block Iflt.L2 Block Iflt.L3

L3
1)

FNo 05671

Diff TRIP

2)
FNo 05603

only for transformer 2) only for line/busbar

FNo 05616

>Diff BLOCK

Diff BLOCKED
FNo 05617

&
 9DAAQSPU
1

Diff ACTIVE

PI 7ypxryh PAA

&
FNo 05615

Diff OFF

Figure 2-14

Tripping logic of the differential protection

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

41

2 Functions

2.2.2

Differential Protection for Transformers

In power transformers, generally, the secondary currents of the current transformers are not equal when a current flows through the power transformer, but depend on the transformation ratio and the connection group of the protected power transformer, and the rated currents of the current transformers at both sides of the power transformer. The currents must, therefore, be matched in order to become comparable. Matching to the various power transformer and current transformer ratios and of the phase displacement according to the vector group of the protected transformer is performed purely mathematically. As a rule, external matching transformers are not required. The input currents are converted in relation to the power transformer rated current. This is achieved by entering the rated transformer data, such as rated power, rated voltage and rated primary current of the current transformers, into the protection device. Once the vector group has been entered, the protection is capable of performing the current comparison according to fixed formulae. Conversion of the currents is performed by programmed coefficient matrices which simulate the difference currents in the transformer windings. All conceivable vector groups (including phase exchange) are possible. In this aspect, the conditioning of the starpoint(s) of the power transformer is essential, too.

Matching of the Measured Values

Isolated Starpoint

Figure 2-15 illustrates an example for a power transformer Yd5 (wye-delta with 150 phase displacement) without any earthed starpoint. The figure shows the windings and the phasor diagrams of symmetrical currents and, at the bottom, the matrix equations. The general form of these equations is ( Im ) = k ( K ) ( I n ) where (Im) k (K) (In) matrix of the matched currents IA, IB, IC, constant factor, coefficient matrix, dependent on the vector group, matrix of the phase currents IL1, IL2, IL3.

On the left (delta) winding, the matched currents IA, IB, IC are derived from the difference of the phase currents IL1, IL2, IL3. On the right (wye) side, the matched currents are equal to the phase currents (magnitude matching not considered).

42

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.2 Differential Protection

Winding 2 L1 L2 L3

Winding 1 L1 L2 L3 IL1

IL3 IL2 IL1 IL3 I A 1 0 1 1 I = ------ 1 1 0 B 3 I 0 1 1 C

Figure 2-15

IA

IA

IL2

I L1 I L2 I L3

I A 1 0 0 IL1 I = 1 B 0 1 0 IL2 I 0 0 1 I C L3

Matching the transformer vector group, example Yd5 (magnitudes not considered)

Earthed Starpoint

Figure 2-16 illustrates an example for a transformer YNd5 with an earthed starpoint on the Yside. In this case, the zero sequence currents are eliminated. On the left side, the zero sequence currents cancel each other because of the calculation of the current differences. This complies with the fact that zero sequence current is not possible outside of the delta winding. On the right side, the zero sequence current is eliminated by the calculation rule of the matrix, e.g. 1 /3 (2 IL1 1 IL2 1 IL3) = 1/3 (3 IL1 IL1 IL2 IL3) = 1/3 (3 IL1 3 I0) = (IL1 I0). Zero sequence current elimination achieves that fault currents which flow via the transformer during earth faults in the network in case of an earth point in the protected zone (transformer starpoint or starpoint former by neutral earth reactor) are rendered harmless without any special external measures. Refer e.g. to Figure 2-17: Because of the earthed starpoint, a zero sequence current occurs on the right side during a network fault but not on the left side. Comparison of the phase currents, without zero sequence current elimination, would cause a wrong result (current difference in spite of an external fault).

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

43

2 Functions

Winding 2 L1 L2 L3

Winding 1 L1 L2 L3 IL1

IL3 IL2 IL1 IL3 I A 1 0 1 1 I = ------ 1 1 0 B 3 I 0 1 1 C

Figure 2-16

IA

IA

IL2

I L1 I L2 I L3

I A 2 1 1 I L1 1 I = -- 1 2 1 I L2 B 3 I 1 1 2 I C L3

Matching the transformer vector group, example YNd5 (magnitudes not considered)

L1 L2 L3

L1 L2 L3

Figure 2-17

Example of an earth fault outside the protected transformer and current distribution

Figure 2-18 shows an example of an earth fault on the delta side outside the protected zone if an earthed starpoint former (zigzag winding) is installed within the protected zone. In this arrangement, a zero sequence current occurs on the right side but not on the left, as above. If the starpoint former were outside the protected zone (i.e. CTs between power transformer and starpoint former) the zero sequence current would not pass through the measuring point (CTs) and would not have any harmful effect. The disadvantage of elimination of the zero sequence current is that the protection becomes less sensitive (factor 2/3 because the zero sequence current amounts to 1/3) in case of an earth fault in the protected area. Therefore, elimination is suppressed in case the starpoint is not earthed (see above, Figure 2-15).

44

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.2 Differential Protection

L1 L2 L3

L1 L2 L3

Figure 2-18

Example of an earth fault outside the protected transformer with a neutral earthing reactor within the protected zone

Increasing the Ground Fault Sensitivity

Higher earth fault sensitivity in case of an earthed winding can be achieved if the starpoint current is available, i.e. if a current transformer is installed in the starpoint connection to earth and this current is fed to the device (current input I7). Figure 2-19 shows an example of a power transformer the starpoint of which is earthed on the Yside. In this case, the zero sequence current is not eliminated. Instead of this, 1 /3 of the starpoint current ISP is added for each phase.

L1 L2 L3 ISP
Figure 2-19

L1 L2 L3 IL3

Example of a earth fault outside the transformer with current distribution

The matrix equation is in this case: I A 1 0 0 I L1 I = 1 0 1 0 I B L2 I 0 0 1 I C L3 I SP 1 + -- I 3 SP I SP

ISP corresponds to 3I0 but is measured in the starpoint connection of the winding and not in the phase lines. The effect is that the zero sequence current is considered in case of an internal fault (from I0 = 1/3 ISP), whilst the zero sequence current is eliminated in case of an external fault because the zero sequence current on the terminal side I0 = 1/3 (IL1 + IL2 + IL3) compensates for the starpoint current. In this way, full sensitivity (with zero sequence current) is achieved for internal earth faults and full elimination of the zero sequence current in case of external earth faults.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

45

2 Functions

Even higher earth fault sensitivity during internal earth fault is possible by means of the restricted earth fault protection as described in Section 2.3. Use on AutoTransformers Auto-transformers can only be connected Y(N)y0. If the starpoint is earthed this is effective for both the system parts (higher and lower voltage system). The zero sequence system of both system parts is coupled because of the common starpoint. In case of an earth fault, the distribution of the fault currents is not unequivocal and cannot be derived from the transformer properties. Current magnitude and distribution is also dependent on whether or not the transformer is provided with a stabilizing winding.

L1 L2 L3

L1 L2 L3

Figure 2-20

Auto-transformer with earthed starpoint

The zero sequence current must be eliminated for the differential protection. This is achieved by the application of the matrices with zero sequence current elimination. The decreased sensitivity due to zero sequence current elimination cannot be compensated by consideration of the starpoint current. This current cannot be assigned to a certain phase nor to a certain side of the transformer. Increased earth fault sensitivity during internal earth fault can be achieved by using the restricted earth fault protection as described in Section 2.3 and/or by the highimpedance differential protection described in Subsection 2.7.2. Use on SinglePhase Transformers Single-phase transformers can be designed with one or two windings per side; in the latter case, the winding phases can be wound on one or two iron cores. In order to ensure that optimum matching of the currents would be possible, always two measured current inputs shall be used even if only one current transformer is installed on one phase. The currents are to be connected to the inputs L1 and L3 of the device; they are designated IL1 and IL3 in the following. If two winding phases are available, they may be connected either in series (which corresponds to a wye-winding) or in parallel (which corresponds to a delta-winding). The phase displacement between the windings can only be 0 or 180. Figure 2-21 shows an example of a single-phase power transformer with two phases per side with the definition of the direction of the currents.

46

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.2 Differential Protection

L1 L3

L1 L3
Example of a single-phase transformer with current definition

Figure 2-21

Like with three-phase power transformers, the currents are matched by programmed coefficient matrices which simulate the difference currents in the transformer windings. The common form of these equations is ( Im ) = k ( K ) ( In ) where (Im) k (K) (In) matrix of the matched currents IA, IC, constant factor, coefficient matrix, matrix of the phase currents IL1, IL3.

Since the phase displacement between the windings can only be 0 or 180, matching is relevant only with respect to the treatment of the zero sequence current (besides magnitude matching). If the starpoint of the protected transformer winding is not earthed (Figure 2-21 left side), the phase currents can directly be used. If a starpoint is earthed (Figure 2-21 right side), the zero sequence current must be eliminated by forming the current differences. Thus, fault currents which flow through the transformer during earth faults in the network in case of an earth point in the protected zone (transformer starpoint) are rendered harmless without any special external measures. The matrices are (Figure 2-21): I A = 1 1 0 I L1 I 0 1 I C L3 I A = 1 1 1 - I 2 1 1 C I L1 I L3

The disadvantage of elimination of the zero sequence current is that the protection becomes less sensitive (factor 1/2 because the zero sequence current amounts to 1/2) in case of an earth fault in the protected area. Higher earth fault sensitivity can be achieved if the starpoint current is available, i.e. if a CT is installed in the starpoint connection to earth and this current is fed to the device (current input I7).

L1 L3 ISP
Figure 2-22

L1 L3

Example of an earth fault outside a single-phase transformer with current distribution

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

47

2 Functions

The matrices are in this case: I A = 1 1 0 I L1 I 0 1 I C L3 I A = 1 1 0 I L1 I 0 1 I C L3 + 1 I SP - 2 I SP

where ISP is the current measured in the starpoint connection. The zero sequence current is not eliminated. Instead of this, for each phase 1/2 of the starpoint current ISP is added. The effect is that the zero sequence current is considered in case of an internal fault (from I0 = 1/2 ISP), whilst the zero sequence current is eliminated in case of an external fault because the zero sequence current on the terminal side I0 = 1/2 (IL1 + IL3) compensates for the starpoint current. In this way, full sensitivity (with zero sequence current) is achieved for internal earth faults and full elimination of the zero sequence current in case of external earth faults.

2.2.3

Differential Protection for Generators, Motors, and Series Reactors

Equal conditions apply for generators, motors, and series reactors. The protected zone is limited by the sets of current transformers at each side of the protected object. On generators and motors, the CTs are installed in the starpoint connections and at the terminal side (Figure 2-23). Since the current direction is normally defined as positive in the direction of the protected object, for differential protection schemes, the definitions of Figure 2-23 apply.

Matching of the Measured Values

L1 L2 L3
Figure 2-23 Definition of current direction with longitudinal differential protection

In 7UT612, all measured quantities are referred to the rated values of the protected object. The device is informed about the rated machine data during setting: the rated apparent power, the rated voltage, and the rated currents of the current transformers. Measured value matching is reduced to magnitude factors, therefore. A special case is the use as transverse differential protection. The definition of the current direction is shown in Figure 2-24 for this application. For use as a transverse differential protection, the protected zone is limited by the end of the parallel phases. A differential current always and exclusively occurs when the currents of two parallel windings differ from each other. This indicates a fault current in one of the parallel phases.

48

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.2 Differential Protection

L1

L2

L3
Figure 2-24 Definition of current direction with transverse differential protection

The currents flow into the protected object even in case of healthy operation, in contrast to all other applications. For this reason, the polarity of one current transformer set must be reversed, i.e. you must set a wrong polarity, as described in Subsection 2.1.2 under Current Transformer Data for 2 Sides, page 23. Starpoint Conditioning If the differential protection is used as generator or motor protection, the starpoint condition need not be considered even if the starpoint of the machine is earthed (high- or low-resistant). The phase currents are always equal at both measuring points in case of an external fault. With internal faults, the fault current results always in a differential current. Nevertheless, increased earth fault sensitivity can be achieved by the restricted earth fault protection as described in Section 2.3 and/or by the high-impedance differential protection described in Subsection 2.7.2.

2.2.4

Differential Protection for Shunt Reactors

If current transformers are available for each phase at both side of a shunt reactor, the same considerations apply as for series reactors (see Subsection 2.2.3). In most cases, current transformers are installed in the lead phases and in the starpoint connection (Figure 2-25 left graph). In this case, comparison of the zero sequence currents is reasonable. The restricted earth fault protection is most suitable for this application, refer to Section 2.3. If current transformers are installed in the line at both sides of the connection point of the reactor (Figure 2-25 right graph) the same conditions apply as for auto-transformers. A neutral earthing reactor (starpoint former) outside the protected zone of a power transformer can be treated as a separate protected object provided it is equipped with current transformers like a shunt reactor. The difference is that the starpoint former has a low impedance for zero sequence currents.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

49

2 Functions

L1 L2 L3

L1 L2 L3

L1 L2 L3

L1 L2 L3

ISP

ISP

Figure 2-25

Definition of current direction on a shunt reactor

2.2.5

Differential Protection for Mini-Busbars, Branch-Points and Short Lines

A branch-point is defined here as a three-phase, coherent piece of conductor which is limited by sets of current transformers (even this is, strictly speaking, no branch point). Examples are short stubs or mini-busbars (Figure 2-26). The differential protection in this operation mode is not suited to transformers; use the function Differential Protection for Transformers for this application (refer to Subsection 2.2.2). Even for other inductances, like series or shunt reactors, the branch point differential protection should not be used because of its lower sensitivity. This operation mode is also suitable for short lines or cables. Short means that the current transformer connections from the CTs to the device cause no impermissible burden for the current transformers. On the other hand, capacitive charging current do not harm this operation because the protection is normally less sensitive with this application. Since the current direction is normally defined as positive in the direction of the protected object, for differential protection schemes, the definitions of Figures 2-26 and 2-27 apply. If 7UT612 is used as differential protection for mini-busbars or short lines, all currents are referred to the nominal current of the protected busbars or line. The device is informed about this during setting. Measured value matching is reduced to magnitude factors, therefore. No external matching devices are necessary if the current transformer sets at the ends of the protected zone have different primary current.

50

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.2 Differential Protection

L1 L2 Busbar L3

Figure 2-26

Definition of current direction at a branch-point (busbar with 2 feeders)

L1 L2 L3
Figure 2-27 Definition of current direction at short lines

Differential Current Monitoring

Whereas a high sensitivity of the differential protection is normally required for transformers, reactors, and rotating machines in order to detect even small fault currents, high fault currents are expected in case of faults on a busbar or a short line so that a higher pickup threshold (above rated current) is conceded here. This allows for a continuous monitoring of the differential currents on a low level. A small differential current in the range of operational currents indicates a fault in the secondary circuit of the current transformers. This monitor operates phase segregated. When, during normal load conditions, a differential current is detected in the order of the load current of a feeder, this indicates a missing secondary current, i.e. a fault in the secondary current leads (short-circuit or open-circuit). This condition is annunciated with time delay. The differential protection is blocked in the associated phase at the same time.

Feeder Current Guard

Another feature is provided for protection of mini-busbars or short lines. This feeder current guard monitors the currents of each phase of each side of the protected object. It provides an additional trip condition. Trip command is allowed only when at least one of these currents exceeds a certain (settable) threshold.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

51

2 Functions

2.2.6

Single-Phase Differential Protection for Busbars

Besides the high-sensitivity current input I8, 7UT612 provides 7 current inputs of equal design. This allows for a single-phase busbar protection for up to 7 feeders. Two possibilities exist: 1. One 7UT612 is used for each phase (Figure 2-28). Each phase of all busbar feeders is connected to one phase dedicated device. 2. The phase currents of each feeder are summarized into a single-phase summation current (Figure 2-29). These currents are fed to one 7UT612.

Phase Dedicated Connection

For each of the phases, a 7UT612 is used in case of single-phase connection. The fault current sensitivity is equal for all types of fault. The differential protection refers all measured quantities to the nominal current of the protected object. Therefore, a common nominal current must be defined for the entire busbar even if the feeder CTs have different nominal currents. The nominal busbar current and the nominal currents of all feeder CTs must be set on the relay. Matching of the current magnitudes is performed in the device. No external matching devices are necessary even if the current transformer sets at the ends of the protected zone have different primary current.

Feeder 1

Feeder 2

Feeder 7 L1 L2 L3

I1 I2

7UT612 Phase L1

I7

Figure 2-28

Single-phase busbar protection, illustrated for phase L1

Connection via Summation CTs

One single device 7UT612 is sufficient for a busbar with up to 7 feeders if the device is connected via summation current transformers. The phase currents of each feeder are converted into single-phase current by means of the summation CTs (Figure 229). Current summation is unsymmetrical; thus, different sensitivity is valid for different type of fault. A common nominal current must be defined for the entire busbar. Matching of the currents can be performed in the summation transformer connections if the feeder CTs have different nominal currents. The output of the summation transformers is normally designed for IM = 100 mA at symmetrical nominal busbar current.

52

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.2 Differential Protection

Feeder 1

Feeder 2

Feeder 7 L1 L2 L3

L1 L2 L3
SCT

L1 L2 L3
SCT

L1 L2 L3
SCT
I1 I7

7UT612
I2

Figure 2-29

Busbar protection with connection via summation current transformers (SCT)

Different schemes are possible for the connection of the current transformers. The same CT connection method must be used for all feeders of a busbar. The scheme shown in Figure 2-30 is the most common. The input windings of the summation transformer are connected to the CT currents IL1, IL3, and IE (residual current). This connection is suitable for all kinds of systems regardless of the conditioning of the system neutral. It is characterized by an increased sensitivity for earth faults. For a symmetrical three-phase fault (where the earth residual component, IE = 0) the single-phase summation current is, as illustrated in Figure 2-30, 3 times the winding unit value. That is, the summation flux (ampere turns) is the same as it would be for single-phase current 3 times the value flowing through the winding with the least number of turns (ratio 1). For three-phase symmetrical fault currents equal to rated current IN, the secondary single-phase current is IM = 100 mA. All relay characteristic operating values are based on this type of fault and these currents.

IL1
2

SCT

IM

IL3
1

7UT612

IE L1 L2 L3
Figure 2-30

CT connection L1L3E

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

53

2 Functions

IL1

IL3
90

60

2 IL1 IM
30

IM = 2 IL1 + IL3

IL3
Figure 2-31

IL2

= 3 |I|

Summation of the currents L1L3E in the summation transformer

For the connection shown in Figure 2-30, the weighting factors W of the summation currents IM for the various fault conditions and the ratios to that given by the threephase symmetrical faults are shown in Table 2-1. On the right hand side is the complementary multiple of rated current which W/3 would have to be, in order to give the summation current IM = 100 mA in the secondary circuit. If the current setting values are multiplied with this factor, the actual pickup values result.

Table 2-1

Fault types and weighting factor for CT connection L1L3E W 3 2 1 1 5 3 4 W/3 1,00 1,15 0,58 0,58 2,89 1,73 2,31 I1 for IM = 100 mA 1.00 IN 0.87 IN 1.73 IN 1.73 IN 0.35 IN 0.58 IN 0.43 IN

Fault type L1L2L3 (sym.) L1L2 L2L3 L3L1 L1E L2E L3E

The table shows that 7UT612 is more sensitive to earth faults than to those without earth path component. This increased sensitivity is due to the fact that the summation transformer winding in the CT starpoint connection (IE, residual current, refer to Figure 2-30) has the largest number of turns, and thus, the weighting factor W = 3. If the higher earth current sensitivity is not necessary, connection according to Figure 2-32 can be used. This is reasonable in earthed systems with particularly low zero sequence impedance where earth fault currents may be larger than those under twophase fault conditions. With this connection, the values given in Table 2-2 can be recalculated for the seven possible fault conditions in solidly earthed networks.

54

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.2 Differential Protection

IL1
2

SCT

IM

IL2
1

7UT612

IL3
3

L1 L2 L3
Figure 2-32 CT connection L1L2L3 with decreased earth fault sensitivity

IL1 2 IL1
IM = 2 IL1 + IL2 + 3 IL3 = 3 |I| 3 IL3

60

IL2

IL3
Figure 2-33

IL2

IM

Summation of the currents L1L2L3 in the summation transformer

Table 2-2

Fault types and weighting factor for CT connection L1L2L3 W 3 1 2 1 2 1 3 W/3 1,00 0,58 1,15 0,58 1,15 0,58 1,73 I1 for IM = 100 mA 1.00 IN 1.73 IN 0.87 IN 1.73 IN 0.87 IN 1.73 IN 0.58 IN

Fault type L1L2L3 (sym.) L1L2 L2L3 L3L1 L1E L2E L3E

Comparison with Table 2-1 shows that under earth fault conditions the weighting factor W is less than with the standard connection. Thus the thermal loading is reduced to 36 %, i.e. (1.73/2.89)2. The described connection possibilities are examples. Certain phase preferences (especially in systems with non-earthed neutral) can be obtained by cyclic or acyclic exchange of the phases. Further increase of the earth current can be performed by introducing an auto-CT in the residual path, as a further possibility. The type 4AM5120 is recommended for summation current transformer. These transformers have different input windings which allow for summation of the currents with the ratio 2:1:3 as well as matching of different primary currents of the main CTs to an certain extent. Figure 2-34 shows the winding arrangement.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

55

2 Functions

The nominal input current of each summation CT must match the nominal secondary current of the connected main CT set. The output current of the summation CT (= input current of the 7UT612) amounts to IN = 0.1 A at nominal conditions, with correct matching.

A B 3

C D 6

E F 9

G H 18 500

K 24

L M 36

N O 90

4AM51203DA000AN2 IN = 1 A
Z

Y A B 1 C D 2 E F 3 G H 4 500 J 6 K L M 8 N O 12

4AM51204DA000AN2 IN = 5 A
Z

Figure 2-34

Winding arrangement of summation and matching transformers 4AM5120

Differential Current Monitoring

Whereas a high sensitivity of the differential protection is normally required for transformers, reactors, and rotating machines in order to detect even small fault currents, high fault currents are expected in case of faults on a busbar so that a higher pickup threshold (above rated current) is conceded here. This allows for a continuous monitoring of the differential currents on a low level. When, during normal load conditions, a differential current is detected in the order of the load current of a feeder, this indicates a missing secondary current, i.e. a fault in the secondary current leads (short-circuit or open-circuit). This condition is annunciated with time delay. The differential protection is blocked at the same time.

Feeder Current Guard

Another feature is provided for protection of busbars. This feeder current guard monitors the currents of each feeder of the busbar. It provides an additional trip condition. Trip command is allowed only when at least one of these currents exceeds a certain (settable) threshold.

2.2.7
General

Setting the Function Parameters

The differential protection can only operate if this function is set ',)) 3527 = (Q DEOHG during configuration (refer to Subsection 2.1.1, address ). If it not used, 'LVDEOHG is configured; in this case the associated setting are not accessible. Additionally, the type of protected object must be decided during configuration (address  3527 2%-(&7, Subsection 2.1.1). Only those parameters are offered which are reasonable for the selected type of protected object; all remaining are suppressed.

56

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.2 Differential Protection

The differential protection can be switched 21 or 2)) in address  ',)) 3527; the option %ORFN UHOD\ allows to operated the protection but the trip output relay is blocked.

Note:
When delivered from factory, the differential protection is switched 2)). The reason is that the protection must not be in operation unless at least the connection group (of a transformer) and the matching factors have been set before. Without proper settings, the device may show unexpected reactions (incl. tripping)!

Starpoint Conditioning

If there is a current transformer in the starpoint connection of an earthed transformer winding, i. e. between starpoint and earth electrode, the starpoint current may be taken into consideration for calculations of the differential protection (see also Subsection 2.2.2, margin heading Increasing the Ground Fault Sensitivity, page 45). Thus, the earth fault sensitivity is increased. In addresses $ ',))Z,(0($6 for side 1 or $ ',))Z,(0($6 for side 2 the user informs the device on whether the earth current of the earthed starpoint is included or not. This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings. With setting <(6 the corresponding earth current will be considered by the differential protection. This setting only applies for transformers with two separate windings. Its use only makes sense if the corresponding starpoint current actually is connected to the device (current input I7). When configuring the protection functions (see Subsection 2.1.1, page 16) address  must have been set accordingly. In addition to that, the starpoint of the corresponding side has to be earthed (Subsection 2.1.2 under margin heading Object Data with Transformers, page 20, addresses  and/or ).

Differential Current Monitoring

With busbar protection differential current can be monitored (see Subsection 2.2.5 and 2.2.6). This function can be set to 21 and 2)) in address  ,',))! 021. Its use only makes sense if one can distinguish clearly between operational error currents caused by missing transformer currents and fault currents caused by a fault in the protected object. The pickup value ,',))! 021 (address ) must be high enough to avoid a pickup caused by a transformation error of the current transformers and by minimum mismatching of different current transformers. The pickup value is referred to the rated current of the protected object. Time delay 7 ,',))! 021 (address ) applies to the annunciation and blocking of the differential protection. This setting ensures that blocking with the presence of faults (even of external ones) is avoided. The time delay is usually about some seconds.

Feeder Current Guard

With busbars and short lines a release of the trip command can be set if one of the incoming currents is exceeded. The differential protection only trips if one of the measured currents exceeds the threshold ,! &855 *8$5' (address ). The pickup value is referred to the rated current of the protected object. With setting  (pre-setting) this release criterion will not be used.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

57

2 Functions

If the feeder current guard is set (i. e. to a value of > 0), the differential protection will not trip before the release criterion is given. This is also the case if, in conjunction with very high differential currents, the extremely fast instantaneous value scheme (see Subsection 2.2.1, margin heading Fast Unstabilized Trip with High-Current Faults) has detected the fault already after a few milliseconds. Trip Characteristic Differential Current The parameters of the trip characteristic are set in addresses  to $. Figure 2-35 illustrates the meaning of the different settings. The numbers signify the addresses of the settings. ,',))! (address ) is the pickup value of the differential current. This is the total fault current into the protected object, regardless of the way this is distributed between the sides. The pickup value is referred to the rated current of the protected object. You may select a high sensitivity (small pickup value) for transformers, reactors, generators, or motors, (presetting 0.2 INObj). A higher value (above nominal current) should be selected for lines and busbars. Higher measuring tolerances must be expected if the nominal currents of the current transformers differ extensively from the nominal current of the protected object. In addition to the pickup limit ,',))!, the differential current is subjected to a second pickup threshold. If this threshold ,',))!! (address ) is exceeded then tripping is initiated regardless of the magnitude of the restraint current or the harmonic content (unstabilized high-current trip). This stage must be set higher than ,',))!. If the protected object has a high direct impedance (transformers, generators, series reactors), a threshold can be found above which a through-fault current never can in1 crease. This threshold (primary) is, e.g. for a power transformer, ---------------------------- I 1 t UD nsf . u
sc transf

I Diff --------------- 10 INObj

9 8 !" D9DAA33 7 6 5 4 3 2
!! D9DAA3

Tripping

!#" TGPQ@!

Blocking
!# TGPQ@

Add-on stabilization

1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
I Rest ----------------I NObj

!## 76T@QPDIU! !#! !$% 76T@QPDIU! D699PITU67

Figure 2-35

Tripping characteristic of the differential protection

58

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.2 Differential Protection

The tripping characteristic forms two more branches (Figure 2-35) The slope of the first branch is determined by the address $ 6/23( , its base point by the address $ %$6( 32,17 . This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings. This branch covers current-proportional errors. These are mainly errors of the main current transformers and, in case of power transformers with tap changers, differential currents which occur due to the transformer regulating range. The percentage of this differential current is equal to the percentage of the regulating range provided the rated voltage is corrected according to Subsection 2.1.2 under margin Object Data with Transformers (page 20). The second branch produces a higher stabilization in the range of high currents which may lead to current transformer saturation. Its base point is set under address $ %$6( 32,17  and is referred to the rated object current. The slope is set under address $ 6/23( . The stability of the protection can be influenced by these settings. A higher slope results in a higher stability. This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings. Delay times In special cases it may be advantageous to delay the trip signal of the protection. For. this, an additional delay can be set. The timer $ 7 ,',))! is started when an internal fault is detected by the IDiff>stage and the trip characteristic. $ 7 , ',))!! is the delay for the IDiff>>stage. This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings. These settings are pure delay times which do not include the inherent operating time of the protection. The increase of the pickup value on startup serves as an additional safety against overfunctioning when a non-energized protection object is switched in. This function can be set to 21 or 2)) in address  ,1&&+$567$57. Especially for motors or motor/transformer in block connection it should be set to 21. The restraint current value ,5(67 67$5783 (address $) is the value of the restraining current which is likely to be undershot before startup of the protected object takes place (i.e. in case of standstill). This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings. Please be aware of the fact that the restraint current is twice the traversing operational current. The pre-set value of 0.1 represents 0.05 times the rated current of the protected object. Address $ 67$57)$&725 determines by which factor the pickup value of the IDiff>stage is to be increased on startup. The characteristic of this stage increases by the same value. The IDiff>>stage is not affected. For motors or motor/transformer in block connection, a value of 2 is normally adequate. This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings. The increase of the pickup value is set back to its original value after time period 7 67$57 0$; (address ) has passed. Add-on Stabilization In systems with very high traversing currents a dynamic add-on stabilization is being enabled for external faults (Figure 2-35). The initial value is set in address $ , $'' 21 67$%. The value is referred to the rated current of the protected object. The slope is the same as for characteristic branch b (6/23( , address $). This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings. Please be aware of the fact that the restraint current is the arithmetical sum of the currents flowing into the protected object, i. e. it is twice the traversing current.

Increase of Pickup Value on Startup

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

59

2 Functions

The maximum duration of the add-on stabilization after detection of an external fault is set to multiples of an AC-cycle (address $ 7 $'' 2167$%). This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings. The add-on stabilization is disabled automatically even before the set time period expires as soon as the device has detected that the operation point IDiff/IRest is located steadily (i. e. via at least one cycle) within the tripping zone. Harmonic Restraint Stabilization with harmonic content is available only when the device is used as transformer protection, i.e. 3527 2%-(&7 (address ) is set to  SKDVH WUDQVI or $XWRWUDQVI or  SKDVH WUDQVI. It is used also for shunt reactors if current transformers are installed at both sides of the connection points of the reactor (cf. example in Figure 2-25, right graph). The inrush restraint function can be switched 2)) or 21 under address  ,1586+ +$50. It is based on the evaluation of the 2nd harmonic content of the inrush current. The ratio of the 2nd harmonic to the fundamental frequency  +$5021,& (address ) is preset to I2fN/IfN =  % and can, as a rule, be retained without change. This ratio can be decreased in order to provide for a more stable setting in exceptional cases under especially unfavourable switch-on conditions The inrush restraint can be extended by the Crossblock function. This means that not only the phase with inrush current exhibiting harmonic content in excess of the permissible value is stabilized but also the other phases of the differential stage IDiff> are blocked. The duration for which the crossblock function is active can be limited under address $ &5266%  +$50. Setting is in multiple of the AC-cycle. This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings. If set to  (presetting) the protection can trip when the transformer is switched on a single-phase fault even while the other phases carry inrush current. If set to the crossblock function remains active as long as harmonic content is registered in any phase. Besides the 2nd harmonic, 7UT612 provides stabilization with a further harmonic: the n-th harmonic. Address  5(675 Q+$50 allows to select the  +DUPRQLF or the  +DUPRQLF, or to switch this n-th harmonic restraint 2)). Steady-state overexcitation of transformers is characterized by odd harmonic content. The 3rd or 5th harmonic is suitable to detect overexcitation. As the 3rd harmonic is often eliminated in the transformer windings (e.g. in a delta connected winding group), the 5th harmonic is usually used. Converter transformers also produce odd harmonic content. The harmonic content which blocks the differential stage IDiff> is set under address  Q +$5021,&. For example, if the 5th harmonic restraint is used to avoid trip during overexcitation, 30 % (presetting) is convenient. Harmonic restraint with the n-th harmonic operates individual per phase. But possibility exists as with the inrush restraint to set the protection such that not only the phase with harmonic content in excess of the permissible value is stabilized but also the other phases of the differential stage IDiff> are blocked (crossblock function). The duration for which the crossblock function is active can be limited under address $ &5266% Q+$50. Setting is in multiple of the AC-cycle. This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings. If set to  (presetting) the crossblock function is ineffective, if set to the crossblock function remains active as long as harmonic content is registered in any phase.

60

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.2 Differential Protection

If the differential current exceeds the magnitude set in address $ ,',))PD[ Q+0 no n-th harmonic restraint takes place. This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings.

2.2.8

Setting Overview
Note: Addresses which have an A attached to its end can only be changed in DIGSI 4, under Additional Settings.

Addr. 1201

Setting Title DIFF. PROT.

Setting Options OFF ON Block relay for trip commands OFF ON OFF ON OFF 3. Harmonic 5. Harmonic OFF ON 0.20..2.00 I/InO; 0 NO YES NO YES 0.05..2.00 I/InO 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.5..35.0 I/InO; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.10..0.50 0.00..2.00 I/InO 0.25..0.95 0.00..10.00 I/InO 0.00..2.00 I/InO 1.0..2.0

Default Setting OFF

Comments Differential Protection

1205 1206 1207

INC.CHAR.START INRUSH 2.HARM. RESTR. n.HARM.

OFF ON OFF

Increase of Trip Char. During Start Inrush with 2. Harmonic Restraint n-th Harmonic Restraint

1208 1210 1211A 1212A 1221 1226A 1231 1236A 1241A 1242A 1243A 1244A 1251A 1252A

I-DIFF> MON. I> CURR. GUARD DIFFw.IE1-MEAS DIFFw.IE2-MEAS I-DIFF> T I-DIFF> I-DIFF>> T I-DIFF>> SLOPE 1 BASE POINT 1 SLOPE 2 BASE POINT 2 I-REST. STARTUP START-FACTOR

ON 0.00 I/InO NO NO 0.20 I/InO 0.00 sec 7.5 I/InO 0.00 sec 0.25 0.00 I/InO 0.50 2.50 I/InO 0.10 I/InO 1.0

Differential Current monitoring I> for Current Guard Diff-Prot. with meas. Earth Current S1 Diff-Prot. with meas. Earth Current S2 Pickup Value of Differential Curr. T I-DIFF> Time Delay Pickup Value of High Set Trip T I-DIFF>> Time Delay Slope 1 of Tripping Characteristic Base Point for Slope 1 of Charac. Slope 2 of Tripping Characteristic Base Point for Slope 2 of Charac. I-RESTRAINT for Start Detection Factor for Increasing of Char. at Start

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

61

2 Functions

Addr. 1253 1256A 1257A 1261 1262A 1271 1272A 1273A 1281 1282

Setting Title T START MAX I-ADD ON STAB. T ADD ON-STAB. 2. HARMONIC

Setting Options 0.0..180.0 sec 2.00..15.00 I/InO 2..250 Cycle; 10..80 %

Default Setting 5.0 sec 4.00 I/InO 15 Cycle 15 % 3 Cycle 30 % 0 Cycle 1.5 I/InO 0.20 I/InO 2 sec

Comments Maximum Permissible Starting Time Pickup for Add-on Stabilization Duration of Add-on Stabilization 2nd Harmonic Content in I-DIFF Time for Cross-blocking 2nd Harm. n-th Harmonic Content in I-DIFF Time for Cross-blocking n-th Harm. Limit IDIFFmax of n-th Harm.Restraint Pickup Value of diff. Current Monitoring T I-DIFF> Monitoring Time Delay

CROSSB. 2. HARM 2..1000 Cycle; 0; n. HARMONIC CROSSB. n.HARM IDIFFmax n.HM I-DIFF> MON. T I-DIFF> MON. 10..80 % 2..1000 Cycle; 0; 0.5..20.0 I/InO 0.15..0.80 I/InO 1..10 sec

2.2.9

Information Overview

F.No. 05603 >Diff BLOCK 05615 Diff OFF 05616 Diff BLOCKED 05617 Diff ACTIVE 05620 Diff Adap.fact. 05631 Diff picked up 05644 Diff 2.Harm L1 05645 Diff 2.Harm L2 05646 Diff 2.Harm L3 05647 Diff n.Harm L1 05648 Diff n.Harm L2 05649 Diff n.Harm L3 05651 Diff Bl. exF.L1 05652 Diff Bl. exF.L2 05653 Diff Bl. exF.L3 05657 DiffCrosBlk2HM

Alarm

Comments >BLOCK differential protection Differential protection is switched OFF Differential protection is BLOCKED Differential protection is ACTIVE Diff: adverse Adaption factor CT Differential protection picked up Diff: Blocked by 2.Harmon. L1 Diff: Blocked by 2.Harmon. L2 Diff: Blocked by 2.Harmon. L3 Diff: Blocked by n.Harmon. L1 Diff: Blocked by n.Harmon. L2 Diff: Blocked by n.Harmon. L3 Diff. prot.: Blocked by ext. fault L1 Diff. prot.: Blocked by ext. fault L2 Diff. prot.: Blocked by ext. fault.L3 Diff: Crossblock by 2.Harmonic

62

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.2 Differential Protection

F.No. 05658 DiffCrosBlknHM 05662 Block Iflt.L1 05663 Block Iflt.L2 05664 Block Iflt.L3 05666 Diff in.char.L1 05667 Diff in.char.L2 05668 Diff in.char.L3 05670 Diff I-Release 05671 Diff TRIP 05672 Diff TRIP L1 05673 Diff TRIP L2 05674 Diff TRIP L3 05681 Diff> L1 05682 Diff> L2 05683 Diff> L3 05684 Diff>> L1 05685 Diff>> L2 05686 Diff>> L3 05691 Diff> TRIP 05692 Diff>> TRIP 05701 Dif L1 : 05702 Dif L2 : 05703 Dif L3 : 05704 Res L1 : 05705 Res L2 : 05706 Res L3 :

Alarm

Comments Diff: Crossblock by n.Harmonic Diff. prot.: Blocked by CT fault L1 Diff. prot.: Blocked by CT fault L2 Diff. prot.: Blocked by CT fault L3 Diff: Increase of char. phase L1 Diff: Increase of char. phase L2 Diff: Increase of char. phase L3 Diff: Curr-Release for Trip Differential protection TRIP Differential protection: TRIP L1 Differential protection: TRIP L2 Differential protection: TRIP L3 Diff. prot.: IDIFF> L1 (without Tdelay) Diff. prot.: IDIFF> L2 (without Tdelay) Diff. prot.: IDIFF> L3 (without Tdelay) Diff. prot: IDIFF>> L1 (without Tdelay) Diff. prot: IDIFF>> L2 (without Tdelay) Diff. prot: IDIFF>> L3 (without Tdelay) Differential prot.: TRIP by IDIFF> Differential prot.: TRIP by IDIFF>> Diff. curr. in L1 at trip without Tdelay Diff. curr. in L2 at trip without Tdelay Diff. curr. in L3 at trip without Tdelay Restr.curr. in L1 at trip without Tdelay Restr.curr. in L2 at trip without Tdelay Restr.curr. in L3 at trip without Tdelay

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

63

2 Functions

2.3

Restricted Earth Fault Protection

The restricted earth fault protection detects earth faults in power transformers, shunt reactors, neutral grounding transformers/reactors, or rotating machines, the starpoint of which is led to earth. It is also suitable when a starpoint former is installed within a protected zone of a non-earthed power transformer. A precondition is that a current transformer is installed in the starpoint connection, i.e. between the starpoint and earth. The starpoint CT and the three phase CTs define the limits of the protected zone exactly. Examples are illustrated in the Figures 2-36 to 2-40.

L1 L2 L3

IL1 IL2 IL3

3I0 = ISP 3I0" = IL1 + IL2 + IL3

L1 L2 L3

ISP

7UT612

Figure 2-36

Restricted earth fault protection on an earthed transformer winding

L1 L2 L3

IL1 IL2 IL3

3I0" = IL1 + IL2 + IL3

L1 L2 L3

Figure 2-37

Restricted earth fault protection on a non-earthed transformer winding with neutral reactor (starpoint former) within the protected zone

64

3I0 = ISP

ISP

7UT612

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.3 Restricted Earth Fault Protection

L1 L2 L3
3I0" = IL1 + IL2 + IL3

L1 L2 L3

7UT612

3I0 = ISP

ISP

Figure 2-38

Restricted earth fault protection on an earthed shunt reactor with CTs in the reactor leads

L1 L2 L3

IL1 IL2 IL3

IL1 IL2 IL3

L1 L2 L3

ISP

IL1 + IL2 + IL3 Side 1

3I0 = ISP

IL1 + IL2 + IL3 Side 2

7UT612

Figure 2-39

Restricted earth fault protection on an earthed shunt reactor with 2 CT sets (treated like an auto-transformer)

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

65

2 Functions

L1 L2 L3

IL1 IL2 IL3

3I0 = ISP

IL1 IL2 IL3 ISP

IL1 + IL2 + IL3 Side 2

L1 L2 L3

IL1 + IL2 + IL3 Side 1

7UT612

Figure 2-40

Restricted earth fault protection on an earthed auto-transformer

2.3.1

Function Description
During healthy operation, no starpoint current ISP flows through the starpoint lead, the sum of the phase currents 3I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3 is zero, too. When an earth fault occurs in the protected zone (Figure 2-41), a starpoint current ISP will flow; depending on the earthing conditions of the power system a further earth current may be recognized in the residual current path of the phase current transformers. Since all currents which flow into the protected zone are defined positive, the residual current from the system will be more or less in phase with the starpoint current.

Basic Principle

L1 L2 L3
ISP IL3

L1 L2 L3

Figure 2-41

Example for an earth fault in a transformer with current distribution

When an earth fault occurs outside the protected zone (Figure 2-42), a starpoint current ISP will flow equally; but the residual current of the phase current transformers 3I0 is now of equal magnitude and in phase opposition with the starpoint current.

66

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.3 Restricted Earth Fault Protection

L1 L2 L3
ISP Figure 2-42 IL3

L1 L2 L3

Example for an earth fault outside a transformer with current distribution

When a fault without earth connection occurs outside the protected zone, a residual current may occur in the residual current path of the phase current transformers which is caused by different saturation of the phase current transformers under strong through-current conditions. This current could simulate a fault in the protected zone. Wrong tripping must be avoided under such condition. For this, the restricted earth fault protection provides stabilization methods which differ strongly from the usual stabilization methods of differential protection schemes since it uses, besides the magnitude of the measured currents, the phase relationship, too. Evaluation of the Measured Quantities The restricted earth fault protection compares the fundamental wave of the current flowing in the starpoint connection, which is designated as 3I0 in the following, with the fundamental wave of the sum of the phase currents, which should be designated in the following as 3I0". Thus, the following applies (Figure 2-43): 3I0' = ISP 3I0" = IL1 + IL2 + IL3 Only 3I0' acts as the tripping effect quantity, during a fault within the protected zone this current is always present.

IL1 IL2 IL3

3I0 = ISP 3I0" = IL1 + IL2 + IL3

L1 L2 L3

ISP

7UT612

Figure 2-43

Principle of restricted earth fault protection

When an earth fault occurs outside the protected zone, another earth current 3I0" flows though the phase current transformers. This is, on the primary side, in counterphase with the starpoint 3I0' current and has equal magnitude. The maximum informa-

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

67

2 Functions

tion of the currents is evaluated for stabilization: the magnitude of the currents and their phase position. The following is defined: A tripping effect current IREF = |3I0| and the stabilization or restraining current IRest = k (|3I0' 3I0"| |3I0' + 3I0"|) where k is a stabilization factor which will be explained below, at first we assume k = 1. IREF is derived from the fundamental wave and produces the tripping effect quantity, IRest counteracts this effect. To clarify the situation, three important operating conditions should be examined: a) Through-fault current on an external earth fault: 3I0" is in phase opposition with 3I0' and of equal magnitude i.e. 3I0" = 3I0' IREF = |3I0'| IRest = |3I0' + 3I0"| |3I0' 3I0"| = 2|3I0'| The tripping effect current (IREF) equals the starpoint current; restraint (IRest) corresponds to twice the tripping effect current. b) Internal earth fault, fed only from the starpoint: In this case, 3I0" = 0 IREF = |3I0'| IRest = |3I0' 0| |3I0' + 0| = 0 The tripping effect current (IREF) equals the starpoint current; restraint (IRest) is zero, i.e. full sensitivity during internal earth fault. c) Internal earth fault, fed from the starpoint and from the system, e.g. with equal earth current magnitude: In this case, 3I0" = 3I0' IREF = |3I0'| IRest = |3I0' 3I0'| |3I0' + 3I0'| = 2 |3I0'| The tripping effect current (IREF) equals the starpoint current; the restraining quantity (IRest) is negative and, therefore, set to zero, i.e. full sensitivity during internal earth fault. This result shows that for internal fault no stabilization is effective since the restraint quantity is either zero or negative. Thus, small earth current can cause tripping. In contrast, strong restraint becomes effective for external earth faults. Figure 2-44 shows that the restraint is the strongest when the residual current from the phase current transformers is high (area with negative 3I0"/3I0'). With ideal current transformers, 3I0"/3I0' would be 1. If the starpoint current transformer is designed weaker than the phase current transformers (e.g. by selection of a smaller accuracy limit factor or by higher secondary burden), no trip will be possible under through-fault condition even in case of severe saturation as the magnitude of 3I0" is always higher than that of 3I0'.

68

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.3 Restricted Earth Fault Protection

IREF IREF> 4

Tripping
3

Blocking

-0.3

-0.2

-0.1

0.0

0.1

0.2

3Io" 0.3 3Io

Figure 2-44

Tripping characteristic of the restricted earth fault protection depending on the earth current ratio 3I0"/3I0' (both currents in phase + or counter-phase ); IREF = tripping effect current; IREF> = setting value

It was assumed in the above examples that the currents 3I0" and 3I0 are in counterphase for external earth faults which is only true for the primary measured quantities. Current transformer saturation may cause phase shifting between the fundamental waves of the secondary currents which reduces the restraint quantity. If the phase displacement (3I0"; 3I0') = 90 then the restraint quantity is zero. This corresponds to the conventional method of direction determination by use of the vectorial sum and difference comparison (Figure 2-45).

+3I0"

3 I0"

3I0'

IRest for k = 1

3I0' + 3I0" 3I0' 3 I0"

Figure 2-45

Phasor diagram of the restraint quantity during external fault

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

69

2 Functions

The restraint quantity can be influenced by means of a factor k. This factor has a certain relationship to the limit angle limit. This limit angle determines, for which phase displacement between 3I0" and 3I0 the pickup value grows to infinity when 3I0" = 3I0, i.e. no pickup occurs. In 7UT612 is k = 2, i.e. the restraint quantity in the above example a) is redoubled once more: the restraint quantity IRest is 4 times the tripping effect quantity IREF. The limit angle is limit = 110. That means no trip is possible for phase displacement (3I0"; 3I0') 110. Figure 2-46 shows the operating characteristics of the restricted earth fault protection dependent of the phase displacement between 3I0" and 3I0', for a constant infeed ratio |3I0"| = |3I0'|.

IREF IREF> 4

Tripping
3

Blocking
1

120

110

100

90

80

70

(3Io";3Io')

Figure 2-46

Tripping characteristic of the restricted earth fault protection depending on the phase displacement between 3I0" and 3I0 at 3I0" = 3I0' (180 = external fault)

It is possible to increase the tripping value in the tripping area proportional to the arithmetic sum of all currents, i.e. with the sum of the magnitudes |I| = |IL1 | + |IL2 | + |IL3 | + |ISP | (Figure 2-47). The slope of this stabilization can be set.

I5()
" " TGPQ@

|I|
Figure 2-47 Increasing the pickup value

70

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.3 Restricted Earth Fault Protection

"
FNo 05817

DS@A3

" " TGPQ@

REF picked up
IL1 IL1 IL1 I7 |3I0'| > k(|3I0'3I0"| |3I0'+3I0"|) |IL1 | + |IL2 | + |IL3 | + |ISt |

&
" !UD@9T3
T Meas. release 0

FNo 05816

REF T start
FNo 05821

REF TRIP
FNo 05812

FNo 05803

>BLOCK REF

REF BLOCKED
FNo 05813

S@AQSPU
1

& 1 &

REF ACTIVE
FNo 05811

PI 7ypxryh PAA

REF OFF

Figure 2-48

Logic diagram of the restricted earth fault protection

2.3.2

Setting the Function Parameters

The restricted earth fault protection can only operate if this function is assigned during configuration (refer to Subsection 2.1.1, address ) 5() 3527 to one of the sides of the protected object. Additionally, the measured current input I7 must be assigned to the same side (address ). The restricted earth fault protection can be set effective (21) or ineffective (2))) in address  5() 3527. When set to %ORFN UH OD\, the protection function operates but no trip command is issued.

Note:
When delivered from factory, the restricted earth fault protection is switched 2)). The reason is that the protection must not be in operation unless at least the assigned side and the CT polarity have been set before. Without proper settings, the device may show unexpected reactions (incl. tripping)! The sensitivity of the restricted earth fault protection is determined by the pickup value ,5()! (address ). The earth fault current which flows through the starpoint lead of the protected object (transformer, generator, motor, shunt reactor) is decisive. A further earth current which may be supplied from the network does not influence the sensitivity. The setting value is referred to the nominal current of the protected side. The set value can be increased in the tripping quadrant depending on the arithmetic sum of the currents (stabilization by the sum of all current magnitudes) which is set under address $ 6/23(. This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings. The preset value  is normally adequate. In special cases it may be advantageous to delay the trip signal of the protection. For. this, an additional delay can be set. The timer $ 7 ,5()! is started when an internal fault is detected. This setting is a pure delay time which does not include the inherent operating time of the protection.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

71

2 Functions

2.3.3

Setting Overview
Note: Addresses which have an A attached to its end can only be changed in DIGSI 4, under Additional Settings.

Addr. 1301

Setting Title REF PROT.

Setting Options OFF ON Block relay for trip commands 0.05..2.00 I / In 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.00..0.95

Default Setting OFF

Comments Restricted Earth Fault Protection

1311 1312A 1313A

I-REF> T I-REF> SLOPE

0.15 I / In 0.00 sec 0.00

Pick up value I REF> T I-REF> Time Delay Slope of Charac. I-REF> = f(I-SUM)

2.3.4

Information Overview

F.No. 05803 >BLOCK REF 05811 REF OFF 05812 REF BLOCKED 05813 REF ACTIVE 05836 REF Adap.fact. 05817 REF picked up 05816 REF T start 05821 REF TRIP 05826 REF D: 05827 REF S: 05830 REF Err CTstar 05835 REF Not avalia.

Alarm

Comments >BLOCK restricted earth fault prot. Restricted earth fault is switched OFF Restricted earth fault is BLOCKED Restricted earth fault is ACTIVE REF: adverse Adaption factor CT Restr. earth flt.: picked up Restr. earth flt.: Time delay started Restr. earth flt.: TRIP REF: Value D at trip (without Tdelay) REF: Value S at trip (without Tdelay) REF err.: No starpoint CT REF err: Not avaliable for this objekt

72

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.4 Time Overcurrent Protection for Phase and Residual Currents

2.4
General

Time Overcurrent Protection for Phase and Residual Currents

The time overcurrent protection is used as backup protection for the short-circuit protection of the protected object and provides backup protection for external faults which are not promptly disconnected and thus may endanger the protected object. Information on the connection and viewpoints for the assignment to the sides of the protected object are given in Subsection 2.1.1 under Special Cases (page 15). The assigned side and the type of characteristics have been decided under addresses  to . The time overcurrent protection for phase currents takes its currents from the side to which it is assigned. The time overcurrent protection for residual current always uses the sum of the current of that side to which it is assigned. The side for the phase currents may be different from that of the residual current. If the protected object is 3527 2%-(&7 = SK %XVEDU (address , see Subsection 2.1.1), the time overcurrent protection is ineffective. The time overcurrent protection provides two definite time stages and one inverse time stage for each the phase currents and the residual current. The inverse time stages may operate according an IEC or an ANSI, or an user defined characteristic.

2.4.1
2.4.1.1

Function Description
Definite Time Overcurrent Protection The definite time stages for phase currents and residual current are always available even if an inverse time characteristic has been configured according to Subsection 2.1.1 (addresses  and/or ).

Pickup, Trip

Two definite time stages are available for each the phase currents and the residual current (3I0). Each phase current and the residual current 3I0 are compared with the setting value ,!! (common setting for the three phase currents) and ,!! (independent setting for 3I0). Currents above the associated pickup value are detected and annunciated. When the respective delay time 7 ,!! or 7 ,!! is expired, tripping command is issued. The reset value is approximately 5 % below the pickup value for currents > 0.3 IN. Figure 2-49 shows the logic diagram for the high-current stages I>> and 3I0>>.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

73

2 Functions

!' H6IV6G8GPT@ Dhpvr D33vh

1

Dvh D3vh

(s. Fig. 2-54)

&

Man. Close

!
IL1 IL2 IL3

D33
FNo 1762 ... 1764

I>>

O/C Ph L1 PU O/C Ph L2 PU O/C Ph L3 PU &

! ! UD33
&
T 0

1 1

FNo 1800

I>> picked up
FNo 1805

L1 L2 L3
FNo 1721 Release meas. Release meas. Release meas.

I>> TRIP
FNo 1804

I>> Time Out

FNo 1852

>BLOCK I>>
FNo 1704

I>> BLOCKED
FNo 1752

>BLK Phase O/C

O/C Phase BLK

! QC6T@P8
1

FNo 1753

O/C Phase ACT

FNo 1751

2)) 21

O/C Phase OFF

!!' "DH6I8GPT@ Dhpvr "D33vh

1

"Dvh "D3vh

(s. Fig. 2-54)

&
"D33
FNo 1766

Man. Close

!!
3I0

I>>

O/C 3I0 PU &

FNo 1901

3I0>> picked up

!! !U"D33
&
FNo 1742 T 0

FNo 1903

3I0>> TRIP
FNo 1902

Release meas.

3I0>> Time Out

FNo 1857

>BLOCK 3I0>>
FNo 1741

3I0> BLOCKED
FNo 1749

>BLK 3I0 O/C

O/C 3I0 BLK

!!
1

"DP8

FNo 1750

O/C 3I0 ACTIVE

FNo 1748

2)) 21

O/C 3I0 OFF

Figure 2-49

Logic diagram of the high-set stages I>> for phase currents and residual current

74

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.4 Time Overcurrent Protection for Phase and Residual Currents

Each phase current and the residual current 3I0 are, additionally, compared with the setting value ,! (common setting for the three phase currents) and ,! (independent setting for 3I0). When the set thresholds are exceeded, pickup is annunciated. But if inrush restraint is used (cf. Subsection 2.4.1.5), a frequency analysis is performed first (Subsection 2.4.1.5). If an inrush condition is detected, pickup annunciation is suppressed and an inrush message is output instead. When, after pickup without inrush recognition, the relevant delay times 7 ,! or 7 ,! are expired, tripping command is issued. During inrush condition no trip is possible but expiry of the timer is annunciated. The reset value is approximately 5 % below the pickup value for currents > 0,3IN. Figure 2-50 shows the logic diagram of the stages I> for phase currents, Figure 2-51 for residual current. The pickup values for each of the stages, I> (phase currents), 3I0> (residual current), I>> (phase currents), 3I0>> (residual current) and the delay times can be set individually.

!' H6IV6G8GPT@ Dhpvr D33vh 1 Dvh D3vh

(s. Fig. 2-54)

& 1 & &

FNo 7551

Man. Close
(s. Fig. 2-56)

I> InRush PU
FNo 7565 ... 7567

Rush Blk L1

! " D3
IL1 IL2 IL3

L1 InRush PU L2 InRush PU L3 InRush PU

FNo 1762 ... 1764

I>

O/C Ph L1 PU O/C Ph L2 PU O/C Ph L3 PU &

1
&

1 1

FNo 1810

I> picked up
FNo 1815

UD3 ! #
&
T 0

I> TRIP

L1 L2 L3
FNo 1722

1
Meas. release Meas. release Meas. release

FNo 1814

I> Time Out

FNo 1851

>BLOCK I>
FNo 1704

I> BLOCKED
FNo 1752

>BLK Phase O/C

O/C Phase BLK

! QC6T@P8
1

FNo 1753

O/C Phase ACT

FNo 1751

2)) 21

O/C Phase OFF

Figure 2-50

Logic diagram of the overcurrent stages I> for phase currents

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

75

2 Functions

!!' "DH6I8GPT@ Dhpvr "D33vh

1

"Dvh "D3vh

(s. Fig 2-54)

&

Man. Close Rush Blk 3I0

FNo 7569

3I0> InRush PU
FNo 7568

!! " "D3
3I0

& &

3I0 InRush PU
FNo 1766

O/C 3I0 PU &

FNo 1904

I>

3I0> picked up

!! #U"D3
&
T 0

&

FNo 1906

3I0> TRIP
FNo 1905

3I0> Time Out

FNo 1743 Meas. release FNo 1857

>BLOCK 3I0>
FNo 1741

3I0> BLOCKED
FNo 1749

>BLK 3I0 O/C

O/C 3I0 BLK

!!
1

"DP8 2)) 21

FNo 1750

O/C 3I0 ACTIVE

FNo 1748

O/C 3I0 OFF

Figure 2-51

Logic diagram of the overcurrent stage 3I0> for residual current

2.4.1.2

Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection The inverse time overcurrent stages operate with a characteristic either according to the IEC- or the ANSI-standard or with a user-defined characteristic. The characteristic curves and their equations are represented in Technical Data (Figures 4-7 to 4-9 in Section 4.4). When configuring one of the inverse time characteristics, definite time stages I>> and I> are also enabled (see Section 2.4.1.1).

Pickup, Trip

Each phase current and the residual current (sum of phase currents) are compared, one by one, to a common setting value ,S and a separate setting ,S. If a current exceeds 1.1 times the setting value, the corresponding stage picks up and is signalled selectively. But if inrush restraint is used (cf. Subsection 2.4.1.5), a frequency analysis is performed first (Subsection 2.4.1.5). If an inrush condition is detected, pickup annunciation is suppressed and an inrush message is output instead. The RMS values of the basic oscillations are used for pickup. During the pickup of an Ip stage, the tripping time is calculated from the flowing fault current by means of an integrating measuring procedure, depending on the selected tripping characteristic. After the expiration of this period, a trip command is transmitted as long as no inrush current is detected or inrush restraint is disabled. If inrush restraint is enabled and inrush current is de-

76

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.4 Time Overcurrent Protection for Phase and Residual Currents

tected, there will be no tripping. Nevertheless, an annunciation is generated indicating that the time has expired. For the residual current ,S the characteristic can be selected independent from the characteristic used for the phase currents. The pickup values for the stages Ip (phase currents), 3I0p (residual current) and the delay times for each of these stages can be set individually. Figure 2-52 shows the logic diagram of the inverse time stages for phase currents, Figure 2-53 for residual current. Dropout for IEC Curves Dropout of a stage using an IEC curves occurs when the respective current decreases below about 95 % of the pickup value. A renewed pickup will cause a renewed start of the delay timers. Using the ANSI-characteristics you can determine whether the dropout of a stage is to follow right after the threshold undershot or whether it is evoked by disk emulation. Right after means that the pickup drops out when the pickup value of approx. 95 % is undershot. For a new pickup the time counter starts at zero.

Dropout for ANSI Curves

!' H6IV6G8GPT@ Dhpvr D33vh 1 Dvh D3vh

(s. Fig. 2-54)

& 1 & &

FNo 7553

Man. Close
(s. Fig. 2-56)

Ip InRush PU
FNo 7565 ... 7567

Rush Blk L1

!!
IL1 IL2 IL3

L1 InRush PU L2 InRush PU L3 InRush PU

FNo 1762 ... 1764

1,1 Ip

!!$ D@88VSW@
&

O/C Ph L1 PU O/C Ph L2 PU O/C Ph L3 PU

1
!!!UD
t

1 1

FNo 1820

Ip picked up
FNo 1825

&
I

&

1 1

Ip TRIP

FNo 1824

L1 L2 L3
FNo 1723

Ip Time Out

Meas. release Meas. release Meas. release FNo 1855

>BLOCK Ip
FNo 1704

Ip BLOCKED
FNo 1752

>BLK Phase O/C

O/C Phase BLK

! QC6T@P8
1

FNo 1753

O/C Phase ACT

FNo 1751

2)) 21

O/C Phase OFF

Figure 2-52

Logic diagram of the inverse time overcurrent stages Ip for phase currents example for IECcurves

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

77

2 Functions

!!' "DH6I8GPT@ Dhpvr "D33vh 1 "Dvh "D3vh

(s. Fig. 2-54)

&

Man. Close Rush Blk 3I0

FNo 7570

3I0p InRush PU
FNo 7568

&

3I0 InRush PU
FNo 1766

!!!
3I0

"D

&
1,1I>

O/C 3I0 PU &


FNo 1907

D@88VSW@ !!!!U"D
&
I

3I0p picked up

FNo 1909

3I0p TRIP
FNo 1908

&

3I0p TimeOut
FNo 1744 Meas. release FNo 1859

>BLOCK 3I0p
FNo 1741

3I0p BLOCKED
FNo 1749

>BLK 3I0 O/C

O/C 3I0 BLK

!! "DP8
1

FNo 1750

O/C 3I0 ACTIVE

FNo 1748

2)) 21

O/C 3I0 OFF

Figure 2-53

Logic diagram of the inverse time overcurrent stage for residual current example for IECcurves

The disk emulation evokes a dropout process (time counter is decrementing) which begins after de-energization. This process corresponds to the back turn of a Ferrarisdisk (explaining its denomination disk emulation). In case several faults occur successively, it is ensured that due to the inertia of the Ferraris-disk the history is taken into consideration and the time behaviour is adapted. The reset begins as soon as 90 % of the setting value is undershot, in correspondence to the dropout curve of the selected characteristic. Within the range of the dropout value (95 % of the pickup value) and 90 % of the setting value, the incrementing and the decrementing processes are in idle state. If 5 % of the setting value is undershot, the dropout process is being finished, i.e. when a new pickup is evoked, the timer starts again at zero. The disk emulation offers its advantages when the grading coordination chart of the time overcurrent protection is combined with other devices (on electro-mechanical or induction base) connected to the system. User-Specified Curves The tripping characteristic of the user-configurable curves can be defined via several points. Up to 20 pairs of current and time values can be entered. With these values the device approximates a characteristic by linear interpolation. If required, the dropout characteristic can also be defined. For the functional description see Dropout for ANSI Curves. If no user-configurable dropout characteristic is desired, dropout is initiated when approx. a 95 % of the pickup value is undershot; when a new pickup is evoked, the timer starts again at zero.

78

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.4 Time Overcurrent Protection for Phase and Residual Currents

2.4.1.3

Manual Close Command When a circuit breaker is closed onto a faulted protected object, a high speed re-trip by the breaker is often desired. The manual closing feature is designed to remove the delay from one of the time overcurrent stages when the breaker is manually closed onto a fault. The time delay is then bypassed via an impulse from the external control switch. This impulse is prolonged by a period of at least 300 ms (Figure 2-54). Addresses $ 0$18$/ &/26( and/or $ , 0$1 &/26( determine for which stages the delay is defeated under manual close condition.

FNo 00356

>Manual Close

50 ms 0 300 ms

FNo 00561

Man.Clos.
Man. Close (internal)

Figure 2-54

Manual close processing

2.4.1.4

Dynamic Cold Load Pickup With the dynamic cold load pickup feature, it is possible to dynamically increase the pickup values of the time overcurrent protection stages when dynamic cold load overcurrent conditions are anticipated, i.e. when consumers have increased power consumption after a longer period of dead condition, e.g. in air conditioning systems, heating systems, motors, etc. By allowing pickup values and the associated time delays to increase dynamically, it is not necessary to incorporate cold load capability in the normal settings. Processing of the dynamic cold load pickup conditions is common for all time overcurrent stages, and is explained in Section 2.6 (page 108). The alternative values themselves are set for each of the stages.

2.4.1.5

Inrush Restraint When switching unloaded transformers or shunt reactors on a live busbar, high magnetizing (inrush) currents may occur. They can amount to a multiple of the rated current and, dependent on the transformer size and design, may last from several milliseconds to several seconds. Although overcurrent detection is based only on the fundamental harmonic component of the measured currents, false pickup due to inrush might occur since the inrush current may even comprise a considerable component of fundamental harmonic. The time overcurrent protection provides an integrated inrush restraint function which blocks the overcurrent stages I> and Ip (not I>>) for phase and residual currents in case of inrush detection. After detection of inrush currents above a pickup value special inrush signals are generated. These signals also initiate fault annunciations and 79

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2 Functions

start the assigned trip delay time. If inrush current is still detected after expiration of the delay time, an annunciation is output. Tripping is suppressed. The inrush current is characterized by a considerable 2nd harmonic content (double rated frequency) which is practically absent in the case of a short-circuit. If the second harmonic content of a phase current exceeds a selectable threshold, trip is blocked for this phase. Similar applies for the residual current stages. The inrush restraint feature has an upper operation limit. Above this (adjustable) current blocking is suppressed since a high-current fault is assumed in this case. The lower limit is the operating limit of the harmonic filters (0.2 IN). Figure 2-55 shows a simplified logic diagram.

!# !C6SHQuhr
IL1 IL2 IL3

fN 2fN

&

Inrush det. L1 Inrush det.. L2 Inrush det.. L3

FNo 07581 ... 07583

L1 L2 L3

DHhDSQu !#!
FNo 07571

Meas. release Meas. release Meas. release

L1 InRush det. L2 InRush det. L3 InRush det.

>BLK Ph.O/C Inr

!! DSuSrQu
1

2)) 21

Figure 2-55

Logic diagram of the inrush restraint feature example for phase currents

Inrush det.. L1

Rush Blk L1

Inrush det.. L2

Rush Blk L2

Inrush det.. L3

8SPTT7GFQuhr !#"
1

U8SPTT7GFQu !##

Rush Blk L3

IP `@T

&

FNo 01843

INRUSH X-BLK

Figure 2-56

Logic diagram of the crossblock function for the phase currents

Since the harmonic restraint operates individually per phase, the protection is fully operative even when e.g. the transformer is switched onto a single-phase fault, whereby inrush currents may possibly be present in one of the healthy phases. However, it is

80

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.4 Time Overcurrent Protection for Phase and Residual Currents

also possible to set the protection such that not only the phase with inrush current exhibiting harmonic content in excess of the permissible value is blocked but also the other phases of the associated stage are blocked (so called cross-block function). This cross-block can be limited to a selectable duration. Figure 2-56 shows the logic diagram. Crossblock refers only to the phase current stages against each other. Phase inrush currents do not block the residual current stages nor vice versa.

2.4.1.6

Fast Busbar Protection Using Reverse Interlocking Each of the overcurrent stages can be blocked via binary inputs of the relay. A setting parameter determines whether the binary input operates in the normally open (i.e. energize input to block) or the normally closed (i.e. energize input to release) mode. Thus, the overcurrent time protection can be used as fast busbar protection in star connected networks or in open ring networks (ring open at one location), using the reverse interlock principle. This is used in high voltage systems, in power station auxiliary supply networks, etc., in which cases a transformer feeds from the higher voltage system onto a busbar with several outgoing feeders (refer to Figure 2-57).

Application Example

Infeed direction

Idiff

I>

I>>

7UT612
T I> T I>>

3D33iypx

I>

I>

t1

t1

Trip

Trip

Trip

Trip

Trip

T I>

T I>>

t1

Fault location Fault location

: :

Tripping time T I>> Tripping time t1 Backup time T I>

Figure 2-57

Fast busbar protection using reverse interlock principle

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

81

2 Functions

The time overcurrent protection is applied to the lower voltage side. Reverse interlocking means, that the overcurrent time protection can trip within a short time TI>>, which is independent of the grading time, if it is not blocked by pickup of one of the next downstream time overcurrent relays (Figure 2-57). Therefore, the protection which is closest to the fault will always trip within a short time, as it cannot be blocked by a relay behind the fault location. The time stages I> or Ip operate as delayed backup stages.

2.4.2

Setting the Function Parameters

During configuration of the functional scope (Subsection 2.1.1, margin heading Special Cases, page 16) in addresses  to  the sides of the protected object and the type of characteristic were determined, separately for the phase current stages and zero sequence current stage. Only the settings for the characteristic selected can be performed here. The definite time stages I>>, 3I0>>, I> and 3I0> are always available.

2.4.2.1 General

Phase Current Stages In address  3+$6( 2& time overcurrent protection for phase currents can be switched 21 or 2)). Address $ 0$18$/ &/26( determines the phase current stage which is to be activated instantaneously with a detected manual close. Settings ,!! LQVWDQW and ,! LQVWDQW can be set independent from the type of characteristic selected. ,S LQVWDQW is only available if one of the inverse time stages is configured. This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings. If time overcurrent protection is applied on the supply side of a transformer, select the higher stage I>> which does not pick up during inrush conditions or set the manual close feature to ,QDFWLYH. In address  ,Q5XVK5HVW 3K inrush restraint (restraint with 2nd harmonic) is enabled or disabled for all phase current stages of time overcurrent protection (excepted the I>> stage). Set 21 if one time overcurrent protection stage is to operate at the supply side of a transformer. Otherwise, use setting 2)). If you intend to set a very small pickup value for any reason, consider that the inrush restraint function cannot operate below 20 % nominal current (lower limit of harmonic filtering).

Definite Time High-Current Stages I>>

If I>>stage ,!! (address ) is combined with I>stage or Ipstage, a two-stage characteristic will be the result. If one stage is not required, the pickup value has to be set to . Stage ,!! always operates with a defined delay time. If time overcurrent protection is used on the supply side of a transformer, a series reactor, a motor or starpoint of a generator, this stage can also be used for current grad-

82

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.4 Time Overcurrent Protection for Phase and Residual Currents

ing. Setting instructs the device to pick up on faults only inside the protected object but not for traversing fault currents. Calculation example: Power transformer feeding a busbar, with the following data: Power transformer YNd5 35 MVA 110 kV/20 kV usc = 15 % 200 A/5 A on the 110 kV side

Current transformers

The time overcurrent protection is assigned to the 110 kV side (= feeding side). The maximum possible three-phase fault current on the 20 kV side, assuming a constant voltage source on the 110 kV side, is: S 1 WUDQVI 1 35 MVA 1 1 I SROH PD[ = ----------------- I 1 WUDQVI = ----------------- ------------------ = ---------- ----------------------------- = 1224.7 A 0.15 3 110 kV u VF WUDQVI u V F WUDQVI 3U
1

Assumed a safety margin of 20 %, the primary setting value results: Setting value I>> = 1.2 1224.7 A = 1470 A For setting in primary values via PC and DIGSI 4 this value can be set directly. For setting with secondary values the currents will be converted for the secondary side of the current transformer. Secondary setting value: 1470 A Setting value I>> = ------------------ 5 A = 36.7 A 200 A i.e. for fault currents higher than 1470 A (primary) or 36.7 A (secondary) the fault is in all likelihood located in the transformer zone. This fault can immediately be cleared by the time overcurrent protection. Increased inrush currents, if their fundamental oscillation exceeds the setting value, are rendered harmless by delay times (address  7 ,!!). The inrush restraint does not apply to stages I>>. Using reverse interlocking (Subsection 2.4.1.6, see also Figure 2-57) the multi-stage function of the time overcurrent protection offers its advantages: Stage 7 ,!! e. g. is used as accelerated busbar protection having a short safety delay ,!! (e. g. 50 ms). For faults at the outgoing feeders the stage I>> is blocked. Stages ,S or ,! serve as backup protection. The pickup values of both stages (,! or ,S and ,!!) are set equal. Time delay 7 ,! or 7 ,S (IEC characteristic) or ' ,S (ANSI characteristic) is set such that it overgrades the delay for the outgoing feeders. If fault protection for motors is applied, you have to make sure that the setting value ,!! is smaller than the smallest (two-pole) fault current and higher than the highest startup current. Since the maximum appearing startup current is usually below 1.6 x the rated startup current (even with unfavourable conditions), the following setting is adequate for fault current stage I>>: 1.6 Istartup > ,!! < Isc2-pole The increased startup current possibly caused by overvoltage is already considered with factor 1.6. Stage I>> can trip instantaneously (7 ,!! =  V) since there is no saturation of shunt reactance for motors, other than for transformers.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

83

2 Functions
The settable time 7 ,!! is an additional time delay and does not include the operating time (measuring time, dropout time). The delay can be set to infinity . If set to infinity, the pickup of this function will be indicated but the stage will not trip after pickup. If the pickup threshold is set to , neither a pickup annunciation nor a trip is generated. Definite Time Overcurrent Stages I> For setting the time overcurrent stage ,! (address ) the maximum appearing operational current is relevant. A pickup caused by an overload must be excluded, as the device operates in this mode as fault protection with correspondingly short tripping times and not as overload protection. For lines or busbars a rate of approx. 20 % above the maximum expected (over)load is set, for transformers and motors a rate of approx. 40 %. The settable time delay (address  7 ,!) results from the grading coordination chart defined for the network. The settable time is an additional time delay and does not include the operating time (measuring time, dropout time). The delay can be set to infinity . If set to infinity, the pickup of the corresponding function will be signalled but the stage will not issue a trip command. If the pickup threshold is set to , neither a pickup annunciation nor a trip is generated. Inverse Time Overcurrent Stages Ip with IEC curves The inverse time stages, depending on the configuration (Subsection 2.1.1, address ), enable the user to select different characteristics. With the IEC characteristics (address  '07,'07 3+ &+ = 72& ,(&) the following is made available in address  ,(& &859(: 1RUPDO ,QYHUVH (type A according to IEC 602553), 9HU\ ,QYHUVH (type B according to IEC 602553), ([WUHPHO\ ,QY (type C according to IEC 602553), and /RQJ ,QYHUVH (type B according to IEC 602553). The characteristics and equations they are based on are listed in the Technical Data (Section 4.4, Figure 4-7). If the inverse time trip characteristic is selected, it must be noted that a safety factor of about 1.1 has already been included between the pickup value and the setting value. This means that a pickup will only occur if a current of about 1.1 times of the setting value is present. The function will reset as soon as the value undershoots 95 % of the pickup value. The current value is set in address  ,S. The maximum operating current is of primary importance for the setting. A pickup caused by an overload must be excluded, as the device operates in this mode as fault protection with correspondingly short tripping times and not as overload protection. The corresponding time multiplier is accessible via address  7 ,S. The time multiplier must be coordinated with the grading coordination chart of the network. The time multiplier can also be set to . If set to infinity, the pickup of this function will be indicated but the stage will not trip after pickup. If the Ipstage is not required, select address  '07,'07 3+ &+ = 'HILQLWH 7LPH when configuring the protection functions (Subsection 2.1.1). Inverse Time Overcurrent Stages Ip with ANSI curves The inverse time stages, depending on the configuration (Subsection 2.1.1, address ), enable the user to select different characteristics. With the ANSI characteristics

84

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.4 Time Overcurrent Protection for Phase and Residual Currents

(address  '07,'07 3+ &+ = 72& $16,) the following is made available in address  $16, &859(: 'HILQLWH ,QY, ([WUHPHO\ ,QY, ,QYHUVH, /RQJ ,QYHUVH, 0RGHUDWHO\ ,QY, 6KRUW ,QYHUVH, and 9HU\ ,QYHUVH. The characteristics and the equations they are based on are listed in the Technical Data (Section 4.4, Figures 4-8 and 4-9). If the inverse time trip characteristic is selected, it must be noted that a safety factor of about 1.1 has already been included between the pickup value and the setting value. This means that a pickup will only occur if a current of about 1.1 times of the setting value is present. The current value is set in address  ,S. The maximum operating current is of primary importance for the setting. A pickup caused by overload must be excluded, since, in this mode, the device operates as fault protection with correspondingly short tripping times and not as overload protection. The corresponding time multiplier is set in address  ' ,S. The time multiplier must be coordinated with the grading coordination chart of the network. The time multiplier can also be set to . If set to infinity, the pickup of this function will be indicated but the stage will not trip after pickup. If the Ipstage is not required, select address  '07,'07 3+ &+ = 'HILQLWH 7LPH when configuring the protection functions (Subsection 2.1.1). If 'LVN (PXODWLRQ is set in address  72& '523287, dropout is being produced according to the dropout characteristic. For more information see Subsection 2.4.1.2, margin heading Dropout for ANSI Curves (page 77). Dynamic Cold Load Pickup An alternative set of pickup values can be set for each stage. It is selected automatically-dynamically during operation. For more information on this function see Section 2.6 (page 108). For the stages the following alternative values are set: for definite time overcurrent protection (phases): address  pickup value ,!!, address  delay time 7 ,!!, address  pickup value ,!, address  delay time 7 ,!; for inverse time overcurrent protection (phases) acc. IEC curves: address  pickup value ,S, address  time multiplier 7 ,S; for inverse time overcurrent protection (phases) acc. ANSI curves: address  pickup value ,S, address  time dial ' ,S.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

85

2 Functions

User Specified Curves

For inverse-time overcurrent protection the user may define his own tripping and dropout characteristic. For configuration in DIGSI 4 a dialog box is to appear. Enter up to 20 pairs of current value and tripping time value (Figure 2-58). In DIGSI 4 the characteristic can also be viewed as an illustration, see the right part of Figure 2-58.

Figure 2-58

Entering a user specified tripping curve using DIGSI 4 example

To create a user-defined tripping characteristic, the following must be set for configuration of the functional scope (Subsection 2.1.1): address  '07,'07 3+ &+, option 8VHU 'HILQHG 38. If you also want to specify the dropout characteristic, set 8VHU GHI 5HVHW. Value pairs are referred to the setting values for current and time. Since current values are rounded in a specific table before they are processed in the device (see Table 2-3), we recommend to use exactly the same preferred current values you can find in this table. .
Table 2-3 ,,S 1.00 1.06 1.13 1.19 1.25 1.31 1.38 1.44 Preferred values of the standard currents for user specified trip characteristics  WR  1.50 1.56 1.63 1.69 1.75 1.81 1.88 1.94 ,,S 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25  WR  3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 ,,S 5.00 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00 6.25  WR  6.50 6.75 7.00 7.25 7.50 7.75 ,,S 8.00 9.00 10.00 11.00 12.00 13.00 14.00  WR  15.00 16.00 17.00 18.00 19.00 20.00

86

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.4 Time Overcurrent Protection for Phase and Residual Currents

The default setting of current values is . Thus they are made invalid. No pickup and no tripping by this protective function takes place. For specification of a tripping characteristic please observe the following: The value pairs are to be indicated in a continuous order. You may also enter less than 20 value pairs. In most cases, 10 value pairs would be sufficient to be able to define an exact characteristic. A value pair which will not be used has to be made invalid entering for the threshold! Please ensure that a clear and steady characteristic is formed from the value pairs. For currents select the values from Table 2-3 and add the corresponding time values. Deviating values I/Ip are rounded. This, however, will not be indicated. Currents smaller than the current value of the smallest characteristic point do not lead to a prolongation of the tripping time. The pickup characteristic (see Figure 259, right side) goes parallel to the current axis, up to the smallest characteristic point.

T/Tp
Largest current point Smallest current point

Reset

Trip

Smallest current point

Largest current point

0.9 1.0 .1 Figure 2-59 User specified characteristic example

20

I/Ip

Currents greater than the current value of the greatest characteristic point do not lead to a reduction of the tripping time. The pickup characteristic (see Figure 2-59, right side) goes parallel to the current axis, beginning with the greatest characteristic point. For specification of a dropout characteristic please observe the following: For currents select the values from Table 2-4 and add the corresponding time values. Deviating values I/Ip are rounded. This, however, will not be indicated. Currents greater than the current value of the greatest characteristic point do not lead to a prolongation of the dropout time. The dropout characteristic (see Figure 259, left side) goes parallel to the current axis, up to the greatest characteristic point. Currents smaller than the current value of the smallest characteristic point do not lead to a reduction of the dropout time. The dropout characteristic (see Figure 2-59, left side) goes parallel to the current axis, beginning with the smallest characteristic point.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

87

2 Functions
Currents smaller than 0.05 times the setting value of currents lead to an immediate dropout. .
Table 2-4 ,,S 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.95 0.94 Preferred values of the standard currents for user specified reset characteristics  WR  0.93 0.92 0.91 0.90 0.89 0.88 0.86 ,,S 0.84 0.83 0.81 0.80 0.78 0.77  WR  0.75 0.73 0.72 0.70 0.69 0.67 ,,S 0.66 0.64 0.63 0.61 0.59 0.56  WR  0.53 0.50 0.47 0.44 0.41 0.38 ,,S 0.34 0.31 0.28 0.25 0.22 0.19  WR  0.16 0.13 0.09 0.06 0.03 0.00

Inrush Restraint

In address  ,Q5XVK5HVW 3K of the general settings (page 82, margin heading General) the inrush restraint can be enabled (21) or disabled (2))). Especially for transformers and if overcurrent time protection is used on the supply side, this inrush restraint is required. Function parameters of the inrush restraint are set in Inrush. It is based on an evaluation of the 2nd harmonic present in the inrush current. The ratio of 2nd harmonics to the fundamental +$50 3KDVH (address ) is set to I2fN/ IfN =  % as default setting. It can be used without being changed. To provide more restraint in exceptional cases, where energizing conditions are particularly unfavourable, a smaller value can be set in the address before-mentioned. If the current exceeds the value indicated in address  , 0D[ ,Q5U 3K, no restraint will be provoked by the 2nd harmonic. The inrush restraint can be extended by the so-called cross-block function. This means that if the harmonic component is only exceeded in one phase, all three phases of the I> or Ipstages are blocked. In address  &5266 %/.3KDVH the crossblock function is set to 21 or 2)). The time period for which the crossblock function is active after detection of inrushes is set at address  7 &5266 %/.3K.

2.4.2.2 General

Residual Current Stages In address  , 2&, time overcurrent protection for residual current can be set to 21 or 2)). Address $ , 0$1 &/26( determines which residual current stage is to be activated instantaneously with a detected manual close. Settings ,!! LQVWDQW and ,! LQVWDQW can be set independent from the type of characteristic selected. ,S LQVWDQW is only available if one of the inverse time stages is configured. This

88

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.4 Time Overcurrent Protection for Phase and Residual Currents

parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings. For this setting, similar considerations apply as for the phase current stages. In address  ,Q5XVK5HVW , inrush restraint (restraint with 2nd harmonic) is enabled or disabled. Set 21 if the residual current stage of the time overcurrent protection is applied at the supply side of a transformer whose starpoint is earthed. Otherwise, use setting 2)). Definite Time High-Current Stage 3I0>> If I0>>stage ,!! (address  is combined with I>stage or Ipstage, a twostage characteristic will be the result. If one stage is not required, the pickup value has to be set to . Stage ,!! always operates with a defined delay time. If the protected winding is not earthed, zero sequence current only emerges due to an inner earth fault or double earth fault with one inner base point. Here, no I0>>-stage is required usually. Stage I0>> can be applied e.g. for current grading. Please note that the zero sequence system of currents is of importance. For transformers with separate windings, zero sequence systems are usually kept separate (exception: bilateral starpoint earthing). Inrush currents can only be created in zero sequence systems, if the starpoint of the winding regarded is earthed. If its fundamental exceeds the setting value, the inrush currents are rendered harmless by delay (address  7 ,!!). Reverse interlocking (Subsection 2.4.1.6, see Figure 2-57) only makes sense if the winding regarded is earthed. Then, we take advantage of the multi-stage function of time overcurrent protection: Stage 7 ,!! e. g. is used as accelerated busbar protection having a short safety delay ,!! (e. g. 50 ms). For faults at the outgoing feeders stage ,!! is blocked. Stages ,S or ,! serve as backup protection. The pickup values of both stages (,! or ,S and ,!!) are set equal. Time delay 7 ,! or 7 ,S (IEC characteristic) or ' ,S (ANSI characteristic) is set such that it overgrades the delay for the outgoing feeders. Here, the grading coordination chart for earth faults, which mostly allows shorter setting times, is of primary importance. The set time 7 ,!! is an additional time delay and does not include the operating time (measuring time, dropout time). The delay can be set to infinity . If set to infinity, the pickup of this function will be indicated but the stage will not trip after pickup. If the pickup threshold is set to , neither a pickup annunciation nor a trip is generated. Definite Time Overcurrent Stage 3I0> For setting the time overcurrent stage ,! (address ) the minimum appearing earth fault current is relevant. The settable time delay (parameter  7 ,!) derives from the grading coordination chart created for the network. For earth currents with earthed network, you can mostly set up a separate grading coordination chart with shorter delay times. If you set a very small pickup value, consider that the inrush restraint function cannot operate below 20 % nominal current (lower limit of harmonic filtering). An adequate time delay could be reasonable. The set time is an additional time delay and does not include the operating time (measuring time, dropout time). The delay can be set to infinity . If set to infinity, the pickup of this function will be indicated but the stage will not be able to trip after pickup. If the pickup threshold is set to , neither a pickup annunciation nor a trip is generated.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

89

2 Functions

Inverse Time Overcurrent Stage 3I0p with IEC curves

The inverse time stage, depending on the configuration (Subsection 2.1.1, address ), enables the user to select different characteristics. With the IEC characteristics (address  '07,'07 , &+ = 72& ,(&) the following is made available in address  ,(& &859(: 1RUPDO ,QYHUVH (type A according to IEC 602553), 9HU\ ,QYHUVH (type B according to IEC 602553), ([WUHPHO\ ,QY (type C according to IEC 602553), and /RQJ ,QYHUVH (type B according to IEC 602553). The characteristics and equations they are based on are listed in the Technical Data (Section 4.4, Figure 4-7). If the inverse time trip characteristic is selected, it must be noted that a safety factor of about 1.1 has already been included between the pickup value and the setting value. This means that a pickup will only occur if a current of about 1.1 times of the setting value is present. The function will reset as soon as the value undershoots 95 % of the pickup value. The current value is set in address  ,S. The most relevant for this setting is the minimum appearing earth fault current. The corresponding time multiplier is accessible via address  7 ,S. This has to be coordinated with the grading coordination chart of the network. For earth currents with earthed network, you can mostly set up a separate grading coordination chart with shorter delay times. If you set a very small pickup value, consider that the inrush restraint function cannot operate below 20 % nominal current (lower limit of harmonic filtering). An adequate time delay could be reasonable. The time multiplier can also be set to . If set to infinity, the pickup of this function will be indicated but the stage will not be able to trip after pickup. If the Ipstage is not required, select address  '07,'07 , &+ = 'HILQLWH 7LPH when configuring the protection functions (Subsection 2.1.1).

Inverse Time Overcurrent Stage 3I0p with ANSI curves

The inverse time stages, depending on the configuration (Subsection 2.1.1, address ), enable the user to select different characteristics. With the ANSI characteristics (address  '07,'07 , &+ = 72& $16,) the following is made available in address  $16, &859(: 'HILQLWH ,QY, ([WUHPHO\ ,QY, ,QYHUVH, /RQJ ,QYHUVH, 0RGHUDWHO\ ,QY, 6KRUW ,QYHUVH, and 9HU\ ,QYHUVH. The characteristics and the equations they are based on are listed in the Technical Data (Section 4.4, Figures 4-8 and 4-9). If the inverse time trip characteristic is selected, it must be noted that a safety factor of about 1.1 has already been included between the pickup value and the setting value. This means that a pickup will only occur if a current of about 1.1 times of the setting value is present. The current value is set in address  ,S. The most relevant for this setting is the minimum appearing earth fault current.

90

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.4 Time Overcurrent Protection for Phase and Residual Currents

The corresponding time multiplier is set in address  ' ,S. This has to be coordinated with the grading coordination chart of the network. For earth currents with earthed network, you can mostly set up a separate grading coordination chart with shorter delay times. If you set a very small pickup value, consider that the inrush restraint function cannot operate below 20 % nominal current (lower limit of harmonic filtering). An adequate time delay could be reasonable. The time multiplier can also be set to . If set to infinity, the pickup of this function will be indicated but the stage will not be able to trip after pickup. If stage 3,0p is not required, select address  '07,'07 , &+ = 'HILQLWH 7LPH when configuring the protection functions (Subsection 2.1.1). If 'LVN (PXODWLRQ is set in address  72& '523287, dropout is being produced according to the dropout characteristic. For more information see Subsection 2.4.1.2, margin heading Dropout for ANSI Curves (page 77). Dynamic Cold Load Pickup An alternative set of pickup values can be set for each stage. It is selected automatically-dynamically during operation. For more information on this function see Section 2.6 (page 108). For the stages the following alternative values are set: for definite time overcurrent protection 3I0: address  pickup value ,!!, address  delay time 7 ,!!, address  pickup value ,!, address  delay time 7 ,!; for inverse time overcurrent protection 3I0 acc. IEC curves: address  pickup value ,S, address  time multiplier 7 ,S; for inverse time overcurrent protection 3I0 acc. ANSI curves: address  pickup value ,S, address  time dial ' ,S. User Specified Curves For inverse time overcurrent protection the user may define his own tripping and dropout characteristic. For configuration in DIGSI 4 a dialog box is to appear. Enter up to 20 pairs of current and tripping time values (Figure 2-58, page 86). The procedure is the same as for phase current stages. See Subsection 2.4.2.1, margin heading User Specified Curves, page 86. To create a user defined tripping characteristic, the following must have been set for configuration of the functional scope (Subsection 2.1.1): address  '07,'07 , &+, option 8VHU 'HILQHG 38. If you also want to specify the dropout characteristic, set option 8VHU GHI 5HVHW. Inrush Restraint In address  ,Q5XVK5HVW , of the general settings (page 88, margin heading General) the inrush restraint can be enabled (21) or disabled (2))). Especially for transformers and if overcurrent time protection is activated on the earthed supply side, this inrush restraint is required. Function parameters of the inrush restraint are set in Inrush. It is based on an evaluation of the 2nd harmonic present in the inrush current. The ratio of 2nd harmonics to the fundamental +$50 , (address ) is preset to

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

91

2 Functions
I2fN/IfN =  %. It can be used without being changed. To provide more restraint in exceptional cases, where energizing conditions are particularly unfavourable, a smaller value can be set in the address before-mentioned. If the current exceeds the value indicated in address  , 0D[ ,Q5U ,, no restraint will be provoked by the 2nd harmonic.

2.4.3

Setting Overview
The following list indicates the setting ranges and the default settings of a rated secondary current IN = 1 A. For a rated secondary current of IN = 5 A these values have to be multiplied by 5. For settings in primary values, a conversion rate from current transformers has to be considered additionally.

Note: Addresses which have an A attached to their end can only be changed in DIGSI 4, Section Additional Settings.
Phase Currents
Addr. 2001 2002 2008A Setting Title PHASE O/C InRushRest. Ph MANUAL CLOSE ON OFF ON OFF I>> instantaneously I> instantaneously Ip instantaneously Inactive 0.10..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.10..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.10..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.10..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.10..4.00 A 0.05..3.20 sec; 0.50..15.00; Instantaneous Disk Emulation Setting Options Default Setting OFF OFF I>> instantaneously Comments Phase Time Overcurrent InRush Restrained O/C Phase O/C Manual Close Mode

2011 2012 2013 2014 2111 2112 2113 2114 2021 2022 2023 2024

I>> T I>> I> T I> I>> T I>> I> T I> Ip T Ip D Ip TOC DROP-OUT

2.00 A 0.00 sec 1.00 A 0.50 sec 10.00 A 0.00 sec 2.00 A 0.30 sec 1.00 A 0.50 sec 5.00 Disk Emulation

I>> Pickup T I>> Time Delay I> Pickup T I> Time Delay I>> Pickup T I>> Time Delay I> Pickup T I> Time Delay Ip Pickup T Ip Time Dial D Ip Time Dial TOC Drop-out characteristic

92

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.4 Time Overcurrent Protection for Phase and Residual Currents

Addr. 2025

Setting Title IEC CURVE

Setting Options Normal Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inverse Long Inverse Very Inverse Inverse Short Inverse Long Inverse Moderately Inverse Extremely Inverse Definite Inverse 0.10..4.00 A 0.05..3.20 sec; 0.50..15.00; 1.00..20.00 I / Ip; 0.01..999.00 Time Dial 0.05..0.95 I / Ip; 0.01..999.00 Time Dial 10..45 % 0.30..25.00 A

Default Setting Normal Inverse IEC Curve

Comments

2026

ANSI CURVE

Very Inverse

ANSI Curve

2121 2122 2123 2031 2032 2041 2042 2043 2044

Ip T Ip D Ip I/Ip PU T/Tp MofPU Res T/Tp 2.HARM. Phase I Max InRr. Ph.

1.50 A 0.50 sec 5.00

Ip Pickup T Ip Time Dial D Ip Time Dial Pickup Curve I/Ip - TI/TIp Multiple of Pickup <-> TI/TIp

15 % 7.50 A NO 0.00 sec

2nd harmonic O/C Ph. in % of fundamental Maximum Current for Inr. Rest. O/C Phase CROSS BLOCK O/C Phase CROSS BLOCK Time O/C Phase

CROSS BLK.Phase NO YES T CROSS BLK.Ph 0.00..180.00 sec

Residual Current
Addr. 2201 2202 2208A Setting Title 3I0 O/C InRushRest. 3I0 3I0 MAN. CLOSE ON OFF ON OFF 3I0>> instantaneously 3I0> instantaneously 3I0p instantaneously Inactive 0.05..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.05..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.05..35.00 A; Setting Options Default Setting OFF OFF 3I0>> instantaneously Comments 3I0 Time Overcurrent InRush Restrained O/C 3I0 O/C 3I0 Manual Close Mode

2211 2212 2213 2214 2311

3I0>> T 3I0>> 3I0> T 3I0> 3I0>>

0.50 A 0.10 sec 0.20 A 0.50 sec 7.00 A

3I0>> Pickup T 3I0>> Time Delay 3I0> Pickup T 3I0> Time Delay 3I0>> Pickup

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

93

2 Functions

Addr. 2312 2313 2314 2221 2222 2223 2224 2225

Setting Title T 3I0>> 3I0> T 3I0> 3I0p T 3I0p D 3I0p TOC DROP-OUT IEC CURVE

Setting Options 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.05..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.05..4.00 A 0.05..3.20 sec; 0.50..15.00; Instantaneous Disk Emulation Normal Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inverse Long Inverse Very Inverse Inverse Short Inverse Long Inverse Moderately Inverse Extremely Inverse Definite Inverse 0.05..4.00 A 0.05..3.20 sec; 0.50..15.00; 1.00..20.00 I / Ip; 0.01..999.00 Time Dial 0.05..0.95 I / Ip; 0.01..999.00 Time Dial 10..45 % 0.30..25.00 A

Default Setting 0.00 sec 1.50 A 0.30 sec 0.20 A 0.20 sec 5.00 Disk Emulation Normal Inverse

Comments T 3I0>> Time Delay 3I0> Pickup T 3I0> Time Delay 3I0p Pickup T 3I0p Time Dial D 3I0p Time Dial TOC Drop-out Characteristic IEC Curve

2226

ANSI CURVE

Very Inverse

ANSI Curve

2321 2322 2323 2231 2232 2241 2242

3I0p T 3I0p D 3I0p I/I0p PU T/TI0p MofPU ResT/TI0p 2.HARM. 3I0 I Max InRr. 3I0

1.00 A 0.50 sec 5.00

3I0p Pickup T 3I0p Time Dial D 3I0p Time Dial Pickup Curve 3I0/3I0p - T3I0/ T3I0p Multiple of Pickup <-> T3I0/ T3I0p

15 % 7.50 A

2nd harmonic O/C 3I0 in % of fundamental Maximum Current for Inr. Rest. O/C 3I0

2.4.4
General
F.No.

Information Overview

Alarm Time Overcurrent picked up Time Overcurrent TRIP

Comments

01761 Overcurrent PU 01791 OvercurrentTRIP

94

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.4 Time Overcurrent Protection for Phase and Residual Currents

Phases Currents
F.No. Alarm Comments >BLOCK Phase time overcurrent >BLOCK time overcurrent Phase InRush Time Overcurrent Phase is OFF Time Overcurrent Phase is BLOCKED Time Overcurrent Phase is ACTIVE Phase L1 InRush detected Phase L2 InRush detected Phase L3 InRush detected Cross blk: PhX blocked PhY Time Overcurrent Phase L1 picked up Time Overcurrent Phase L2 picked up Time Overcurrent Phase L3 picked up Phase L1 InRush picked up Phase L2 InRush picked up Phase L3 InRush picked up >BLOCK I>> I>> BLOCKED I>> picked up I>> Time Out I>> TRIP >BLOCK I> I> BLOCKED I> picked up I> InRush picked up I> Time Out I> TRIP >BLOCK Ip Ip BLOCKED Ip picked up Ip InRush picked up Ip Time Out Ip TRIP O/C Phase Not avali. for this objekt

01704 >BLK Phase O/C 07571 >BLK Ph.O/C Inr 01751 O/C Phase OFF 01752 O/C Phase BLK 01753 O/C Phase ACT 07581 L1 InRush det. 07582 L2 InRush det. 07583 L3 InRush det. 01843 INRUSH X-BLK 01762 O/C Ph L1 PU 01763 O/C Ph L2 PU 01764 O/C Ph L3 PU 07565 L1 InRush PU 07566 L2 InRush PU 07567 L3 InRush PU 01721 >BLOCK I>> 01852 I>> BLOCKED 01800 I>> picked up 01804 I>> Time Out 01805 I>> TRIP 01722 >BLOCK I> 01851 I> BLOCKED 01810 I> picked up 07551 I> InRush PU 01814 I> Time Out 01815 I> TRIP 01723 >BLOCK Ip 01855 Ip BLOCKED 01820 Ip picked up 07553 Ip InRush PU 01824 Ip Time Out 01825 Ip TRIP 01860 O/C Ph. Not av.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

95

2 Functions

Residual Current
F.No. 01741 >BLK 3I0 O/C 07572 >BLK 3I0O/C Inr 01748 O/C 3I0 OFF 01749 O/C 3I0 BLK 01750 O/C 3I0 ACTIVE 01766 O/C 3I0 PU 07568 3I0 InRush PU 01742 >BLOCK 3I0>> 01858 3I0>> BLOCKED 01901 3I0>> picked up 01902 3I0>> Time Out 01903 3I0>> TRIP 01743 >BLOCK 3I0> 01857 3I0> BLOCKED 01904 3I0> picked up 07569 3I0> InRush PU 01905 3I0> Time Out 01906 3I0> TRIP 01744 >BLOCK 3I0p 01859 3I0p BLOCKED 01907 3I0p picked up 07570 3I0p InRush PU 01908 3I0p TimeOut 01909 3I0p TRIP 01861 O/C 3I0 Not av. Alarm Comments >BLOCK 3I0 time overcurrent >BLOCK time overcurrent 3I0 InRush Time Overcurrent 3I0 is OFF Time Overcurrent 3I0 is BLOCKED Time Overcurrent 3I0 is ACTIVE Time Overcurrent 3I0 picked up 3I0 InRush picked up >BLOCK 3I0>> time overcurrent 3I0>> BLOCKED 3I0>> picked up 3I0>> Time Out 3I0>> TRIP >BLOCK 3I0> time overcurrent 3I0> BLOCKED 3I0> picked up 3I0> InRush picked up 3I0> Time Out 3I0> TRIP >BLOCK 3I0p time overcurrent 3I0p BLOCKED 3I0p picked up 3I0p InRush picked up 3I0p Time Out 3I0p TRIP O/C 3I0 Not avali. for this objekt

96

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.5 Time Overcurrent Protection for Earth Current

2.5

Time Overcurrent Protection for Earth Current

The time overcurrent protection for earth current is always assigned to the current input I7 of the device. Principally, it can be used for any desired application of overcurrent detection. Its preferred application is the detection of an earth current between the starpoint of a protected three-phase object and the earthing electrode. This protection can be used in addition to the restricted earth fault protection (Section 2.3). Then it forms the backup protection for earth faults outside the protected zone which are not cleared there. Figure 2-60 shows an example. The time overcurrent protection for earth current provides two definite time stages and one inverse time stage. The latter may operate according an IEC or an ANSI, or an user defined characteristic.

L1 L2 L3

IL1 IL2 IL3

Restricted earth fault protection

L1 L2 L3

ISP

I7

7UT612
Time overcurrent prot. for earth current

Figure 2-60

Time overcurrent protection as backup protection for restricted earth fault protection

2.5.1
2.5.1.1

Function Description
Definite Time Overcurrent Protection The definite time stages for earth current are always available even if an inverse time characteristic has been configured according to Subsection 2.1.1 (address ).

Pickup, Trip

Two definite time stages are available for the earth current IE. The current measured at the input I7 is compared with the setting value ,(!!. Current above the pickup value is detected and annunciated. When the delay time 7 ,(!! is expired, tripping command is issued. The reset value is approximately 5 % below the pickup value for currents > 0.3 IN.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

97

2 Functions

Figure 2-61 shows the logic diagram for the high-current stage IE>>.

!#' D@H6I8GPT@ Dhpvr D@33vh 1 D@vh D@3vh

(s. Fig. 2-54)

&

Man. Close

!#
I7

D@33
FNo 1831

IE>> picked up
I>>

&

!# !UD@33
&
T 0

FNo 1833

IE>> TRIP
FNo 1832

IE>> Time Out

Meas. release FNo 1724 FNo 1854

>BLOCK IE>>
FNo 1714

IE>> BLOCKED
FNo 1757

>BLK Earth O/C

O/C Earth BLK

!# @6SUCP8
1

FNo 1758

O/C Earth ACT

FNo 1756

2)) 21

O/C Earth OFF

Figure 2-61

Logic diagram of the high-current stage IE>> for earth current

The current detected at the current measuring input I7 is additionally compared with setting value ,(!. An annunciation is generated if the value is exceeded. But if inrush restraint is used (cf. Subsection 2.5.1.5), a frequency analysis is performed first (Subsection 2.5.1.5). If an inrush condition is detected, pickup annunciation is suppressed and an inrush message is output instead. If there is no inrush or if inrush restraint is disabled, a tripping command will be output after expiration of delay time 7 ,(!. If inrush restraint is enabled and inrush current is detected, there will be no tripping. Nevertheless, an annunciation is generated indicating that the time expired. The dropout value is approx. a 95 % of the pickup value for currents greater than 0.3 IN. Figure 2-62 shows the logic diagram of the earth overcurrent stage IE>. The pickup values for each of the stages IE> and IE>> and the delay times can be set individually.

98

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.5 Time Overcurrent Protection for Earth Current

!#' D@H6I8GPT@ Dhpvr D@33vh

1

D@vh D@3vh
(s. Fig. 2-54)

&

Man. Close Rush Blk E

FNo 7552

IE> InRush PU
FNo 7564

&

Earth InRush PU
FNo 1765

!# " D@3
I7

&
I>

O/C Earth PU &

FNo 1834

IE> picked up

!# #UD@3
&
T 0

&

FNo 1836

IE> TRIP
FNo 1835

IE> Time Out

FNo 1725 Meas. release FNo 1853

>BLOCK IE>
FNo 1714

IE> BLOCKED
FNo 1757

>BLK Earth O/C

O/C Earth BLK

!# @6SUCP8
1

FNo 1758

O/C Earth ACT

FNo 1756

2)) 21

O/C Earth OFF

Figure 2-62

Logic diagram of the overcurrent stage IE> for earth current

2.5.1.2

Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection The inverse-time overcurrent stage operates with a characteristic either according to the IEC- or the ANSI-standard or with a user-defined characteristic. The characteristic curves and their equations are represented in Technical Data (Figures 4-7 to 4-9 in Section 4.4). If one of the inverse time characteristics is configured, the definite time stages IE>> and IE> are also enabled (see Subsection 2.5.1.1).

Pickup, Trip

The current detected at the current measuring input I7 is compared with setting value ,(S. If the current exceeds 1.1 times the set value, the stage picks up and an annunciation is made. But if inrush restraint is used (cf. Subsection 2.5.1.5), a frequency analysis is performed first (Subsection 2.5.1.5). If an inrush condition is detected, pickup annunciation is suppressed and an inrush message is output instead. The RMS value of the fundamental is used for the pickup. During the pickup of an ,Ep stage, tripping time is calculated from the flowing fault current by means of an integrating measuring procedure, depending on the selected tripping characteristic. After expiration of this time period, a trip command is output as long as no inrush current is detected or inrush restraint is disabled. If inrush restraint is enabled and inrush current is detected, there will be no tripping. Nevertheless, an annunciation is generated indicating that the time expired.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

99

2 Functions

Figure 2-63 shows the logic diagram of the inverse time overcurrent protection.

!#' D@H6I8GPT@ Dhpvr D@33vh

1

D@vh D@3vh
(s. Fig. 2-54)

&

Man. Close Rush Blk E

FNo 7554

IEp InRush PU
FNo 7564

&

Earth InRush PU
FNo 1765

!#!
3I0

D@

&
1,1I>

O/C Earth PU &


FNo 1837

D@88VSW@ !#!!UD@
&
I

IEp picked up

FNo 1839

IEp TRIP
FNo 1838

&

IEp TimeOut
FNo 1726 Meas. release FNo 1856

>BLOCK IEp
FNo 1714

IEp BLOCKED
FNo 1757

>BLK Earth O/C

O/C Earth BLK

!# @6SUCP8
1

FNo 1758

O/C Earth ACT

FNo 1756

2)) 21

O/C Earth OFF

Figure 2-63

Logic diagram of the inverse time overcurrent protection stage IEp example for IECcurves

Dropout for IEC Curves

Dropout of the stage using an IEC curves occurs when the respective current decreases below about 95 % of the pickup value. A renewed pickup will cause a renewed start of the delay timers. Using the ANSI-characteristics you can determine whether the dropout of the stage is to follow right after the threshold undershot or whether it is evoked by disk emulation. Right after means that the pickup drops out when the pickup value of approx. 95 % is undershot. For a new pickup the time counter starts at zero. The disk emulation evokes a dropout process (time counter is decrementing) which begins after de-energization. This process corresponds to the back turn of a Ferrarisdisk (explaining its denomination disk emulation). In case several faults occur successively, it is ensured that due to the inertia of the Ferraris-disk the History is taken into consideration and the time behaviour is adapted. The reset begins as soon as 90 % of the setting value is undershot, in correspondence to the dropout curve of the selected characteristic. Within the range of the dropout value (95 % of the pickup value) and 90 % of the setting value, the incrementing and the decrementing processes are in idle state. If 5 % of the setting value is undershot, the dropout process is being finished, i.e. when a new pickup is evoked, the timer starts again at zero.

Dropout for ANSI Curves

100

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.5 Time Overcurrent Protection for Earth Current

The disk emulation offers its advantages when the grading coordination chart of the time overcurrent protection is combined with other devices (on electro-mechanical or induction base) connected to the system. Use Specified Curves The tripping characteristic of the user-configurable characteristic can be defined via several points. Up to 20 pairs of current and time values can be entered. With these values the device approximates a characteristic by linear interpolation. If required, the dropout characteristic can also be defined. For the functional description see Dropout for ANSI Curves. If no user-configurable dropout characteristic is desired and if approx. a 95 % of the pickup value is undershot, dropout is initiated. When a new pickup is evoked, the timer starts again at zero.

2.5.1.3

Manual Close Command When a circuit breaker is closed onto a faulted protected object, a high speed re-trip by the breaker is often desired. The manual closing feature is designed to remove the delay from one of the time overcurrent stages when the breaker is manually closed onto a fault. The time delay is then bypassed via an impulse from the external control switch. This impulse is prolonged by a period of at least 300 ms (Figure 2-54, page 79). Address $ ,( 0$1 &/26( determines for which stages the delay is defeated under manual close condition.

2.5.1.4

Dynamic Cold Load Pickup Dynamic changeover of pickup values is available also for time overcurrent protection for earth current as it is for the time overcurrent protection for phase currents and residual current (Section 2.4). Processing of the dynamic cold load pickup conditions is common for all time overcurrent stages, and is explained in Section 2.6 (page 108). The alternative values themselves are set for each of the stages.

2.5.1.5

Inrush Restraint Earth current time overcurrent protection provides an integrated inrush restraint function which blocks the overcurrent stages IE> and IEp (not IE>>) in case of detection of an inrush on a transformer. If the second harmonic content of the earth current exceeds a selectable threshold, trip is blocked.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

101

2 Functions

The inrush restraint feature has an upper operation limit. Above this (adjustable) current blocking is suppressed since a high-current fault is assumed in this case. The lower limit is the operating limit of the harmonic filter (0.2 IN). Figure 2-64 shows a simplified logic diagram.

!## !C6SH@hu
IE

fN 2fN

&

Rush blk E

E
FNo 07573

DHhDS@

!##!

Meas. release

>BLK E O/C Inr

!#! DSuSr@hu
1

2)) 21

Figure 2-64

Logic diagram of the inrush restraint feature

2.5.2
General

Setting the Function Parameters

When configuring the protection functions (see Subsection 2.1.1, margin heading Special Cases, page 16) the type of characteristic was set (address ). Only settings for the characteristic selected can be performed. Definite time stages IE>> and IE> are always available. In address  ($57+ 2&, time overcurrent protection for earth current can be set to 21 or 2)). Address $ ,( 0$1 &/26( determines which earth current stage is to be activated instantaneously with a detected manual close. Settings ,(!! LQVWDQW and ,(! LQVWDQW can be set independent from the type of characteristic selected. ,(S LQVWDQW is only available if one of the inverse time stages is configured. This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings. If time overcurrent protection is applied on the feeding side of a transformer, select the higher stage IE>> which does not pick up by the inrush current, or select the Manual Close ,QDFWLYH. In address  ,Q5XVK5HVW(DUWK inrush restraint (inrush restraint with 2nd harmonic) is enabled or disabled. Set 21 if the protection is applied at the feeding side of an earthed transformer. Otherwise, use setting 2)).

Definite Time High-Current Stage IE>>

If ,(!!stage (address ) is combined with the IE>stage or the IEpstage, a twostage characteristic will be the result. If this stage is not required, the pickup value shall be set to . Stage ,(!! always operates with a defined delay time.

102

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.5 Time Overcurrent Protection for Earth Current

Current and time setting shall exclude pickup during switching operations. This stage is applied if you want to create a multi-stage characteristic together with stage IE> or IEp (below described). With a certain degree of exactness, current grading can also be achieved, similar to the corresponding stages of the time overcurrent protection for phase and residual currents (Subsection 2.4.2). However, zero sequence system quantities must be taken into consideration. In most cases, this stage operates instantaneously. A time delay, however, can be achieved by setting address  7 ,(!!. The set time is an additional time delay and does not include the operating time (measuring time, dropout time). The delay can be set to infinity . If set to infinity, the pickup of this function will be indicated but the stage will not be able to trip after pickup. If the pickup threshold is set to , neither a pickup annunciation nor a trip is generated. Definite Time Overcurrent Stage IE> Using the time overcurrent stage ,(! (address ) earth faults can also be detected with weak fault currents. Since the starpoint current originates from one single current transformer, it is not affected by summation effects evoked by different current transformer errors like, for example, the zero sequence current derived from phase currents. Therefore, this address can be set to very sensitive. Consider that the inrush restraint function cannot operate below 20 % nominal current (lower limit of harmonic filtering). An adequate time delay could be reasonable for very sensitive setting if inrush restraint is used. Since this stage also picks up with earth faults in the network, the time delay (address  7 ,(!) has to be coordinated with the grading coordination chart of the network for earth faults. Mostly, you may set shorter tripping times than for phase currents since a galvanic separation of the zero sequence systems of the connected power system sections is ensured by a transformer with separate windings. The set time is an additional time delay and does not include the operating time (measuring time, dropout time). The delay can be set to infinity . If set to infinity, the pickup of this function will be indicated but the stage will not trip after pickup. If the pickup threshold is set to , neither a pickup annunciation nor a trip is generated. Inverse Time Overcurrent Stages IEp with IEC curves The inverse time stage, depending on the configuration (Subsection 2.1.1, address ), enables the user to select different characteristics. With the IEC characteristics (address  '07,'07 ( &+5 = 72& ,(&) the following is made available in address  ,(& &859(: 1RUPDO ,QYHUVH (type A according to IEC 602553), 9HU\ ,QYHUVH (type B according to IEC 602553), ([WUHPHO\ ,QY (type C according to IEC 602553), and /RQJ ,QYHUVH (type B according to IEC 602553). The characteristics and equations they are based on are listed in the Technical Data (Section 4.4, Figure 4-7). If the inverse time trip characteristic is selected, it must be noted that a safety factor of about 1.1 has already been included between the pickup value and the setting value. This means that a pickup will only occur if a current of about 1.1 times of the setting value is present. The function will reset as soon as the value undershoots 95 % of the pickup value. Using the time overcurrent stage ,(S (address ) earth faults can also be detected with weak fault currents. Since the starpoint current originates from one single cur-

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

103

2 Functions

rent transformer, it is not affected by summation effects evoked by different current transformer errors like, for example, the zero sequence current derived from phase currents. Therefore, this address can be set to very sensitive. Consider that the inrush restraint function cannot operate below 20 % nominal current (lower limit of harmonic filtering). An adequate time delay could be reasonable for very sensitive setting if inrush restraint is used. Since this stage also picks up with earth faults in the network, the time multiplier (address  7 ,(S) has to be coordinated with the grading coordination chart of the network for earth faults. Mostly, you may set shorter tripping times than for phase currents since a galvanic separation of the zero sequence systems of the connected power system sections is ensured by a transformer with separate windings. The time multiplier can also be set to . If set to infinity, the pickup of this function will be indicated but the stage will not trip after pickup. If the IEpstage is not required, select address  '07,'07 ( &+5 = 'HILQLWH 7LPH when configuring the protection functions (Subsection 2.1.1). Inverse Time Overcurrent Stages Ip with ANSI curves The inverse time stages, depending on the configuration (Subsection 2.1.1, address ), enable the user to select different characteristics. With the ANSI characteristics (address  '07,'07 ( &+5 = 72& $16,) the following is made available in address  $16, &859(: 'HILQLWH ,QY, ([WUHPHO\ ,QY, ,QYHUVH, /RQJ ,QYHUVH, 0RGHUDWHO\ ,QY, 6KRUW ,QYHUVH, and 9HU\ ,QYHUVH. The characteristics and the equations they are based on are listed in the Technical Data (Section 4.4, Figures 4-8 and 4-9). If the inverse time trip characteristic is selected, it must be noted that a safety factor of about 1.1 has already been included between the pickup value and the setting value. This means that a pickup will only occur if a current of about 1.1 times of the setting value is present. Using the time overcurrent stage ,(S (address ) earth faults can also be detected with weak fault currents. Since the starpoint current originates from one single current transformer, it is not affected by summation effects evoked by different current transformer errors like, for example, the zero sequence current derived from phase currents. Therefore, this address can be set to very sensitive. Consider that the inrush restraint function cannot operate below 20 % nominal current (lower limit of harmonic filtering). An adequate time delay could be reasonable for very sensitive setting if inrush restraint is used. Since this stage also picks up with earth faults in the network, the time multiplier (address  ' ,(S) has to be coordinated with the grading coordination chart of the network for earth faults. Mostly, you may set shorter tripping times than for phase currents since a galvanic separation of the zero sequence systems of the connected power system sections is ensured by a transformer with separate windings. The time multiplier can also be set to . If set to infinity, the pickup of this function will be indicated but the stage will not trip after pickup. If the IEpstage is not required, se-

104

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.5 Time Overcurrent Protection for Earth Current

lect address  '07,'07 ( &+5 = 'HILQLWH 7LPH when configuring the protection functions (Subsection 2.1.1). If 'LVN (PXODWLRQ is set in address  72& '523287, dropout is being produced according to the dropout characteristic. For more information see Subsection 2.5.1.2, margin heading Dropout for ANSI Curves (page 100). Dynamic Cold Load Pickup An alternative set of pickup values can be set for each stage. It is selected automatically-dynamically during operation. For more information on this function see Section 2.6 (page 108). For the stages the following alternative values are set: for definite time overcurrent protection: address  pickup value ,(!!, address  delay time 7 ,(!!, address  pickup value ,(!, address  delay time 7 ,(!; for inverse time overcurrent protection acc. IEC curves: address  pickup value ,(S, address  time multiplier 7 ,(S; for inverse time overcurrent protection acc. ANSI curves: address  pickup value ,(S, address  time dial ' ,(S. User Specified Curves For inverse time overcurrent protection the user may define his own tripping and dropout characteristic. For configuration in DIGSI 4 a dialog box is to appear. Enter up to 20 pairs of current and tripping time values (Figure 2-58, page 86). The procedure is the same as for phase current stages. See Subsection 2.4.2.1, margin heading User Specified Curves, page 86. To create a user-defined tripping characteristic for earth current, the following has to be set for configuration of the functional scope: address  (Subsection 2.1.1) '07 ,'07 ( &+5, option 8VHU 'HILQHG 38. If you also want to specify the dropout characteristic, set option 8VHU GHI 5HVHW. Inrush Restraint In address  ,Q5XVK5HVW(DUWK of the general settings (page 102, margin heading General) the inrush restraint can be enabled (21) or disabled (2))). This inrush restraint only makes sense for transformers and if overcurrent time protection is activated on the earthed feeding side. Function parameters of the inrush restraint are set in Inrush. It is based on an evaluation of the 2nd harmonic present in the inrush current. The ratio of 2nd harmonics to the fundamental +$50 (DUWK (address ) is set to I2fN/ IfN =  % as default setting. It can be used without being changed. To provide more restraint in exceptional cases, where energizing conditions are particularly unfavourable, a smaller value can be set in the address before-mentioned. If the current exceeds the value indicated in address  , 0D[ ,Q5U (, no restraint will be provoked by the 2nd harmonic.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

105

2 Functions

2.5.3

Setting Overview
The following list indicates the setting ranges and the default settings of a rated secondary current IN = 1 A. For a rated secondary current of IN = 5 A these values have to be multiplied by 5. For settings in primary values, a conversion rate of the current transformers has to be considered additionally.

Note: Addresses which have an A attached to their end can only be changed in DIGSI 4, Section Additional Settings.
Addr. 2401 2402 2408A Setting Title EARTH O/C InRushRestEarth IE MAN. CLOSE Setting Options ON OFF ON OFF IE>> instantaneously IE> instantaneously IEp instantaneously Inactive 0.05..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.05..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.05..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.05..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.05..4.00 A 0.05..3.20 sec; 0.50..15.00; Instantaneous Disk Emulation Normal Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inverse Long Inverse Very Inverse Inverse Short Inverse Long Inverse Moderately Inverse Extremely Inverse Definite Inverse 0.05..4.00 A 0.05..3.20 sec; Default Setting OFF OFF IE>> instantaneously Comments Earth Time Overcurrent InRush Restrained O/C Earth O/C IE Manual Close Mode

2411 2412 2413 2414 2511 2512 2513 2514 2421 2422 2423 2424 2425

IE>> T IE>> IE> T IE> IE>> T IE>> IE> T IE> IEp T IEp D IEp TOC DROP-OUT IEC CURVE

0.50 A 0.10 sec 0.20 A 0.50 sec 7.00 A 0.00 sec 1.50 A 0.30 sec 0.20 A 0.20 sec 5.00 Disk Emulation Normal Inverse

IE>> Pickup T IE>> Time Delay IE> Pickup T IE> Time Delay IE>> Pickup T IE>> Time Delay IE> Pickup T IE> Time Delay IEp Pickup T IEp Time Dial D IEp Time Dial TOC Drop-out Characteristic IEC Curve

2426

ANSI CURVE

Very Inverse

ANSI Curve

2521 2522

IEp T IEp

1.00 A 0.50 sec

IEp Pickup T IEp Time Dial

106

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.5 Time Overcurrent Protection for Earth Current

Addr. 2523 2431 2432 2441 2442

Setting Title D IEp I/IEp PU T/TEp MofPU Res T/TEp 2.HARM. Earth I Max InRr. E

Setting Options 0.50..15.00; 1.00..20.00 I / Ip; 0.01..999.00 Time Dial 0.05..0.95 I / Ip; 0.01..999.00 Time Dial 10..45 % 0.30..25.00 A

Default Setting 5.00

Comments D IEp Time Dial Pickup Curve IE/IEp - TIE/TIEp Multiple of Pickup <-> TI/TIEp

15 % 7.50 A

2nd harmonic O/C E in % of fundamental Maximum Current for Inr. Rest. O/C Earth

2.5.4

Information Overview

F.No. 01714 >BLK Earth O/C 07573 >BLK E O/C Inr 01756 O/C Earth OFF 01757 O/C Earth BLK 01758 O/C Earth ACT 01765 O/C Earth PU

Alarm

Comments >BLOCK Earth time overcurrent >BLOCK time overcurrent Earth InRush Time Overcurrent Earth is OFF Time Overcurrent Earth is BLOCKED Time Overcurrent Earth is ACTIVE Time Overcurrent Earth picked up Earth InRush picked up >BLOCK IE>> IE>> BLOCKED IE>> picked up IE>> Time Out IE>> TRIP >BLOCK IE> IE> BLOCKED IE> picked up IE> InRush picked up IE> Time Out IE> TRIP >BLOCK IEp IEp BLOCKED IEp picked up IEp InRush picked up IEp Time Out IEp TRIP

07564 Earth InRush PU 01724 >BLOCK IE>> 01854 IE>> BLOCKED 01831 IE>> picked up 01832 IE>> Time Out 01833 IE>> TRIP 01725 >BLOCK IE> 01853 IE> BLOCKED 01834 IE> picked up 07552 IE> InRush PU 01835 IE> Time Out 01836 IE> TRIP 01726 >BLOCK IEp 01856 IEp BLOCKED 01837 IEp picked up 07554 IEp InRush PU 01838 IEp TimeOut 01839 IEp TRIP

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

107

2 Functions

2.6

Dynamic Cold Load Pickup for Time Overcurrent Protection

With the dynamic cold load pickup feature, it is possible to dynamically increase the pickup values of the time overcurrent protection stages when dynamic cold load overcurrent conditions are anticipated, i.e. when consumers have increased power consumption after a longer period of dead condition, e.g. in air conditioning systems, heating systems, motors, etc. By allowing pickup values and the associated time delays to increase dynamically, it is not necessary to incorporate cold load capability in the normal settings.

Note:
Dynamic cold load pickup is in addition to the four setting groups (A to D) which are configured separately. The dynamic cold load pickup feature operates with the time overcurrent protection functions described in the sections 2.4 and 2.5. A set of alternative values can be set for each stage.

2.6.1

Function Description
There are two primary methods used by the device to determine if the protected equipment is de-energized: Via a binary input, an auxiliary contact in the circuit breaker can be used to determine if the circuit breaker is open or closed. The current flow monitoring threshold may be used to determine if the equipment is de-energized. You may select one of these criteria for the time overcurrent protection for phase currents (Section 2.4) and for that for residual current (Section 2.4). The device assigns automatically the correct side for current detection or the breaker auxiliary contact. The time overcurrent protection for earth current (Section 2.5) allows the breaker criterion only if it is assigned to a certain side of the protected object (address , see also Section 2.1.1 under margin header Special Cases, page 16); otherwise exclusively the current criterion can be used. If the device recognizes the protected equipment be de-energized via one of the criteria above, then the alternative pickup values will become effective for the overcurrent stages once a specified time delay has elapsed. Figure 2-66 shows the logic diagram for dynamic cold load pickup function. The time &% 2SHQ 7LPH controls how long the equipment can be de-energized before the dynamic cold load pickup function is activated. When the protected equipment is re-energized (i.e. the device receives input via a binary input that the assigned circuit breaker is closed or the assigned current flowing through the breaker increases above the current flow monitoring threshold), the active time $FWLYH 7LPH is initiated. Once the active time has elapsed, the pickup values of the overcurrent stages return to their normal settings. The active time controls how long dynamic cold load pickup settings remain in place once the protect-

108

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.6 Dynamic Cold Load Pickup for Time Overcurrent Protection

ed object is re-energized. Upon re-energizing of the equipment, if the measured current values are below the normal pickup settings, an alternative time delay referred to as the 6WRS 7LPH is also initiated. As in the case with the active time, once this time has elapsed, the pickup values of overcurrent stages change from the dynamic cold load pickup values to their normal settings. The 6WRS 7LPH controls how long dynamic cold load pickup settings remain in place given that measured currents are below the normal pickup settings. To defeat this time from switching the overcurrent stages pickup settings back to normal, it may be set to or blocked via the binary input !%/. &/3 VWS7LP.

Circuit breaker
closed open

&% 2SHQ 7LPH address 

CB open time CB open time

$FWLYH 7LPH address 

Active time

Operating state
DCP settings active normal settings active

Possible shorter CLP due to Stop Time

6WRS 7LPH address 

Stop time

Normal pickup levels

Pickup Dropout
Increased power consumption after long outage Trip, if increased power demand is present after active time

Figure 2-65

Cold load pickup timing sequence

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

109

2 Functions

If an overcurrent stage picks up while the dynamic settings are enabled, elapse of the active time $FWLYH 7LPH will not restore the normal pickup settings until drop out of the overcurrent stage occurs based on the dynamic settings. If the dynamic cold load pickup function is blocked via the binary input !%/2&. &/3, all triggered timers will be immediately reset and all normal settings will be restored. If blocking occurs during an on-going fault with dynamic cold load pickup functions enabled, the timers of all overcurrent stages will be stopped, and then restarted based on their normal duration. During power up of the protective relay with an open circuit breaker, the time delay &% 2SHQ 7LPH is started, and is processed using the normal settings. Therefore, when the circuit breaker is closed, the normal settings are effective. Figure 2-65 shows a timing diagram, Figure 2-66 describes the logic for cold load pickup function.

FNo 1730 >BLOCK CLP

FNo 1995 CLP BLOCKED FNo 1996 CLP running FNo 1994 CLP OFF

& 8PG9GP69QD8FVQ PI PAA

>CB1 configured.NO >CB1 configured NC

&
Meas. release

FNo 410 >CB1 3p Closed FNo 411 >CB1 3p Open

&

87PrUvr
0 FNo 1998

& 1

Circuit breaker open

I Dyn.set. ACT
FNo 1999

&! Th8GQQuhr
1

7rhxr8hp I8r

3I0 Dyn.set.ACT
FNo 2000

SQ & & R

IE Dyn.set. ACT
Processing of the cold load pickup values in the overcurrent stages

283

7rhxrT D3

Max. of IL1, IL2, IL3

dynamic pickup

<
& ! 6pvrUvr
T 0

Exceeding one of the the dynamic cold load pick-up thresholds of the overcurrent stages

Exceeding one of the normal pick-up thresholds of the overcurrent stages

& " TUvr

normal pickup FNo 1731 >BLK CLP stpTim

&

Figure 2-66

Logic diagram for dynamic cold load pickup feature illustrated for phase overcurrent protection stage on side 1

110

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.6 Dynamic Cold Load Pickup for Time Overcurrent Protection

2.6.2
General

Setting the Function Parameters

Dynamic cold load pickup can only be enabled if address  &ROGORDG 3LFNXS was set to (QDEOHG. If this feature is not required, address  is set to 'LVDEOHG. Under address  &2/'/2$' 3,&.83 the function can be switched 21 or 2)). You can determine the criteria for dynamic switchover to the cold load pickup values for all protective functions which allow this switchover. Select the current criterion 1R &XUUHQW or the breaker position criterion %UHDNHU &RQWDFW: address  6WDUW &/3 3KDVH address  6WDUW &/3 , for the phase current stages, for the residual current stages.

Cold Load Criteria

The current criterion takes the currents of that side where the corresponding protective function is assigned to. When using the breaker position criterion, the auxiliary contact of the assigned side must inform the device via a binary input about the breaker position. The time overcurrent protection for earth current allows only the current criterion because it cannot assigned to any circuit breaker. (address  6WDUW &/3 (DUWK is always 1R &XUUHQW). Timers There are no specific procedures on how to set the time delays at addresses  &% 2SHQ 7LPH,  $FWLYH 7LPH and  6WRS 7LPH. These time delays must be based on the specific loading characteristics of the equipment being protected, and should be selected to allow the brief overloads associated with dynamic cold load conditions. The dynamic pickup values and time delays associated with the time overcurrent stages are set in the related addresses of these stages themselves.

Cold Load Pickup Values

2.6.3

Setting Overview

Addr. 1701 1702 1703 1704 1711 1712

Setting Title COLDLOAD PICKUP Start CLP Phase Start CLP 3I0 Start CLP Earth CB Open Time Active Time OFF ON

Setting Options

Default Setting OFF No Current No Current No Current 3600 sec 3600 sec

Comments Cold-Load-Pickup Function Start Condition CLP for O/C Phase Start Condition CLP for O/C 3I0 Start Condition CLP for O/C Earth Circuit Breaker OPEN Time Active Time

No Current Breaker Contact No Current Breaker Contact No Current Breaker Contact 0..21600 sec 1..21600 sec

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

111

2 Functions

Addr. 1713

Setting Title Stop Time

Setting Options 1..600 sec;

Default Setting 600 sec Stop Time

Comments

2.6.4

Information Overview

F.No. 01730 >BLOCK CLP

Alarm >BLOCK Cold-Load-Pickup

Comments

01731 >BLK CLP stpTim 01994 CLP OFF 01995 CLP BLOCKED 01996 CLP running 01998 I Dyn.set. ACT 01999 3I0 Dyn.set.ACT 02000 IE Dyn.set. ACT

>BLOCK Cold-Load-Pickup stop timer Cold-Load-Pickup switched OFF Cold-Load-Pickup is BLOCKED Cold-Load-Pickup is RUNNING Dynamic settings O/C Phase are ACTIVE Dynamic settings O/C 3I0 are ACTIVE Dynamic settings O/C Earth are ACTIVE

112

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.7 Single-Phase Time Overcurrent Protection

2.7

Single-Phase Time Overcurrent Protection

The single-phase time overcurrent protection can be assigned either to the measured current input I7 or I8. It can be used for any desired single-phase application. If assigned to I8 a very sensitive pickup threshold is possible (smallest setting 3 mA at the current input). Examples for application are high-impedance unit protection or highly sensitive tank leakage protection. These applications are covered in the following subsections: Subsection 2.7.2 for high-impedance protection, and Subsection 2.7.3 for high-sensitivity tank leakage protection. The single-phase time overcurrent protection comprises two definite time delayed stages which can be combined as desired. If you need only one stage, the other can be set to infinity.

2.7.1

Function Description
The measured current is filtered by numerical algorithms. Because of the high sensitivity a particular narrow band filter is used. For the single-phase I>> stage, the current measured at the configured current input (I7 or I8) is compared with the setting value 3KDVH ,!!. Current above the pickup value is detected and annunciated. When the delay time 7 3KDVH ,!! has expired, tripping command is issued. The reset value is approximately 5 % below the pickup value for currents > 0.3 IN. For the single-phase I> stage, the current measured at the configured current input is compared with the setting value 3KDVH ,!. Current above the pickup value is detected and annunciated. When the delay time 7 3KDVH ,! has expired, tripping command is issued. The reset value is approximately 5 % below the pickup value for currents > 0.3 IN. Both stages form a two-stage definite time overcurrent protection whose tripping characteristic is illustrated in Figure 2-67. When high fault current occurs, the current filter can be bypassed in order to achieve a very short tripping time. This is automatically done when the instantaneous value of the current exceeds the set value I>> by the factor 22. The logic diagram of the single-phase time overcurrent protection is shown in Figure 2-68.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

113

2 Functions

Tripping 7 ,!

7 ,!! ,! Figure 2-67 ,!! I Two-stage tripping characteristic of the single-phase time overcurrent protection

9HU QC6T@ !& 9vhiyrq r8U& r8U'

!&"

QuhrD33

I7 I8

I>>

1
!&# U QuhrD33

FNo 5977

O/C 1Ph I>> PU

T 0 FNo 5979

22I>>

&

O/C1Ph I>> TRIP

FNo 5971

Meas. release

O/C 1Ph PU
FNo 5967

FNo 5953

>BLK 1Ph. I>>

FNo 5951

O/C 1Ph I>> BLK

FNo 5962

>BLK 1Ph. O/C

O/C 1Ph. BLK

FNo 5963

!&
1

QuhrP8 2)) 21

O/C 1Ph. ACT

FNo 5961

O/C 1Ph. OFF

Meas. release FNo 5972

!&%

QuhrD3

O/C 1Ph TRIP

FNo 5974

I>

O/C 1Ph I> PU

!&& U QuhrD3

&

FNo 5975

O/C 1Ph I> TRIP

FNo 5952

FNo 5966

>BLK 1Ph. I>

O/C 1Ph I> BLK

Figure 2-68

Logic diagram of the single-phase time overcurrent protection example for detection of the current at input I8

114

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.7 Single-Phase Time Overcurrent Protection

2.7.2

High-Impedance Differential Protection

With the high-impedance scheme all current transformers at the limits of the protection zone operate parallel to a common relatively high-ohmic resistance R whose voltage is measured. With 7UT612 the voltage is registered by measuring the current through the external resistor R at the sensitive current measuring input I8. The current transformers have to be of equal design and provide at least a separate core for high-impedance protection. They also must have the same transformation ratio and approximately the same knee-point voltage. With 7UT612 the high-impedance principle is very suited for detection of earth faults in transformers, generators, motors and shunt reactors in earthed systems. High-impedance protection can be used instead of or in addition to the restricted earth fault protection (see Section 2.3). Of course, the sensitive current measuring input I8 can only be used for high-impedance protection or tank leakage protection (Subsection 2.7.3). Figure 2-69 (left side) illustrates an application example for an earthed transformer winding or an earthed motor/generator. The example on the right side shows a nonearthed transformer winding or an non-earthed motor/generator where the earthing of the system is assumed somewhere else.

Application Example

IL1 IL2 IL3 ISP R

L1 L2 L3

IL1 IL2 IL3

L1 L2 L3

R
Figure 2-69 Earth fault protection according to the high-impedance scheme

High-Impedance Principle

The high-impedance principle is explained on the basis of an earthed transformer winding (Figure 2-70). No zero sequence current will flow during normal operation, i.e. the starpoint current is ISP = 0 and the line currents are 3I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3 = 0. With an external earth fault (Figure 2-70, left side), whose fault current is supplied via the earthed starpoint, the same current flows through the transformer starpoint and the phases. The corresponding secondary currents (all current transformers having the same transformation ratio) compensate each other, they are connected in series. Across resistance R only a small voltage is generated. It originates from the inner resistance of the transformers and the connecting cables of the transformers. Even if any current transformer experiences a partial saturation, it will become low-ohmic for the period of saturation and creates a low-ohmic shunt to the high-ohmic resistor R.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

115

2 Functions

Thus, the high resistance of the resistor also has an stabilizing effect (the so-called resistance stabilization).

IL1 IL2 IL3

L1 L2 L3

IL1 IL2 IL3

L1 L2 L3

ISP

ISP

Figure 2-70

Earth fault protection using the high-impedance principle

In case there is an earth fault in the protection zone (Figure 2-70, right side), a starpoint current ISP will be present for sure. The earthing conditions in the rest of the network determine how strong a zero sequence current from the system is. A secondary current which is equal to the total fault current tries to pass through the resistor R. Since the latter is high-ohmic, a high voltage emerges immediately. Therefore, the current transformers get saturated. The RMS voltage across the resistor approximately corresponds to the knee-point voltage of the current transformers. Resistance R is dimensioned such that, even with the very lowest earth fault current to be detected, it generates a secondary voltage which is equal to the half knee-point voltage of current transformers (see also notes on dimensioning in Subsection 2.7.4). High-Impedance Protection with 7UT612 With 7UT612 the sensitive measuring input I8 is used for high-impedance protection. As this is a current input, the protection detects current through the resistor instead of the voltage across the resistor R. Figure 2-71 shows the connection example. The 7UT612 is connected in series to resistor R and measures its current. Varistor V limits the voltage when inner faults occur. High voltage peaks emerging with transformer saturation are cut by the varistor. At the same time, voltage is smoothed without reduction of the mean value. For protection against overvoltages it is also important that the device is directly connected to the earthed side of the current transformers so that the high voltage at the resistor can be kept away from the device. For generators, motors and shunt reactors high-impedance protection can be used analogously. All current transformers at the overvoltage side, the undervoltage side and the current transformer at the starpoint have to be connected in parallel when using auto-transformers. In principle, this scheme can be applied to every protected object. When applied as busbar protection, for example, the device is connected to the parallel connection of all feeder current transformers via the resistor.

116

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.7 Single-Phase Time Overcurrent Protection

IL1 IL2 IL3 ISP V

L1 L2 L3

7UT612

Figure 2-71

Connection scheme for earth fault protection according to the high-impedance principle

2.7.3

Tank Leakage Protection

The tank leakage protection has the task to detect earth leakage even high-ohmic between a phase and the frame of a power transformer. The tank must be isolated from earth (refer to Figure 2-72). A conductor links the tank to earth, and the current through this conductor is fed to a current input of the relay. When a tank leakage occurs, a fault current (tank leakage current) will flow through the earthing conductor to earth. This tank leakage current is detected by the single-phase overcurrent protection as an overcurrent; an instantaneous or delayed trip command is issued in order to disconnect all sides of the transformer. The high-sensitivity current input I8 is used for tank leakage protection. Of course, this current input can only be used once: either for tank leakage protection or for high-impedance differential protection according to Subsection 2.7.2.

Application Example

I8

7UT612

isolated

Figure 2-72

Principle of tank leakage protection

I8

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

117

2 Functions

2.7.4
General

Setting the Function Parameters

In address  3KDVH 2&, the single-phase time overcurrent protection can switched 21 or 2)). The settings depend on the application. The setting ranges depend on whether the current at input I7 or at I8 is used. This was determined during configuration of the protective functions (Subsection 2.1.1 under Special Cases, page 16) in address : '07 3+$6( = XQVHQV &7 In this case you set the pickup value 3KDVH ,!! in address , the pickup value 3KDVH ,! in address . If you need only one stage, set the other to . '07 3+$6( = VHQV &7 In this case you set the pickup value 3KDVH ,!! in address , the pickup value 3KDVH ,! in address . If you need only one stage, set the other to . If you need a trip time delay, set it in address  7 3KDVH ,!! for the I>> stage, and/or in address  7 3KDVH ,! for the I> stage. With setting  s no delay takes place. The set times are pure delay times which do not include the inherent operating times of the protection stages. If you set a time to the associated stage does not trip but pickup annunciation will occur. Special notes are given in the following for the use as high-impedance unit protection and tank leakage protection.

Use as HighImpedance Protection

When used as high-impedance protection, only the pickup value of the single-phase overcurrent protection is set on the 7UT612 to detect overcurrent at the current input I8. Consequently, during configuration of the protective functions (Subsection 2.1.1 under Special Cases, page 16), address  is set '07 3+$6( = VHQV &7. But, the entire function of the high-impedance unit protection is dependent on the coordination of the current transformer characteristics, the external resistor R and the voltage across R. The following three header margins give information about these considerations.

Current Transformer Data for High-Impedance Protection

All current transformers must have identical transformation ratio and nearly equal knee-point voltage. This is usually the case if they are of equal design and identical rated data. If the knee-point voltage is not stated, it can be approximately calculated from the rated data of a CT as follows: PN U KPV = R i + ------- ALF I N 2 IN where UKPV Ri PN IN ALF = = = = = knee-point voltage of the CT Internal burden of the CT rated power of the CT rated secondary current of the CT rated accuracy limit factor of the CT

The rated current, rated power and accuracy limit factor are normally stated on the rating plate of the current transformer, e.g.

118

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.7 Single-Phase Time Overcurrent Protection

Current transformer 800/5; 5P10; 30 VA That means IN = 5 A (from 800/5) ALF = 10 (from 5P10) PN = 30 VA The internal burden is often stated in the test report of the current transformer. If not it can be derived from a DC measurement on the secondary winding. Calculation example: Current transformer 800/5; 5P10; 30 VA with Ri = 0.3 PN 30 VA U KPV = R i + ------- ALF I N = 0.3 + --------------- 10 5 A = 75 V 2 2 IN (5 A) or Current transformer 800/1; 5P10; 30 VA with Ri = 5 PN 30 VA U KPV = R i + ------- ALF I N = 5 + --------------- 10 1 A = 350 V 2 2 IN (1 A) Besides the CT data, the resistance of the longest connection lead between the CTs and the 7UT612 device must be known. Stability with HighImpedance Protection The stability condition is based on the following simplified assumption: If there is an external fault, one of the current transformers gets totally saturated. The other ones will continue transmitting their (partial) currents. In theory, this is the most unfavourable case. Since, in practice, it is also the saturated transformer which supplies current, an automatic safety margin is guaranteed. Figure 2-73 shows a simplified equivalent circuit. CT1 and CT2 are assumed as ideal transformers with their inner resistances Ri1 and Ri2. Ra are the resistances of the connecting cables between current transformers and resistor R. They are multiplied by 2 as they have a go- and a return line. R a2 is the resistance of the longest connecting cable. CT1 transmits current I1. CT2 shall be saturated. Because of saturation the transformer represents a low-resistance shunt which is illustrated by a dashed short-circuit line. R >> (2Ra2 + Ri2) is a further prerequisite.

Ri1

2Ra1

2Ra2

Ri2

CT1

I1

CT2

Figure 2-73

Simplified equivalent circuit of a circulating current system for high-impedance differential protection

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

119

2 Functions

The voltage across R is then UR I1 (2Ra2 + Ri2 ) It is assumed that the pickup value of the 7UT612 corresponds to half the knee-point voltage of the current transformers. In the balanced case results UR = UKPV/2 This results in a stability limit ISL, i.e. the maximum through-fault current below which the scheme remains stable: U KPV 2 ISL = ------------------------------2 R a2 + R i2 Calculation example: For the 5 A CT like above with UKPV = 75 V and Ri = 0.3 longest CT connection lead 22 m with 4 mm2 cross-section, results in Ra 0,1 U KPV 2 37.5 V I SL = ------------------------------- = ------------------------------------------- = 75 A 2 R a2 + R i2 2 0.1 + 0.3 that is 15 rated current or 12 kA primary. For the 1 A CT like above with UKPV = 350 V and Ri = 5 longest CT connection lead 107 m with 2.5 mm2 cross-section, results in Ra 0.75 U KPV 2 175 V I SL = ------------------------------- = ----------------------------------------- = 27 A 2 R a2 + R i2 2 0.75 + 5 that is 27 rated current or 21,6 kA primary. Sensitivity with High Impedance Protection As before mentioned, high-impedance protection is to pick up with approximately half the knee-point voltage of the current transformers. Resistance R can be calculated from it. Since the device measures the current flowing through the resistor, resistor and measuring input of the device are to be connected in series (see also Figure 2-71). Since, furthermore, the resistance shall be high-ohmic (condition: R >> 2Ra2 + Ri2, as above mentioned), the inherent resistance of the measuring input can be neglected. The resistance is then calculated from the pickup current Ipu and the half knee-point voltage: U KPV 2 R = -------------------I pu

Calculation example: For the 5 A CT like above with required pickup value Ipu = 0.1 A (corresponding to 16 A primary) U KPV 2 75 V 2 R = -------------------- = ------------------ = 375 I pu 0.1 A For the 1 A CT like above required pickup value Ipu = 0.05 A (corresponding to 40 A primary) U KPV 2 350 V 2 R = -------------------- = ---------------------- = 3500 I pu 0.05 A

120

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.7 Single-Phase Time Overcurrent Protection

The required short-term power of the resistor is derived from the knee-point voltage and the resistance: PR
2 U KPV ( 75 V ) = ---------------- = ------------------- = 15 W R 375 2 2

for the 5 A CT example for the 1 A CT example

2 U KPV ( 350 V ) P R = ---------------- = ---------------------- = 35 W R 3500

As this power only appears during earth faults for a short period of time, the rated power can be smaller by approx. factor 5. The varistor (see also Figure 2-71) must be dimensioned such that it remains highohmic up to the knee-point voltage, e.g. approx. 100 V for the 5 A CT example, approx. 500 V for the 1 A CT example. For 7UT612, the pickup value (0.1 A or 0.05 A in the example) is set in address  3KDVH ,!. Stage I>> is not required (Address  3KDVH ,!! = ). The trip command of the protection can be delayed in address  7 3KDVH ,!. This time delay is usually set to 0. If a higher number of current transformers is connected in parallel, e.g. when using as busbar protection with several feeders, the magnetizing currents of the transformers connected in parallel cannot be neglected anymore. In this case, the magnetizing currents at the half knee-point voltage (corresponds to the setting value) have to be summed. These magnetizing currents reduce the current through the resistor R. Therefore the actual pickup value will be correspondingly higher. Use as Tank Leakage Protection If the single-phase time overcurrent protection is used as tank leakage protection, merely the pickup value for the current at the input I8 is set on 7UT612. Consequently, during configuration of the protective functions (Subsection 2.1.1 under Special Cases, page 16) had been set under address : '07 3+$6( = VHQV &7. The tank leakage protection is a highly sensitive overcurrent protection which detects the leakage current between the isolated transformer tank and earth. Its sensitivity is set in address  3KDVH ,!. The I>> stage is not used (address  3KDVH ,!! = ). The trip command can be delayed under address  7 3KDVH ,!. Normally, this delay time is set to .

2.7.5

Setting Overview
The following list indicates the setting ranges and the default settings of a rated secondary current IN = 1 A. For a rated secondary current of IN = 5 A these values have to be multiplied by 5. For settings in primary values, a conversion rate of the current transformers has to be considered additionally.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

121

2 Functions

Addr. 2701 2702 2703 2704 2705 2706 2707

Setting Title 1Phase O/C 1Phase I>> 1Phase I>> T 1Phase I>> 1Phase I> 1Phase I> T 1Phase I> OFF ON

Setting Options

Default Setting OFF 0.50 A 0.300 A 0.10 sec 0.20 A 0.100 A 0.50 sec

Comments 1Phase Time Overcurrent 1Phase O/C I>> Pickup 1Phase O/C I>> Pickup T 1Phase O/C I>> Time Delay 1Phase O/C I> Pickup 1Phase O/C I> Pickup T 1Phase O/C I> Time Delay

0.05..35.00 A; 0.003..1.500 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.05..35.00 A; 0.003..1.500 A; 0.00..60.00 sec;

2.7.6

Information Overview

F.No. 05951 >BLK 1Ph. O/C 05952 >BLK 1Ph. I> 05953 >BLK 1Ph. I>> 05961 O/C 1Ph. OFF 05962 O/C 1Ph. BLK 05963 O/C 1Ph. ACT 05966 O/C 1Ph I> BLK

Alarm

Comments >BLOCK Time Overcurrent 1Phase >BLOCK Time Overcurrent 1Ph. I> >BLOCK Time Overcurrent 1Ph. I>> Time Overcurrent 1Phase is OFF Time Overcurrent 1Phase is BLOCKED Time Overcurrent 1Phase is ACTIVE Time Overcurrent 1Phase I> BLOCKED Time Overcurrent 1Phase I>> BLOCKED Time Overcurrent 1Phase picked up Time Overcurrent 1Phase TRIP Time Overcurrent 1Phase I> picked up Time Overcurrent 1Phase I> TRIP Time Overcurrent 1Phase I>> picked up Time Overcurrent 1Phase I>> TRIP Time Overcurrent 1Phase: I at pick up

05967 O/C 1Ph I>> BLK 05971 O/C 1Ph PU 05972 O/C 1Ph TRIP 05974 O/C 1Ph I> PU 05975 O/C 1Ph I> TRIP 05977 O/C 1Ph I>> PU 05979 O/C1Ph I>> TRIP 05980 O/C 1Ph I:

122

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.8 Unbalanced Load Protection

2.8
General

Unbalanced Load Protection

Negative sequence protection detects unbalanced loads on the system. In addition, it may be used to detect interruptions, faults, and polarity problems with current transformers. Furthermore, it is useful in detecting phase-to-ground, phase-to-phase, and double phase-to-ground faults with magnitudes lower than the maximum load current. Negative sequence protection is reasonable only for three-phase equipment. It is, therefore, not available in case of 3527 2%-(&7 = SK %XVEDU or  SKDVH WUDQVI (address , see Subsection 2.1.1). The application of unbalanced load protection to generators and motors has a special significance. The negative sequence currents associated with unbalanced loads create counter-rotating fields in three-phase induction machines, which act on the rotor at double frequency. Eddy currents are induced at the rotor surface, and local overheating at the transition between the slot wedges and the winding bundles takes place. In addition, the threat of thermal overload exists when motors are supplied by unbalanced system voltages. Because the motor represents a small impedance to negative sequence voltages, small voltage imbalances can lead to large negative sequence currents. The unbalanced load protection operates always on the side of the protected object to which it is assigned during configuration of the protective functions. (see Subsection 2.1.1 under Special Cases, page 17, address ). The unbalanced load protection consists of two definite time stages and one inverse time stage which latter may operate according to an IEC or ANSI characteristic.

2.8.1

Function Description
The unbalanced load protection of 7UT612 uses numerical filters to dissect the phase currents into their symmetrical components. If the negative sequence component of the phase currents is at least 10 % of the nominal device current, and all phase currents are less than four times the nominal device current, then the negative sequence current is fed into the current detector elements.

Determination of Unbalanced Load

2.8.1.1

Definite Time Stages The definite time characteristic is of two-stage design. When the negative sequence current exceeds the set threshold ,! the timer 7 ,! is started and a corresponding pickup message is output. When the negative sequence current exceeds the set threshold ,!! of the high-set stage the timer 7 ,!! is started and a corresponding pickup message is output. When a delay time is expired trip command is issued (see Figure 2-74).

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

123

2 Functions

Tripping

T I2>

T I2>>

I2> Figure 2-74

I2>>

I2/IN

Trip characteristic of the definite time unbalanced load protection

2.8.1.2

Inverse Time Stage The inverse time overcurrent stage operates with a tripping characteristic either according to the IEC- or the ANSI-standard. The characteristic curves and the corresponding equations are represented in the Technical Data (Figures 4-7 and 4-8 in Section 4.4). The inverse time characteristic superposes the definite time stages I2>> and I2> (see Subsection 2.8.1.1).

Pickup, Trip

The negative sequence current I2 is compared with setting value ,S. When negative sequence current exceeds 1.1 times the setting value, a pickup annunciation is generated. The tripping time is calculated from the negative sequence current according to the characteristic selected. After expiration of the time period a tripping command is output. Figure 2-75 shows the qualitative course of the characteristic. In this figure the overlapping stage I2>> is represented as a dashed line. Dropout of the stage using an IEC curves occurs when the current decreases below about 95 % of the pickup value. A renewed pickup will cause a renewed start of the delay timers. Using the ANSI-characteristics you can determine whether the dropout of the stage is to follow right after the threshold undershot or whether it is evoked by disk emulation. Right after means that the pickup drops out when the pickup value of approx. 95 % is undershot. For a new pickup the time counter starts at zero. The disk emulation evokes a dropout process (time counter is decrementing) which begins after de-energization. This process corresponds to the back turn of a Ferrarisdisk (explaining its denomination disk emulation). In case several faults occur successively, it is ensured that due to the inertia of the Ferraris-disk the History is taken into consideration and the time behaviour is adapted. This ensures a proper simulation

Dropout for IEC Curves

Dropout for ANSI Curves

124

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.8 Unbalanced Load Protection

of the temperature rise of the protected object even for extremely fluctuating unbalanced load values. The reset begins as soon as 90 % of the setting value is undershot, in correspondence to the dropout curve of the selected characteristic. Within the range of the dropout value (95 % of the pickup value) and 90 % of the setting value, the incrementing and the decrementing processes are in idle state. If 5 % of the setting value is undershot, the dropout process is finished, i.e. when a new pickup is evoked, the timer starts again at zero.

Tripping

superimposed I2>> stage

T I2>>

I2p Figure 2-75

I2>>

I2/IN

Trip characteristic of the inverse time unbalanced load protection (with superimposed definite time stage)

Logic

Figure 2-76 shows the logic diagram of the unbalanced load protection. The protection may be blocked via a binary input. That way, pickups and time stages are reset. When the tripping criterion leaves the operating range of the overload protection (all phase currents below 0.1 IN or at least one phase current is greater than 4 IN), the pickups of all unbalanced load stages drop off.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

125

2 Functions

FNo 5166

I2p picked up

VI76GGP698CS 9rsvvrUvr UP8D@8 UP86ITD #' D!

1.1 I2p

#% D@88VSW@ #  UD!

t

I2

I2

FNo 5165

I2> picked up

#! D!3
I2>

#" UD!3
T 0 FNo 5170

I2 TRIP

## D!33

#$ UD!33
T 0 FNo 5159

I2>>

I2>> picked up

D@88VSW@
FNo 5143 Meas. release FNo 5152

>BLOCK I2

I2 BLOCKED

#
1

VI76G6I8@GP69 PI PAA

FNo 5153

I2 ACTIVE
FNo 5151

I2 OFF

Figure 2-76

Logic diagram of the unbalanced load protection illustrated for IEC characteristic

2.8.2
General

Setting the Function Parameters

During configuration of the functional scope (Subsection 2.1.1, margin heading Special Cases, page 17) the sides of the protected object were determined in address . The corresponding characteristic type was selected in address . In the following only settings for the characteristic selected can be performed. The definite time stages I2>> and I2> are always available. Unbalanced load protection only makes sense with three-phase protected objects. For 3527 2%-(&7 = SK %XVEDU or  SKDVH WUDQVI (address , see Subsection 2.1.1) the following settings are not available. In address  81%$/$1&( /2$' the function can be set to 21 or 2)).

Definite Time Stages I2>>, I2>

A two-stage characteristic enables the user to set a short time delay (address  7 ,!!) for the upper stage (address  ,!!) and longer time delay (address  7 ,!) for the lower stage (address  ,!). Stage I2>, for example, can be used as alarm stage, stage I2>> as tripping stage. Setting ,!! to a percentage higher than 60 % makes sure that no tripping is performed with stage I2>> in case of phase failure.

126

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.8 Unbalanced Load Protection

The magnitude of the negative sequence current when one phase is lost, is 1 I 2 = ------ I = 0.58 I 3 On the other hand, with more than 60 % negative sequence current, a two-phase fault in the system may be assumed. Therefore, the delay time 7 ,!! must be coordinated with the time grading of the system. On line feeders, negative sequence protection may serve to identify low-current unsymmetrical faults below the pickup values of the time overcurrent protection. In this case: a two-phase fault with fault current I produces a negative sequence current 1 I 2 = ------ I = 0.58 I 3 a single-phase fault with fault current I produces a negative sequence current 1 I 2 = -- I = 0.33 I 3 With more than 60 % negative sequence current, a two-phase fault can be assumed. The delay time 7 ,!! must be coordinated with the time grading of the system. For a power transformer, negative sequence protection may be used as sensitive protection for low magnitude phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase faults. In particular, this application is well suited for delta-wye transformers where low side phase-toground faults do not generate a high side zero sequence current. The relationship between negative sequence currents and total fault current for phaseto-phase faults and phase-to-ground faults are valid for the transformer as long as the turns ratio is taken into consideration. Considering a power transformer with the following data: Rated apparent power Nominal high side voltage Nominal low side voltage Transformer connection SNT = 16 MVA UHS = 110 kV ULS = 20 kV Dyn5

the following faults may be detected at the lower-voltage side: If the pickup setting (PU) of the device on the high side is set to ,! = 0.1 A, then a phase-to-ground fault current of I = 3 (110 kV/20 kV) ,! = 3 0.1 100 A = 165 A and a phase-to-phase fault of 3 (110/20) 0.1 100 A = 95 A can be detected on the low side. This corresponds to 36 % and 20 % of the power transformer rating. To prevent false operation for faults in other zones of protection, the delay time 7 ,! must be coordinated with the time grading of other relays in the system. For generators and motors, the setting depends on the permissible unbalanced load of the protected object. It is reasonable to set the I2> stage to the continuously permissible negative sequence current and a long time delay in order to obtain an alarm stage. The I2>> stage is then set to a short-term negative sequence current with the delay time permitted here.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

127

2 Functions

Example: Motor INmotor I2prim / INmotor I2prim /INmotor INprim / INsec I2> I2>> TI2>> = 545A = 0,11 continuous = 0,55 for Tmax = 1s = 600 A/1 A = 0.11 0.11 = 0.55 0,55 =1s 545 545 545 545 A = 60 A primary or A (1/600) = 0.10 A secondary A = 300 A primary or A (1/600) = 0.50 A secondary

Current transf. Setting Setting Delay

To achieve a better adaptation to the protected object, use the additional inverse-time stage. Inverse Time Stage I2p with IEC curves Having selected an inverse time tripping characteristic the thermal load of a machine caused by unbalanced load can be simulated easily. Use the characteristic which is most similar to the thermal unbalanced load curve of the machine manufacturer. With the IEC-characteristics (address  81%$/ /2$' &+5 = 72& ,(&, see also Subsection 2.1.1) the following characteristics are made available in address  ,(& &859(: 1RUPDO ,QYHUVH (type A according to IEC 602553), 9HU\ ,QYHUVH (type B according to IEC 602553), ([WUHPHO\ ,QY (type C according to IEC 602553). The characteristics and equations they are based on are listed in the Technical Data (Section 4.4, Figure 4-7). If an inverse-time characteristic is selected, it must be noted that a safety factor of about 1.1 has already been included between the pickup value and the setting value. This means that a pickup will only occur if an unbalanced load of about 1.1 times the setting value of ,S (Address ) is present. The function will reset as soon as the value undershoots 95 % of the pickup value. The corresponding time multiplier is accessible via address  7 ,S. The time multiplier can also be set to . If set to infinity, the pickup of this function will be indicated but the stage will not be able to trip after pickup. If the inverse time stage is not required, select address  81%$/ /2$' &+5 = 'HILQLWH 7LPH when configuring the protection functions (Subsection 2.1.1). The above mentioned definite time stages can be used in addition to the inverse-time stage as alarm and tripping stages (see margin heading Definite Time Stages I2>>, I2>). Inverse Time Stage I2p with ANSI curves Having selected an inverse-time tripping characteristic the thermal load of a machine caused by unbalanced load can be simulated easily. Use the characteristic which is most similar to the thermal unbalanced load curve of the machine manufacturer. With the ANSI characteristics (address  81%$/ /2$' &+5 = 72& $16,) the following is made available in address  $16, &859(:

128

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.8 Unbalanced Load Protection

([WUHPHO\ ,QY, ,QYHUVH, 0RGHUDWHO\ ,QY, and 9HU\ ,QYHUVH. The characteristics and equations they are based on are listed in the Technical Data (Section 4.4, Figure 4-8). If an inverse-time characteristic is selected, it must be noted that a safety factor of about 1.1 has already been included between the pickup value and the setting value. This means that a pickup will only occur if an unbalanced load of about 1.1 times the setting value of ,S (Address ) is present. The corresponding time multiplier is accessible via address  ' ,S. The time multiplier can also be set to . If set to infinity, the pickup of this function will be indicated but the stage will not be able to trip after pickup. If the inverse-time stage is not required, select address  81%$/ /2$' &+5 = 'HILQLWH 7LPH when configuring the protection functions (Subsection 2.1.1). The above mentioned definite time stages can be used in addition to the inverse-time stage as alarm and tripping stages (see margin heading Definite Time Stages I2>>, I2>). If 'LVN (PXODWLRQ is set in address  ,S '523287, dropout is being produced according to the dropout characteristic. For more information see Subsection 2.8.1.2, margin heading Dropout for ANSI Curves (page 124).

2.8.3

Setting Overview
Note: The following list indicates the setting ranges and default settings for a rated secondary current of IN = 1 A. For a rated secondary current of IN = 5 A, these values must be multiplied by 5. When performing settings in primary values, the current transformer ratios have to be taken into consideration.

Addr. 4001 4002 4003 4004 4005 4006

Setting Title UNBALANCE LOAD OFF ON I2> T I2> I2>> T I2>> IEC CURVE

Setting Options

Default Setting OFF 0.10 A 1.50 sec 0.50 A 1.50 sec Extremely Inverse

Comments Unbalance Load (Negative Sequence) I2> Pickup T I2> Time Delay I2>> Pickup T I2>> Time Delay IEC Curve

0.10..3.00 A 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.10..3.00 A 0.00..60.00 sec; Normal Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inverse Extremely Inverse Inverse Moderately Inverse Very Inverse

4007

ANSI CURVE

Extremely Inverse

ANSI Curve

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

129

2 Functions

Addr. 4008 4009 4010 4011 I2p

Setting Title

Setting Options 0.10..2.00 A 0.50..15.00; 0.05..3.20 sec; Instantaneous Disk Emulation

Default Setting 0.90 A 5.00 0.50 sec Instantaneous I2p Pickup

Comments

D I2p T I2p I2p DROP-OUT

D I2p Time Dial T I2p Time Dial I2p Drop-out Characteristic

2.8.4

Information Overview

F.No. 05143 >BLOCK I2 05151 I2 OFF 05152 I2 BLOCKED 05153 I2 ACTIVE 05159 I2>> picked up 05165 I2> picked up 05166 I2p picked up 05170 I2 TRIP 05172 I2 Not avalia.

Alarm

Comments >BLOCK I2 (Unbalance Load) I2 switched OFF I2 is BLOCKED I2 is ACTIVE I2>> picked up I2> picked up I2p picked up I2 TRIP I2 Not avaliable for this objekt

130

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.9 Thermal Overload Protection

2.9

Thermal Overload Protection

The thermal overload protection prevents damage to the protected object caused by thermal overloading, particularly in case of power transformers, rotating machines, power reactors and cables. Two methods of overload detection are available in 7UT612: Overload calculation using a thermal replica according to IEC 60255-8, Calculation of the hot-spot temperature and determination of the ageing rate according to IEC 60354. You may select one of these two methods. The first one is characterized by easy handling and setting, the second needs some knowledge about the protected object and its thermal characteristics and the input of the cooling medium temperature.

2.9.1
Principle

Overload Protection Using a Thermal Replica

The thermal overload protection of 7UT612 can be assigned to one of the sides of the protected object (selectable), i.e. it evaluates the currents flowing at this side. Since the cause of overload is normally outside the protected object, the overload current is a through-flowing current. The unit computes the temperature rise according to a thermal single-body model as per the following thermal differential equation
2 I 1 d 1 ------- + ------ = ------ ------------------- k I Nobj th dt th

with

currently valid temperature rise referred to the final temperature rise for the maximum permissible phase current k INobj, th thermal time constant for heating up, k kfactor which states the maximum permissible continuous current, referred to the rated current of the protected object, I currently valid RMS current, INobj rated current of protected object.

The solution of this equation under steady-state conditions is an efunction whose asymptote shows the final temperature rise end. When the temperature rise reaches the first settable temperature threshold alarm, which is below the final temperature rise, a warning alarm is given in order to allow an early load reduction. When the second temperature threshold, i.e. the final temperature rise or tripping temperature, is reached, the protected object is disconnected from the network. The overload protection can, however, also be set on $ODUP 2QO\. In this case only an alarm is output when the final temperature rise is reached. The temperature rises are calculated separately for each phase in a thermal replica from the square of the associated phase current. This guarantees a true RMS value measurement and also includes the effect of harmonic content. The maximum calculated temperature rise of the three phases is decisive for evaluation of the thresholds. The maximum permissible continuous thermal overload current Imax is described as a multiple of the rated current INobj:

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

131

2 Functions

Imax = k INobj INobj is the rated current of the protected object: For power transformers, the rated power of the assigned winding is decisive. The device calculates this rated current from the rated apparent power of the transformer and the rated voltage of the assigned winding. For transformers with tap changer, the non-regulated side must be used. For generators, motors, or reactors, the rated object current is calculated by the device from the set rated apparent power and the rated voltage. For short lines or busbars, the rated current was directly set. In addition to the kfactor, the thermal time constant th as well as the alarm temperature rise alarm must be entered into the protection. Apart from the thermal alarm stage, the overload protection also includes a current overload alarm stage Ialarm, which can output an early warning that an overload current is imminent, even when the temperature rise has not yet reached the alarm or trip temperature rise values. The overload protection can be blocked via a binary input. In doing so, the thermal replica are also reset to zero. Extension of the Time Constant for Machines The differential equation mentioned above assumes a constant cooling represented by the thermal time constant th = Rth Cth (thermal resistance times thermal capacitance). But, the thermal time constant of a self-ventilated machine during stand-still differs substantially from that during operation because of the missing ventilation. Thus, in this case, two time constants exist. This must be considered in the thermal replica. Stand-still of the machine is assumed when the current drops below the threshold %UHDNHU 6 ,! or %UHDNHU 6 ,! (depending on the assigned side for overload protection, refer also to Circuit Breaker Status in Subsection 2.1.2). Motor Startup Recognition On startup of electrical machines the temperature rise calculated by the thermal replica may exceed the alarm temperature rise or even the trip temperature rise. To avoid an alarm or trip, the starting current is acquired and the increase of temperature rise deriving from it is suppressed. This means that the calculated temperature rise is kept constant as long as the starting current is detected. When machines must be started for emergency reasons, operating temperatures above the maximum permissible operating temperatures are allowed (emergency start). Then exclusively the tripping signal can be blocked via a binary input (!(PHU6WDUW 2/). After startup and dropout of the binary input, the thermal replica may still be greater than the trip temperature rise. Therefore the thermal replica features a settable run-on time (7 (0(5*(1&<) which is started when the binary input drops out. It also suppresses the trip command. Tripping by the overload protection will be defeated until this time interval elapses. This binary input only affects the trip command. There is no effect on fault recording, nor does the thermal replica reset.

Emergency Starting of Machines

132

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.9 Thermal Overload Protection

D6G6SH #!$

#!! FA68UPS #!" UDH@8PITU6IU

L3 L2 L1

I IL2 L3 IL1 1 2 d 1 ------- + -- = -- I - dt = const

1
#!# 6G6SH

FNo 01515

&

O/L I Alarm
FNo 01516

max
=0
100 % (fix)

O/L Alarm

&
DHPUPSTU6SU #!( #!& FA68UPS
CB closed

FNo 01521

ThOverload TRIP

FNo 01517

&

O/L Th. pick.up

FNo 01503

FNo 01512

>BLK ThOverload

Th.Overload BLK
FNo 01513

#! UurPW@SGP69
PAA
1

Th.Overload
FNo 01511

Th.Overload OFF

PI 6yhPy

#!' U@H@SB@I8`
FNo 01507

>Emer.Start O/L

Figure 2-77

Logic diagram of the thermal overload protection

2.9.2

Hot-Spot Calculation and Determination of the Ageing Rate

The overload calculation according to IEC 60354 calculates two quantities relevant for the protection function: the relative ageing and the hot-spot temperature in the protected object. The user can install up to 12 temperature measuring points in the protected object. Via one or two thermoboxes and a serial data connection the measuring points inform the overload protection of the 7UT612 about the local coolant temperature. One of these points is selected to form the relevant point for hot-spot calculation. This point shall be situated at the insulation of the upper inner turn of the winding since this is the location of the hottest temperature. The relative ageing is acquired cyclically and summed up to a total ageing sum.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

133

2 Functions

Cooling Methods

The hot-spot calculation is dependent on the cooling method. Air cooling is always available. Two different methods are distinguished: AN (Air Natural): natural air circulation and AF (Air Forced): forced air circulation (ventilation). If liquid coolants are used in combination with the two cooling methods above-described, the following types of coolants are available: ON (Oil Natural = naturally circulating oil): Because of emerging differences in temperature the coolant (oil) moves within the tank. The cooling effect is not very intense due to its natural convection. This cooling variant, however, is almost noiseless. OF (Oil Forced = forced oil circulation): An oil pump makes the coolant (oil) move within the tank. The cooling effect of this method is therefore more intense than with the ON method. OD (Oil Directed = forced-directed oil circulation): The coolant (oil) is directed through the tank. Therefore the oil flow is intensified for sections which are extremely temperature-sensitive. Therefore, the cooling effect is very good. This method has the lowest temperature rise. Figures 2-78 to 2-80 show examples of the cooling methods.

ONAN cooling

ONAF cooling

Figure 2-78 ON cooling (Oil Natural)

134

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.9 Thermal Overload Protection

OFAN cooling

Figure 2-79

OF cooling (Oil Forced)

OD cooling

Figure 2-80

OD cooling (Oil Directed)

Hot-Spot Calculation

The hot-spot temperature of the protected object is an important value of status. The hottest spot relevant for the life-time of the transformer is usually situated at the insulation of the upper inner turn. Generally the temperature of the coolant increases from the bottom up. The cooling method, however, affects the rate of the temperature drop. The hot-spot temperature is composed of two parts: the temperature at the hottest spot of the coolant (included via thermobox), the temperature rise of the winding turn caused by the transformer load. Thermobox 7XV566 can be used to acquire the temperature of the hottest spot. It converts the temperature value into numerical signals and sends them to the corresponding interface of device 7UT612. The thermobox is able to acquire the temperature at up to 6 points of the transformer tank. Up to two thermoboxes of this types can be connected to a 7UT612.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

135

2 Functions

The device calculates the hot-spot temperature from these data and the settings of the characteristical properties. When a settable threshold (temperature alarm) is exceeded, an annunciation and/or a trip is generated. Hot-spot calculation is done with different equations depending on the cooling method. For ONcooling and OFcooling: h = o + H gr k with h o Hgr k Y
Y

hot-spot temperature top oil temperature hot-spot to top-oil gradient load factor I/IN (measured) winding exponent

For ODcooling: h = o + H gr k
Y Y Y

for k 1 for k > 1

h = o + H gr k + 0,15 [ ( o + H gr k ) 98 C ] Ageing Rate Calculation

The life-time of a cellulose insulation refers to a temperature of 98 C or 208.4 F in the direct environment of the insulation. Experience shows that an increase of 6 K means half of the life-time. For a temperature which defers from the basic value of 98 C (208.4 F), the relative ageing rate V is given by Ageing at h ( h 98 ) 6 V = ----------------------------------------- = 2 Ageing at 98 C The mean value of the relative ageing rate L is given by the calculation of the mean value of a certain period of time, i.e. from T1 to T2:
T2

1 L = ------------------ T 2 T1

V dt
T1

With constant rated load, the relative ageing rate L is equal to 1. For values greater than 1, accelerated ageing applies, e.g. if L = 2 only half of the life-time is expected compared to the life-time under nominal load conditions. According to IEC, the ageing range is defined from 80 C to 140 C (176 F to 284 F). This is the operating range of the ageing calculation in 7UT612: Temperatures below 80 C (176 F) do not extent the calculated ageing rate; values greater than 140 C (284 F) do not reduce the calculated ageing rate. The above-described relative ageing calculation only applies to the insulation of the winding and cannot be used for other failure causes. Output of Results The hot-spot temperature is calculated for the winding which corresponds to the side of the protected object configured for overload protection (Subsection 2.1.1, address ). The calculation includes the current of that side and the cooling temperature measured at a certain measuring point. There are two thresholds which can be set. They output a warning (Stage 1) and an alarm (Stage 2) signal. When the alarm signal is assigned to a trip output, it can also be used for tripping the circuit breaker(s).

136

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.9 Thermal Overload Protection

For the middle ageing rate, there is also a threshold for each of the warning and the alarm signal. The status can be read out from the operational measured values at any time. The information includes: hot-spot temperature for each winding in C or F (as configured), relative ageing rate expressed in per unit, load backup up to warning signal (Stage 1) expressed in per cent, load backup up to alarm signal (Stage 2) expressed in per cent.

2.9.3
General

Setting the Function Parameters

The overload protection can be assigned to any desired side of the protected object. Since the cause of the overload current is outside the protected object, the overload current is a through-flowing current, the overload protection may be assigned to a feeding or a non-feeding side. For transformers with voltage regulation, i.e. with tap changer, the overload protection must be assigned to the non-regulated side as only this winding allows a defined relationship between the rated current and the rated power. For generators, the overload protection is, normally, assigned to the starpoint side. For motors and shunt reactors, the overload protection is assigned to the feeding side. For series reactors or short cables, nor preferable side exists. For busbar sections or overhead lines, the overload protection is, generally, not used since calculation of a temperature rise is not reasonable because of the widely varying ambient conditions (air temperature, wind). But, in these applications, the current warning stage may be useful to announce overload currents. The side of the protected object which is to be assigned to the overload protection, was selected under address  7KHUP2YHUORDG during configuration of the protection functions (Subsection 2.1.1). There are two method for evaluation of overload conditions in 7UT612, as explained above. During configuration of the protection function (Subsection 2.1.1), you had already decided under address  7KHUP2/ &+5, whether the protection shall operate according to the classical method of a thermal replica (7KHUP2/ &+5 = FODVVLFDO) or whether the calculation of the hot-spot temperature according to IEC 60354 (7KHUP2/ &+5 = ,(&) shall be carried out. In the latter case, at least one thermobox 7XV566 must be connected to the device in order to inform the device about the cooling medium temperature. The data concerning the thermobox were entered to the device under address  57' &211(&7,21 (Subsection 2.1.1). The thermal overload protection can be switched 21 or 2)) under address  7KHUP2YHUORDG. Furthermore $ODUP 2QO\ can be set. With that latter setting the protection function is active but only outputs an alarm when the tripping temperature rise is reached, i.e. the output function 7K2YHUORDG 75,3 is not active.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

137

2 Functions

kFactor

The rated current of the protected object is taken as the base current for detecting an overload. The setting factor k is set under address  .)$&725. It is determined by the relation between the permissible thermal continuous current and this rated current: I max k = ----------I Nobj When using the method with a thermal replica, it is not necessary to evaluate any absolute temperature nor the trip temperature since the trip temperature rise is equal to the final temperature rise at k INobj. Manufacturers of electrical machines usually state the permissible continuous current. If no data are available, k is set to 1.1 times the rated current of the protected object. For cables, the permissible continuous current depends on the cross-section, the insulation material, the design and the method of installation, and can be derived from the relevant tables. When using the method with hot-spot evaluation according to IEC 60354, set k = 1 since all remaining parameters are referred to the rated current of the protected object.

Time Constant for Thermal Replica

The thermal time constant th is set under the address  7,0( &2167$17. This is also to be stated by the manufacturer. Please note that the time constant is set in minutes. Quite often other values for determining the time constant are stated which can be converted into the time constant as follows: 1s current 2 th 1 permissible 1s current -------- = ----- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 60 permissible continuous current min permissible current for application time other than 1 s, e.g. for 0.5 s 2 th 0.5 permissible 0.5s current -------- = ------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- min 60 permissible continuous current t6time; this is the time in seconds for which a current of 6 times the rated current of the protected object may flow th -------- = 0.6 t 6 min

Calculation examples: Cable with permissible continuous current 322 A permissible 1s current 13.5 kA th 2 1 13500 A 2 1 -------- = ----- ---------------------- = ----- 42 = 29.4 min 60 322 A 60 Setting value 7,0( &2167$17 =  min. Motor with t6time 12 s th -------- = 0.6 12 s = 7.2 min Setting value 7,0( &2167$17 =  min. For rotating machines, the time constant as set under address  7,0( &2167$17 is valid as long as the machine is running. The machine will cool down extensively

138

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.9 Thermal Overload Protection

slower during stand-still or running down if it is self-ventilated. This phenomenon is considered by a higher stand-still time constant .)$&725 (address $) which is set as a factor of the normal time constant. Stand-still of the machine is assumed when the currents fall below the threshold %UHDNHU 6 ,! or %UHDNHU 6 ,!, depending on the side to which the overload protection is assigned, (see margin Circuit Breaker Status in Subsection 2.1.2). This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings. If it not necessary to distinguish between different time constants, leave the factor . )$&725 at  (default setting). Alarm Stages with Thermal Replica By setting a thermal alarm stage $/$50 (address ) an alarm can be output before the tripping temperature is reached, so that a trip can be avoided by early load reduction or by switching over. The percentage is referred to the tripping temperature rise. Note that the final temperature rise is proportional to the square of the current. Example: kfactor = 1.1 Alarm shall be given when the temperature rise reaches the final (steady-state) temperature rise at nominal current. 1 alarn = ---------- = 0.826 2 1.1 Setting value $/$50 =  %. The current overload alarm setpoint , $/$50 (address ) is stated in amps (primary or secondary) and should be set equal to or slightly below the permissible continuous current k INobj. It can also be used instead of the thermal alarm stage. In this case the thermal alarm stage is set to 100 % and thus practically ineffective. Emergency Start for Motors The run-on time value to be entered at address $ 7 (0(5*(1&< must ensure that after an emergency start and dropout of the binary input !(PHU6WDUW 2/ the trip command is blocked until the thermal replica has fallen below the dropout threshold. This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings. The startup itself is only recognized if the startup current , 02725 67$57 set in address $ is exceeded. Under each load and voltage condition during motor start, the value must be overshot by the actual startup current. With short-time permissible overload the value must not be reached. For other protected objects the setting will not be changed. Thus the emergency start is disabled. Temperature Detectors For the hot-spot calculation according to IEC 60354 the device must be informed on the type of resistance temperature detectors that will be used for measuring the oil temperature, the one relevant for the hot-spot calculation and ageing determination. Up to 6 sensors can be used with one thermobox 7XV566, with 2 boxes up to 12 sensors. In address  2,/'(7 57' the identification number of the resistance temperature detector decisive for hot-spot calculation is set. The characteristic values of the temperature detectors are set separately, see Section 2.10.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

139

2 Functions

Hot-Spot Stages

There are two annunciation stages for the hot-spot temperature. To set a specific hotspot temperature value (expressed in C) which is meant to generate the warning signal (Stage 1), use address  +27 6327 67 . Use address  +27 6327 67  to indicate the corresponding alarm temperature (Stage 2). Optionally, it can be used for tripping of circuit breakers if the outgoing message 2/ KVSRW 75,3 (FNo ) is allocated to a trip relay. If address  7(03 81,7 = )DKUHQKHLW is set (Subsection 2.1.2, margin heading Temperature Unit), thresholds for warning and alarm temperatures have to be expressed in Fahrenheit (addresses  and ). If the temperature unit is changed in address  after having set the thresholds for temperature, these thresholds for the temperature unit changed must be set again in the corresponding addresses.

Ageing Rate

For ageing rate L thresholds can also be set, i.e. for the warning signal (Stage 1) in address  $* 5$7( 67  and for alarm signal (Stage 2) in address  $* 5$7( 67 . This information is referred to the relative ageing, i.e. L = 1 is reached at 98 C or 208 F at the hot spot. L > 1 means an accelerated ageing, L < 1 a delayed ageing. Set in address  0(7+ &22/,1* which cooling method is used: 21 = Oil Natural for natural cooling, 2) = Oil Forced for oil forced cooling or 2' = Oil Directed for oil directed cooling. For definitions see also Subsection 2.9.2, margin heading Cooling Methods. For hot-spot calculation the device requires the winding exponent Y and the hot-spot to top-oil gradient Hgr which is set in addresses  <:,1'(;321(17 and  +276327 *5. If the corresponding information is not available, it can be taken from the IEC 60354. An extract from the corresponding table of the standard with the technical data relevant for this project can be found hereinafter (Table 2-5).

Cooling Method and Insulation Data

Table 2-5

Thermal characteristics of power transformers Distribution transformers ONAN 1.6 23 Medium and large power transformers ON.. OF.. OD.. 1.8 26 1.8 22 2.0 29

Cooling method: Winding exponent Hot-spot to top-oil gradient Y Hgr

140

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.9 Thermal Overload Protection

2.9.4

Setting Overview
Note: The following list indicates the setting ranges and default settings for a rated secondary current of IN = 1 A. For a rated secondary current of IN = 5 A, these values must be multiplied by 5. When setting the device using primary values, the current transformer ratios have to be taken into consideration. Note: Addresses which have an A attached to its end can only be changed in DIGSI 4, under Additional Settings.

Addr. 4201

Setting Title Ther. OVER LOAD

Setting Options OFF ON Alarm Only 0.10..4.00 1.0..999.9 min 50..100 % 0.10..4.00 A 1.0..10.0 10..15000 sec 0.60..10.00 A; 1..6 98..140 C 208..284 F 98..140 C 208..284 F 0.125..128.000 0.125..128.000 ON (Oil-Natural) OF (Oil-Forced) OD (Oil-Directed) 1.6..2.0 22..29

Default Setting OFF

Comments Thermal Overload Protection

4202 4203 4204 4205 4207A 4208A 4209A 4221 4222 4223 4224 4225 4226 4227 4231

K-FACTOR TIME CONSTANT ALARM I ALARM K-FACTOR T EMERGENCY I MOTOR START OIL-DET. RTD HOT SPOT ST. 1 HOT SPOT ST. 1 HOT SPOT ST. 2 HOT SPOT ST. 2 AG. RATE ST. 1 AG. RATE ST. 2 METH. COOLING

1.10 100.0 min 90 % 1.00 A 1.0 100 sec A 1 98 C 208 F 108 C 226 F 1.000 2.000 ON (Oil-Natural)

K-Factor Time Constant Thermal Alarm Stage Current Overload Alarm Setpoint Kt-FACTOR when motor stops Emergency Time Current Pickup Value of Motor Starting Oil-Detector conected at RTD Hot Spot Temperature Stage 1 Pickup Hot Spot Temperature Stage 1 Pickup Hot Spot Temperature Stage 2 Pickup Hot Spot Temperature Stage 2 Pickup Aging Rate STAGE 1 Pickup Aging Rate STAGE 2 Pickup Method of Cooling

4232 4233

Y-WIND.EXPONENT HOT-SPOT GR

1.6 22

Y-Winding Exponent Hot-spot to top-oil gradient

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

141

2 Functions

2.9.5

Information Overview

F.No.

Alarm

Comments >BLOCK Thermal Overload Protection >Emergency start Th. Overload Protection Thermal Overload Protection OFF Thermal Overload Protection BLOCKED Thermal Overload Protection ACTIVE Th. Overload Current Alarm (I alarm) Thermal Overload Alarm Thermal Overload picked up Thermal Overload TRIP Thermal Overload hot spot Th. Alarm Thermal Overload hot spot Th. TRIP Thermal Overload aging rate Alarm Thermal Overload aging rate TRIP Th. Overload No temperature mesured Th. Overload Not avaliable for this obj.

01503 >BLK ThOverload 01507 >Emer.Start O/L 01511 Th.Overload OFF 01512 Th.Overload BLK 01513 Th.Overload ACT 01515 O/L I Alarm 01516 O/L Alarm 01517 O/L Th. pick.up 01521 ThOverload TRIP 01541 O/L ht.spot Al. 01542 O/L h.spot TRIP 01543 O/L ag.rate Al. 01544 O/L ag.rt. TRIP 01545 O/L No Th.meas. 01549 O/L Not avalia.

142

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.10 Thermoboxes for Overload Protection

2.10

Thermoboxes for Overload Protection

For overload protection with hot-spot calculation and relative ageing rate determination, the temperature of the hottest spot of the coolant is required. At least one resistance temperature detector (RTD) must be installed at the hot-spot location which informs the device about this temperature via a thermoboxes 7XV566. One thermobox is able to process up to 6 RTDs. One or two thermoboxes can be connected to the 7UT612.

2.10.1 Function Description

A thermobox 7XV566 is suited for up to 6 measuring points (RTDs) in the protected object, e.g. in the transformer tank. The thermobox takes the coolant temperature of each measuring point from the resistance value of the temperature detectors connected with a two- or three-wire line (Pt100, Ni100 or Ni120) and converts it to a digital value. The digital values are output at the serial interface RS485. One or two thermoboxes can be connected to the service interface of the 7UT612. Thus, up to 6 or 12 measuring points (RTDs) can be processed. For each temperature detector, characteristic data as well as alarm (stage 1) and trip (stage 2) temperature can be set. The thermobox also acquires thresholds of each single measuring point. The information is then passed on via an output relay. For further information refer to the instruction manual of the thermobox.

2.10.2 Setting the Function Parameters

For RTD1 (temperature detector for measuring point 1) the type of temperature detector is set in address $ 57'  7<3(. 3W  , 1L  and 1L  are available. If there is no measuring point for RTD1, set 57'  7<3( = 1RW FRQQHFW HG. This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings. Address $ 57'  /2&$7,21 informs the device on the mounting location of RTD1. 2LO, $PELHQW, :LQGLQJ, %HDULQJ and 2WKHU are available. This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings. Furthermore, alarm and trip temperature can be set. Depending on the temperature unit selected in the Power System Data (Subsection 2.1.2 in address  7(03 81,7, page 20), the alarm temperature can be expressed in Celsius (C) (address  57'  67$*( ) or Fahrenheit (F) (address  57'  67$*( ). The trip temperature expressed in Celsius (C) is set in address  57'  67$*( . To express it in Fahrenheit (F) use address  57'  67$*( . For other temperature detectors connected to the first thermobox make settings correspondingly:

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

143

2 Functions
for RTD2 address $ address $ address  address  for RTD3 address $ address $ address  address  for RTD4 address $ address $ address  address  for RTD5 address $ address $ address  address  for RTD6 address $ address $ address  address  57' 57' 57' 57' 57' 57' 57' 57' 57' 57' 57' 57' 57' 57' 57' 57' 57' 57' 57' 57'                     7<3(, /2&$7,21, 67$*(  (in C) or  57'  67$*(  (F), 67$*(  (in C) or  57'  67$*(  (F); 7<3(, /2&$7,21, 67$*(  (in C) or  57'  67$*(  (F), 67$*(  (in C) or  57'  67$*(  (F); 7<3(, /2&$7,21, 67$*(  (in C) or  57'  67$*(  (F), 67$*(  (in C) or  57'  67$*(  (F); 7<3(, /2&$7,21, 67$*(  (in C) or  57'  67$*(  (F), 67$*(  (in C) or  57'  67$*(  (F); 7<3(, /2&$7,21, 67$*(  (in C) or  57'  67$*(  (F), 67$*(  (in C) or  57'  67$*(  (F);

If two thermoboxes are connected, information for further temperature detectors can be set: for RTD7 address $ address $ address  address  for RTD8 address $ address $ address  address  for RTD9 address $ address $ address  address  for RTD address $ address $ address  address  for RTD address $ address $ address  address  for RTD address $ address $ address  address  57' 57' 57' 57' 57' 57' 57' 57' 57' 57' 57' 57'             7<3(, /2&$7,21, 67$*(  (in C) or  57'  67$*(  (F), 67$*(  (in C) or  57'  67$*(  (F); 7<3(, /2&$7,21, 67$*(  (in C) or  57'  67$*(  (F), 67$*(  (in C) or  57'  67$*(  (F); 7<3(, /2&$7,21, 67$*(  (in C) or  57'  67$*(  (F), 67$*(  (in C) or  57'  67$*(  (F); 7<3(, /2&$7,21, 67$*(  (in C) or  57' 67$*(  (F), 67$*(  (in C) or  57' 67$*(  (F); 7<3(, /2&$7,21, 67$*(  (in C) or  57' 67$*(  (F), 67$*(  (in C) or  57' 67$*(  (F); 7<3(, /2&$7,21, 67$*(  (in C) or  57' 67$*(  (F), 67$*(  (in C) or  57' 67$*(  (F).

57' 57' 57' 57' 57' 57' 57' 57' 57' 57' 57' 57'

144

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.10 Thermoboxes for Overload Protection

2.10.3 Setting Overview

Note: Addresses which have an A attached to its end can only be changed in DIGSI 4, Section Additional Settings.
Addr. 9011A Setting Title RTD 1 TYPE Setting Options not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F; Default Setting Pt 100 Ohm RTD 1: Type Comments

9012A

RTD 1 LOCATION

Oil

RTD 1: Location

9013 9014 9015 9016 9021A

RTD 1 STAGE 1 RTD 1 STAGE 1 RTD 1 STAGE 2 RTD 1 STAGE 2 RTD 2 TYPE

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F not connected

RTD 1: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 1: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 1: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 1: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 2: Type

9022A

RTD 2 LOCATION

Other

RTD 2: Location

9023 9024 9025 9026 9031A

RTD 2 STAGE 1 RTD 2 STAGE 1 RTD 2 STAGE 2 RTD 2 STAGE 2 RTD 3 TYPE

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F not connected

RTD 2: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 2: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 2: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 2: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 3: Type

9032A

RTD 3 LOCATION

Other

RTD 3: Location

9033 9034 9035 9036

RTD 3 STAGE 1 RTD 3 STAGE 1 RTD 3 STAGE 2 RTD 3 STAGE 2

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F

RTD 3: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 3: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 3: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 3: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

145

2 Functions

Addr. 9041A

Setting Title RTD 4 TYPE

Setting Options not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm

Default Setting not connected RTD 4: Type

Comments

9042A

RTD 4 LOCATION

Other

RTD 4: Location

9043 9044 9045 9046 9051A

RTD 4 STAGE 1 RTD 4 STAGE 1 RTD 4 STAGE 2 RTD 4 STAGE 2 RTD 5 TYPE

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F not connected

RTD 4: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 4: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 4: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 4: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 5: Type

9052A

RTD 5 LOCATION

Other

RTD 5: Location

9053 9054 9055 9056 9061A

RTD 5 STAGE 1 RTD 5 STAGE 1 RTD 5 STAGE 2 RTD 5 STAGE 2 RTD 6 TYPE

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F not connected

RTD 5: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 5: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 5: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 5: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 6: Type

9062A

RTD 6 LOCATION

Other

RTD 6: Location

9063 9064 9065 9066 9071A

RTD 6 STAGE 1 RTD 6 STAGE 1 RTD 6 STAGE 2 RTD 6 STAGE 2 RTD 7 TYPE

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F not connected

RTD 6: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 6: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 6: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 6: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 7: Type

146

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.10 Thermoboxes for Overload Protection

Addr. 9041A

Setting Title RTD 4 TYPE

Setting Options not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm

Default Setting not connected RTD 4: Type

Comments

9042A

RTD 4 LOCATION

Other

RTD 4: Location

9043 9044 9045 9046 9051A

RTD 4 STAGE 1 RTD 4 STAGE 1 RTD 4 STAGE 2 RTD 4 STAGE 2 RTD 5 TYPE

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F not connected

RTD 4: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 4: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 4: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 4: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 5: Type

9052A

RTD 5 LOCATION

Other

RTD 5: Location

9053 9054 9055 9056 9061A

RTD 5 STAGE 1 RTD 5 STAGE 1 RTD 5 STAGE 2 RTD 5 STAGE 2 RTD 6 TYPE

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F not connected

RTD 5: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 5: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 5: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 5: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 6: Type

9062A

RTD 6 LOCATION

Other

RTD 6: Location

9063 9064 9065 9066 9071A

RTD 6 STAGE 1 RTD 6 STAGE 1 RTD 6 STAGE 2 RTD 6 STAGE 2 RTD 7 TYPE

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F not connected

RTD 6: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 6: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 6: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 6: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 7: Type

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

147

2 Functions

Addr. 9072A

Setting Title RTD 7 LOCATION

Setting Options Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm

Default Setting Other

Comments RTD 7: Location

9073 9074 9075 9076 9081A

RTD 7 STAGE 1 RTD 7 STAGE 1 RTD 7 STAGE 2 RTD 7 STAGE 2 RTD 8 TYPE

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F not connected

RTD 7: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 7: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 7: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 7: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 8: Type

9082A

RTD 8 LOCATION

Other

RTD 8: Location

9083 9084 9085 9086 9091A

RTD 8 STAGE 1 RTD 8 STAGE 1 RTD 8 STAGE 2 RTD 8 STAGE 2 RTD 9 TYPE

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F not connected

RTD 8: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 8: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 8: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 8: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 9: Type

9092A

RTD 9 LOCATION

Other

RTD 9: Location

9093 9094 9095 9096 9101A

RTD 9 STAGE 1 RTD 9 STAGE 1 RTD 9 STAGE 2 RTD 9 STAGE 2 RTD10 TYPE

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F not connected

RTD 9: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 9: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 9: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 9: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD10: Type

9102A

RTD10 LOCATION Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other

Other

RTD10: Location

148

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.10 Thermoboxes for Overload Protection

Addr. 9103 9104 9105 9106 9111A

Setting Title RTD10 STAGE 1 RTD10 STAGE 1 RTD10 STAGE 2 RTD10 STAGE 2 RTD11 TYPE

Setting Options -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm

Default Setting 100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F not connected

Comments RTD10: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD10: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD10: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD10: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD11: Type

9112A

RTD11 LOCATION Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other RTD11 STAGE 1 RTD11 STAGE 1 RTD11 STAGE 2 RTD11 STAGE 2 RTD12 TYPE -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm

Other

RTD11: Location

9113 9114 9115 9116 9121A

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F not connected

RTD11: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD11: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD11: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD11: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD12: Type

9122A

RTD12 LOCATION Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other RTD12 STAGE 1 RTD12 STAGE 1 RTD12 STAGE 2 RTD12 STAGE 2 -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F;

Other

RTD12: Location

9123 9124 9125 9126

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F

RTD12: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD12: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD12: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD12: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

149

2 Functions

2.10.4 Information Overview

Note: Further annunciations on thresholds of each measuring point are available at the thermobox itself for output at the relay contacts.
F.No. 14101 Fail: RTD 14111 Fail: RTD 1 14112 RTD 1 St.1 p.up 14113 RTD 1 St.2 p.up 14121 Fail: RTD 2 14122 RTD 2 St.1 p.up 14123 RTD 2 St.2 p.up 14131 Fail: RTD 3 14132 RTD 3 St.1 p.up 14133 RTD 3 St.2 p.up 14141 Fail: RTD 4 14142 RTD 4 St.1 p.up 14143 RTD 4 St.2 p.up 14151 Fail: RTD 5 14152 RTD 5 St.1 p.up 14153 RTD 5 St.2 p.up 14161 Fail: RTD 6 14162 RTD 6 St.1 p.up 14163 RTD 6 St.2 p.up 14171 Fail: RTD 7 14172 RTD 7 St.1 p.up 14173 RTD 7 St.2 p.up 14181 Fail: RTD 8 14182 RTD 8 St.1 p.up 14183 RTD 8 St.2 p.up 14191 Fail: RTD 9 14192 RTD 9 St.1 p.up 14193 RTD 9 St.2 p.up 14201 Fail: RTD10 14202 RTD10 St.1 p.up 14203 RTD10 St.2 p.up Alarm Comments Fail: RTD (broken wire/shorted) Fail: RTD 1 (broken wire/shorted) RTD 1 Temperature stage 1 picked up RTD 1 Temperature stage 2 picked up Fail: RTD 2 (broken wire/shorted) RTD 2 Temperature stage 1 picked up RTD 2 Temperature stage 2 picked up Fail: RTD 3 (broken wire/shorted) RTD 3 Temperature stage 1 picked up RTD 3 Temperature stage 2 picked up Fail: RTD 4 (broken wire/shorted) RTD 4 Temperature stage 1 picked up RTD 4 Temperature stage 2 picked up Fail: RTD 5 (broken wire/shorted) RTD 5 Temperature stage 1 picked up RTD 5 Temperature stage 2 picked up Fail: RTD 6 (broken wire/shorted) RTD 6 Temperature stage 1 picked up RTD 6 Temperature stage 2 picked up Fail: RTD 7 (broken wire/shorted) RTD 7 Temperature stage 1 picked up RTD 7 Temperature stage 2 picked up Fail: RTD 8 (broken wire/shorted) RTD 8 Temperature stage 1 picked up RTD 8 Temperature stage 2 picked up Fail: RTD 9 (broken wire/shorted) RTD 9 Temperature stage 1 picked up RTD 9 Temperature stage 2 picked up Fail: RTD10 (broken wire/shorted) RTD10 Temperature stage 1 picked up RTD10 Temperature stage 2 picked up

150

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.10 Thermoboxes for Overload Protection

F.No. 14211 Fail: RTD11

Alarm

Comments Fail: RTD11 (broken wire/shorted) RTD11 Temperature stage 1 picked up RTD11 Temperature stage 2 picked up Fail: RTD12 (broken wire/shorted) RTD12 Temperature stage 1 picked up RTD12 Temperature stage 2 picked up

14212 RTD11 St.1 p.up 14213 RTD11 St.2 p.up 14221 Fail: RTD12 14222 RTD12 St.1 p.up 14223 RTD12 St.2 p.up

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

151

2 Functions

2.11

Circuit Breaker Failure Protection

2.11.1 Function Description

General The circuit breaker failure protection provides rapid backup fault clearance, in the event that the circuit breaker fails to respond to a trip command from a feeder protection. Whenever e.g. the differential protection or any short-circuit protection relay of a feeder issues a trip command to the circuit breaker, this is repeated to the breaker failure protection (Figure 2-81). A timer TBF in the breaker failure protection is started. The timer runs as long as a trip command is present and current continues to flow through the breaker poles.

Circuit breaker failure protection CBI> Feeder protec. (external)

Diff Trip
9vss

&

TBF

0 BF Trip

7UT612

Figure 2-81

Simplified function diagram of circuit breaker failure protection with current flow monitoring

Normally, the breaker will open and interrupt the fault current. The current monitoring stage CBI> resets and stops the timer TBF. If the trip command is not carried out (breaker failure case), current continues to flow and the timer runs to its set limit. The breaker failure protection then issues a command to trip the backup breakers and interrupt the fault current. The reset time of the feeder protection is not relevant because the breaker failure protection itself recognizes the interruption of the current.

152

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.11 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection

Please make sure that the measuring point of the current and the supervised circuit breaker belong together! Both must be located at the supply side of the protected object. In Figure 2-81 the current is measured at the busbar side of the transformer (= supply side), therefore the circuit breaker at the busbar side is supervised. The adjacent circuit breakers are those of the busbar illustrated. With generators the breaker failure protection usually affects the network breaker. In cases other than that, the supply side must be the relevant one. Initiation Figure 2-82 shows a logic diagram of the circuit breaker failure protection. The breaker failure protection can be initiated by two different sources: Internal protective function of the 7UT612, e.g. trip commands of protective functions or via CFC (internal logic functions), External trip signals via binary input. In both cases, the breaker failure protection checks the continuation of current flow. Additionally, the breaker position (read from the auxiliary contact) can be checked. The current criterion is fulfilled if at least one of the three phase currents exceeds a set threshold value: %UHDNHU 6 ,! or %UHDNHU 6 ,!, depending on the side to which the breaker failure protection is assigned, see also Subsection 2.1.2 under margin Circuit Breaker Status (page 27). Processing of the auxiliary contact criterion depends on which auxiliary contacts are available and how they are arranged to the binary inputs of the device. If both the normally closed (NC) as well as the normally open (NO) auxiliary contacts are available, an intermediate position of the breaker can be detected. In this case, disappearance of the current flow is always the only criterion for the breaker response. Initiation can be blocked via the binary input !%/2&. %NU)DLO (e.g. during testing of the feeder protection relay). Delay Time and Breaker Failure Trip For each of the two sources, a unique pickup message is generated, a unique time delay is initiated, and a unique tripping signal is generated. The setting value for the delay applies to both sources. When the associated time has elapsed, trip command is issued. The two commands are combined with an ORgate and form the output information %UN)DLOXUH 75,3 which is used to trip the adjacent breakers so that the fault current will be interrupted. The adjacent breakers are those which can feed the same busbar or busbar section to which the breaker is connected.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

153

2 Functions

&#8ux7SF8PIU68U PAA 1 PI

&
CB open configured CB closed configured

Error

& & &

FNo 411 >CB1 3p Open FNo 410 >CB1 3p Closed

&
=

& 1

& &
Internal initiation source

FNo 1456 BkrFail int PU

&$USDQUvr
Device Trip

& >

&

FNo 1480 BkrFail intTRIP

87Tvqr D3283
Max. of IL1, IL2, IL3

External initiation source FNo 1457 BkrFail ext PU

&$USDQUvr
FNo 1431 >BrkFail extSRC

& &

FNo 1481 BkrFail extTRIP

87Tvqr D3283
Max. of IL1, IL2, IL3

>
FNo 1471 BrkFailure TRIP

FNo 1403 >BLOCK BkrFail

Meas. release FNo 1452 BkrFail BLOCK

& 7S@6F@SA6DGVS@ PI 1 PAA

FNo 1453 BkrFail ACTIVE FNo 1451 BkrFail OFF

Figure 2-82

Logic diagram of the breaker failure protection, illustrated for side 1

154

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.11 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection

2.11.2 Setting the Function Parameters

General With the determination of the functional scope (Subsection 2.1.1) in address  %5($.(5 )$,/85(, it was defined to which side of the protected object the circuit breaker failure protection shall operate. Please make sure that the measuring point of the current and the supervised circuit breaker are assigned to the same side! Both must be located at the supply side of the protected object. The breaker failure protection is switched 2)) or 21 under address  %5($.(5 )$,/85(. Initiation Current flow monitoring uses the values set in the Power System Data 1 (Subsection 2.1.2 under margin Circuit Breaker Status, page 27). Depending on the side of the protected object to which the breaker failure protection is assigned, address  %UHDNHU 6 ,! or address  %UHDNHU 6 ,! is decisive. Normally, the breaker failure protection evaluates the current flow criterion as well as the position of the breaker auxiliary contact(s). If the auxiliary contact(s) status is not available in the device, this criterion cannot be processed. In this case, set address  &KN %5. &217$&7 to 12. Time delay The delay times are determined from the maximum operating time of the feeder circuit breaker, the reset time of the current detectors of the breaker failure protection, plus a safety margin which allows for any tolerance of the delay timers. The time sequence is illustrated in Figure 2-83. For the reset time, 11/2 cycle can be assumed. The time delay is set under address  75,37LPHU.

Fault inception Normal fault clearance time Prot. trip CB operating time Reset CB I> Initiation breaker failure protection Time delay TBF of breaker failure protection CB operating time (adjacent CBs) Safety margin

Total fault clearance time with breaker failure

Figure 2-83

Time sequence example for normal clearance of a fault, and with circuit breaker failure

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

155

2 Functions

2.11.3 Setting Overview

The following list indicates the setting ranges and the default settings of a rated secondary current IN = 1 A. For a rated secondary current of IN = 5 A, these values must be multiplied by 5. When setting the device using primary values, the current transformer ratios have to be taken into consideration.
Addr. 7001 7004 7005 Setting Title BREAKER FAILURE Chk BRK CONTACT TRIP-Timer OFF ON OFF ON 0.06..60.00 sec; Setting Options Default Setting OFF OFF 0.25 sec Comments Breaker Failure Protection Check Breaker contacts TRIP-Timer

2.11.4 Information Overview

F.No. 01403 >BLOCK BkrFail

Alarm >BLOCK Breaker failure

Comments

01431 >BrkFail extSRC 01451 BkrFail OFF 01452 BkrFail BLOCK 01453 BkrFail ACTIVE 01456 BkrFail int PU 01457 BkrFail ext PU 01471 BrkFailure TRIP 01480 BkrFail intTRIP 01481 BkrFail extTRIP 01488 BkrFail Not av.

>Breaker failure initiated externally Breaker failure is switched OFF Breaker failure is BLOCKED Breaker failure is ACTIVE Breaker failure (internal) PICKUP Breaker failure (external) PICKUP Breaker failure TRIP Breaker failure (internal) TRIP Breaker failure (external) TRIP Breaker failure Not aval. for this obj.

156

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.12 Processing of External Signals

2.12

Processing of External Signals

2.12.1 Function Description

External Trip Commands Two desired trip signals from external protection or supervision units can be incorporated into the processing of the differential protection 7UT612. The signals are coupled into the device via binary inputs. Like the internal protection and supervision signals, the can be annunciated, delayed, transmitted to the output trip relays, and blocked. This allows to include mechanical protective devices (e.g. pressure switch, Buchholz protection) in the processing of 7UT612. The minimum trip command duration set for all protective functions are also valid for these external trip commands. (Subsection 2.1.2 under Trip Command Duration, page 27, address $). Figure 2-84 shows the logic diagram of one of these external trip commands. Two of these functions are available. The function numbers FNo are illustrated for the external trip command 1.

FNo 04536

Ext 1 picked up
FNo 04526

 U9@G6`

>Ext trip 1

&

FNo 04537

Ext 1 Gen. TRIP

FNo 04532

FNo 04523

>BLOCK Ext 1

Ext 1 BLOCKED

Figure 2-84

Logic diagram of external trip feature illustrated for External Trip 1

Transformer Messages

In addition to the external trip commands as described above, some typical messages from power transformers can be incorporated into the processing of the 7UT612 via binary inputs. This prevents the user from creating user specified annunciations. These messages are the Buchholz alarm, Buchholz trip and Buchholz tank alarm as well as gassing alarm of the oil.

Blocking Signal for External Faults

Sometimes for transformers so-called sudden pressure relays (SPR) are installed in the tank which are meant to switch off the transformer in case of a sudden pressure increase. Not only transformer failures but also high traversing fault currents originating from external faults can lead to a pressure increase. External faults are quickly recognized by 7UT612 (refer also to Subsection 2.2.1, margin heading Add-on Stabilization during External Fault, page 36). A blocking signal can be created by means of a CFC logic in order to prevent from erroneous trip of the SPR. Such a logic can be created according to Figure 2-85, for example.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

157

2 Functions

"IN: 7ypxThG

TQ" "IN: 7ypxThG!TQ" "IN: 7ypxThG"TQ"

PS PS PSBhr 7PY 7PY! 7PY"

QG8 f7@6 $ `7P

"OUT: 7ypxTQSDTQ"

Figure 2-85

CFC chart for blocking of a pressure sensor during external fault

2.12.2 Setting the Function Parameters

General The direct external trip functions are only enabled if addresses  (;7 75,3  and/or  (;7 75,3  are set to (QDEOHG in the relay configuration (Subsection 2.1.1). In addresses  (;7(51 75,3  and  (;7(51 75,3  functions can be set to 21 or 2)) apart from each other. And, if required, only the trip command can be blocked (%ORFN UHOD\). Signals included from outside can be stabilized by means of a delay time and thus increase the dynamic margin against interference signals. For external trip function 1 settings are done in address  7 '(/$<, for external trip function 2 in address  7 '(/$<.

2.12.3 Setting Overview

Addr. 8601 8602 8701 8702

Setting Title EXTERN TRIP 1 T DELAY EXTERN TRIP 2 T DELAY ON OFF

Setting Options

Default Setting OFF 1.00 sec OFF 1.00 sec

Comments External Trip Function 1 Ext. Trip 1 Time Delay External Trip Function 2 Ext. Trip 2 Time Delay

0.00..60.00 sec; ON OFF 0.00..60.00 sec;

158

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.12 Processing of External Signals

2.12.4 Information Overview

F.No. 04523 >BLOCK Ext 1 04526 >Ext trip 1 04531 Ext 1 OFF 04532 Ext 1 BLOCKED 04533 Ext 1 ACTIVE 04536 Ext 1 picked up 04537 Ext 1 Gen. TRIP 04543 >BLOCK Ext 2 04546 >Ext trip 2 04551 Ext 2 OFF 04552 Ext 2 BLOCKED 04553 Ext 2 ACTIVE 04556 Ext 2 picked up 04557 Ext 2 Gen. TRIP F.No. 00390 >Gas in oil 00391 >Buchh. Warn 00392 >Buchh. Trip 00393 >Buchh. Tank

Alarm >Block external trip 1 >Trigger external trip 1

Comments

External trip 1 is switched OFF External trip 1 is BLOCKED External trip 1 is ACTIVE External trip 1: General picked up External trip 1: General TRIP >BLOCK external trip 2 >Trigger external trip 2 External trip 2 is switched OFF External trip 2 is BLOCKED External trip 2 is ACTIVE External trip 2: General picked up External trip 2: General TRIP Alarm Comments >Warning stage from gas in oil detector >Warning stage from Buchholz protection >Tripp. stage from Buchholz protection >Tank supervision from Buchh. protect.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

159

2 Functions

2.13

Monitoring Functions
The device incorporates comprehensive monitoring functions which cover both hardware and software; the measured values are continuously checked for plausibility, so that the CT circuits are also included in the monitoring system to a large extent. Furthermore, binary inputs are available for supervision of the trip circuit.

2.13.1 Function Description

2.13.1.1 Hardware Monitoring The complete hardware including the measurement inputs and the output relays is monitored for faults and inadmissible states by monitoring circuits and by the processor. Auxiliary and Reference Voltages The processor voltage is monitored by the hardware as the processor cannot operate if the voltage drops below the minimum value. In that case, the device is not operational. When the correct voltage has re-established the processor system is restarted. Failure or switch-off of the supply voltage sets the system out of operation; this status is signalled by a fail-safe contact. Transient dips in supply voltage will not disturb the function of the relay (see also Subsection 4.1.2 in the Technical Data). The processor monitors the offset and the reference voltage of the ADC (analog-todigital converter). In case of inadmissible deviations the protection is blocked; persistent faults are signalled. Back-up Battery The back-up battery guarantees that the internal clock continues to work and that metered values and alarms are stored if the auxiliary voltage fails. The charge level of the battery is checked regularly. If the voltage drops below the permissible minimum the alarm )DLO %DWWHU\ is output. All working memories (RAMs) are checked during start-up. If a fault occurs, the start is aborted and an LED starts flashing. During operation the memories are checked with the help of their checksum. For the program memory (EPROM), the cross-check sum is cyclically generated and compared to a stored reference program cross-check sum. For the parameter memory (EEPROM), the cross-check sum is cyclically generated and compared to the cross-check sum that is refreshed after each parameterization change. If a fault occurs the processor system is restarted.

Memory Modules

160

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.13 Monitoring Functions

Sampling Frequency

The sampling frequency is continuously monitored. If deviations cannot be corrected by another synchronization, the device sets itself out of operation and the red LED Blocked lights up; the Device OK relay drops off and signals the malfunction by its healthy status contact.

2.13.1.2 Software Monitoring Watchdog For continuous monitoring of the program sequences, a watchdog timer is provided in the hardware (hardware watchdog) which will reset and completely restart the processor system in the event of processor failure or if a program falls out of step. A further software watchdog ensures that any error in the processing of the programs will be recognized. Such errors also lead to a reset of the processor. If such an error is not eliminated by restarting, another restart attempt is initiated. If the fault is still present after three restart attempts within 30 s, the protection system will take itself out of service, and the red LED Blocked lights up. The Device OK relay drops off and signals the malfunction by its healthy status contact.

2.13.1.3 Monitoring of Measured Quantities The device detects and signals most of the interruptions, short-circuits, or wrong connections in the secondary circuits of current transformers (an important commissioning aid). For this the measured values are checked in background routines at cyclic intervals, as long as no pickup condition exists. Current Balance In healthy network operation it can be expected that the currents will be approximately balanced. The monitoring of the measured values in the device checks this balance for each side of a three-phase object. For this the lowest phase current is set in relation to the highest. An unbalance is detected, e.g. for side 1, when |Imin | / |Imax | Imax / IN < %$/ )$&7 , 6 provided that > %$/ , /,0,7 6 / IN

Imax is the highest, Imin the lowest of the three phase currents. The balance factor %$/ )$&7 , 6 represets the degree of unbalance of the phase currents, the limiting value %$/ , /,0,7 6 is the lower threshold of the operating range of this monitoring function (see Figure 2-86). Both parameters can be set. The resetting ratio is approx. 97 %.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

161

2 Functions

Imin IN

Slope:

76GA68UPSD

AhvyDihyhpr

76GDGDHDU
Figure 2-86 Current balance monitoring

Imax IN

Current balance monitoring is available separate for each side of the protected object. It has no meaning with single-phase busbar protection and does not operate in this case. Unsymmetrical condition is indicated for the corresponding side with the alarm )DLO ,V\P  (FNo ) or )DLO ,V\P  (FNo ). The common message )DLO , EDODQFH (FNo ) appears in both cases. Phase Sequence To detect swapped connections in the current input circuits, the direction of rotation of the phase currents for three-phase application is checked. Therefore the sequence of the zero crossings of the currents (having the same sign) is checked for each side of the protected object. For single-phase differential busbar protection and single-phase transformers this function would not be of any use and is thus disabled. Especially the unbalanced load protection requires clockwise rotation. If rotation in the protected object is reverse, this must be considered for the configuration of the Power System Data 1 (Subsection 2.1.2, margin heading Phase sequence). Phase rotation is checked by supervising the phase sequence of the currents. IL1 before IL2 before IL3 Supervision of current rotation requires a maximum current of |IL1|, |IL2|, |IL3| > 0.5 IN. If the rotation measured differs from the rotation set, the annunciation )DLO3K6HT , 6 (FNo ) or )DLO3K6HT , 6 (FNo ) is output. At the same time, the following annunciation appears: )DLO 3K 6HT , (FNo ).

2.13.1.4 Trip Circuit Supervision The differential protection relay 7UT612 is equipped with an integrated trip circuit supervision. Depending on the number of available binary inputs that are not connected to a common potential, supervision modes with one or two binary inputs can be selected. If the allocation of the necessary binary inputs does not comply with the selected monitoring mode, an alarm is given.

162

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.13 Monitoring Functions

Supervision Using Two Binary Inputs

If two binary inputs are used, they are connected according to Figure 2-87, one in parallel to the assigned command relay contact of the protection and the other parallel to the circuit breaker auxiliary contact. A precondition for the use of the trip circuit supervision is that the control voltage for the circuit breaker is higher than the total of the minimum voltages drops at the two binary inputs (UCtrl > 2UBImin). As at least 19 V are needed at each binary input, supervision can be used with a control voltage higher than 38 V.

L+

UCtrl UBI1 7UT612

7UT612

AI%'$! AI%'$"

>TripC trip rel

TR

>TripC brk rel.

Legend: TR CB TC Aux.1 Aux.2 UCtrl UBI1 UBI2 Trip relay contact Circuit breaker Circuit breaker trip coil Circuit breaker auxiliary contact (make) Circuit breaker auxiliary contact (break)

UBI2

CB

TC

Aux.1

Aux.2

Control voltage (trip voltage) Input voltage of 1st binary input Input voltage of 2nd binary input

L
Figure 2-87

Note: The diagram shows the circuit breaker in closed state.

Principle of the trip circuit supervision with two binary inputs

Depending on the state of the trip relay and the circuit breakers auxiliary contact, the binary inputs are triggered (logic state H in Table 2-6) or short-circuited (logic state L). A state in which both binary inputs are not activated (L) is only possible in intact trip circuits for a short transition period (trip relay contact closed but circuit breaker not yet open). This state is only permanent in the event of interruptions or short-circuits in the trip circuit or a battery voltage failure. Therefore, this state is the supervision criterion.

Table 2-6 No 1 2 3 4

Status table of the binary inputs depending on TR and CB Trip relay open open closed closed Circuit breaker CLOSED OPEN CLOSED OPEN Aux.1 closed open closed open Aux.2 open closed open closed BI 1 H H L L BI 2 L H L H

The states of the two binary inputs are interrogated periodically, approximately every 500 ms. Only after n = 3 of these consecutive state queries have detected a fault an

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

163

2 Functions

alarm is given (see Figure 2-88). These repeated measurements result in a delay of this alarm and thus avoid that an alarm is given during short-time transient periods. After the fault is removed in the trip circuit, the fault message is reset automatically after the same time delay.

AI%'$!
>TripC trip rel

AI%'$"
>TripC brk rel.

&

AI%'%$ FAIL: Trip cir.

T approx. 1 to 2 s

Figure 2-88

Logic diagram of the trip circuit supervision with two binary inputs

Supervision Using One Binary Input

The binary input is connected in parallel to the respective command relay contact of the protection device according to Figure 2-89. The circuit breaker auxiliary contact is bridged with the help of a high-ohmic substitute resistor R. The control voltage for the circuit breaker should be at least twice as high as the minimum voltage drop at the binary input (UCtrl > 2UBImin). Since at least 19 V are necessary for the binary input, this supervision can be used with a control voltage higher than 38 V. An calculation example for the substitute resistance of R is shown in Subsection 3.1.2, margin Trip Circuit Supervision.

L+

UCtrl UBI 7UT612

7UT612

AI%'$!

>TripC trip rel

TR
Legend: TR CB TC Aux.1 Aux.2 R UCrtl UBI UR Trip relay contact Circuit breaker Circuit breaker trip coil Circuit breaker auxiliary contact (make) Circuit breaker auxiliary contact (break) Substitute resistor

R
UR

CB

TC

Aux.1

Aux.2

Control voltage (trip voltage) Input voltage of binary input Voltage across the substitute resistor

L
Figure 2-89

Note: The diagram shows the circuit breaker in closed state.

Principle of the trip circuit supervision with one binary input

In normal operation the binary input is energized when the trip relay contact is open and the trip circuit is healthy (logic state H), as the monitoring circuit is closed via the auxiliary contact (if the circuit breaker is closed) or via the substitute resistor R. The binary input is short-circuited and thus deactivated only as long as the tripping relay is closed (logic state L). If the binary input is permanently deactivated during operation, an interruption in the trip circuit or a failure of the (trip) control voltage can be assumed.

164

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.13 Monitoring Functions

As the trip circuit supervision is not operative during a system fault condition (pickedup status of the device), the closed trip contact does not lead to an alarm. If, however, the trip contacts of other devices are connected in parallel, the alarm must be delayed (see also Figure 2-90). After the fault in the trip circuit is removed, the alarm is reset automatically after the same time.

AI%'$!
>TripC trip rel Gen Fault Detection
T approx. 300 s

&

AI%'%$ FAIL: Trip cir.

Figure 2-90

Logic diagram of the trip circuit supervision with one binary input

2.13.1.5 Fault Reactions Depending on the kind of fault detected, an alarm is given, the processor is restarted or the device is taken out of operation. If the fault is still present after three restart attempts the protection system will take itself out of service and indicate this condition by drop-off of the Device OK relay, thus indicating the device failure. The red LED Blocked on the device front lights up, provided that there is an internal auxiliary voltage, and the green LED RUN goes off. If the internal auxiliary voltage supply fails, all LEDs are dark. Table 2-7 shows a summary of the monitoring functions and the fault reactions of the device.

Table 2-7

Summary of the fault reactions of the device Possible causes External (aux. voltage) Internal (converter) Internal (converter or sampling) internal (offset) Fault reaction Device out of operation alarm, if possible Protection out of operation, alarm Protection out of operation, alarm Device out of operation Restart attempt 1) Restart attempt 1), Restart abort device out of operation Restart attempt 1) Restart attempt 1) Alarm All LEDs dark LED ERROR (UURU $'FRQY LED ERROR (UURU 2IIVHW LED ERROR LED ERROR LED flashes DOK Output
2)

Supervision Auxiliary voltage failure Measured value acquisition

drops off

DOK2) drops off DOK2) drops off DOK2) drops off DOK2) drops off DOK2) drops off

Hardware watchdog Internal (processor failure) Software watchdog Working memory Internal (program flow) Internal (RAM)

Program memory Parameter memory

1) 2)

Internal (EPROM) Internal (EEPROM or RAM)

LED ERROR LED ERROR

DOK2) drops off DOK2) drops off

After three unsuccessful attempts the device is put out of operation DOK = Device OK relay

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

165

2 Functions

Table 2-7

Summary of the fault reactions of the device Possible causes 1/5/0.1 A jumper wrong Fault reaction Alarms Protection out of operation Alarm Using default values Alarm Alarm Alarms Protection out of operation Alarm No overload protection with RTD Alarm (UURU$$ZURQJ LED ERROR $ODUP 12 FDOLEU )DLO %DWWHU\ &ORFN 6\QF(UURU (UURU %RDUG ... and if applicable (UURU $'FRQY )DLO 57'%R[  or )DLO 57'%R[ 
2

Supervision 1 A/5 A/0.1 A setting Calibration data Backup battery Time clock Modules

Output DOK ) drops off

Internal (device not calibrated) Internal (backup battery) Time synchronization Module does not comply with ordering number Thermobox not connected or number does not match External (system or current transformers) External (system or connections) External (trip circuit or control voltage)

as allocated as allocated as allocated DOK2) drops off

Thermobox connection Current symmetry

as allocated

Alarm with identification )DLO ,V\P  or of the side )DLO ,V\P , )DLO , EDODQFH Alarm with identification )DLO3K6HT , 6 or of the side )DLO3K6HT , 6, )DLO 3K 6HT , Alarm )$,/ 7ULS FLU

as allocated

Phase sequence

as allocated

Trip circuit supervision

1) 2)

as allocated

After three unsuccessful attempts the device is put out of operation DOK = Device OK relay

2.13.1.6 Group Alarms Certain messages of the monitoring functions are already combined to group alarms. Table 2-8 shows an overview of these group alarms an their composition.

Table 2-8

Group alarms Group alarm Designation Failure I Supervision

(Measured value supervision without consequences on protection functions)

FNo 00161

FNo 00571 00572 00265 00266 00161 00068 00177 00193 00198 00199

Composed of Designation Fail. Isym 1 Fail. Isym 2 FailPh.Seq I S1 FailPh.Seq I S2 Fail I Superv. Clock SyncError Fail Battery Alarm NO calibr Err. Module B Err. Module C

00160

Alarm Sum Event

(Failures or configuration errors without consequences on protection functions)

166

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.13 Monitoring Functions

Table 2-8

Group alarms Group alarm Designation Failure measured values

(Fatal configuration or measured value errors with blocking of all protection functions)

FNo

FNo 00181 00190 00183 00192 00161 00191 00264 00267

Composed of Designation Error A/D-conv. Error Board 0 Error Board 1 Error1A/5Awrong Fail I Superv. Error Offset Fail: RTD-Box 1 Fail: RTD-Box 2

00140

Error Sum Alarm

(Problems which can lead to part blocking of protection functions)

2.13.1.7 Setting Errors If setting of the configuration and function parameters is carried out according to the order they appear in this chapter, conflicting settings may be avoided. Nevertheless, changes made in settings, during allocation of binary inputs and outputs or during assignment of measuring inputs may lead to inconsistencies endangering proper operation of protective and supplementary functions. The device 7UT612 checks settings for inconsistencies and reports them. For instance, the restricted earth fault protection cannot be applied if there is no measuring input for the starpoint current between the starpoint of the protected object and the earth electrode. These inconsistencies are output with the operational and spontaneous annunciations. Table 3-10 (Subsection 3.3.4, page 227) gives an overview.

2.13.2 Setting the Function Parameters

The sensitivity of the measurement supervision can be altered. Experiential values set ex works are sufficient in most cases. If an extremely high operational unbalance of the currents is to be expected in the specific application, or if during operation monitoring functions are operated sporadically, the relevant parameters should be set less sensitive. Measured Value Supervision The symmetry supervision can be switched 21 or 2)) in address  %$/$1&( ,. In address  3+$6( 527$7,21 phase rotation supervision can be set to 21 or 2)). Address  %$/ , /,0,7 6 determines the threshold current for side 1 above which the current balance supervision is effective (also see Figure 2-86). Address  %$/ )$&7 , 6 is the associated balance factor, i.e. the gradient of the balance characteristic (Figure 2-86).

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

167

2 Functions
Address  %$/ , /,0,7 6 determines the threshold current for side 1 above which the current balance supervision is effective (also see Figure 2-86). Address  %$/ )$&7 , 6 is the associated balance factor, i.e. the gradient of the balance characteristic (Figure 2-86). Trip Circuit Supervision When address  7ULS &LU 6XS was configured (Subsection 2.1.1), the number of binary inputs per trip circuit was set. If the trip circuit supervision function is not used at all, 'LVDEOHG is set there. If the routing of the binary inputs required for this does not comply with the selected supervision mode, an alarm is output (7ULS& 3URJ )DLO). The trip circuit supervision can be switched 21 or 2)) in address  75,3 &LU 683.

2.13.3 Setting Overview

The following list indicates the setting ranges and the default settings of a rated secondary current IN = 1 A. For a rated secondary current of IN = 5 A, these values must be multiplied by 5. When setting the device using primary values, the current transformer ratios have to be taken into consideration.

Addr. 8101 8102 8111 8112 8121 8122

Setting Title BALANCE I ON OFF

Setting Options

Default Setting OFF OFF 0.50 A 0.50 0.50 A 0.50

Comments Current Balance Supervision Phase Rotation Supervision Current Balance Monitor Side 1 Balance Factor for Current Monitor S1 Current Balance Monitor Side 2 Balance Factor for Current Monitor S2 Comments TRIP Circuit Supervision

PHASE ROTATION ON OFF BAL. I LIMIT S1 BAL. FACT. I S1 BAL. I LIMIT S2 BAL. FACT. I S2 0.10..1.00 A 0.10..0.90 0.10..1.00 A 0.10..0.90

Addr. 8201

Setting Title TRIP Cir. SUP. ON OFF

Setting Options

Default Setting OFF

168

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.13 Monitoring Functions

2.13.4 Information Overview

F.No. 00161 Fail I Superv. 00163 Fail I balance 00571 Fail. Isym 1 00572 Fail. Isym 2 00175 Fail Ph. Seq. I 00265 FailPh.Seq I S1 00266 FailPh.Seq I S2 Alarm Comments Failure: General Current Supervision Failure: Current Balance Fail.: Current symm. supervision side 1 Fail.: Current symm. supervision side 2 Failure: Phase Sequence Current Failure: Phase Sequence I side 1 Failure: Phase Sequence I side 2

F.No. SysIntErr. Error FMS1 Error FMS2 00110 Event Lost 00113 Flag Lost

Alarm Error Systeminterface Error FMS FO 1 Error FMS FO 2 Event lost Flag Lost Error with a summary alarm Error: A/D converter Error Board 0 Error Board 1

Comments

00140 Error Sum Alarm 00181 Error A/D-conv. 00190 Error Board 0 00183 Error Board 1 00192 Error1A/5Awrong 00191 Error Offset 00264 Fail: RTD-Box 1 00267 Fail: RTD-Box 2 00160 Alarm Sum Event 00193 Alarm NO calibr 00177 Fail Battery 00068 Clock SyncError 00198 Err. Module B 00199 Err. Module C

Error:1A/5Ajumper different from setting Error: Offset Failure: RTD-Box 1 Failure: RTD-Box 2 Alarm Summary Event Alarm: NO calibration data available Failure: Battery empty Clock Synchronization Error Error: Communication Module B Error: Communication Module C

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

169

2 Functions

F.No. 06851 >BLOCK TripC 06852 >TripC trip rel 06853 >TripC brk rel. 06861 TripC OFF

Alarm

Comments >BLOCK Trip circuit supervision >Trip circuit supervision: trip relay >Trip circuit supervision: breaker relay Trip circuit supervision OFF Trip circuit supervision is BLOCKED Trip circuit supervision is ACTIVE Trip Circuit blk. Bin. input is not set Failure Trip Circuit

06862 TripC BLOCKED 06863 TripC ACTIVE 06864 TripC ProgFail 06865 FAIL: Trip cir.

170

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.14 Protection Function Control

2.14

Protection Function Control

The function control is the control centre of the device. It coordinates the sequence of the protection and ancillary functions, processes their decisions and the information coming from the power system. Among these are processing of the circuit breaker position, fault detection/pickup logic, tripping logic.

2.14.1 Fault Detection Logic of the Entire Device

General Pickup The fault detection logic combines the pickup signals of all protection functions. The pickup signals are combined with OR and lead to a general pickup of the device. It is signalled with the alarm 5HOD\ 3,&.83. If no protection function of the device has picked up any longer, 5HOD\ 3,&.83 disappears (message: *RLQJ). The general pickup is the precondition for a number of internal and external consequential functions. Among these functions, which are controlled by the general pickup, are: Start of a fault log: All fault messages are entered into the trip log from the beginning of the general pickup to the dropout. Initialization of the fault recording: The recording and storage of fault wave forms can additionally be made subject to the presence of a trip command. Creation of spontaneous displays: Certain fault messages can be displayed as so called spontaneous displays (see Spontaneous Displays below). This display can additionally be made subject to the presence of a trip command. External functions can be controlled via an output contact. Examples are: Further additional devices or similar. Spontaneous Displays Spontaneous displays are alarms that are displayed automatically after a general pickup of the device or after the trip command of the device. In the case of 7UT612 they are the following: 5HOD\ 3,&.83: pickup of any protection function with phase indication; 5HOD\ 75,3: 38 7LPH: 75,3 7LPH: trip of any protection function; the operating time from the general pickup to the dropout of the device, the time is given in ms; the operating time from the general pickup to the first trip command of the device, the time is given in ms.

Note, that the overload protection does not have a pickup comparable to the other protective functions. The general device pickup time is started with the trip signal, which starts the trip log.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

171

2 Functions

2.14.2 Tripping Logic of the Entire Device

General Tripping All tripping signals of the protection functions are combined with logical OR and lead to the alarm 5HOD\ 75,3. This can be allocated to an LED or output relay as can be each of the individual trip commands. It is suitable as general trip information as well as used for the output of trip commands to the circuit breaker. Once a trip command is activated, it is stored separately for each side of the protected object (Figure 2-91). At the same time a minimum trip command duration 70LQ 75,3 &0' is started to ensure that the command is sent to the circuit breaker long enough if the tripping protection function should drop off too quickly or if the breaker of the feeding end operates faster. The trip commands cannot be terminated until the last protection function has dropped off (no function activated) AND the minimum trip command duration is over. A further condition for terminating the trip command is that the circuit breaker is recognized to be open. The current through the tripped breaker must have fallen below the value that corresponds to the setting value %UHDNHU 6 ,! (address  for side 1), or %UHDNHU 6 ,! (address  for side 2), refer to Circuit Breaker Status in Subsection 2.1.2, page 27) plus 10 % of the fault current.

Terminating the Trip Command

FNo 00511

Trip commands
(from protection functions)

S CB open & R

Relay TRIP

UHvUSDQ8H9 !'

&

Figure 2-91

Storage and termination of the trip command

Reclosure Interlocking

When tripping the circuit breaker by a protection function the manual reclosure must often be blocked until the cause for the protection function operation is found. Using the user-configurable logic functions (CFC) an automatic reclosure interlocking function can be created. The default setting of 7UT612 offers a pre-defined CFC logic which stores the trip command of the device until the command is acknowledged manually. The CFC-block is illustrated in Appendix A.5, margin heading Preset CFC Charts (page 306). The internal output *753 4XLW must be additionally assigned to the tripping output relays which are to be sealed. Acknowledgement is done via binary input !4XLW*753. With default configuration, press function key F4 at the device front to acknowledge the stored trip command. If the reclosure interlocking function is not required, delete the allocation between the internal single-point indication *753 4XLW and the source CFC in the configuration matrix.

172

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.14 Protection Function Control

No Trip no Flag

The storage of fault messages allocated to local LEDs and the availability of spontaneous displays can be made dependent on the device sending a trip command. Fault event information is then not output when one or more protection functions have picked up due to a fault but no tripping occurred because the fault was removed by another device (e.g. on a different feeder). The information is thus limited to faults on the protected line (so-called no trip no flag feature). Figure 2-92 shows the logic diagram of this function.

 Ay9vG@9G89 UhtrQV

1

UhtrUSDQ

Device TRIP Device dropoff

&

Reset LED and spontaneous displays

Figure 2-92

Logic diagram of the notripnoflag feature (command-dependent alarms)

CB Operation Statistics

The number of trips caused by the device 7UT612 is counted. Furthermore, the current interrupted for each pole is acquired, provided as an information and accumulated in a memory. The levels of these counted values are buffered against auxiliary voltage failure. They can be set to zero or to any other initial value. For further information refer to the SIPROTEC 4 System Manual, order no. E50417H1176C151.

2.14.3 Setting the Function Parameters

The parameters for the tripping logic of the entire device and the circuit breaker test have already been set in Subsection 2.1.2. Address  )OW'LVS/('/&' still decides whether the alarms that are allocated to local LEDs and the spontaneous displays that appear on the local display after a fault should be displayed on every pickup of a protection function (7DUJHW RQ 38) or whether they should be stored only when a tripping command is given (7DUJHW RQ 75,3).

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

173

2 Functions

2.14.4 Setting Overview

Addr. 7110

Setting Title FltDisp.LED/LCD

Setting Options

Default Setting

Comments

Display Targets on every Display Targets on Fault Display on LED / LCD Pickup every Pickup Display Targets on TRIP only

2.14.5 Information Overview

F.No. 00003 >Time Synch 00005 >Reset LED 00060 Reset LED 00015 >Test mode Test mode 00016 >DataStop DataStop UnlockDT >Light on 00051 Device OK 00052 ProtActive 00055 Reset Device 00056 Initial Start 00067 Resume

Alarm

Comments >Synchronize Internal Real Time Clock >Reset LED Reset LED >Test mode Test mode >Stop data transmission Stop data transmission Unlock data transmission via BI >Back Light on Device is Operational and Protecting At Least 1 Protection Funct. is Active Reset Device Initial Start of Device Resume Daylight Saving Time Clock Synchronization Setting calculation is running Settings Check Level-2 change Frequency out of range Chatter ON Hardware Test Mode

00069 DayLightSavTime SynchClock 00070 Settings Calc. 00071 Settings Check 00072 Level-2 change 00109 Frequ. o.o.r. 00125 Chatter ON HWTestMod

174

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.15 Ancillary Functions

2.15

Ancillary Functions
The auxiliary functions of the 7UT612 relay include: processing of messages, processing of operational measured values, storage of fault record data.

2.15.1 Processing of Messages

2.15.1.1 General For the detailed fault analysis, the information regarding the reaction of the protection device and the measured values following a system fault are of interest. For this purpose, the device provides information processing which operates in a threefold manner: Indicators (LEDs) and Binary Outputs (Output Relays) Important events and states are indicated with optical indicators (LED) on the front plate. The device furthermore has output relays for remote indication. Most of the signals and indications can be marshalled, i.e. routing can be changed from the presetting with delivery. The procedure is described in detail in the SIPROTEC 4 system manual, order no. E50417H1176C151. The state of the delivered relay (presetting) is listed in Section A.5 of the Appendix The output relays and the LEDs may be operated in a latched or unlatched mode (each may be individually set). The latched state is saved against loss of auxiliary supply. It is reset: locally by operation of the key LED reset on the front of the device, from remote via a binary input, via one of the serial interfaces, automatically on detection of a new fault. Condition messages should not be latched. Also, they cannot be reset until the condition to be reported has reset. This applies to e.g. messages from monitoring functions, or similar. A green LED indicates that the device is in service (RUN); it can not be reset. It extinguishes if the self-monitoring of the microprocessor recognizes a fault or if the auxiliary supply fails. In the event that the auxiliary supply is available while there is an internal device failure, the red LED (ERROR) is illuminated and the device is blocked. The binary inputs, outputs, and LEDs of a SIPROTEC4 device can be individually and precisely checked using DIGSI 4. This feature is used to verify wiring from the device to plant equipment during commissioning (refer also to Subsection 3.3.3).

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

175

2 Functions

Information on the Integrated Display (LCD) or to a Personal Computer

Events and states can be obtained from the LCD on the front plate of the device. A personal computer can be connected to the front interface or the service interface for retrieval of information. In the quiescent state, i.e. as long as no system fault is present, the LCD can display selectable operational information (overview of the operational measured values). In the event of a system fault, information regarding the fault, the so-called spontaneous displays, are displayed instead. The quiescent state information is displayed again once the fault messages have been acknowledged. The acknowledgement is identical to the resetting of the LEDs (see above). The device in addition has several event buffers for operational messages, switching statistics, etc., which are saved against loss of auxiliary supply by means of a battery buffer. These messages can be displayed on the LCD at any time by selection via the keypad or transferred to a personal computer via the serial service or PC interface. The retrieval of events/alarms during operation is extensively described in the SIPROTEC 4 System Manual, order no. E50417H1176C151. With a PC and the protection data processing program DIGSI 4 it is also possible to retrieve and display the events with the convenience of visualisation on a monitor and a menu-guided dialogue. The data may be printed or stored for later evaluation.

Information to a Control Centre

If the device has a serial system interface, the information may additionally be transferred via this interface to a centralized control and monitoring system. Several communication protocols are available for the transfer of this information. You may test whether the information is transmitted correctly with DIGSI 4. Also the information transmitted to the control centre can be influenced during operation or tests. For on-site monitoring, the IEC protocol 608705103 offers the option to add a comment saying test mode to all annunciations and measured values transmitted to the control centre. It is then understood as the cause of annunciation and there is no doubt on the fact that messages do not derive from real disturbances. Alternatively, you may disable the transmission of annunciations to the system interface during tests (transmission block). To influence information at the system interface during test mode (test mode and transmission block) a CFC logic is required. Default settings already include this logic (see Appendix A.5, margin heading Preset CFCCharts, page 306). For information on how to enable and disable the test mode and the transmission block see for the SIPROTEC 4 System Manual E50417H1176C151.

Structure of Messages

The messages are categorized as follows: Event Log: these are operating messages that can occur during the operation of the device. They include information about the status of device functions, measurement data, system data, and similar information. Trip Log: these are fault messages from the last eight network faults that were processed by the device. Switching statistics; these messages count the trip commands initiated by the device, values of accumulated circuit currents and interrupted currents. A complete list of all message and output functions that can be generated by the device, with the associated information number (FNo), can be found in the Appendix. The lists also indicate where each message can be sent. The lists are based on a

176

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.15 Ancillary Functions

SIPROTEC 4 device with the maximum complement of functions. If functions are not present in the specific version of the device, or if they are set as 'LVDEOHG in device configuration, then the associated messages cannot appear.

2.15.1.2 Event Log (Operating Messages) Operating messages contain information that the device generates during operation and about the operation. Up to 200 operating messages are stored in chronological order in the device. New messages are added at the end of the list. If the memory has been exceeded, then the oldest message is overwritten for each new message. Operational annunciations come in automatically and can be read out from the device display or a personal computer. Faults in the power system are indicated with 1HW ZRUN )DXOW and the present fault number. The fault messages (Trip Log) contain details about the history of faults. This topic is discussed in Subsection 2.15.1.3.

2.15.1.3 Trip Log (Fault Messages) Following a system fault, it is possible to for example retrieve important information regarding its progress, such as pickup and trip. The start of the fault is time stamped with the absolute time of the internal system clock. The progress of the disturbance is output with a relative time referred to the instant of fault detection (first pickup of a protection function), so that the duration of the fault until tripping and up to reset of the trip command can be ascertained. The resolution of the time information is 1 ms. A system fault starts with the recognition of the fault by the fault detection, i.e. first pickup of any protection function, and ends with the reset of the fault detection, i.e. dropout of the last protection function, or after the expiry of the auto-reclose reclaim time, so that several unsuccessful auto-reclose cycles are also stored cohesively. Accordingly a system fault may contain several individual fault events (from fault detection up to reset of fault detection). Spontaneous Displays The spontaneous messages appear automatically in the display, after a general pickup of the device. The most important data about a fault can be viewed on the device front in the sequence shown in Figure 2-93.

'LII 3LFNXS /( 'LII 7ULS 38 7LPH  PV 75,3 7LPH  PV

Figure 2-93

Protection function that had picked up, e.g. differential protection, with phase information; Protection function that had tripped, e.g. differential protection; Elapsed time from pickup until dropoff; Elapsed time from pickup until the first trip command of a protection function.

Display of spontaneous messages in the display

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

177

2 Functions

Retrieved messages

The messages for the last eight network faults can be retrieved. Altogether up to 600 indications can be stored. Oldest data are erased for newest data when the buffer is full.

2.15.1.4 Spontaneous Annunciations Spontaneous annunciations contain information on new incoming annunciations. Each new incoming annunciation appears immediately, i.e. the user does no have to wait for an update or initiate one. This can be a useful help during operation, testing and commissioning. Spontaneous annunciations can be read out via DIGSI 4. For further information see the SIPROTEC 4 System Manual (order-no. E50417H1176C151).

2.15.1.5 General Interrogation The present condition of a SIPROTEC device can be examined by using DIGSI 4 to view the contents of the General Interrogation annunciation. All of the messages that are needed for a general interrogation are shown along with the actual values or states.

2.15.1.6 Switching Statistics The messages in switching statistics are counters for the accumulation of interrupted currents by each of the breaker poles, the number of trips issued by the device to the breakers. The interrupted currents are in primary terms. Switching statistics can be viewed on the LCD of the device, or on a PC running DIGSI 4 and connected to the operating or service interface. The counters and memories of the statistics are saved by the device. Therefore the information will not get lost in case the auxiliary voltage supply fails. The counters, however, can be reset back to zero or to any value within the setting range. A password is not required to read switching statistics; however, a password is required to change or delete the statistics. For further information see the SIPROTEC 4 System Manual (order-no. E50417H1176C151).

178

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.15 Ancillary Functions

2.15.2 Measurement during Operation

Display and Transmission of Measured Values Operating measured values are determined in the background by the processor system. They can be called up at the front of the device, read out via the operating interface using a PC with DIGSI 4, or transferred to a central master station via the system interface (if available). Precondition for a correct display of primary and percentage values is the complete and correct entry of the nominal values of the instrument transformers and the power system according to Subsection 2.1.2. Table 2-9 shows a survey of the operational measured values. The scope of measured values depends on the ordered version, the configured functions and the connection of the device. To be able to output a measured voltage 8PHDV, a measured voltage has to be connected to one of the current inputs I7 or I8 via an external series resistor. Via a userconfigurable CFC logic (CFC block Life_Zero) the current proportional to the voltage can be measured and indicated as voltage 8PHDV. For more information see the manual CFC. The apparent power 6 is not a measured value, but a value calculated from the rated voltage of the protected object which is set and the actually flowing currents of side 1: UN UN S = ----- ( I L1S1 + I L2S1 + I L3S1 ) for three-phase applications or S = ----- ( IL1S1 + I L3S1 ) 2 3 for single-phase transformers. If, however, the voltage measurement described in the previous paragraph is applied, this voltage measurement is used to calculate the apparent power. The phase angles are listed in Table 2-10, the measured thermal values in Table 211. The latter can only appear if the overload protection is set to (QDEOHG. Which measured values are available to the user also depends on the method of overload detection selected and maybe on the number of temperature detectors interconnected between device and thermobox. The operational measured values are also calculated during a running fault in intervals of approx. 0.6 s. The referred values are always based on the nominal values of the protected object (cf. also the footnotes of the tables), the temperature rise is based on the trip temperature rise. The phase angles and the temperature degrees have actually no base values. But, processing of these values in the CFC-logic or transmission via the serial interfaces requires values without dimension, therefore, base values are defined arbitrarily. These are stated in the Tables 2-10 and 2-11 in the column titled %Conversion.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

179

2 Functions

Table 2-9

Operational measured values (magnitudes primary, secondary, percent) Measured values primary A; kA A; kA A; kA A; kA A; kA A; kA A; kA A; kA A V; kV; MV kVA; MVA; GVA Hz secondary A A A A A A A A mA Hz % referred to Operating nominal current 1) Operating nominal current 1) Operating nominal current 1) Operating nominal current 1) Operating nominal current 1) Operating nominal current 1) Operating nominal current 1) Operating nominal current 1) Operating nominal current 1) 2) Rated frequency
3

IL1S1, IL2S1, IL3S1 ) Phase currents of side 1 3I0S1 3) I1S1, I2S1 3) Residual current of side 1 Positive and negative sequence component currents of side 1

IL1S2, IL2S2, IL3S2 3) Phase currents of side 2 3I0S2 3) I1S2, I2S2 3) I7 3) I1 ... I7 4) I8 Umeas 5) S f
1

Residual current of side 2 Positive and negative sequence component currents of side 2 Current at current input I7 Currents at the current inputs Current at current input I8 Voltage from current at I7 or I8 Apparent power Frequency

6)

) for transformers acc. to addresses !#, !#", and !#( (see Subsection 2.1.2) IN = SN /(3UN) or IN = SN / UN (1-phase) for generators/motors/reactors acc. to addresses !$ and !$! (see Subsection 2.1.2) IN = SN /(3UN); for busbars and lines acc. to address !%$ (see Subsection 2.1.2) 2 ) with consideration of the factor address !"$AhpD' (see Subsection 2.1.2)
3 4

) only for three-phase objects ) only for single-phase busbar protection if configured and prepared in CFC calculated from phase currents and nominal voltage or measured voltage Umeas

5) 6)

Table 2-10

Operational measured values (phase relationship) Measured values Dimension %Conversion 5) 0 = 0 % 360 = 100 % 0 = 0 % 360 = 100 % 0 = 0 % 360 = 100 % 0 = 0 % 360 = 100 %
5)

IL1S1, IL2S1, IL3S1

3)

Phase angle of the currents of side 1, towards IL1S1 Phase angle of the currents of side 2, towards IL1S1 Phase angle of the currents at the current inputs, towards I1 Phase angle of the current at the current input I7, towards I1

IL1S2, IL2S2, IL3S2 3) I1 ... I7 4) I7 3)

3) 4)

only for three-phase objects only for single-phase busbar protection

only for CFC and serial interfaces

180

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.15 Ancillary Functions

Table 2-11

Thermal values Measured values Dimension %Conversion 5) % % p.u. % % C or F C or F 0 C = 0 % 500 C = 100 % 0 F = 0 % 1000 F = 100 %
5

L1/trip, L2/trip, L3/trip ) Thermal value of each phase,

1

referred to the tripping value

/trip 1) Ag.Rate 2) 3) ResWARN 2) 3) ResALARM 2) 3) leg1,leg2, leg3 ) )
2 3

Thermal resultant value, referred to the tripping value

Relative ageing rate Load reserve to hot-spot warning (stage 1) Load reserve to hot-spot alarm (stage 2) Hot-spot temperature for each phase Temperature of the temperature detectors 1 to 12

RTD1 ... RTD12 )

3
1

) only for overload protection with thermal replica (IEC 602558): address #" UurPG8CS = FODVVLFDO (Subsection 2.1.1) 2 ) only for overload protection with hot-spot calculation (IEC 60354): address #" UurPG8CS = ,(& (Subsection 2.1.1) 3) only if thermobox(es) available (Section 2.10)

) only for CFC and serial interfaces

Differential Protection Values

The differential and restraining values of the differential protection and the restricted earth fault protection are listed in Table 2-12.

Table 2-12

Values of the differential protection Measured values % referred to Operating nominal current 1) Operating nominal current 1) Operating nominal current 1) Operating nominal current 1)

IDiffL1, IDiffL2, IDiffL3 IRestL1, IRest L2, IRest L3 IDiffEDS IRestEDS

1

Calculated differential currents of the three phases Calculated restraining currents of the three phases Calculated differential current of the restricted earth fault protection Calculated restraining current of the restricted earth fault protection

) for transformers acc. to addresses !#, !#", and !#((see Subsection 2.1.2) IN = SN /(3UN) or IN = SN / UN (1-phase); for generators/motors/reactors acc. to addresses !$ and !$! (see Subsection 2.1.2) IN = SN /(3UN); for busbars and lines acc. to address !%$ (see Subsection 2.1.2)

The IBS-Tool

The commissioning help IBS-tool offers a wide range of commissioning and monitoring functions that allows a detailed illustration of the most important measured values via a personal computer equipped with a web-browser. For more details refer to the Online Help for the IBS-tool. The Online Help can be downloaded from the INTERNET.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

181

2 Functions

This tool allows to illustrate the measured values of all ends of the protected object during commissioning and during operation. The currents appear as vector diagrams and are indicated as numerical values. Figure 2-94 shows an example. Additionally the position of the differential and restraint values can be viewed in the pickup characteristic.

Secondary Values
Currents: Side 1 +90 Currents: Side 2 +90

180

0 180

90

90

IL1LS1 = 1.01 A, IL2LS1 = 0.98 A, IL3LS1 = 0.99 A,

0.0 240.2 119.1

IL1LS2 = IL2LS2 = IL3LS2 =

0.99 A, 0.97 A, 0.98 A,

177.9 58.3 298.2

Figure 2-94

Measured values of the sides of the protected object example for through-flowing currents

User Defined Set-Points

In SIPROTEC 7UT612, set-points can be configured for measured and metered values. If, during operation, a value reaches one of these set-points, the device generates an alarm which is indicated as an operational message. As for all operational messages, it is possible to output the information to LED and/or output relay and via the serial interfaces. The set-points are supervised by the processor system in the background, so they are not suitable for protection purposes. Set-points can only be set if their measured and metered values have been configured correspondingly in CFC (see SIPROTEC 4 System Manual, ordering number E50417H1176C151).

182

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.15 Ancillary Functions

2.15.3 Fault Recording

The differential protection 7UT612 is equipped with a fault recording function. The instantaneous values of the measured quantities iL1S1, iL2S1, iL3S1, iL1S2, iL2S2, iL3S2, 3i0S1, 3i0S2, i7, i8, and IDiffL1, IDiffL2, IDiffL3, IRestL1, IRestL2, IRestL3 are sampled at 12/3 ms intervals (for a frequency of 50 Hz) and stored in a cyclic buffer (12 samples per period). When used as single-phase busbar protection, the first six feeder currents are stored instead of the phase currents, the zero sequence currents are nor applicable. During a system fault these data are stored over a time span that can be set (5 s at the longest for each fault record). Up to 8 faults can be stored. The total capacity of the fault record memory is approx. 5 s. The fault recording buffer is updated when a new fault occurs, so that acknowledging is not necessary. Fault recording can be initiated, additionally to the protection pickup, via the integrated operator panel, the serial operator interface and the serial service interface. The data can be retrieved via the serial interfaces by means of a personal computer and evaluated with the protection data processing program DIGSI 4 and the graphic analysis software SIGRA 4. The latter graphically represents the data recorded during the system fault and calculates additional information from the measured values. A selection may be made as to whether the measured quantities are represented as primary or secondary values. Binary signal traces (marks) of particular events e.g. fault detection, tripping are also represented. If the device has a serial system interface, the fault recording data can be passed on to a central device via this interface. The evaluation of the data is done by the respective programs in the central device. The measured quantities are referred to their maximum values, scaled to their rated values and prepared for graphic representation. In addition, internal events are recorded as binary traces (marks), e.g. fault detection, tripping. Where transfer to a central device is possible, the request for data transfer can be executed automatically. It can be selected to take place after each fault detection by the protection, or only after a trip.

2.15.4 Setting the Function Parameters

Measured Values In addition to the values measured directly and the measured values calculated from currents and maybe from temperatures the 7UT612 can also output the voltage and the apparent power. To get the voltage values, a voltage must be connected to the current measuring input I7 or I8 via an external series resistor. Additionally, a user-defined logic must be created in CFC (see Subsection 2.15.2, margin heading Display and Transmission of Measured Values). The apparent power is either calculated from this voltage or from the rated voltage of side 1 of the protected object and the currents of the same side. For the first case, set

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

183

2 Functions
address  32:(5 &$/&8/ to = ZLWK 9 PHDVXU, for the latter case ZLWK 9 VHWWLQJ. Waveform Capture The settings pertaining to waveform capture are found under the 26&)$8/7 5(& sub-menu of the 6(77,1*6 menu. Distinction is made between the starting instant (i.e. the instant where time tagging is T = 0) and the criterion to save the record (address  :$9()25075,**(5). With the setting 6DYH Z 3LFNXS, the starting instant and the criterion for saving are the same: the pickup of any protective element. The option 6DYH Z 75,3 means that also the pickup of a protective function starts fault recording but the record is saved only if the device issues a trip command. The final option for address  is 6WDUW Z 75,3: A trip command issued by the device is both the starting instant and the criterion to save the record. An oscillographic record includes data recorded prior to the time of trigger, and data after the dropout of the recording criterion. You determine the length of pre-trigger time and post-dropout time to be included in the fault record with the settings in Address  35( 75,* 7,0( and address  3267 5(& 7,0( The maximum length of time of a record is entered in address  0$; /(1*7+. The largest value here is 5 seconds. A total of 8 records can be saved. However the total length of time of all fault records in the buffer may not exceed 5 seconds. Once the capacity of the buffer is exceeded the oldest fault is deleted, whereas the new fault is saved in the buffer. An oscillographic record can be triggered and saved via a binary input or via the operating interface connected to a PC. The trigger is dynamic. The length of a record for these special triggers is set in address  %LQ,Q &$377,0( (upper bound is address ). Pre-trigger and post-dropout settings in Addresses  and  are included. If address  is set for , then the length of the record equals the time that the binary input is activated (static), or the 0$; /(1*7+ setting in address , whichever is shorter.

2.15.5 Setting Overview

Measured Values
Addr. 7601 Setting Title POWER CALCUL. Setting Options with V setting with V measuring Default Setting with V setting Comments Calculation of Power

Fault Recording
Addr. 401 Setting Title WAVEFORMTRIGGER MAX. LENGTH Setting Options Save with Pickup Save with TRIP Start with TRIP 0.30..5.00 sec Default Setting Save with Pickup Comments Waveform Capture

403

1.00 sec

Max. length of a Waveform Capture Record

184

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.15 Ancillary Functions

Addr. 404 405 406

Setting Title PRE. TRIG. TIME POST REC. TIME BinIn CAPT.TIME

Setting Options 0.05..0.50 sec 0.05..0.50 sec 0.10..5.00 sec;

Default Setting 0.10 sec 0.10 sec 0.50 sec

Comments Captured Waveform Prior to Trigger Captured Waveform after Event Capture Time via Binary Input

2.15.6 Information Overview

Statistics
F.No. Alarm >BLOCK Op Counter Counter of operating hours Number of breaker TRIP commands Accumulation of interrupted curr. L1 S1 Accumulation of interrupted curr. L2 S1 Accumulation of interrupted curr. L3 S1 Accumulation of interrupted curr. L1 S2 Accumulation of interrupted curr. L2 S2 Accumulation of interrupted curr. L3 S2 Accumulation of interrupted curr. I1 Accumulation of interrupted curr. I2 Accumulation of interrupted curr. I3 Accumulation of interrupted curr. I4 Accumulation of interrupted curr. I5 Accumulation of interrupted curr. I6 Accumulation of interrupted curr. I7 Comments

00409 >BLOCK Op Count 01020 Op.Hours= 01000 # TRIPs= 30607 IL1S1: 30608 IL2S1: 30609 IL3S1: 30610 IL1S2: 30611 IL2S2: 30612 IL3S2: 30620 I1: 30621 I2: 30622 I3: 30623 I4: 30624 I5: 30625 I6: 30626 I7:

Measured Values
F.No. 00721 IL1S1= 00722 IL2S1= 00723 IL3S1= 30640 3I0S1= 30641 I1S1= Alarm Comments Operat. meas. current IL1 side 1 Operat. meas. current IL2 side 1 Operat. meas. current IL3 side 1 3I0 (zero sequence) of side 1 I1 (positive sequence) of side 1

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

185

2 Functions

F.No. 30642 I2S1= 00724 IL1S2= 00725 IL2S2= 00726 IL3S2= 30643 3I0S2= 30644 I1S2= 30645 I2S2= 30646 I1= 30647 I2= 30648 I3= 30649 I4= 30650 I5= 30651 I6= 30652 I7= 30653 I8= 07740 IL1S1= 07741 IL2S1= 07749 IL3S1= 07750 IL1S2= 07759 IL2S2= 07760 IL3S2= 30633 I1= 30634 I2= 30635 I3= 30636 I4= 30637 I5= 30638 I6= 30639 I7= 30656 Umeas.= 00645 S = 00644 Freq=

Alarm

Comments I2 (negative sequence) of side 1 Operat. meas. current IL1 side 2 Operat. meas. current IL2 side 2 Operat. meas. current IL3 side 2 3I0 (zero sequence) of side 2 I1 (positive sequence) of side 2 I2 (negative sequence) of side 2 Operat. meas. current I1 Operat. meas. current I2 Operat. meas. current I3 Operat. meas. current I4 Operat. meas. current I5 Operat. meas. current I6 Operat. meas. current I7 Operat. meas. current I8 Phase angle in phase IL1 side 1 Phase angle in phase IL2 side 1 Phase angle in phase IL3 side 1 Phase angle in phase IL1 side 2 Phase angle in phase IL2 side 2 Phase angle in phase IL3 side 2 Phase angle of current I1 Phase angle of current I2 Phase angle of current I3 Phase angle of current I4 Phase angle of current I5 Phase angle of current I6 Phase angle of current I7 Operat. meas. voltage Umeas. S (apparent power) Frequency

186

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.15 Ancillary Functions

Thermal Values
F.No. 00801 /trip = 00802 /tripL1= 00803 /tripL2= 00804 /tripL3= 01060 leg 1= 01061 leg 2= 01062 leg 3= 01063 Ag.Rate= 01066 ResWARN= 01067 ResALARM= 01068 RTD 1 = 01069 RTD 2 = 01070 RTD 3 = 01071 RTD 4 = 01072 RTD 5 = 01073 RTD 6 = 01074 RTD 7 = 01075 RTD 8 = 01076 RTD 9 = 01077 RTD10 = 01078 RTD11 = 01079 RTD12 = Alarm Comments Temperat. rise for warning and trip Temperature rise for phase L1 Temperature rise for phase L2 Temperature rise for phase L3 Hot spot temperature of leg 1 Hot spot temperature of leg 2 Hot spot temperature of leg 3 Aging Rate Load Reserve to warning level Load Reserve to alarm level Temperature of RTD 1 Temperature of RTD 2 Temperature of RTD 3 Temperature of RTD 4 Temperature of RTD 5 Temperature of RTD 6 Temperature of RTD 7 Temperature of RTD 8 Temperature of RTD 9 Temperature of RTD10 Temperature of RTD11 Temperature of RTD12

Diff-Values
F.No. 07742 IDiffL1= 07743 IDiffL2= 07744 IDiffL3= 07745 IRestL1= 07746 IRestL2= 07747 IRestL3= 30654 IdiffREF= 30655 IrestREF= Alarm Comments IDiffL1(I/Inominal object [%]) IDiffL2(I/Inominal object [%]) IDiffL3(I/Inominal object [%]) IRestL1(I/Inominal object [%]) IRestL2(I/Inominal object [%]) IRestL3(I/Inominal object [%]) Idiff REF (I/Inominal object [%]) Irest REF (I/Inominal object [%])

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

187

2 Functions

Set-Points
F.No. 00272 SP. Op Hours> Alarm Set Point Operating Hours Comments

Fault Recording
F.No. Alarm >Trigger Waveform Capture Waveform data deleted Fault Recording Start Comments

00004 >Trig.Wave.Cap. 00203 Wave. deleted FltRecSta

Puls metering
F.No. 00888 Wp(puls) 00889 Wq(puls)

if configured (CFC)
Alarm Pulsed Energy Wp (active) Pulsed Energy Wq (reactive) Comments

188

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.16 Processing of Commands

2.16
General

Processing of Commands
In addition to the protective functions described so far, control command processing is integrated in the SIPROTEC 7UT612 to coordinate the operation of circuit breakers and other equipment in the power system. Control commands can originate from four command sources: Local operation using the keypad on the local user interface of the device, Local or remote operation using DIGSI 4, Remote operation via system (SCADA) interface (e.g. SICAM), Automatic functions (e.g. using a binary inputs, CFC). The number of switchgear devices that can be controlled is basically limited by the number of available and required binary inputs and outputs. For the output of control commands it has be ensured that all the required binary inputs and outputs are configured and provided with the correct properties. If specific interlocking conditions are needed for the execution of commands, the user can program the device with bay interlocking by means of the user-defined logic functions (CFC). The configuration of the binary inputs and outputs, the preparation of user defined logic functions, and the procedure during switching operations are described in the SIPROTEC 4 System Manual, order no. E50417H1176C151.

2.16.1 Types of Commands

The following types of commands are distinguished. Control Commands These commands operate binary outputs and change the power system status: Commands for the operation of circuit breakers (without synchro-check) as well as commands for the control of isolators and earth switches, Step commands, e.g. for raising and lowering transformer taps, Commands with configurable time settings (e.g. Petersen coils). Internal / Pseudo Commands These commands do not directly operate binary outputs. They serve to initiate internal functions, simulate or acknowledge changes of state. Manual entries to change the feedback indication of plant such as the status condition, for example in the case when the physical connection to the auxiliary contacts is not available or is defective. The process of manual entries is recorded and can be displayed accordingly. Additionally, tagging commands can be issued to establish internal settings, such as switching authority (remote / local), parameter set changeover, data transmission inhibit and metering counter reset or initialization.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

189

2 Functions
Acknowledgment and resetting commands for setting and resetting internal buffers. Status information commands for setting / deactivating the information status for the information value of an object: Controlling activation of binary input status, Blocking binary outputs.

2.16.2 Steps in the Command Sequence

Safety mechanisms in the command sequence ensure that a command can only be released after a thorough check of preset criteria has been successfully concluded. Additionally, user-defined interlocking conditions can be configured separately for each device. The actual execution of the command is also monitored after its release. The entire sequence of a command is described briefly in the following: Check Sequence Command entry (e.g. using the keypad on the local user interface of the device) Check password access rights; Check switching mode (interlocking activated/deactivated) selection of deactivated interlocking status. User configurable interlocking checks that can be selected for each command Switching authority (local, remote), Switching direction control (target state = present state), Zone controlled/bay interlocking (logic using CFC), System interlocking (centrally via SICAM), Double operation (interlocking against parallel switching operation), Protection blocking (blocking of switching operations by protective functions). Fixed command checks Timeout monitoring (time between command initiation and execution can be monitored), Configuration in process (if setting modification is in process, commands are rejected or delayed), Equipment not present at output (if controllable equipment is not assigned to a binary output, then the command is denied), Output block (if an output block has been programmed for the circuit breaker, and is active at the moment the command is processed, then the command is denied), Component hardware malfunction, Command in progress (only one command can be processed at a time for each circuit breaker or switch),

190

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.16 Processing of Commands

1-out-of-n check (for schemes with multiple assignments and common potential contact, it is checked whether a command has already been initiated for the common output contact). Monitoring the Command Execution Interruption of a command because of a cancel command, Running time monitor (feedback message monitoring time).

2.16.3 Interlocking
Interlocking is executed by the user-defined logic (CFC). The interlocking checks of a SICAM/SIPROTEC-system are classified into: System interlocking checked by a central control system (for interbay interlocking) Zone controlled/bay interlocking checked in the bay device (for the feeder-related intelocking) System interlocking relies on the system data base in the central control system. Zone controlled/bay interlocking relies on the status of the circuit breaker and other switches that are connected to the relay. The extent of the interlocking checks is determined by the configuration and interlocking logic of the relay. Switchgear which is subject to system interlocking in the central control system is identified with a specific setting in the command properties (in the routing matrix). For all commands the user can select the operation mode with interlocking (normal mode) or without interlocking (test mode): for local commands by reprogramming the settings with password check, for automatic commands via command processing with CFC, for local / remote commands by an additional interlocking command via Profibus.

2.16.3.1 Interlocked/Non-Interlocked Switching The command checks that can be selected for the SIPROTEC-relays are also referred to as standard interlocking. These checks can be activated (interlocked) or deactivated (non interlocked) via DIGSI 4. Deactivated interlock switching means the configured interlocking conditions are bypassed in the relay. Interlocked switching means that all configured interlocking conditions are checked in the command check routines. If a condition could not be fulfilled, the command will be rejected by a message with a minus added to it (e.g. CO-), followed by an operation response information. Table 2-13 shows some types of commands and messages. For

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

191

2 Functions

the device the messages designated with *) are displayed in the event logs, for DIGSI 4 they appear in spontaneous messages.

Table 2-13

Types of command and messages

Type of command Abbrev. CO MT IB OB CA Message CO+/ MT+/ IB+/ *) OB+/ *) CA+/

Control issued Manual tagging (positive / negative) Input blocking Output blocking Control abortion

The plus sign indicated in the message is a confirmation of the command execution: the command execution was as expected, in other words positive. The minus is a negative confirmation, the command was rejected. Figure 2-95 shows the messages relating to command execution and operation response information for a successful operation of the circuit breaker. The check of interlocking can be programmed separately for all switching devices and tags that were set with a tagging command. Other internal commands such as manual entry or abort are not checked, i.e. carried out independent of the interlocking.

(9(17 /2*    4 &2 FORVH   4 )% FORVH
Figure 2-95 Example of a message when closing the circuit breaker Q0

Standard Interlocking

The standard interlocking includes the checks for each device which were set during the configuration of inputs and outputs. An overview for processing the interlocking conditions in the relay is shown by Figure 2-96.

192

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.16 Processing of Commands

Device with Source of Command = LOCAL SAS REMOTE ), DIGSI AUTO Switching Authority (Local/Remote)
1

Switching Authority On/Off

Switching Mode

&
Local

Local

&

&
Remote

&

&
Switching Authority DIGSI DIGSI

DIGSI

or
&
Remote

Switching Mode Local

Non-Interlocked

&
Switching Mode Remote

or

SCHEDULED=ACT .y/n

Interlocked

&

or

feedback Indication On/Off Protection Blocking 52 Close 52 Open

SCHEDULED=ACT.y/n System Interlock. y/n Field Interlocking y/n Protection Blockingy/n Double Oper. Blocky/n SW. Auth. LOCA> y/n Sw. Auth. REMOTEy/n

or

Command Output to Relay

Event Condition

1)

Source REMOTE also includes SAS.

LOCAL
Figure 2-96

Command via substation controller. Standard Interlocking Arrangements

REMOTE Command via telecontrol system to substation controller and from substation controller to device.

The display shows the configured interlocking reasons. The are marked by letters explained in the following Table 2-14.

Table 2-14

Interlocking commands Interlocking commands Abbrev. L S Z P B Message L S Z P B

Control authorization System interlock Zone controlled Target state = present state (check switch position) Block by protection

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

193

2 Functions

Figure 2-97 shows all interlocking conditions (which usually appear in the display of the device) for three switchgear items with the relevant abbreviations explained in Table 2-14. All parameterized interlocking conditions are indicated (see Figure 2-97).

,QWHUORFNLQJ  

4 &ORVH2SHQ 6 = 3 % 4 &ORVH2SHQ 6 = 3 % 4 &ORVH2SHQ 6 = 3 % Figure 2-97 Example of configured interlocking conditions

Control Logic using CFC

For zone controlled/field interlocking, control logic can be programmed, using the CFC. Via specific release conditions the information released or bay interlocked are available.

2.16.4 Recording and Acknowledgement of Commands

During the processing of the commands, independent of the further processing of information, command and process feedback information are sent to the message processing centre. These messages contain information on the cause. The messages are entered in the event list. Acknowledgement of Commands to the Device Front Acknowledgement of Commands to Local/Remote/Digsi All information which relates to commands that were issued from the device front Command Issued = Local is transformed into a corresponding message and shown in the display of the device. The acknowledgement of messages which relate to commands with the origin Command Issued = Local/Remote/DIGSI are sent back to the initiating point independent of the routing (configuration on the serial digital interface). The acknowledgement of commands is therefore not provided with a response indication as it is done with the local command but with ordinary recorded command and feedback information. Monitoring of Feedback Information The processing of commands monitors the command execution and timing of feedback information for all commands. At the same time the command is sent, the monitoring time is started (monitoring of the command execution). This time controls whether the device operation is executed with the required final result within the monitoring time. The monitoring time is stopped as soon as the feedback information is detected. If no feedback information arrives, a response Timeout command monitoring time is indicated and the command sequence is terminated.

194

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

2.16 Processing of Commands

Commands and information feedback are also recorded in the event list. Normally the execution of a command is terminated as soon as the feedback information (FB+) of the relevant switchgear arrives or, in case of commands without process feedback information, the command output resets. The plus appearing in a feedback information confirms that the command was successful, the command was as expected, in other words positive. The minus is a negative confirmation and means that the command was not executed as expected. Command Output and Switching Relays The command types needed for tripping and closing of the switchgear or for raising and lowering of transformer taps are described in the SIPROTEC 4 System Manual, order no. E50417H1176C151.

2.16.5 Information Overview

F.No. Cntrl Auth ModeREMOTE ModeLOCAL

Alarm Control Authority Controlmode REMOTE Controlmode LOCAL

Comments

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

195

2 Functions

196

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

Installation and Commissioning

This chapter is primarily for personnel who are experienced in installing, testing, and commissioning protective and control systems, and are familiar with applicable safety rules, safety regulations, and the operation of the power system. Installation of the 7UT612 is described in this chapter. Hardware modifications that might be needed in certain cases are explained. Connection verifications required before the device is put in service are also given. Commissioning tests are provided. Some of the tests require the protected object (line, transformer, etc.) to carry load.

3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4

Mounting and Connections Checking the Connections Commissioning Final Preparation of the Device

198 218 222 245

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

197

3 Installation and Commissioning

3.1

Mounting and Connections

Warning!
The successful and safe operation of the device is dependent on proper handling, installation, and application by qualified personnel under observance of all warnings and hints contained in this manual. In particular the general erection and safety regulations (e.g. IEC, ANSI, DIN, VDE, EN or other national and international standards) regarding the correct use of hoisting gear must be observed. Non-observance can result in death, personal injury, or substantial property damage.

Preconditions

Verification of the ratings of the 7UT612 as well as matching to ratings of the power equipment must have been completed.

3.1.1

Installation

Panel Flush Mounting

q Remove the 4 covering caps located on the corners of the front cover, reveal the
4 slots in the mounting flange.

q Insert the device into the panel cut-out and fasten with four screws. Refer to Figure
4-13 in Section 4.15 for dimensions.

q Replace the four covers. q Connect the ground on the rear plate of the device to the protective ground of the

panel. Use at least one M4 screw for the device ground. The cross-sectional area of the ground wire must be greater than or equal to the cross-sectional area of any other control conductor connected to the device. Furthermore, the cross-section of the ground wire must be at least 2.5 mm2. vice according to the wiring diagram for the panel. When using forked lugs or directly connecting wires to screwed terminals, the screws must be tightened so that the heads are even with the terminal block before the lugs or wires are inserted. A ring lug must be centred in the connection chamber so that the screw thread fits in the hole of the lug. The System Manual (orderno. E50417H1176C151) has pertinent information regarding wire size, lugs, bending radii, etc. Installation notes are also given in the brief reference booklet attached to the device.

q Connect the plug terminals and/or the screwed terminals on the rear side of the de-

198

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

3.1 Mounting and Connections

Elongated holes

SIEMENS
RUN

SIPROTEC
ERROR

7UT612

H6DIH@IV $ 6pvhv Hrhrr!

MENU

LED

ESC

ENTER

Annunciation Meas. Val. Trip log

F1 F2 F3 F4

7 4 1

8 5 2 0

9 6 3 +/-

Figure 3-1

Panel mounting of a 7UT612

Rack Mounting and Cubicle Mounting

To install the device in a frame or cubicle, two mounting brackets are required. The ordering codes are stated in the Appendix A in Subsection A.1.1.

q Loosely screw the two mounting brackets in the rack with four screws. q Remove the 4 covers at the corners of the front cover. The 4 slots in the mounting
flange are revealed and can be accessed.

q Fasten the device to the mounting brackets with four screws. q Replace the four covers. q Tighten the mounting brackets to the rack using eight screws. q Connect the ground on the rear plate of the device to the protective ground of the

rack. Use at least one M4 screw for the device ground. The cross-sectional area of the ground wire must be greater than or equal to the cross-sectional area of any other control conductor connected to the device. Furthermore, the cross-section of the ground wire must be at least 2.5 mm2. vice according to the wiring diagram for the rack. When using forked lugs or directly connecting wires to screwed terminals, the screws must be tightened so that the heads are even with the terminal block before the lugs or wires are inserted. A ring lug must be centred in the connection chamber so that the screw thread fits in the hole of the lug. The System Manual (orderno. E50417H1176C151) has pertinent information regarding wire size, lugs, bending radii, etc. Installation notes are also given in the brief reference booklet attached to the device.

q Connect the plug terminals and/or the screwed terminals on the rear side of the de-

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

199

3 Installation and Commissioning

Mounting bracket
SIEMENS
RUN

SIPROTEC
ERROR

7UT612

H6DIH@IV@ $ 6pvhv Hrhrr!

MENU

LED

ESC

ENTER

Annunciation Meas. Val. Trip log

F1 F2 F3 F4

7 4 1

8 5 2 0

9 6 3 +/-

Mounting bracket

Figure 3-2

Installing a 7UT612 in a rack or cubicle

Panel Surface Mounting

q Secure the device to the panel with four screws. Refer to Figure 4-14 in Section
4.15 for dimensions.

q Connect the ground of the device to the protective ground of the panel. The crosssectional area of the ground wire must be greater than or equal to the cross-sectional area of any other control conductor connected to the device. Furthermore, the cross-section of the ground wire must be at least 2.5 mm2. be connected to the grounding surface on the side. Use at least one M4 screw for the device ground.

q Solid, low-impedance operational grounding (cross-sectional area 2.5 mm2) must q Connect the screwed terminals on the top and bottom of the device according to the

wiring diagram for the panel. Optical connections are made on the inclined housings on the top and/or bottom of the case. The System Manual (orderno. E50417 H1176C151) has pertinent information regarding wire size, lugs, bending radii, etc. Installation notes are also given in the brief reference booklet attached to the device.

200

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

3.1 Mounting and Connections

3.1.2

Termination Variants
General diagrams are shown in Appendix A.2. Connection examples for current transformer circuits are provided in Appendix A.3. It must be checked that the settings for configuration (Subsection 2.1.1) and the power system data (Subsection 2.1.2) match the connections to the device.

Protected Object

The setting 3527 2%-(&7 (address ) must correspond to the object to be protected. Wrong setting may cause unexpected reaction of the device. Please note that auto-transformers are identified as 3527 2%-(&7 = $XWRWUDQVI, not  SKDVH WUDQVI. For  SKDVH WUDQVI, the centre phase L2 remains unconnected.

Currents

Connection of the CT currents depends on the mode of application. With three-phase connection the three phase currents are allocated to each side of the protected object. For connection examples see Appendix A.3, Figures A-3 to A-6 and A-9 to A-13 referring to the protected object types. With two-phase connection of a single-phase transformer the centre phase will not be used (IL2). Figure A-7 in Appendix A.3 shows a connection diagram. Even if there is only one current transformer, both phases will be used (IL1 and IL3), see the right part of Figure A-8. For single-phase busbar protection every measuring input (except I8) is allocated to a busbar feeder. Figure A-14 in Appendix A.3 illustrates an example for one phase. The other phases are to be connected correspondingly. If the device is connected via summation transformers, see Figure A-15. With the latter case you have to take into consideration that the rated output current of the summation transformers is usually 100 mA. The measuring inputs of the device have to be matched accordingly (refer also to Subsection 3.1.3). The allocation of the current inputs I7 and I8 is to be checked. Connections also differ according to the application the device is used for. The Appendix offers some connection examples (e.g. Figures A-4 to A-7 and A-11 to A-15) which refer to different applications. Also check the rated data and the matching factors for the current transformers. The allocation of the protection functions to the sides must be consistent. This particularly goes for the circuit breaker failure protection whose measuring point (side) must correspond with the side of the circuit breaker to be monitored.

Binary Inputs and Outputs

The connections to the power plant depend on the possible allocation of the binary inputs and outputs, i.e. how they are assigned to the power equipment. The preset allocation can be found in Tables A-2 and A-3 in Section A.5 of Appendix A. Also check that the labels on the front panel correspond to the configured message functions. It is also very important that the feedback components (auxiliary contacts) of the circuit breaker monitored are connected to the correct binary inputs which correspond to the assigned side of the circuit breaker failure protection.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

201

3 Installation and Commissioning

Changing Setting Groups with Binary Inputs

If binary inputs are used to switch setting groups, note: Two binary inputs must be dedicated to the purpose of changing setting groups when four groups are to be switched. One binary input must be set for !6HW *URXS %LW , the other input for !6HW *URXS %LW . If either of these input functions is not assigned, then it is considered as not controlled. To control two setting groups, one binary input set for !6HW *URXS %LW  is sufficient since the binary input !6HW *URXS %LW , which is not assigned, is considered to be not controlled. The status of the signals controlling the binary inputs to activate a particular setting group must remain constant as long as that particular group is to remain active. Table 3-1 shows the relationship between !6HW *URXS %LW , !6HW *URXS %LW , and the setting groups A to D. Principal connection diagrams for the two binary inputs are illustrated in Figure 3-3. The figure illustrates an example in which both Set Group Bits 0 and 1 are configured to be controlled (actuated) when the associated binary input is energized (high).

Table 3-1

Setting group selection with binary inputs example

Binary Input Events !6HW *URXS %LW  !6HW *URXS %LW  no yes no yes
no = not energized yes= energized

Active Group Group A Group B Group C Group D

no no yes yes

Selector switch for setting group A B C D L

Binary input set for: & 3TrB7v, High

L+

L+

A B C D

7UT612
L
Binary input set for: ' 3TrB7v , High

Figure 3-3

Connection diagram (example) for setting group switching with binary inputs

202

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

3.1 Mounting and Connections

Trip Circuit Supervision

It must be noted that two binary inputs or one binary input and one bypass resistor R must be connected in series. The pick-up threshold of the binary inputs must therefore be substantially below half the rated control DC voltage. If two binary inputs are used for the trip circuit supervision, these binary inputs must be volt-free i.o.w. not be commoned with each other or with another binary input. If one binary input is used, a bypass resistor R must be employed (refer to Figure 34). This resistor R is connected in series with the second circuit breaker auxiliary contact (Aux2). The value of this resistor must be such that in the circuit breaker open condition (therefore Aux1 is open and Aux2 is closed) the circuit breaker trip coil (TC) is no longer picked up and binary input (BI1) is still picked up if the command relay contact is open.

L+

UCTR UBI 7UT612

7UT612
>TripC trip rel

RTC

Legend:

R CB
TC Aux1 Aux2

RTC CB TC Aux1

Relay Tripping Contact Circuit Breaker Circuit breaker Trip Coil Circuit breaker Auxiliary contact (closed when CB is closed) Aux2 Circuit breaker Auxiliary contact (closed when CB is open) R Bypass Resistor UCTR Control voltage (trip voltage) UBI Input voltage for Binary Input

L
Figure 3-4

Trip circuit supervision with one binary input

This results in an upper limit for the resistance dimension, Rmax, and a lower limit Rmin, from which the optimal value of the arithmetic mean should be selected. R max + R min R = --------------------------------2 In order that the minimum voltage for controlling the binary input is ensured, Rmax is derived as: U CRT U BI min R max = ------------------------------------- R CBTC I BI (High) So the circuit breaker trip coil does not remain energized in the above case, R min is derived as: U CTR U TC (LOW) R min = R TC ---------------------------------------------- U TC (LOW)

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

203

3 Installation and Commissioning

IBI (HIGH) UBI min

Constant current with BI on (=1.7 mA) Minimum control voltage for BI =19 V for delivery setting for nominal voltage of 24/48/60 V = 73 V for delivery setting for nominal voltage of 110/125/220/250 V Control voltage for trip circuit DC resistance of circuit breaker trip coil Maximum voltage on the circuit breaker trip coil that does not lead to tripping

UCTR RCBTC UCBTC (LOW)

If the calculation results that Rmax < Rmin, then the calculation must be repeated, with the next lowest switching threshold UBI min, and this threshold must be implemented in the relay using plug-in bridges (see Subsection 3.1.3). For the power consumption of the resistor: 2 U CTR 2 P R = I R = --------------------------- R R + R CBTC

Example:
IBI (HIGH) UBI min UCTR RCBTC 1.7 mA (from SIPROTEC 7UT612) 19 V for delivery setting for nominal voltage 24/48/60 V 73 V for delivery setting for nominal voltage 110/125/220/250 V 110 V from trip circuit (control voltage) 500 from trip circuit (resistance of CB trip coil)

UCBTC (LOW) 2 V from trip circuit (max. voltage not to trip breaker)

110 V 19 V R max = --------------------------------- 500 1.7 mA Rmax = 53 k 110 V 2 V R min = 500 ----------------------------- 500 2V Rmin = 27 k R max + R min R = ------------------------------- = 40 k 2 The closed standard value of 39 k is selected; the power is:
2 110 V P R = --------------------------------------- 39 k 39 k + 0.5 k

P R 0.3 W Thermoboxes If the overload protection operates with processing of the coolant temperature (overload protection with hot-spot calculation), one or two thermoboxes 7XV5662 can be connected to the serial service interface at port C.

204

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

3.1 Mounting and Connections

3.1.3
3.1.3.1

Hardware Modifications
General Hardware modifications might be necessary or desired. For example, a change of the pickup threshold for some of the binary inputs might be advantageous in certain applications. Terminating resistors might be required for the communication bus. In either case, hardware modifications are needed. If modifications are done or interface modules are replaced, please observe the details in Subsections 3.1.3.2 to 3.1.3.5.

Power Supply Voltage

There are different input ranges for the power supply voltage. Refer to the data for the 7UT612 ordering numbers in Section A.1 of Appendix A. The power supplies with the ratings 60/110/125 VDC and 110/125/220/250 VDC / 115/230 VAC are interconvertible. Jumper settings determine the rating. The assignment of these jumpers to the supply voltages are illustrated below in Section 3.1.3.3 under margin Processor Board ACPU. When the relay is delivered, these jumpers are set according to the name-plate sticker. Generally, they need not be altered. Jumper settings determine the rating of the current input transducers of the device. When the relay is delivered, these jumpers are set according to the name-plate sticker to 1 A or 5 A, for the current inputs I1 to I7; the input I8 is independent of the rated current. If the current transformer sets have different rated secondary currents at the sides of the protected object and/or of current input I7, the device must be adapted to it. The same applies for the current transformers of the busbar feeders when single-phase busbar protection is applied. Using single-phase busbar protection with summation transformers interconnected, rated currents for current inputs I1 to I7 are usually 100 mA. The physical arrangements of these jumpers that correspond to the different current ratings are described below in Subsection 3.1.3.3 under margin Input/Output Board AI/O3. When performing changes, please make sure that the device is always informed about them: Using three-phase applications and single-phase transformers, changes for side 1 are to be set in address  ,16(& &7 6 and changes for side 2 in address  ,16(& &7 6 in the Power System Data (refer to Subsection 2.1.2, margin heading Current Transformer Data for 2 Sides, page 23). Using three-phase applications and single-phase transformers, changes for current input I7 are to be performed in address  ,16(& &7 , (refer to Subsection 2.1.2, margin heading Current Transformer Data for Current Input I7, page 26). Using single-phase busbar protection, changes are made in addresses  ,1 6(& &7 , to  ,16(& &7 , (refer to Subsection 2.1.2, margin heading Current Transformer Data for Single-phase Busbar Protection, page 25). The current measuring input I8 disregarding the rated current of the device is suited for highly sensitive current measurement (approx. 3 mA to 1.6 A).

Nominal Currents

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

205

3 Installation and Commissioning

Control Voltages for Binary Inputs

When the device is delivered from the factory, the binary inputs are set to operate with a voltage that corresponds to the rated voltage of the power supply. In general, to optimize the operation of the inputs, the pickup voltage of the inputs should be set to most closely match the actual control voltage being used. Each binary input has a pickup voltage that can be independently adjusted; therefore, each input can be set according to the function performed. A jumper position is changed to adjust the pickup voltage of a binary input. The physical arrangement of the binary input jumpers in relation to the pickup voltages is explained below in Section 3.1.3.3, margin heading Processor Board ACPU.

Note:
If the 7UT612 performs trip circuit monitoring, two binary inputs, or one binary input and a resistor, are connected in series. The pickup voltage of these inputs must be less than half of the nominal DC voltage of the trip circuit.

Type of Contact for Binary Outputs

The processor module ACPU contains 2 output relays the contact of which can be set as normally closed or normally open contact. Therefore it might be necessary to rearrange a jumper. Subsection 3.1.3.3, margin heading margin Processor Board A CPU describes to which type of relays in which boards this applies. The serial interface modules can be replaced. Which kind of interfaces and how the interfaces can be replaced is described in Replacing Interface Modules, Section 3.1.3.4. If the device is equipped with a serial RS 485 port, the RS 485 bus must be terminated with resistors at the last device on the bus to ensure reliable data transmission. For this purpose, terminating resistors are provided on the interface modules. The physical arrangement and jumper positions on the interface modules see Subsection 3.1.3.4, margin heading RS485 Interface. Spare parts may be the backup battery that maintains the data in the battery-buffered RAM when the voltage supply fails, and the miniature fuse of the internal power supply. Their physical location is shown in Figure 3-6. The ratings of the fuse are printed on the module next to the fuse itself. When exchanging the fuse, please observe the hints given in the System Manual (order no. E50417H1176C151) in Chapter Maintenance.

Interface Modules

Termination of Serial Interfaces

Spare Parts

206

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

3.1 Mounting and Connections

3.1.3.2

Disassembling the Device

WARNING!
For the following steps it is assumed that the device is not in operating state. Since dangerous voltages and laser radiation may develop, do not connect the device to auxiliary voltage, measured values or optical fibres! If changes to jumper settings are required to modify the rating of the power supply, the nominal rating of the current inputs, the pickup voltage of binary inputs, or the state of the terminating resistors, proceed as follows:

Caution!
Jumper-setting changes that affect nominal values of the device render the ordering number and the corresponding nominal values on the name-plate sticker invalid. If such changes are necessary, the changes should be clearly and fully noted on the device. Self adhesive stickers are available that can be used as replacement nameplates.

Prepare area of work. Provide a grounded mat for protecting components subject to damage from electrostatic discharges (ESD). The following equipment is needed: screwdriver with a 5 to 6 mm wide tip, 1 Philips screwdriver size Pz1, 4.5 mm socket or nut driver.

o o o o

Unfasten the screw-posts of the D-subminiature connector on the back panel at location A. This activity does not apply if the device is for surface mounting. If the device has more communication interfaces on the rear, the screws located diagonally to the interfaces must be removed. This activity is not necessary if the device is for surface mounting. Remove the four caps on the front cover and loosen the screws that become accessible. Carefully pull off the front cover. The front cover is connected to the CPU board with a short ribbon-cable. Refer to Figure 3-5 for the physical arrangement of the printed boards.

Caution!
Electrostatic discharges through the connections of the components, wiring, plugs, and jumpers must be avoided. Wearing a grounded wrist strap is preferred. Otherwise, first touch a grounded metal part.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

207

3 Installation and Commissioning

The order of the boards is shown in Figure 3-5.

o o o o

Disconnect the ribbon-cable between the front cover and the ACPU board () at the cover end. To disconnect the cable, push up the top latch of the plug connector and push down the bottom latch of the plug connector. Carefully set aside the front cover. Disconnect the ribbon-cables between the ACPU board () and the AI/O3 board (). Remove the boards and set them on the grounded mat to protect them from electrostatic damage. A greater effort is required to withdraw the ACPU board, especially in versions of the device for surface mounting, because of the plug connectors. Check the jumpers according to Figures 3-6 and 3-7 and the following notes. Change or remove the jumpers as necessary.

1 2

Processor printed circuit board ACPU Prozessorbaugruppe Input/output printed circuit board AI/O3

Slot 5
1

Slot 19
2

BI1 to BI3
Figure 3-5

Binary Inputs (BI)

Front view of the device after removal of the front cover (simplified and scaled down)

208

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

3.1 Mounting and Connections

3.1.3.3

Jumper Settings on Printed Circuit Boards The design of a jumper setting for the processor board ACPU is shown in Figure 3-6. The preset rated voltage of the integrated power supply is checked according to Table 3-2, the pickup voltages of the binary inputs BI1 through BI3 are checked according to Table 3-3, and the quiescent state of the binary outputs (BO1 and BO2) is checked according to Table 3-4.

Processor Board ACPU

Mini-fuse
F1

Front Serial Operating Interface

Battery Grip Time Synchronization (Port A)

Battery

G1

Figure 3-6

Processor board ACPU (without interface modules) with representation of the jumper settings required for the module configuration

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

T 2,0H250V 3 X41 3 X42 X21 L H X22

X51 3 21

2 1 2 1

X53 L H L H

1 2 3 4 3 2 1 X52

X23

209

3 Installation and Commissioning

Table 3-2

Jumper settings for the nominal voltage of the integrated power supply on the processor board ACPU Nominal voltage

Jumper 24 to 48 VDC X51 X52 X53 not fitted not fitted not fitted 60 to 125 VDC 12 12 and 34 12 110 to 250 VDC; 115 to 230 VDC 23 23 23

Table 3-3

Jumper settings for the pickup voltages of the binary inputs BI1 through BI3 on the processor board ACPU Jumper X21 X22 X23 17 VDC pickup 1) 12 12 12 73 VDC pickup 2) 23 23 23

Binary Input BI1 BI2 BI3

1)Factory 2)

settings for devices with power supply voltages of 24 VDC to 125 VDC Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 110 V to 250 VDC and 115 to 230 VAC

Table 3-4

Jumper setting for the quiescent state of the Binary Outputs on the processor-

board ACPU
For BO1 BO2 Jumper X41 X42 Open in the quiescent state Closed in the quiescent state (NO contact) (NC contact) 12 12 23 23 Presetting 12 12

210

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

3.1 Mounting and Connections

Input/Output Board AI/O3

The design of a jumper setting for the processor board AI/O3 is shown in Figure 3-7.

X66 0.1A

X65 0.1A

5A 1A 1A 5A 5A 1A

5A 1A

IL2S2 I5

IL1S2 I4

IL3S2 I6

I8

IL2S1 I2

undef

undef

IL3S1 I3
1A 1A

X67 0.1A X62 0.1A X61 0.1A 1A 5A

IL1S1 I1

I7

Figure 3-7

The rated current settings of the input current transformers are checked on the AI/O3 board. With default settings all jumpers (X61 to X70) are set to the same rated current (according to the order number of the device). However, rated currents can be changed for each individual input transformer. To do so you have to change the location of the jumpers next to the transformers. Additionally, settings of the common jumpers X68 to X70 must be changed correspondingly. Table 3-5 shows the assignment of the jumpers to the current measuring inputs.

5A

5A

5A 0.1A rated 1A current X70 I7

0.1A rated 1A current X69 side 2

0.1A rated 1A current X68 side 1

X63 0.1A

X64 0.1A

Input/output board AI/O3 with representation of the jumper settings required for the module configuration

5A

5A

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

211

3 Installation and Commissioning

For three-phase applications and single-phase transformers: There are 3 measuring inputs for each side. The jumpers belonging to one side must be plugged to the same rated current. Furthermore, the corresponding common jumper (X68 for side 1 and X69 for side 2) has to be plugged to the same rated current. For measuring input I7 the individual and the common jumper are plugged to the same rated current. For single-phase busbar protection: Each input can be set individually. Only if measuring inputs I1 to I3 have the same rated current, X68 is plugged to the same rated current. Only if measuring inputs I4 to I6 have the same rated current, X69 is plugged to the same rated current. If different rated currents are reigning within the input groups, the corresponding common jumper is plugged to undef. For interposed summation transformers with 100 mA output, jumpers of all measuring inputs, including the common jumpers, are plugged to 0.1A.

Table 3-5

Assignment of the jumpers to the measuring inputs Application Jumper Individual X61 X62 X63 X65 X66 X67 X64 X70 X69 X68 Common I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8

3-phase IL1S1 IL2S1 IL3S1 IL1S2 IL2S2 IL3S2 I7 I8

1-phase

212

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

3.1 Mounting and Connections

3.1.3.4

Interface Modules The interface modules are located on the processor board ACPU. Figure 3-8 shows the CPU board and the location of the interface modules.

Replacing Interface Modules

Port on the rear side of the housing Service Interface/ Thermobox

System Interface

Figure 3-8

Processor board ACPU with interface modules

Please note the following: Interface modules can only be exchanged for devices with flush mounting housing. Interface modules for devices with surface mounting housing must be exchanged in our manufacturing centre. Use only interface modules that can be ordered as an option of the device (see also Appendix A.1).

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

213

3 Installation and Commissioning

Termination of the serial interfaces in case of RS485 must be ensured according to header margin RS485 Interface.

Table 3-6

Exchange interface modules for devices with flush mounting housing Mounting Port Replacing Module RS232 RS485 Optical 820 nm Profibus FMS RS485 Profibus FMS single ring

Interface

System Interface

Profibus FMS double ring Profibus DP RS485 Profibus DP double ring Modbus RS485 Modbus 820 nm DNP 3.0 RS485 DNP 3.0 820 nm RS232

Service Interface/ Thermobox

RS485 Optical 820 nm

The ordering numbers of the exchange modules are listed in Appendix A.1.1, (Accessories). RS232 Interface The RS232 interface can be transformed into a RS485 interface according to Figure 3-10. Figure 3-8 shows the PCB of the ACPU with the location of the modules. Figure 3-9 shows how jumpers of interface RS232 are located on the interface module. Here, terminating resistors are not required. They are always disabled.

1 2 3 X12 1 2 3 1 2 3 X11 X10 1 2 3

X3 X6 X7 X4 X5

1 2 3

Jumpers illustrated in factory position

X13 C53207A324-B180

8X

1 2 3

1 2 3

Figure 3-9

Location of the jumpers on interface module for RS232

214

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

3.1 Mounting and Connections

With jumper X11 the flow control which is important for modem communication is enabled. Jumper settings are explained in the following: Jumper setting 23: The modem control signals CTS (Clear-To-Send) according to RS232 are not available. This is a standard connection via star coupler or optical fibre converter. They are not required since the connection to the SIPROTEC devices is always operated in the half-duplex mode. Please use connection cable with order number 7XV51004. Jumper setting 12: Modem signals are made available. For a direct RS232 connection between the device and the modem this setting can be selected optionally. We recommend to use a standard RS232 modem connection cable (converter 9-pole on 25-pole).

Table 3-7 Jumper X11

Jumper setting for CTS (Clear-To-Send) on the interface module /CTS from RS232 interface 12 /CTS controlled by /RTS 23

RS485 Interface

The interface RS485 can be transformed into interface RS232 according to Figure 39. Using interfaces with bus capability requires a termination for the last device at the bus, i.e. terminating resistors must be switched to the line. The terminating resistors are connected to the corresponding interface module that is mounted to the processor input/output board ACPU. Figure 3-8 shows the printed circuit board of the ACPU and the allocation of the modules. The module for the RS485 interface is illustrated in Figure 3-10, for the profibus interface in Figure 3-11. The two jumpers of a module must always be plugged in the same position. When the module is delivered, the jumpers are plugged so that th resistors are disconnected. Exception: Connecting one or two temperature measuring devices 7XV566 to the service interface, the terminating resistors are switched onto the line since this is the standard for this application. This only goes for Port C for devices with order number 7UT612*****24*** (position 12 = 2; position 13 = 4).

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

215

3 Installation and Commissioning

1 2 3 1 2 3 X12 1 2 3 1 2 3 X11 X10 1 2 3 1 2 3 X3 X6 X7 X4 X5 1 2 3 8X

Terminating Resistors Jumper X3 X4 Connected 23 23 Disconnected 12 *) 12 *)

X13 C53207A324-B180

*) Factory setting (exception see text)

Figure 3-10

Location of the jumpers of the RS485 interface module

C53207-A322Terminating Resistors Jumper X3 X4 Connected 12 12

*) Factory Setting

2 3 4 B100 B101
X4 3 2 1

Disconnected 23 *) 23 *)

3 2 1 X3

Figure 3-11

Location of the jumpers of the Profibus interface module

Terminating resistors can also be implemented outside the device (e.g. in the plug connectors). In that case the terminating resistors provided on the RS485 or Profibus interface module must be switched out.

+5 V 390 A/A 220 B/B 390

Figure 3-12

External terminating resistors

216

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

3.1 Mounting and Connections

3.1.3.5

To Reassemble the Device To reassemble the device, proceed as follows:

Carefully insert the boards into the housing. The installation locations of the boards are shown in Figure 3-5. For the model of the device designed for surface mounting, use the metal lever to insert the ACPU board. The installation is easier with the lever. First insert the plug connectors on the ribbon cable in the input/output board AI/O3 and then on the processor board ACPU. Be careful not to bend any of the connecting pins! Do not use force! Insert the plug connector of the ribbon cable between the processor board ACPU and the front cover in the socket on the front cover. Press the latches of the plug connectors together. Replace the front cover and secure to the housing with the screws. Replace the covers. Re-fasten the interfaces on the rear of the device housing. This activity is not necessary if the device is for surface mounting.

o o o o o o

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

217

3 Installation and Commissioning

3.2
3.2.1

Checking the Connections

Data Connections of the Serial Interfaces
The tables of the following margin headers list the pin-assignments for the different serial interfaces of the device and the time synchronization interface. The physical arrangement of the connectors is illustrated in Figure 3-13.

5 9 6 1
Operating Interface at the Front Side

RS232-LWL RS232 RS485

1 6 9 5

1 6 9 5
Time Synchronization Interface at the Rear Side (Panel Flush Mounting)

Serial Interface at the Rear Side Figure 3-13 9-pin D-subminiature sockets

Operating Interface at Front

When the recommended communication cable is used, correct connection between the SIPROTEC device and the PC is automatically ensured. See the Appendix A, Subsection A.1.1 for an ordering description of the cable. When a serial interface of the device is connected to a central substation control system, the data connection must be checked. A visual check of the transmit channel and the receive channel is important. Each connection is dedicated to one transmission direction. The data output of one device must be connected to the data input of the other device, and vice versa. The data cable connections are designated in sympathy with DIN 66020 and ISO 2110 (see also Table 3-8): TxD RxD RTS CTS DGND Data Transmit Data Receive Request to Send Clear to Send Signal/Chassis Ground

System (SCADA) Interface

The cable shield is to be grounded at only both ends. For extremely EMC-loaded environments the GND may be integrated into a separate individually shielded wire pair to improve the immunity to interference.

218

P-Slave AME

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

3.2 Checking the Connections

Table 3-8 Pin-No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Pin-assignments of the D-subminiature ports Operating Interface RxD TxD GND RTS CTS RS232 Profibus FMS Slave, RS485 Profibus DP Slave, RS485 Screen (with screen ends electrically connected) RS485 A/A' (RxD/TxDN) C/C' (GND) *) B/B' (RxD/TxDP) B/B' (RxD/TxDP) CNTRA (TTL) C/C' (GND) +5 V (max. load 100 mA) A/A' (RxD/TxDN) Modbus RS485 DNP3.0 RS485 A RTS (TTL level) GND1 VCC1 B

RxD TxD GND RTS CTS

*) Pin 7 also may carry the RS232 RTS signal on an RS485 interface. Pin 7 must therefore not be connected!

Termination

The RS485 interface is capable of half-duplex service with the signals A/A and B/B with a common reference potential C/C (DGND). Verify that only the last device on the bus has the terminating resistors connected, and that the other devices on the bus do not. Jumpers for the terminating resistors are on the interface module RS 485 (Figure 3-10) or on the Profibus module (Figure 3-11). It is also possible that the terminating resistors are arranged externally (Figure 3-12). If the bus is extended, make sure again that only the last device on the bus has the terminating resistors switched in, and that all other devices on the bus do not.

Time Synchronization

Either 5 VDC, 12 VDC or 24 VDC time synchronization signals can be processed if the connections are made as indicated in Table 3-9. .
Table 3-9 Pin-No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Pin-assignments of the D-subminiature port of the time synchronization interface Designation P24_TSIG P5_TSIG M_TSIG M_TSYNC*) Screen P12_TSIG P_TSYNC*) Screen Signal Meaning Input 24 V Input 5 V Return Line Return Line *) Screen potential Input 12 V Input 24 V *) Screen potential

*) assigned, but not available

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

219

3 Installation and Commissioning

Optical Fibres

Signals transmitted over optical fibres are unaffected by interference. The fibres guarantee electrical isolation between the connections. Transmit and receive connections are identified with the symbols for transmit and for receive. The character idle state for the optical fibre interface is Light off. If this setting is to be changed, use the operating program DIGSI 4, as described in the SIPROTEC System Manual, order-no. E50417H1176C151.

Warning!
Laser injection! Do not look directly into the fibre-optic elements!

Thermoboxes

If one or two thermoboxes 7XV566 are connected for considering the coolant temperature when using overload protection with hot-spot calculation, check this connection at the service interface (Port C). Check also for the termination: The terminating resistors must be connected to the device 7UT612 (see Subsection 3.1.3.4, margin heading RS485 Interface). For notes concerning the 7XV566 see for the instruction manual attached to the device. Check the transmission parameters at the temperature measuring device. Besides Baud-rate and parity also the bus number is of primary importance. For the connection of 1 thermobox 7XV566: bus number = 0 with Simplex-transmission (to be set at 7XV566), bus number = 1 with Duplex-transmission (to be set at 7XV566), For the connection of 2 thermoboxes 7XV566: bus number = 1 for the 1st thermobox (to be set at 7XV566 for RTD1 to 6), bus number = 2 for the 2nd thermobox (to be set at 7XV566 for RTD7 to 12).

3.2.2

Checking Power Plant Connections

Warning!
Some of the following test steps will be carried out in presence of hazardous voltages. They shall be performed only by qualified personnel which is thoroughly familiar with all safety regulations and precautionary measures and pay due attention to them.

Caution!
Operating the device on a battery charger without a connected battery can lead to impermissibly high voltages and consequently, the destruction of the device. For limit values see Subsection 4.1.2 in the Technical Data. Before the device is energized for the first time, the device should be in the final operating environment for at least 2 hours to equalize the temperature and to minimize hu-

220

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

3.2 Checking the Connections

midity and avoid condensation. Connection are checked with the device at its final location. The plant must first be switched off and grounded. Connection examples for the current transformer circuits are given in the Appendix Section A.3. Please observe the plant diagrams, too.

o o

Protective switches (e.g. test switches, fuses, or miniature circuit breakers) for the power supply must be opened. Check the continuity of all current transformer connections against the switch-gear and connection diagrams:

q Are the current transformers grounded properly? q Are the polarities of the current transformers the same for each CT set? q Is the phase relationship of the current transformers correct? q Is the polarity for current input I7 correct (if used)? q Is the polarity for current input I8 correct (if used)?
o
Check the functions of all test switches that may be installed for the purposes of secondary testing and isolation of the device. Of particular importance are test switches in current transformer circuits. Be sure these switches short-circuit the current transformers when they are in the test mode (open). The short-circuit feature of the current circuits of the device are to be checked. An ohmmeter or other test equipment for checking continuity is needed.

q Remove the front panel of the device (see Figure 3-5). q Remove the ribbon cable connected to the AI/O3 board and pull the board out q At the terminals of the device, check continuity for each pair of terminals that receives current from the CTs.

until there is no contact between the board and the rear connections of the device.

q Firmly re-insert the board. Carefully connect the ribbon cable. Do not bend any connector pins! Do not use force!

q Check continuity for each of the current terminal-pairs again. q Attach the front panel and tighten the screws.
o o o o o o o o o
7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

Connect an ammeter in the supply circuit of the power supply. A range of about 2.5 A to 5 A for the meter is appropriate. Close the protective switches to apply voltage to the power supply of the device. Check the polarity and magnitude of the voltage at the device terminals. The measured steady-state current should correspond to the quiescent power consumption of the device. Transient movement of the ammeter merely indicates the charging current of capacitors. Remove the voltage from the power supply by opening the protective switches. Disconnect the measuring equipment; restore the normal power supply connections. Check the trip circuits to the power system circuit breakers. Verify that the control wiring to and from other devices is correct. Check the signalling connections. Close the protective switches to apply voltage to the power supply.

221

3 Installation and Commissioning

3.3

Commissioning

Warning!
Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation. Non observance of the safety rules can result in severe personal injury or property damage. Only qualified personnel shall work on and around this equipment after becoming thoroughly familiar with all warnings and safety notices of this manual as well as with the applicable safety regulations. Particular attention must be drawn to the following: The earthing screw of the device must be connected solidly to the protective earth conductor before any other electrical connection is made. Hazardous voltages can be present on all circuits and components connected to the supply voltage or to the measuring and test quantities. Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after disconnection of the supply voltage (storage capacitors!). Wait for at least 10 s after having disconnected the supply voltage before you reapply the voltage in order to achieve defined initial conditions. The limit values stated in the Technical Data must not be exceeded at all, not even during testing and commissioning.

When testing the device with secondary test equipment, make sure that no other measurement quantities are connected. Take also into consideration that the trip and close commands to the circuit breakers and other primary switches are disconnected from the device unless expressly stated.

DANGER!
Current transformer secondary circuits must have been short-circuited before the current leads to the device are disconnected! If test switches are installed that automatically short-circuit the current transformer secondary circuits, it is sufficient to place them into the Test position provided the short-circuit functions has been previously tested. For the commissioning switching operations have to be carried out. A prerequisite for the prescribed tests is that these switching operations can be executed without danger. They are accordingly not meant for operational checks.

Warning!
Primary tests must only be carried out by qualified personnel, who are familiar with the commissioning of protection systems, the operation of the plant and the safety rules and regulations (switching, earthing, etc.).

222

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

3.3 Commissioning

3.3.1

Testing Mode and Transmission Blocking

If the device is connected to a substation control system or a server, the user is able to modify, in some protocols, information that is transmitted to the substation (see Section A.6 Protocol Dependent Functions in Appendix A). In the WHVWLQJ PRGH all messages sent from a SIPROTEC4device to the substation are marked with an extra test bit so that the substation is able to identify them as messages announcing no real faults. Furthermore the WUDQVPLVVLRQ EORFNLQJ function leads to a total blocking of the message transmission process via the system interface in the testing mode. Refer to System Manual (Order-no. E50417H1176C151) to know how the testing mode and the transmission blocking can be enabled and disabled. Please note that it is necessary to be 2QOLQH to be able to use the testing mode.

3.3.2

Checking the System (SCADA) Interface

Provided that the device is equipped with a system (SCADA) interface that is used for the communication with a central computer station, it is possible to test via the DIGSI 4 operational function if messages are transmitted correctly. Do not apply this test feature while the device is in service on a live system!

Preliminary Notes

DANGER!
The transmission and reception of messages via the system (SCADA) interface by means of the testing mode is the real exchange of information between the SIPROTEC4 device and the substation. Connected equipment such as circuit breakers or disconnectors can be operated as a result of these actions!

Note:
After termination of this test, the device will reboot. All annunciation buffers are erased. If required, these buffers should be extracted with DIGSI 4 prior to the test. The system interface test is carried out 2QOLQH using DIGSI 4:

q Double-click on the 2QOLQH directory to open the required dialogue box. q Click on 7HVW and the functional options appear on the right side of the window.
Double-click on 7HVWLQJ 0HVVDJHV IRU 6\VWHP ,QWHUIDFH shown in the list view. The dialogue box *HQHUDWH ,QGLFDWLRQV opens (refer to Figure 3-14). Structure of the Dialogue Box In the column ,QGLFDWLRQ, all message texts that were configured for the system interface in the matrix will then appear. In the column 6(732,17 VWDWXV you to define the value for the messages to be tested. Depending on the type of message different

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

223

3 Installation and Commissioning

entering fields are available (e.g. message 21 / message 2))). By clicking onto one of the fields the required value can be selected from the list.

Figure 3-14

Dialogue box: Generate indications example

Changing the Operating State

Clicking for the first time onto one of the field in column $FWLRQ you will be asked for password no. 6 (for hardware test menus). Having entered the correct password messages can be issued. To do so, click on 6HQG. The corresponding message is issued and can be read out either from the event log of the SIPROTEC4 device as well as from the central master computer. As long as the windows is open, further tests can be performed.

Test in Message Direction

For all information that is transmitted to the central station the following is to be checked under 6(732,17 VWDWXV:

q Make sure that each checking process is carried out carefully without causing any
danger (see above and refer to DANGER!). station and shows the desired reaction.

q Click on 6HQG and check whether the transmitted information reaches the central
Exiting the Test Mode Test in Command Direction To end the system interface test, click on &ORVH. The device is briefly out of service while the processor system starting up. The dialogue box closes. Information in command direction must be sent by the central station. Check whether the reaction is correct.

224

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

3.3 Commissioning

3.3.3

Checking the Binary Inputs and Outputs

The binary inputs, outputs, and LEDs of a SIPROTEC4 device can be individually and precisely controlled using DIGSI 4. This feature is used to verify control wiring from the device to plant equipment during commissioning. This test feature shall not be used while the device is in service on a live system.

Preliminary Notes

DANGER!
Changing the status of a binary input or output using the test feature of DIGSI 4 results in an actual and immediate corresponding change in the SIPROTEC device. Connected equipment such as circuit breakers or disconnectors will be operated as a result of these actions!

Note: After termination of the hardware test, the device will reboot. Thereby, all annunciation buffers are erased. If required, these buffers should be extracted with DIGSI 4 prior to the test.
The hardware test can be done using DIGSI 4 in the online operating mode:

q Open the 2QOLQH directory by double-clicking; the operating functions for the device appear.

q Click on 7HVW; the function selection appears in the right half of the screen. q Double-click in the list view on +DUGZDUH 7HVW. The dialogue box of the same
name opens (see Figure 3-15).

Figure 3-15

Dialogue box for hardware test example

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

225

3 Installation and Commissioning

The dialogue box is divided into three groups: %, for binary inputs, 5(/ for output relays, and /(' for light-emitting diodes. Each of these groups is associated with an appropriately marked switching area. By double-clicking in an area, components within the associated group can be turned on or off. In the 6WDWXV column, the present (physical) state of the hardware component is displayed. The binary inputs and outputs are indicated by an open or closed switch symbol, the LEDs by a dark or illuminated LED symbol. The possible intended condition of a hardware component is indicated with clear text under the 6FKHGXOHG column, which is next to the 6WDWXV column. The intended condition offered for a component is always the opposite of the present state. The right-most column indicates the commands or messages that are configured (masked) to the hardware components. Changing the Hardware Conditions To change the condition of a hardware component, click on the associated switching field in the 6FKHGXOHG column. Password No. 6 (if activated during configuration) will be requested before the first hardware modification is allowed. After entry of the correct password a condition change will be executed. Further condition changes remain possible while the dialog box is open. Test of the Binary Outputs Each individual output relay can be energized allowing a check of the wiring between the output relay of the 7UT612 and the plant, without having to generate the message that is assigned to the relay. As soon as the first change of state for any one of the output relays is initiated, all output relays are separated from the internal device functions, and can only be operated by the hardware test function. This implies that a switching signal to an output relay from e.g. a protection function or control command cannot be executed.

Structure of the Test Dialogue Box

q Ensured that the switching of the output relay can be executed without danger (see
above under DANGER!). alog box.

q Each output relay must be tested via the corresponding 6FKHGXOHGcell in the diq The test sequence must be terminated (refer to margin heading Exiting the Procedure), to avoid the initiation of inadvertent switching operations by further tests. Test of the Binary Inputs To test the wiring between the plant and the binary inputs of the 7UT612 the condition in the plant which initiates the binary input must be generated and the response of the device checked. To do this, the dialogue box +DUGZDUH 7HVW must again be opened to view the physical state of the binary inputs. The password is not yet required.

q Each state in the plant which causes a binary input to pick up must be generated. q The response of the device must be checked in the 6WDWXVcolumn of the dialogue
box. To do this, the dialogue box must be updated. The options may be found below under the margin heading Updating the Display. If however the effect of a binary input must be checked without carrying out any switching in the plant, it is possible to trigger individual binary inputs with the hardware test function. As soon as the first state change of any binary input is triggered and the

226

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

3.3 Commissioning

password nr. 6 has been entered, all binary inputs are separated from the plant and can only be activated via the hardware test function.

q Terminate the test sequence (see above under the margin heading Exiting the Procedure). Test of the LEDs The LEDs may be tested in a similar manner to the other input/output components. As soon as the first state change of any LED has been triggered, all LEDs are separated from the internal device functionality and can only be controlled via the hardware test frunction. This implies that no LED can be switched on anymore by e.g. a protection function or operation of the LED reset key. When the dialog box +DUGZDUH 7HVW is opened, the present conditions of the hardware components at that moment are read in and displayed. An update occurs: for each harware component, if a command to change the condition is successfully performed, for all hardware components if the 8SGDWH button is clicked, for all hardware components with cyclical updating if the $XWRPDWLF 8SGDWH VHF field is marked. Exiting the Procedure To end the hardware test, click on &ORVH. The dialog box closes. The device becomes unavailable for a brief start-up period immediately after this. Then all hardware components are returned to the operating conditions determined by the plant settings.

Updating the Display

3.3.4

Checking the Setting Consistency

The device 7UT612 checks settings of the protection functions against the corresponding configuration parameters. Any inconsistencies will be reported. For instance, earth fault differential protection cannot be applied if there is no measuring input for the starpoint current between starpoint of the protected object and the earthing electrode. In the operational or spontaneous annunciations check if there is any information on inconsistencies. Table 3-10 shows such inconsistency annunciations.

Table 3-10

Annunciations on Inconsistencies FNo 00192 05620 05836 Description Setting of the rated secondary currents on Input/Output Board AI/O3 inconsistent The matching factor of the current transformers for differential protection is too great or too small. The matching factor of the current transformers for restricted earth fault protection is too great or too small. See Section 2.1.2 3.1.3.3 2.1.2 2.2 2.1.2 2.1.1

Message Error1A/ 5Awrong Diff Adap.fact. REF Adap.fact. REF Err CTstar

05830* There is no measuring input assigned for restricted earth fault protection

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

227

3 Installation and Commissioning

Table 3-10

Annunciations on Inconsistencies FNo Description See Section

Message REF Not avalia. O/C Ph. Not av. O/C 3I0 Not av. I2 Not avalia.

05835* Restricted earth fault protection is not available for the configured protected 2.1.1 object 01860* Time overcurrent protection for phase currents is not available for the configured protected object 01861* Time overcurrent protection for residual current is not available for the configured protected object 05172* Unbalanced load protection is not available for the configured protected object 2.1.1 2.1.1 2.1.1 2.1.1 2.9.3 2.1.1

O/L No Th.meas. 01545* Temperature reception for overload protection is missing (from thermobox) O/L Not avalia. BkrFail Not av. TripC ProgFail Fault Configur.. 01549* Overload protection is not available for the configured protected object

01488* Breaker failure protection is not available for the configured protected object 2.1.1 06864 00311 For trip circuit supervision the number of binary inputs was set incorrectly Group indication of fault annunciations marked with *. 2.13.1.4 3.1.2

In the operational or spontaneous annunciations also check if there are any fault annunciations from the device.

3.3.5

Checking for Breaker Failure Protection

If the device is equipped with the breaker failure protection and this function is used, the interaction with the breakers of the power plant must be tested. Because of the manifold application facilities and various configuration possibilities of the power plant it is not possible to give detailed description of the test steps necessary to verify the correct interaction between the breaker failure protection and the breakers. It is important to consider the local conditions and the protection and plant drawings. It is advised to isolate the circuit breaker of the tested feeder at both sides, i.e. to keep the busbar disconnector and the line disconnector open, in order to ensure operation of the breaker without risk.

Caution!
Tripping of the complete busbar or busbar section may occur even during tests at the local feeder breaker. Therefore, it is recommended to interrupt the tripping commands to the adjacent (busbar) breakers e.g. by switch-off of the associated control voltage. Nevertheless ensure that trip remains possible in case of a real primary fault if parts of the power plant are in service. The following lists do not claim to cover all possibilities. On the other hand, they may contain items that can be bypassed in the actual application.

228

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

3.3 Commissioning

Circuit Breaker Auxiliary Contacts

The circuit breaker auxiliary contact(s) form an essential part of the breaker failure protection system in case they have been connected to the device. Make sure that the correct assignment has been checked (Subsection 3.3.3). Make sure that the measured currents for breaker failure protection (CTs), the tested circuit breaker, and its auxiliary contact(s) relate to the same side of the protected object. If the breaker failure protection is intended to be initiated by external protection devices, each of the external initiation conditions must be checked. At least the tested phase of the device must be subjected to a test current to enable initiation of the breaker failure protection. This may be a secondary injected current.

External Initiation Conditions

q Start by trip command of the external protection: q Following initiation the message %NU)DLO
7LPHU (address ).

Binary input !%UN)DLO H[W65& (FNo ); look up in the trip log or spontaneous messages. H[W 38 (FNo ) must appear in the fault annunciations (trip log) or in the spontaneous messages.

q Trip command of the circuit breaker failure protection after the delay time 75,3
Switch off test current. The following applies if initiation without current flow is possible:

q Close tested circuit breaker while the disconnectors at both sides open. q Start by trip command of the external protection: q Following initiation the message %NU)DLO
7LPHU (address ).

Binary input !%UN)DLO H[W65& (FNo ); look up in the trip log or spontaneous messages. H[W 38 (FNo ) must appear in the fault annunciations (trip log) or in the spontaneous messages.

q Trip command of the circuit breaker failure protection after the delay time 75,3
Reopen the local circuit breaker. Busbar Trip The most important thing is the check of the correct distribution of the trip commands to the adjacent circuit breakers in case the local breaker fails. The adjacent circuit breakers are those of all feeders which must be tripped in order to ensure interruption of the fault current should the local breaker fail. In other words, the adjacent breaker are those of all feeders which may feed the same busbar or busbar section as the faulty feeder. In case of a power transformer, the adjacent breakers may include the breaker of the other side of the transformer. The identification of the adjacent feeders depends widely on the topology of the busbar and its possible arrangement or switching states. That is why a generally detailed test description cannot be specified. In particular if multiple busbars are concerned the trip distribution logic to the other breakers must be checked. It must be verified for each busbar section that all breakers connected to the same section are tripped in case the concerned feeder breaker fails, and no other breakers.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

229

3 Installation and Commissioning

Termination of the Checks

After completion of the tests, re-establish all provisory measures which might have been taken for the above tests. Ensure that the states of all switching devices of the plant are correct, that interrupted trip commands are reconnected and control voltages are switched on, that setting values which might have been altered are reverted to correct values, and that protective function are switched to the intended state (on or off).

3.3.6

Symmetrical Current Tests on the Protected Object

Should secondary test equipment be connected to the device, it is to be removed or, if applying, test switches should be in normal operation position.

Note:
It must be taken into consideration that tripping may occur if connections were made wrong. The measured quantities of the following tests can be read out from the PC using DIGSI 4 or a web browser via the IBS-Tool. This provides comfortable read-out possibilities for all measured values with visualisation using phasor diagrams. If you choose to work with the IBS-Tool, please note the Help files referring to the IBSTool. The IPaddress neede for the browser depends on the poert where the PC is connected: Connection to the front operation interface: IPaddress 141.141.255.160 Connection to the rear service interface: IPaddress 141.143.255.160 The following descriptions refer to read-out using DIGSI 4. Preparation of Symmetrical Current Tests At first commissioning, current checks must be performed before the protected object is energized for the first time. This ensures that the differential protection is operative as a short-circuit protection during the first excitation of the protected object with voltage. If current checks are only possible with the protected object under voltage (e.g. power transformers in networks when no low-voltage test equipment is available), it is imperative that a backup protection, e.g. time overcurrent protection, be commissioned before, which operates at least at the feeding side. The trip circuit of other protection devices (e.g. Buchholz protection) must either remain operative. The test arrangement varies dependent on the application.

DANGER!
Operations in the primary area must be performed only with plant sections voltage-free and earthed! Perilous voltages may occur even on voltage-free plant sections due to capacitive influence caused by other live sections.

230

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

3.3 Commissioning

On network power transformers and asynchronous machines, a low-voltage test equipment is preferably used. A low-voltage source is used to energize the protected object, which is completely disconnected from the network (see Figure 3-16). On transformers, the test source is normally connect at the primary side. A short-circuit bridge which is capable to carry the test current, is installed outside of the protected zone and allows the symmetrical current to flow. On a motor, its star point enables current flow.

M
400 V 400 V

3~

7UT612

3~

7UT612

400 V

400 V

Test source
Figure 3-16

Test source

Current test with low-voltage test source examples for a transformer and a motor

On power station unit transformers and synchronous machines, the checks are performed during the current tests. The generator itself forms the test current source (see Figure 3-17). The current is produced by a three-pole short-circuit bridge which is installed outside of the protected zone and is capable to carry rated current for a short time.

7UT612 7UT612
Figure 3-17

7UT612

Current test in a power station with generator as test source example

On busbars, branch points, and short lines, a low-voltage test source can be used. Alternatively, load current test is possible. In the latter case the above hint about backup protection must be observed! With the single-phase differential protection for busbars with more than 2 feeders, symmetrical current test is not necessary (but permissible, of course). The test can be carried out using a single-phase current source. But, current tests must be performed for each possible current path, e.g. feeder 1 against feeder 2, feeder 1 against feeder

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

231

3 Installation and Commissioning

3, etc. Please read at first the notes about Checking for Busbar Protection, Subsection 3.3.8 (page 240). Realization of Symmetrical Current Tests For this commissioning tests, the test current must be at least 2 % of the rated relay current for each phase. This test cannot replace visual inspection of the correct current transformer connections. Therefore, the inspection according to Section 3.2.2 is a prerequisite. Since 7UT612 offers comprehensive commissioning aids commissioning can be performed quickly and without external instrumentation. The following indices are used for the display of measured values: The equation symbol for current (I, ) is followed by the phase identifier L and by a number that identifies the side (e.g. the transformer winding). Example: IL1S1 current in phase L1 on Side 1. The following procedure applies to three-phase protected objects. For transformers it is assumed that side 1 is the overvoltage side of the transformer.

Switch on the test current, or start up the generator and bring it to nominal speed and excite it to the required test current. None of the measurement monitoring functions in the device must respond. If there was a fault message, however, the Event Log or spontaneous messages could be checked to investigate the reason for it. Refer also to the SIPROTEC 4 System Manual, order-no. E50417H1176C151. Read out the current magnitudes: Compare the measured values under 0HDVXUHPHQW 6HFRQGDU\ 9DOXHV 2SHUDWLRQDO YDOXHV VHFRQGDU\ with the real values: I L1S1 = I L2S1 = I L3S1 = 3I0S1 = I L1S2 = I L2S2 = I L3S2 = 3I0S2 =

Note: The IBS Tool provides comfortable read-out possibilities for all measured values with visualisation using phasor diagrams (Figure 3-18).
If deviations occur which cannot be explained by measuring tolerances, an error can be assumed in the device connections or in the test arrangement.

q Switch off the test source and the protected object (shut down the generator) and
earth it.

q Re-check the plant connections to the device and the test arrangement and correct

them. If a substantial zero sequence current 3I0 occurs one two of the currents of the corresponding side must have a wrong polarity. 3I0 phase current one or two phase currents are missing, 3I0 doubled phase current one or two phase currents have a reversed polarity.

q Repeat test and re-check the current magnitudes.

232

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

3.3 Commissioning

Secondary Values
Currents: Side 1 +90 Currents: Side 2 +90

180

0 180

90

90

IL1LS1 = 1.01 A, IL2LS1 = 0.98 A, IL3LS1 = 0.99 A,

0.0 240.2 119.1

IL1LS2 = IL2LS2 = IL3LS2 =

0.99 A, 0.97 A, 0.98 A,

177.9 58.3 298.2

Figure 3-18

Measured values on the sides of the protected object example for through-flowing currents

Phase angle measurement for side 1 with test current: Read out the phase angles under 0HDVXUHPHQW 6HFRQGDU\ 9DOXHV $QJOHV of side 1 of the protected object. All angles are referred to I L1S1. The following values must result approximately for a clockwise phase rotation: L1S1 0 L2S1 240 L3S1 120 If the angles are wrong, reverse polarity or swapped phase connections on side 1 of the protected object may be the cause.

q Switch off the test source and the protected object (shut down the generator) and
earth it. them.

q Re-check the plant connections to the device and the test arrangement and correct q Repeat test and re-check the current angles.
o
Phase angle measurement for side 2 with test current: Read out the phase angles under 0HDVXUHPHQW 6HFRQGDU\ 9DOXHV $QJOHV of side 2 of the protected object. All angles are referred to I L1S1.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

233

3 Installation and Commissioning

Consider that always the currents flowing into the protected object are defined as positive. That means that, with through-flowing in-phase currents, the currents leaving the protected object at side 2, have reversed polarity (180 phase displacement) against the corresponding in-flowing currents at side 1. Exception: With transverse differential protection, the currents of the corresponding phase have equal phase! For clockwise phase rotation, approximately the values according to Table 3-11 result.

Table 3-11

Phase indication dependent on the protected object (three-phase) Generator/Motor/ Busbar/Line 180 60 300 0 1 2 Transformer with connection group numeral 1) 3 90 4 60 5 30 6 0 7 8 9 10 11

Prot. object Phase angle L1S2 L2S2 L3S2

1)

180 150 120 60 30 0

330 300 270 240 210 90 330

330 300 270 240 210 180 150 120 90 60 30 0

300 270 240 210 180 150 120

The stated angles are valid if the high-voltage winding is side 1. Otherwise read 360 minus the stated angle

If considerable deviations occur, reversed polarity or swapped phases are expected on side 2.

q Deviation in individual phases indicates reversed polarity in the related phase current connection or acyclically swapped phases.

q If all phase angles differ by the same value, phase current connections of side 2 are
cyclically swapped or the connection group of the transformer differs from the set group. In the latter case, re-check the matching parameters (Subsection 2.1.2 under margin Object Data with Transformers, page 20) under addresses , , and .

q If all phase angles differ by 180, the polarity of the complete CT set for side 2 is

wrong. Check and correct the applicable power system data (cf. Subsection 2.1.2 under Current Transformer Data for 2 Sides, page 23): address  675317!2%- 6 for side 1, address  675317!2%- 6 for side 2.

For single-phase busbar protection refer to Subsection 2.1.2 under header margin Current Transformer Data for Single-phase Busbar Protection. If connection errors are assumed:

q Switch off the test source and the protected object (shut down the generator) and
earth it. them.

q Re-check the plant connections to the device and the test arrangement and correct q Repeat test and re-check the current angles.
Measuring Differential and Restraint Currents Before the tests with symmetrical currents are terminated, the differential and restraint currents are examined. Even though the above tests with symmetrical current should have widely detected connection errors, nevertheless, errors are possible concerning current matching and the assignment of the connection group cannot be completely excluded.

234

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

3.3 Commissioning

The differential and restraint currents are referred to the nominal currents of the protected object. This must be considered when they are compared with the test currents.

Read out the differential and restraint currents under 0HDVXUHPHQW 3HUFHQW 9DOXHV 'LIIHUHQWLDO DQG 5HVWUDLQW &XUUHQWV. In the IBS-Tool, the differential and restraint currents are displayed as a graph in a characteristics diagram. An example is illustrated in Figure 3-19.

Tripping Characteristics
Diff.-Current I/InO
3

Rest.-Current I/InO
1 2 3

Diff.-Current IDiffL1 = IDiffL2 = IDiffL3 = 0.03 I/InO 0.02 I/InO 0.10 I/InO

Rest.-Current IRestL1 = 0.80 I/InO IRestL2 = 0.74 I/InO IRestL3 = 0.78 I/InO 0.3 7.5 I/InO I/InO

Parameter I DIFF >: Parameter I DIFF> >:

Figure 3-19

Differential and restraint currents example for plausible currents

q The differential currents must be low, at least one scale less than the currents flowing through.

q The restraint currents correspond to twice the through-flowing test currents.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

235

3 Installation and Commissioning

q If there are differential currents in the size of the restraint currents (approximately
twice the through-flowing test current), you may assume a polarity reversal of the current transformer(s) at one side. Check the polarity again and set it right after short-circuiting all the six current transformers. If you have modified these current transformers, also perform an angle test.

q If there are differential currents which are nearly equal in all three phases, matching
of the measured values may be erroneous. Wrong connection group of a power transformer can be excluded because they should have been detected during the phase angle test. Re-check the settings for current matching. These are mainly the data of the protected object: For all kind of power transformers, addresses ,  and  under Object Data with Transformers, (page 20) and addresses , ,  and  under Current Transformer Data for 2 Sides (page 23). For generators, motors, reactors, addresses  and  under Object Data with Generators, Motors and Reactors (page 22) and addresses ,   and  under Current Transformer Data for 2 Sides (page 23). For mini-busbars, address  under Object Data with Mini-Busbars, BranchPoints, Short Lines (page 22) and addresses , ,  and  under Current Transformer Data for 2 Sides (page 23). For single-phase busbar protection, addresses  and  under Object Data with Busbars with up to 7 Feeders (page 23) and addresses  to  under Current Transformer Data for Single-phase Busbar Protection (page 25). If interposed summation transformers are used, matching errors can be caused by wrong connections at the summation CTs.

o o

Finally, switch off the test source and the protected object (shut down the generator). If parameter settings have been changed for the tests, reset them to the values necessary for operation.

3.3.7

Zero Sequence Current Tests on the Protected Object

The zero sequence current tests are only necessary if the starpoint of a three-phase object or a single-phase transformer is earthed and if the current between starpoint and earth is available and fed to the current input I7 of the device. The polarity of this earth current (starpoint current) at I7 is essential for zero sequence current correction of the differential protection (increased earth fault sensitivity) and the restricted earth fault protection. No polarity check is necessary for I7 (and/or I8) if only the magnitude of the respective current is processed (e.g. for time overcurrent protection).

Note:
It must be taken into consideration that tripping may occur if connections were made wrong.

236

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

3.3 Commissioning

Preparation of Zero Sequence Current Tests

Zero sequence current measurements are always performed from that side of the protected object where the starpoint is earthed, on auto-transformers from the high-voltage side. Power transformers shall be equipped with a delta winding (dwinding or compensating winding). The side which is not included in the tests remains open as the delta winding ensures low-ohmic termination of the current path. The test arrangement varies with the application. Figures 3-20 to 3-24 show schematic examples of arrangements.

DANGER!
Operations in the primary area must be performed only with plant sections voltage-free and earthed! Perilous voltages may occur even on voltage-free plant sections due to capacitive influence caused by other live sections.

~ Test source

7UT612
Figure 3-20 Zero sequence current measurement on a star-delta transformer

~ Test source

7UT612
Figure 3-21 Zero sequence current measurement on a star-star transformer with compensation winding

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

237

3 Installation and Commissioning

~ Test source

7UT612
Figure 3-22 Zero sequence current measurement on a zig-zag-winding

~ Test source

7UT612
Figure 3-23 Zero sequence current measurement on a delta winding with neutral earthing reactor within the protected zone

~ Test source

7UT612
Figure 3-24 Zero sequence current measurement on an earthed single-phase transformer

238

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

3.3 Commissioning

Realization of Zero Sequence Current Tests

For this commissioning tests, the zero sequence current must be at least 2 % of the rated relay current for each phase, i.e. the test current at least 6 %. This test cannot replace visual inspection of the correct current transformer connections. Therefore, the inspection according to Section 3.2.2 is a prerequisite.

o o

Switch on test current. Read out the current magnitudes under 0HDVXUHPHQW 6HFRQGDU\ 9DOXHV 2SHUDWLRQDO YDOXHV VHFRQGDU\ and compare them with the real values: All phase currents of the tested side correspond to approximately 1/3 of the test current (1/2 with single-phase transformers). 3I0 of the tested side corresponds to the test current. Phase currents and zero sequence current of the other side are, on transformers, nearly 0. Current I7 correspond to the test current. Deviation can practically occur only for the current I7 because the phase currents had been tested already during the symmetrical tests. When deviations are in I7:

q Switch off the test source and the protected object (shut down the generator) and
earth it.

q Re-check the I7 connections and the test arrangement and correct them. q Repeat test and re-check the current magnitudes.
Measuring Differential and Restraint Currents The differential and restraint currents are referred to the nominal currents of the protected object. This must be considered when they are compared with the test currents. Switch on test current. Read out the differential and restraint currents under 0HDVXUHPHQW 3HUFHQW 9DOXHV 'LIIHUHQWLDO DQG 5HVWUDLQW &XUUHQWV.

o o

q The differential current of the restricted earth fault protection IDiffREF must be low,
at least one scale less than the test current.

q The restraint current IRestREF corresponds to twice the test current. q If the differential current is in the size of the restraint current (approximately twice

the test current), you may assume a polarity reversal of the current transformer for I7. Check the polarity again and compare it with the setting in address  ($57+ (/(&752' (cf. also Subsection 2.1.2 under margin Current Transformer Data for Current Input I7 (page 26). the matching factor for I7 may be incorrect. Check the setting relevant for current matching. These are mainly the data of the protected object (Subsection 2.1.2):

q If there is a differential current which does not correspond to twice the test current,
addresses  and  under Object Data with Transformers, (page 20) and addresses  and  under Current Transformer Data for Current Input I7 (page 26).

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

239

3 Installation and Commissioning

Check also the differential currents IDiffL1, IDiffL2, IDiffL3.

q The differential currents of the differential protection must either be low, at least one
Starpoint conditioning of a transformer: addresses  67$5317 6,'( ,  67$5317 6,'( , Subsection 2.1.2 under margin Object Data with Transformers, (page 20), as well as the assignment of the starpoint current transformer to the input I7: address  ,&7 &211(&7, Subsection 2.1.1 under Special Cases (page 16).

scale less than the test current. If considerable differential currents occur, re-check the settings for the starpoints:

q Countercheck: The restraint currents of the differential protection IRestL1, IRestL2,

o o

IRest L3 are equally small. If all tests have been successful until now, this should be ensured.

Finally, switch off the test source and the protected object (shut down the generator). If parameter settings have been changed for the tests, reset them to the values necessary for operation.

3.3.8
General

Checking for Busbar Protection

For single-phase busbar protection with one device per phase or with summation transformers, the same checks have to be performed as described in Subsection 3.3.6 Symmetrical Current Tests on the Protected Object. Please observe the following 4 notes: 1. Checks are often done with operational currents or primary testing devices. Please take note of all warnings you can find in the sections and be aware of the fact that you will require a backup protection at the supplying point. 2. Checks have to be performed for every current path, beginning with the supplying feeder. 3. When using one device per phase, checks are to be performed for each phase. In the following you can find some more information on summation transformers. 4. However, each check is restricted on one current pair, i.e. on the one traversing testing current. Information on vector group matching and vectors (except the phase angle comparison of the traversing current = 180 at the sides tested) or similar is not relevant.

Connection via Summation CTs

If summation transformers are used, different connection possibilities exist. The following clarification are based on the normal connection mode L1L3E according to Figure 3-25. Figure 3-26 applies for connection L1L2L3. Single-phase primary tests are to be preferred, since they evoke clearer differences in the measured currents. They also detect connecting errors in the earth current path. The measured current to be read out in the operational measured values only corresponds to the testing current if three-phase symmetrical check is performed. In other

240

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

3.3 Commissioning

cases there are deviations which are listed in the figures as factor of the testing current.

IL1
2

SCT

IM

Test Current L1L2L3 (sym.) L1L2 L2L3 L3L1 L1E L2E L3E

Measured Current 1.00 1.15 0.58 0.58 2.89 1.73 2.31

IL3
1

3I0 L1 L2 L3
Figure 3-25

CT connection L1L3E

IL1
2

SCT

IM

Test Current L1L2L3 (sym.) L1L2 L2L3 L3L1 L1E L2E L3E

Measured Current 1.00 0.58 1.15 0.58 1.15 0.58 1.73

IL2
1

IL3
3

L1 L2 L3
Figure 3-26 CT connection L1L2L3

Deviations which cannot be explained by measuring tolerances may be caused by connection errors or matching errors of the summation transformers:

q Switch off the test source and the protected object and earth it. q Re-check the connections and the test arrangement and correct them. q Repeat test and re-check the current magnitudes.
The phase angles must be 180 in all cases. Check the differential and restraint currents. If single-phase primary checks cannot be carried out but only symmetrical operational currents are available, polarity or connecting errors in the earth current path with summation transformer connection L1L3E according to Figure 3-25 will not be detected with the before-mentioned checks. In this case, asymmetry is to be achieved by secondary manipulation. Therefore the current transformer of phase L2 is short-circuited. See Figure 3-27.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

241

3 Installation and Commissioning

DANGER!
All precautionary measures must be observed when working on the instrument transformers! Secondary connections of the current transformers must have been short-circuited before any current lead to the relay is interrupted!

IL1
2

SCT

IM

IL3
1

3I0 L1 L2 L3
Figure 3-27 Unsymmetrical test with summation CT connection L1L3E

The measured current is now 2.65 times the current of the symmetrical test. This test must be carried out for each summation CT.

3.3.9

Checking for Current Input I8

Checks concerning the measured current input I8 extremely depend on how this measuring input is applied. By any means, the matching factor for the magnitude has to be checked (address , see also Subsection 2.1.2, margin heading Current Transformer Data for Current Input I8, page 27). Polarity check is not required since only the current magnitude is detected. With high-impedance protection the current at I8 corresponds to the fault current in the protected object. Polarity of all current transformers supplying the resistor, whose current is measured at I8, must be uniform. Here, traversing currents are used as for differential protection checks. Each current transformer must be included into a measurement. The current at I8 must not exceed, by no means, the half of the pickup value of the single-phase time overcurrent protection.

242

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

3.3 Commissioning

3.3.10 Testing User Specified Functions

7UT612 has a vast capability for allowing functions to be defined by the user, especially with the CFC logic. Any special function or logic added to the device must be checked. Naturally, general test procedures cannot be given. Rather, the configuration of these user defined functions and the necessary associated conditions must be known and verified. Of particular importance are possible interlocking conditions of the switchgear (circuit breakers, isolators, etc.). They must be considered and tested.

3.3.11 Stability Check and Triggering Oscillographic Recordings

At the end of commissioning, an investigation of switching operations of the circuit breaker(s), under load conditions, should be done to assure the stability of the protection system during the dynamic processes. Oscillographic recordings obtain the maximum information about the behaviour of the 7UT612. Requirements Along with the capability of recording waveform data during system faults, the 7UT612 also has the capability of capturing the same data when commands are given to the device via the service program DIGSI 4, the serial interfaces, or a binary input. For the latter, the binary input must be assigned to the function !7ULJ:DYH&DS (FNo ). Triggering for the oscillographic recording then occurs when the input is energized. An oscillographic recording that is externally triggered (that is, without a protective element pickup or device trip) is processed by the device as a normal fault recording with the exception that data are not given in the fault messages (trip log). The externally triggered record has a number for establishing a sequence. Triggering with DIGSI 4 To trigger oscillographic recording with DIGSI 4, click on 7HVW in the left part of the window. Double click the entry 7HVW :DYH )RUP in the list in the right part of the window to trigger the recording. See Figure 3-28. A report is given in the bottom left region of the screen. In addition, message segments concerning the progress of the procedure are displayed. The SIGRA program or the Comtrade Viewer program is required to view and analyse the oscillographic data. Such test records are especially informative on power transformers when they are triggered by the switch-on command of the transformer. Since the inrush current may have the same effect as a single-ended infeed but must not initiate tripping, the effectiveness of the inrush restraint is checked by energizing the power transformer several times. The trip circuit should be interrupted or the differential protection should be switched to ',)) 3527 = %ORFN UHOD\ (address ) during this tests in order to avoid tripping.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

243

3 Installation and Commissioning

Figure 3-28

Triggering oscillographic recording with DIGSI 4 example

As the pickup signal of the protection is not stabilized, the inrush current will start fault recording automatically provided the pickup threshold is reached. Conclusions as to the effectiveness of the inrush restraint can be drawn from the recording of the differential currents and the harmonic contents. If necessary the inrush current restraint effect can be increased (smaller value of  +$5021,&, address ) when trip occurs or when the recorded data show that the second harmonic content does not safely exceed the restraining threshold (address ). A further method to increase inrush stability is to set the crossblock function effective or to increase the duration of the crossblock function (address $ &5266%  +$50). For further detail refer to Subsection 2.2.7 under Harmonic Restraint, page 60).

Note:
Do not forget to switch the differential protection 21 (address ) after completion of the test.

244

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

3.4 Final Preparation of the Device

3.4

Final Preparation of the Device

Tighten the used screws at the terminals; those ones not being used should be slightly fastened. Ensure all pin connectors are properly inserted.

Caution!
Do not use force! The permissible tightening torques must not be exceeded as the threads and terminal chambers may otherwise be damaged!

Verify that all service settings are correct. This is a crucial step because some setting changes might have been made during commissioning. The protective settings under device configuration, input/output configuration are especially important as well as the power system data, and activated Groups A through D (if applicable). All desired elements and functions must be set 21. See (Chapter 2). Keep a copy of all of the in-service settings on a PC. Check the internal clock of the device. If necessary, set the clock or synchronize the clock if it is not automatically synchronized. For assistance, refer to the system manual. The annunciation memory buffers should be cleared, particularly the operational messages (event log) and fault messages (trip log). Future information will then only apply for actual system events and faults. To clear the buffers, press 0$,1 0(18 $Q QXQFLDWLRQ 6HW5HVHW. Refer to the system manual if further assistance is needed. The numbers in the switching statistics should be reset to the values that were existing prior to the testing, or to values in accordance with the users practices. Set the statistics by pressing 0$,1 0(18 $QQXQFLDWLRQ 6WDWLVWLF. Press the
ESC

key, several times if necessary, to return to the default display.

Clear the LEDs on the front panel by pressing the LED key. Any output relays that were picked up prior to clearing the LEDs are reset when the clearing action is performed. Future indications of the LEDs will then apply only for actual events or faults. Pressing the LED key also serves as a test for the LEDs because they should all light when the button is pushed. Any LEDs that are lit after the clearing attempt are displaying actual conditions. The green 581 LED must be on. The red (5525 LED must not be lit. Close the protective switches. If test switches are available, then these must be in the operating position. The device is now ready for operation.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

245

3 Installation and Commissioning

246

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

Technical Data

This chapter provides the technical data of the SIPROTEC 4 7UT612 device and its individual functions, including the limiting values that must not be exceeded under any circumstances. The electrical and functional data of fully equipped 7UT612 devices are followed by the mechanical data, with dimensional drawings.

4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10 4.11 4.12 4.13 4.14 4.15

General Device Data Differential Protection Restricted Earth Fault Protection Time Overcurrent Protection for Phase and Residual Currents Time Overcurrent Protection for Earth Current Dynamic Cold Load Pickup for Time Overcurrent Protection Single-Phase Time Overcurrent Protection Unbalanced Load Protection Thermal Overload Protection Thermoboxes for Overload Protection Circuit Breaker Failure Protection External Trip Commands Monitoring Functions Ancillary Functions Dimensions

248 258 263 264 271 272 273 274 275 277 278 278 279 280 282

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

247

4 Technical Data

4.1
4.1.1

General Device Data

Analog Inputs
Nominal frequency fN IN 50 Hz / 60 Hz / 162/3 Hz (adjustable) 1 A or 5 A or 0.1 A approx. 0.02 VA approx. 0.2 VA approx. 1 mVA approx. 0.05 VA (changeable)

Current Inputs

Nominal current

Power consumption per input I1 to I7 at IN = 1 A at IN = 5 A at IN = 0.1 A for high-sensitivity input I8 at 1 A

Current overload capability per input I1 to I7 thermal (rms) 100 IN for 1 s 30 IN for 10 s 4 IN continuous dynamic (pulse) 1250 A (half cycle) Current overload capability for high-sensitivity input I8 thermal (rms) 300 A for 1 s 100 A for 10 s 15 A continuous dynamic (pulse) 750 A (half cycle) Current Transformer Requirements Underburden factor PN + Pi n' = n -----------------P' + P i max. ratio of nominal primary current of the current transformers to nominal object current I kd max n 4 ----------------I N prim I kd max n 5 ----------------I N prim for 100 ms for > 100 ms

I Nprim transf 4 for phase currents --------------------------- I Nprim obj 8 for earth current at I7

4.1.2

Power Supply
Voltage supply via integrated DC/DC converter:
Nominal power supply direct voltage UNDC Permissible voltage ranges Nominal power supply direct voltage UNDC Permissible voltage ranges

Direct Voltage

24/48 VDC 19 to 58 VDC

60/110/125 VDC 48 to 150 VDC

110/125/220/250 VDC 88 to 300 VDC

Permissible AC ripple voltage, peak to peak

15 % of the nominal power supply voltage

248

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

4.1 General Device Data

Power consumption quiescent energized Bridging time for failure/short-circuit of the power supply Alternating Voltage

approx. 5 W approx. 7 W 50 ms at UH = 48 V and UNDC 110 V 20 ms at UH = 24 V and UNDC = 60 V

115/230 VAC 92 to 265 VAC

Voltage supply via integrated AC/DC converter

Nominal power supply alternating voltage UNAC Permissible voltage ranges

Power consumption quiescent energized Bridging time for failure/short-circuit of the power supply

approx. 6.5 VA approx. 8.5 VA 50 ms

4.1.3

Binary Inputs and Outputs

Number Nominal voltage Switching thresholds for nominal voltages 24/48 VDC 60/110/125 VDC for nominal voltages 110/125/ 220/250 VDC Current consumption, energized Maximum permissible voltage Input interference suppression 3 (allocatable) 24 VDC to 250 VDC in 2 ranges, bipolar adjustable with jumpers Upickup 19 VDC Udropoff 14 VDC Upickup 88 VDC Udropoff 66 VDC approx. 1.8 mA independent of the control voltage 300 VDC 220 nF coupling capacitance at 220 V with recovery time >60 ms

Binary Inputs

Binary Outputs

Signalling/command relays (see also General Diagrams in Section A.2 of Appendix A) Number: Switching capability MAKE BREAK 4, each with 1 NO contact (volt-free) (allocatable) 1000 W/VA 30 VA 40 W ohmic 25 W for L/R 50 ms 1, with 1 NO or NC contact (reconnectable) MAKE BREAK 1000 W/VA 30 VA 40 W ohmic 25 W for L/R 50 ms 250 V

Alarm relay Switching capability

Switching voltage

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

249

4 Technical Data

Permissible current per contact Permissible total current on common paths

5 A continuous 30 A for 0.5 s 5 A continuous 30 A for 0.5 s

4.1.4

Communications Interfaces
Connection front panel, non-isolated, RS 232 9-pin DSUB socket for connecting a personal computer with DIGSI 4 min. 4 800 Baud; max. 115200 Baud factory setting: 38400 Baud; parity: 8E1 15 m (50 ft) isolated interface for data transfer for operation with DIGSI 4 or connection of a thermobox

Operation Interface

Operation Transmission speed Maximum transmission distance Service/Modem Interface (optional) RS232/RS485/Optical acc. ordered version RS232 Connection for flush mounted case for surface mounted case

rear panel, mounting location C 9-pin DSUB socket at the inclined housing on the case bottom shielded data cable

Test voltage Transmission speed Maximum transmission distance RS485 Connection for flush mounted case for surface mounted case

500 V; 50 Hz min. 4 800 Baud; max. 115200 Baud factory setting: 38400 Baud 15 m (50 ft)

rear panel, mounting location C 9-pin DSUB socket at the inclined housing on the case bottom shielded data cable

Test voltage Transmission speed Maximum transmission distance Optical fibre Connector Type for flush mounted case for surface mounted case

500 V; 50 Hz min. 4800 Baud; max. 115200 Baud factory setting: 38400 Baud 1000 m (3300 ft)

STconnector rear panel, mounting location C at the inclined housing on the case bottom

250

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

4.1 General Device Data

= 820 nm using glass fibre 50/125 m or using glass fibre 62.5/125 m

Optical wavelength Laser class 1 acc. EN 608251/ 2

Permissible optical signal attenuation max. 8 dB using glass fibre 62.5/125 m Maximum transmission distance Character idle state System (SCADA) Interface (optional) RS232/RS485/Optical Profibus RS485/Profibus Optical acc. to ordered version RS232 Connection for flush mounted case for surface mounted case Test voltage Transmission speed Maximum transmission distance RS485 Connection for flush mounted case for surface mounted case Test voltage Transmission speed Maximum transmission distance Optical fibre Connector Type for flush mounted case for surface mounted case Optical wavelength Laser class 1 acc. EN 608251/ 2 STconnector rear panel, mounting location B at the inclined housing on the case bottom = 820 nm using glass fibre 50/125 m or using glass fibre 62.5/125 m rear panel, mounting location B 9-pin DSUB socket at the inclined housing on the case bottom 500 V, 50 Hz min. 4800 Bd, max. 38400 Bd factory setting: 19200 Bd 1000 m (3300 ft) rear panel, mounting location B 9-pin DSUB socket at the inclined housing on the case bottom 500 V; 50 Hz min. 4800 Bd, max. 38400 Bd factory setting: 19200 Bd 15 m (50 ft) 1.5 km (1 mile) selectable; factory setting: Light off isolated interface for data transfer to a master terminal

Permissible optical signal attenuation max. 8 dB using glass fibre 62.5/125 m Maximum transmission distance Character idle state Profibus RS485 (FMS and DP) Connectionfor flush mounted case for surface mounted case Test voltage rear panel, mounting location B 9-pin DSUB socket at the inclined housing on the case bottom 500 V; 50 Hz 1.5 km (1 mile) selectable; factory setting: Light off

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

251

4 Technical Data

Transmission speed Maximum transmission distance

up to 1.5 MBd 1000 m (3300 ft) 500 m (1640 ft) 200 m (660 ft) at 93.75 kBd at 187.5 kBd at 1.5 MBd

Profibus Optical (FMS and DP) Connector Type STplug FMS: single ring or twin ring depending on ordered version DP: twin ring only rear panel, mounting location B at the inclined housing on the case bottom to 1.5 MBd > 500 kBd = 820 nm using glass fibre 50/125 m or using glass fibre 62.5/125 m

Connection for flush mounted case for surface mounted case Transmission speed recommended: Optical wavelength Laser class 1 acc. EN 608251/ 2

Permissible optical signal attenuation max. 8 dB using glass fibre 62.5/125 m Maximum transmission distance DNP3.0 RS485 Connectionfor flush mounted case for surface mounted case Test voltage Transmission speed Maximum transmission distance DNP3.0 Optical Connector Type Connection for flush mounted case for surface mounted case Transmission speed Optical wavelength Laser class 1 acc. EN 608251/ 2 STplug transmitter/receiver rear panel, mounting location B at the inclined housing on the case bottom up to 19200 Bd = 820 nm using glass fibre 50/125 m or using glass fibre 62.5/125 m rear panel, mounting location B 9-pin DSUB socket at the inclined housing on the case bottom 500 V; 50 Hz up to 19200 Bd 1000 m (3300 ft) 1.5 km (1 mile)

Permissible optical signal attenuation max. 8 dB using glass fibre 62.5/125 m Maximum transmission distance MODBUS RS485 Connection for flush mounted case for surface mounted case Test voltage rear panel, mounting location B 9-pin DSUB socket at the inclined housing on the case bottom 500 V; 50 Hz 1.5 km (1 mile)

252

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

4.1 General Device Data

Transmission speed Maximum transmission distance MODBUS LWL Connector Type Connection for flush mounted case for surface mounted case Transmission speed Optical wavelength Laser class 1 acc. EN 608251/ 2

up to 19200 Bd 1000 m (3300 ft)

STplug transmitter/receiver rear panel, mounting location B at the inclined housing on the case bottom up to 19200 Bd = 820 nm using glass fibre 50/125 m or using glass fibre 62.5/125 m

Permissible optical signal attenuation max. 8 dB using glass fibre 62,5/125 m Maximum transmission distance Time Synchronization Signal type Connection for flush mounted case for surface mounted case Nominal signal voltages Signal level and burden:
5V Nominal signal input voltage 12 V 24 V

1.5 km (1 mile) DCF77/IRIG B-Signal rear panel, mounting location A 9-pin DSUB socket at the terminal on the case bottom optional 5 V, 12 V or 24 V

UIHigh UILow IIHigh RI

6.0 V

1.0 V at IILow = 0.25 mA 4.5 mA to 9.4 mA 890 at UI = 4 V 640 at UI = 6 V

15.8 V 1.4 V at IILow = 0.25 mA 4.5 mA to 9.3 mA 1930 at UI = 8.7 V 1700 at UI = 15.8 V

31 V 1.9 V at IILow = 0.25 mA 4.5 mA to 8.7 mA 3780 at UI = 17 V 3560 at UI = 31 V

4.1.5

Electrical Tests
Standards: IEC 60255 (Product standards) ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0; C37.90.0.1; C37.90.0.2 DIN 57435 Part 303 See also standards for individual tests IEC 602555 and 6087021 2.5 kV (rms); 50 Hz

Specifications

Insulation Tests

Standards: High voltage test (routine test) all circuits except power supply, binary inputs, and communication/time sync. interfaces

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

253

4 Technical Data

High voltage test (routine test) only power supply and binary inputs High Voltage Test (routine test) only isolated communication /time sync. interfaces Impulse voltage test (type test) all circuits except communication /time sync. interfaces, class III EMC Tests; Interference Immunity (Type Tests) Standards:

3.5 kVDC 500 V (rms); 50 Hz

5 kV (peak); 1.2/50 s; 0.5 Ws; 3 positive and 3 negative impulses in intervals of 5 s IEC 602556 and 22 (Product standards) EN 500822 (Generic standard) DIN 57435 Part 303 2.5 kV (Peak); 1 MHz; = 15 s; 400 surges per s; test duration 2 s Ri = 200 8 kV contact discharge; 15 kV air discharge, both polarities; 150 pF; Ri = 330

High frequency test IEC 60255221, class III and VDE 0435 part 303, class III Electrostatic discharge IEC 60255222 class IV and IEC 6100042, class IV

Irradiation with HF field, non-modulated10 V/m; 27 MHz to 500 MHz IEC 60255223 (report) class III Irradiation with HF field, amplitude 10 V/m; 80 MHz to 1000 MHz; 80 % AM; modulated; IEC 6100043, class III 1 kHz Irradiation with HF field, 10 V/m; 900 MHz; repetition frequency pulse modulated 200 Hz; duty cycle of 50 % IEC 6100043/ENV 50204, class III Fast transient disturbance/burst IEC 60255224 and IEC 6100044, class IV High energy surge voltages (SURGE), IEC 6100045 installation class 3 power supply analogue inputs, binary inputs and outputs 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz; burst length = 15 ms; repetition rate 300 ms; both polarities; Ri = 50 ; test duration 1 min impulse: 1.2/50 s 2 kV; 12 ; 9 F 1 kV; 2 ; 18 F 2 kV; 42 ; 0.5 F 1 kV; 42 ; 0.5 F

common mode: diff. mode: common mode: diff. mode:

Line conducted HF, amplitude 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 % AM; 1 kHz modulated; IEC 6100046, class III Power system frequency magnetic field; IEC 6100048, class IV; IEC 602556 30 A/m continuous; 300 A/m for 3 s; 50 Hz 0.5 mT; 50 Hz

Oscillatory surge withstand capability 2.5 to 3 kV (peak value); 1 to 1.5 MHz ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 decaying wave; 50 surges per s; duration 2 s; Ri = 150 to 200 Fast transient surge withstand capability, ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 4 kV to 5 kV; 10/150 ns; 50 surges per s; both polarities; duration 2 s; Ri = 80

Radiated electromagnetic interference 35 V/m; 25 MHz to 1000 MHz ANSI/IEEE Std C37.90.2 amplitude and pulse modulated 254

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

4.1 General Device Data

Damped oscillations IEC 60694, IEC 61000412 EMC Tests; Interference Emission (Type Tests) Standard: Conducted interference, only power supply voltage IECCISPR 22 Radio interference field strength IECCISPR 22

2.5 kV (peak value), polarity alternating; 100 kHz, 1 MHz, 10 MHz and 50 MHz; Ri = 200 EN 50081* (Generic standard) 150 kHz to 30 MHz limit class B 30 MHz to 1000 MHz limit class B

4.1.6

Mechanical Stress Tests

Standards: Vibration IEC 60255211, class 2 IEC 6006826 IEC 6025521 and IEC 60068 sinusoidal 10 Hz to 60 Hz: 0.075 mm amplitude 60 Hz to 150 Hz: 1 g acceleration frequency sweep rate 1 octave/min 20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes. half-sine shaped acceleration 5 g, duration 11 ms, 3 shocks in each direction of 3 orthogonal axes sinusoidal 1 Hz to 8 Hz: 3.5 mm amplitude (horizontal axis) 1 Hz to 8 Hz: 1.5 mm amplitude (vertical axis) 8 Hz to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration (horizontal axis) 8 Hz to 35 Hz: 0.5 g acceleration (vertical axis) Frequency sweep rate1 octave/min 1 cycle in 3 orthogonal axes IEC 6025521 and IEC 60068 sinusoidal 5 Hz to 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude 8 Hz to 150 Hz: 2 g acceleration Frequency sweep rate1 octave/min 20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes half-sine shaped acceleration 15 g; duration 11 ms; 3 shocks in each direction of 3 orthogonal axes

Vibration and Shock During Operation

Shock IEC 60255212, class 1 IEC 60068227 Seismic vibration IEC 60255213, class 1 IEC 6006833

Vibration and Shock During Transport

Standards: Vibration IEC 60255211, class 2 IEC 6006826

Shock IEC 60255212, class 1 IEC 60068227

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

255

4 Technical Data

Continuous shock IEC 60255212, class 1 IEC 60068229

half-sine shaped acceleration 10 g; duration 16 ms; 1000 shocks in each direction of 3 orthogonal axes

4.1.7

Climatic Stress Tests

Standards: IEC 602556 (+23 F to +131 F)

Ambient Temperatures

recommended operating temperature 5 C to +55 C limiting temporary (transient) operating temperature limiting temperature during storage limiting temperature during transport 20 C to +70 C (4 F to 158 F)

Visibility of display may be impaired above +55 C/130 F in quiescent state, i.e. no pickup and no indications

25 C to +55 C (13 F to 131 F) 25 C to +70 C (13 F to 158 F)

Storage and transport of the device with factory packaging! Humidity Permissible humidity mean value p. year 75 % relative humidity on 56 days per year up to 93 % relative humidity; condensation not permissible!

All devices shall be installed such that they are not exposed to direct sunlight, nor subject to large fluctuations in temperature that may cause condensation to occur.

4.1.8

Service Conditions
The device is designed for use in an industrial environment or an electrical utility environment, for installation in standard relay rooms and compartments so that proper installation and electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is ensured. In addition, the following are recommended: All contactors and relays that operate in the same cubicle, cabinet, or relay panel as the numerical protective device should, as a rule, be equipped with suitable surge suppression components. For substations with operating voltages of 100 kV and above, all external cables should be shielded with a conductive shield grounded at both ends. The shield must be capable of carrying the fault currents that could occur. For substations with lower operating voltages, no special measures are normally required. Do not withdraw or insert individual modules or boards while the protective device is energized. When handling the modules or the boards outside of the case, standards for components sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD) must be observed. The modules, boards, and device are not endangered when the device is completely assembled.

256

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

4.1 General Device Data

4.1.9

Construction
Housing Dimensions Weight (mass), approx. in flush mounted case, size 1/2 in surface mounted case, size 1/2 Degree of protection acc. IEC 60529 for the device in surface mounted case in flush mounted case front rear for human safety 7XP20 see drawings, Section 4.15 5.1 kg (111/4 lb) 9.6 kg (211/4 lb)

IP 51 IP 51 IP 50 IP 2x with closed protection cover

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

257

4 Technical Data

4.2
4.2.1

Differential Protection
General
Differential current High-current stage Pickup on switch-on (factor of IDIFF>) Add-on stabilization on external fault (IRest > set value) Iadd-on/INobj action time Trip characteristic Tolerances (at preset parameters) IDIFF> stage and characteristic IDIFF>> stage IDIFF>/INobj IDIFF>>/INobj 0.05 to 2.00 (steps 0.01)

Pickup Values

0.5 to 35.0 (steps 0.1) or (stage ineffective) 1.0 to 2.0 (steps 0.1)

2.00 to 15.00 (steps 0.01) 2 to 250 cycles (steps 1 cycle) or (effective until dropoff) see Figure 4-1 5 % of set value 5 % of set value 0.00 s to 60.00 s or (no trip) 0.00 s to 60.00 s or (no trip) (steps 0.01 s) (steps 0.01 s)

Time Delays

Delay of IDIFF> stage Delay of IDIFF>> stage Time tolerance

TI-DIFF> TI-DIFF>>

1 % of set value or 10 ms

The set times are pure delay times

I diff -------------I Nobj

10 9

Fault Characteristic

D9DAA33

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Legend: Differential current = |I1 + I2 | Idiff Istab Stabilizing current = |I1 | + |I2 | INobj Nominal current of prot. object

Tripping Blocking

Add-on Stabilization

D9DAA3

1
76T@QPDIU

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

76T@QPDIU!

D699PITU67

I stab -------------I Nobj

Figure 4-1

Tripping characteristic of the differential protection

258

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

4.2 Differential Protection

4.2.2

Transformers
Inrush restaint ratio (2nd harmonic) 10 % to 80 % see also Figure 4-2 (steps 1 %) (steps 1 %)

Harmonic Restraint

I2fN/IfN

Stabilization ratio further (n-th) harmonic 10 % to 80 % (optional 3. or 5.) InfN/IfN see also Figure 4-3 Crossblock function max. action time for Crossblock

can be activated / deactivated 2 to 1000 AC cycles (steps 1 cycles) or 0 (crossblock deactivated) or (active until dropout)

Operating Times

Pickup time/dropout time with single-side infeed

Pickup time at frequency at 1.5 setting value IDIFF> at 1.5 setting value IDIFF>> at 5 setting value IDIFF>> Dropout time, approx. 50 Hz 38 ms 25 ms 19 ms 35 ms 60 Hz 35 ms 22 ms 17 ms 30 ms 162/3 Hz 85 ms 55 ms 25 ms 80 ms

Dropout ratio, approx. Current Matching for Transformers Frequency Matching of vector group Star point conditioning Frequency correction in the range Frequency influence

0.7 0 to 11 ( 30) (steps 1)

earthed or non-earthed (for each winding) 0.9 f/fN 1.1 see Figure 4-4

IfN INobj

10.0 5.0 Tripping 2.0 1.0 0.5 0.2 0.1 0

Figure 4-2

settable e.g. IDIFF>>/INobj = 10

Blocking
settable e.g. 2nd Harmonic = 15 %

settable e.g. IDIFF>/INobj = 0.15

Legend: Idiff Differential current = |I1 + I2 | INobj Nominal current of protected object Current with nominal IfN frequency I2f Current with twice nominal frequency I2f IfN

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

Stabilizing influence of 2nd harmonic (transformer protection)

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

259

4 Technical Data

IfN INobj

10.0 Tripping 5.0

settable e.g. I
9DAA h CH

/I1REM = 5

2.0 1.0 0.5

settable e.g. IDIFF>/INobj = 0.15

settable e.g. n-th Harmonic = 40 % Legend: Idiff Differential current = |I1 + I2 | INobj Nominal current of protected object IfN Current with nominal frequency Current with n-fold Inf nominal frequency (n = 3 or 4) Inf IfN

Blocking

0.2 0.1 0
Figure 4-3

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

Stabilizing influence of n-th harmonic (transformer protection)

IXf INobj 20 10 5 3 2 1.0 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0

Figure 4-4
settable e.g. IDIFF>/IN obj = 0.15 settable e.g. IDIFF>>/IN obj = 5.0

Blocking Blocking Tripping

Legend: Differential current = |I1 + I2 | Idiff INobj Nominal current of the protected object Current with any frequency IXf in operating range

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

1.0

1.2

1.4

f/fN

Frequency influence (transformer protection)

260

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

4.2 Differential Protection

4.2.3

Generators, Motors, Reactors

Pickup time/dropout time with single-side infeed
Pickup time at frequency at 1.5 setting value IDIFF> at 1.5 setting value IDIFF>> at 5 setting value IDIFF>> Dropout time, approx. 50 Hz 38 ms 25 ms 19 ms 35 ms 60 Hz 35 ms 22 ms 17 ms 30 ms 162/3 Hz 85 ms 55 ms 25 ms 80 ms

Operating Times

Dropout ratio, approx. Frequency Frequency correction in the range Frequency influence

0.7 0.9 f/fN 1.1 see Figure 4-5

IXf INobj 2

Legend: Differential current = |I1 + I2 | Idiff INobj Nominal current of the protected object Current with any frequency IXf in operating range

0.6 0.4 0.3 0.2 Blocking 0.1 0

Figure 4-5
IDIFF>>/INobj (settable) Setting value e.g. 0.1

Tripping

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

1.0

1.2

1.4

f/fN

Frequency influence (generator / motor protection)

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

261

4 Technical Data

4.2.4

Busbars, Branch-Points, Short Lines

Steady-state differential current monitoring 0.15 to 0.80 Idiff mon/INobj Delay of blocking by differential current monitoring Tdiff mon 1 s to 10 s 0.20 to 2.00 or 0 (always released)

Differencial Current Monitor

(steps 0.01) (steps 1 s) (steps 0.01)

Feeder Current Guard Operating Times

Trip release Iguard/INObj by feeder current guard

Pickup time/dropout time with single-side infeed

Pickup time at frequency at 1.5 setting value IDIFF> at 1.5 setting value IDIFF>> at 5 setting value IDIFF>> Dropout time, approx. 50 Hz 25 ms 20 ms 19 ms 30 ms 60 Hz 25 ms 19 ms 17 ms 30 ms 162/3 Hz 50 ms 45 ms 35 ms 70 ms

Dropout ratio, approx. Frequency Frequency correction in the range Frequency influence

0.7 0.9 f/fN 1.1 see Figure 4-5

262

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

4.3 Restricted Earth Fault Protection

4.3
Settings

Restricted Earth Fault Protection

Differential current Limit angle Trip characteristic Pickup tolerance Time delay Time tolerance
The set times are pure delay times

IREF>/INobj REF

0.05 to 2.00 110 (fix) see Figure 4-6 5 % at I < 5 IN

(steps 0.01)

TREF

0.00 s to 60.00 s or (no trip) 1 % of set value or 10 ms

(steps 0.01 s)

Operating Times Pickup time at frequency at 1.5 setting value IEDS>, approx. at 2.5 setting value IEDS>, approx. Dropout time, approx. Dropout ratio, approx. Frequency Frequency influence 0.7 50 Hz 40 ms 37 ms 40 ms 60 Hz 38 ms 32 ms 40 ms

162/3 Hz 100 ms 80 ms 80 ms

1 % in the range 0.9 f/fN 1.1

IREF IREF> 4

Tripping
3

Blocking

-0.3

-0.2

-0.1

0.0

0.1

0.2

3Io" 0.3 3Io

Figure 4-6

Tripping characteristic of the restricted earth fault protection dependent on zero sequence current ratio 3I0"/3I0 (both current in phase or counter-phase)

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

263

4 Technical Data

4.4

Time Overcurrent Protection for Phase and Residual Currents

Definite time stages Inverse time stages (acc. IEC or ANSI) (DT) (IT) IPh>>, 3I0>>, IPh>, 3I0> IP, 3I0P one of the curves according to Figures 4-7 to 4-9 can be selected alternatively user specified trip and reset characteristic Reset characteristics (IT) (acc. ANSI with disk emulation) see Figures 4-10 and 4-11 0.10 A to 35.00 A 1) or (stage ineffective) 0.00 s to 60.00 s or (no trip) 0.05 A to 35.00 A 1) or (stage ineffective) 0.00 s to 60.00 s or (no trip) 0.10 A to 35.00 A 1) or (stage ineffective) 0.00 s to 60.00 s or (no trip) 0.05 A to 35.00 A 1) or (stage ineffective) 0.00 s to 60.00 s or (no trip) 0.10 A to 4.00 A 1) 0.05 s to 3.20 s or (no trip) 0.05 A to 4.00 A 1) 0.05 s to 3.20 s or (no trip) 0.10 A to 4.00 A 1) 0.50 s to 15.00 s or (no trip) 0.05 A to 4.00 A 1) 0.50 s to 15.00 s or (no trip) (steps 0.01 A) (steps 0.01 s) (steps 0.01 A) (steps 0.01 s) (steps 0.01 A) (steps 0.01 s) (steps 0.01 A) (steps 0.01 s) (steps 0.01 A) (steps 0.01 s) (steps 0.01 A) (steps 0.01 s) (steps 0.01 A) (steps 0.01 s) (steps 0.01 A) (steps 0.01 s)

Characteristics

Current Stages

High-current stages

IPh>> TIPh>> 3I0>> T3I0>>

Definite time stages

IPh> TIPh> 3I0> T3I0>

Inverse time stages (acc. IEC)

IP TIP 3I0P T3I0P

Inverse time stages (acc. ANSI)

IP DIP 3I0P D3I0P

Tolerances with definite time

currents times

3 % of set value or 1 % of nominal current 1 % of set value or 10 ms

264

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

4.4 Time Overcurrent Protection for Phase and Residual Currents

Pickup at 1.05 I/IP 1.15; or 1.05 I/3I0P 1.15 5 % 15 ms at fN = 50/60 Hz 5 % 45 ms at fN = 162/3 Hz for 2 I/IP 20 and TIP/s 1; or 2 I/3I0P 20 and T3I0P/s 1 5 % 15 ms at fN = 50/60 Hz 5 % 45 ms at fN = 162/3 Hz for 2 I/IP 20 and DIP/s 1; or 2 I/3I0P 20 and D3I0P/s 1

Tolerances with inverse time (acc. IEC

currents times

(acc. ANSI)

times

The set definite times are pure delay times.

1)

Secondary values based on IN = 1 A; for IN = 5 A they must be multiplied by 5.

Operating Times of the Definite Time Stages

Pickup time/dropout time phase current stages Pickup time at frequency without inrush restraint, min. without inrush restraint, typical with inrush restraint, min. with inrush restraint, typical Dropout time, typical 50 Hz 20 ms 25 ms 40 ms 45 ms 30 ms 60 Hz 18 ms 23 ms 35 ms 40 ms 30 ms 162/3 Hz 30 ms 45 ms 85 ms 100 ms 80 ms

Pickup time/dropout time residual current stages Pickup time at frequency without inrush restraint, min. without inrush restraint, typical with inrush restraint, min. with inrush restraint, typical Dropout time, typical Drop-out Ratios Inrush Blocking Current stages Inrush blocking ratio (2nd harmonic) Lower operation limit Max. current for blocking Crossblock function between phases max. action time for crossblock
1)

50 Hz 40 ms 45 ms 40 ms 45 ms 30 ms

60 Hz 35 ms 40 ms 35 ms 40 ms 30 ms

162/3 Hz 100 ms 105 ms 100 ms 105 ms 80 ms

approx. 0.95 for I/IN 0.5 10 % to 45 % I2fN/IfN I > 0.2 A 1) 0.03 A to 25.00 A 1) (steps 0.10 A) (steps 1 %)

can be activated/deactivated 0.00 s to 180 s (steps 0.01 s) 1 % in the range 0.9 f/fN 1.1

Secondary values based on IN = 1 A; for IN = 5 A they must be multiplied by 5.

Frequency

Frequency influence

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

265

4 Technical Data

100 t [s] 30 20 10 Tp 3.2

100 t [s] 30 20 10

5
3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.05 1
Inverse: (type A)

5
1.6 0.8 0.4 0.2 0.1 0.05 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.2 0.1 0.05 2 3 5 7 10 I/Ip 20
[s]

Tp 3.2 1.6 0.8 0.4

0.05 1 2 3 5 10 20 I/Ip 13, 5 t = --------------------------- T [s] p 1 (I I ) 1 p

0.1

0, 14 t = ---------------------------------- T p 0.02 1 (I I ) p

Very inverse: (type B)

100 t [s]

1000 t [s] 300

20 10 5 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.8 0.1 0.05 1 2 3 5 0.05 10 I/Ip 0.1 0.2 20 0.4 1.6 Tp 3.2

200 100

50
30 20 10 5 3 2 1 0.5 1 2 3 5 7 10 I/Ip 0.05 20
[s]

Tp 3.2 1.6 0.8 0.4 0.2 0.1

Extremely inverse: (type C) t Tp I Ip tripping time set time multiplier fault current set pickup value

80 t = --------------------------- T [s] p 2 (I Ip) 1

Longtime inverse: not for unbalanced load protection

Notes: Shortest trip time for 162/3 Hz is 100 ms. For residual current read 3I0p instead of Ip and T3I0p instead of Tp for earth current read IEp instead of Ip and TIEp instead of Tp for unbalanced load read I2p instead of Ip and TI2p instead of Tp

120 t = --------------------------- T p 1 ( I Ip ) 1

Figure 4-7

Trip time characteristics of inverse time overcurrent protection and unbalanced load protection, according IEC

266

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

4.4 Time Overcurrent Protection for Phase and Residual Currents

500 t [s] 200 100 50 30 20

100 t [s] 30 20 10

5
10 3 5 3 2 1 0,5 0,3 0,2 0,1 0,05 1 2 3 5 0,5 10 1 I/Ip 20
Inverse

D [s] 15 10 5

2 1 D [s] 15 10 5 0.1 2 0.05 1 2 3 5 10 0.5

2 0.3 0.2 1 0.5

Extremely inverse

5.64 t = --------------------------- + 0.02434 D [s] 2 (I Ip ) 1

8.9341 t = ---------------------------------------- + 0.17966 D [s] 2.0938 1 ( I Ip )

20 I/Ip

100 t [s] 50

100 t [s] 30

20 10 5 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.05 1 0.5

20 10

D [s] 15 10 5

5
3 2 1 0.5 D [s] 15 10 5

0.3 0.2 0.1 0.05 2 1 0.5 1 2 3 5 10 20 I/Ip 3.992 t = --------------------------- + 0.0982 D [s] 2 ( I Ip ) 1 2

10

Moderately inverse t D I Ip tripping time set time dial fault current set pickup value

0.0103 t = ---------------------------------- + 0.0228 D [s] 0.02 1 (I Ip )

I/Ip

20

Very inverse

Notes: Shortest trip time for 16 /3 Hz is 100 ms. For residual current read 3I0p instead of Ip for earth current read IEp instead of Ip for unbalanced load read I2p instead of Ip

Figure 4-8

Trip time characteristics of inverse time overcurrent protection and unbalanced load protection, according ANSI/IEEE

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

267

4 Technical Data

100 t [s] 30 20 10 5 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.05 1 2 3 5 10 20 I/Ip 0.4797 t = ---------------------------------------- + 2.1359 D 1.5625 1 ( I Ip ) 2 1 0.5

100 t [s] 50 D [s] 15 10 20 5 10 5 D [s] 15 10 5 3 2 0.5 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.05 1 2 3 5 10 I/Ip
[s] Long inverse 5.6143 t = ------------------------ + 2.18592 D [s] (I I ) 1 p

2 1

20

Definite inverse

100

t [s]
50 30 20 10 5 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 t D I Ip tripping time set time dial fault current set pickup value

D [s] 15 10 5

Notes: Shortest trip time for 162/3 Hz is 100 ms. For residual current read 3I0p instead of Ip for earth current read IEp instead of Ip a

0.5
0.05

1 5 10 I/Ip 20

Short inverse

0.2663 t = ---------------------------------------- + 0.03393 D [s] 1.2969 1 (I Ip)

Figure 4-9

Trip time characteristics of inverse time overcurrent protection, according ANSI/IEEE

268

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

4.4 Time Overcurrent Protection for Phase and Residual Currents

500 t [s] t [s] 200 100 50 30 20 2 10 1 5 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.05 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 I/Ip
[s]

500 D [s] D [s] 15 10 50 5 30 20 10 5 0.5 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.05 1.0 Inverse 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 I/Ip
[s]

200 100

15
10 5 2 1 0.5

1.0

Extremely inverse

5.82 t = --------------------------- D 2 ( I Ip ) 1

8.8 t = ---------------------------------------- D 2.0938 1 (I Ip )

500 t [s] 200 100 50 30 20 10 5 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.05 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1.0 I/Ip 0.97 Moderately inverse t = ---------------------------- D [s] 2 ( I I p ) 1 t reset time D set time dial I interrupted current Ip set pickup value 2 1 0.5 D [s] 15 10 5

500 t [s] 200 D [s] 100 50 30 20 10 5 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.05 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5
[s]

15 10 5 2 1 0.5

1.0

Very inverse

Notes: For residual current read 3I0p instead of Ip for earth current read IEp instead of Ip for unbalanced load read I2p instead of Ip

4.32 t = --------------------------- D 2 ( I I p ) 1

I/Ip

Figure 4-10

Reset time characteristics of inverse time overcurrent protection and unbalanced load protection with disk emulation, according ANSI/IEEE

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

269

4 Technical Data

500 t [s] t [s] 200 100 50 30 20 10 5 3 2 1 1 0.5 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.05 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 I/Ip Definite inverse
1.0394 t = ---------------------------------------- D 1.5625 1 ( I Ip ) [s]

500 200 100 50 D [s] 15 10 5 5 2 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.05 1.0 30 20 10

D [s]

15
10 5 2 1 0.5

0.05

0.1

0.2 0.3

0.5 I/Ip

1.0

Long inverse

12.9 t = --------------------------- D [s] 1 ( I I p ) 1

500 t [s] 200 100 50 30 20 10 5 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.05 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 I/Ip 1.0 2 1 0.5 0,5 D [s] 15 10 5
t D I Ip reset time set time dial interrupted current set pickup value

Notes: For residual current read 3I0p instead of Ip for earth current read IEp instead of Ip

Short inverse

0.831 t = ---------------------------------------- D 1.2969 1 ( I Ip )

[s]

Figure 4-11

Reset time characteristics of inverse time overcurrent protection with disk emulation, according ANSI/IEEE

270

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

4.5 Time Overcurrent Protection for Earth Current

4.5

Time Overcurrent Protection for Earth Current

Definite time stages Inverse time stages (acc. IEC or ANSI) (DT) (IT) IE>>, IE> IEP one of the curves according to Figures 4-7 to 4-9 can be selected alternatively user specified trip and reset characteristic Reset characteristics (IT) (acc. ANSI with disk emulation) see Figures 4-10 and 4-11 0.05 A to 35.00 A 1) or (stage ineffective) 0.00 s to 60.00 s or (no trip) 0.05 A to 35.00 A 1) or (stage ineffective) 0.00 s to 60.00 s or (no trip) 0.05 A to 4.00 A 1) 0.05 s to 3.20 s or (no trip) 0.05 A to 4.00 A 1) 0.50 s to 15.00 s or (no trip) (steps 0.01 A) (steps 0.01 s) (steps 0.01 A) (steps 0.01 s) (steps 0.01 A) (steps 0.01 s) (steps 0.01 A) (steps 0.01 s)

Characteristics

Current Stages

High-current stage

IE>> TIE>>

Definite time stage

IE> TIE>

Inverse time stages (acc. IEC) Inverse time stages (acc. ANSI)

IEP TIEP IEP DIEP

Tolerances definite time currents times Tolerances inverse time currents (acc. IEC times

3 % of set value or 1 % of nominal current 1 % of set value or 10 ms Pickup at 1.05 I/IEP 1.15 5 % 15 ms at fN = 50/60 Hz 5 % 45 ms at fN = 162/3 Hz for 2 I/IEP 20 and TIEP/s 1 5 % 15 ms at fN = 50/60 Hz 5 % 45 ms at fN = 162/3 Hz for 2 I/IEP 20 and DIEP/s 1

(acc. ANSI)

times

The set definite times are pure delay times.

1)

Secondary values based on IN = 1 A; for IN = 5 A they must be multiplied by 5.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

271

4 Technical Data

Operating Times of the Definite Time Stages

Pickup time/dropout time Pickup time at frequency without inrush restraint, min. without inrush restraint, typical with inrush restraint, min. with inrush restraint, typical Dropout time, typical 50 Hz 20 ms 25 ms 40 ms 45 ms 30 ms 60 Hz 18 ms 23 ms 35 ms 40 ms 30 ms 162/3 Hz 30 ms 45 ms 85 ms 100 ms 80 ms

Drop-out ratios Inrush Blocking

Current stages Inrush blocking ratio (2nd harmonic) Lower operation limit Max. current for blocking
1)

approx. 0.95 for I/IN 0.5 10 % to 45 % I2fN/IfN I > 0.2 A 1) 0.30 A to 25.00 A 1) (steps 0.01 A) (steps 1 %)

Secondary values based on IN = 1 A; for IN = 5 A they must be multiplied by 5.

Frequency

Frequency influence

1 % in the range 0.9 f/fN 1.1

4.6

Dynamic Cold Load Pickup for Time Overcurrent Protection

Start criterion Binary input from circuit breaker auxiliary contact or current criterion (of the assigned side) TCB open TActive time 0 s to 21600 s (= 6 h) 1 s to 21600 s (= 6 h) (steps 1 s) (steps 1 s)

Time Control

CB open time Active time

Accelerated dropout time TStop Time Setting Ranges and Changeover Values Dynamic parameters of current pickups and delay times or time multipliers

1 s to 600 s (= 10 min) (steps 1 s) or (no accelerated dropout) Setting ranges and steps are the same as for the functions to be influenced

272

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

4.7 Single-Phase Time Overcurrent Protection

4.7

Single-Phase Time Overcurrent Protection

High-current stage I>> 0.05 A to 35.00 A 1) 0.003 A to 1.500 A 2) or (stage ineffective) 0.00 s to 60.00 s or (no trip) 0.05 A to 35.00 A 1) 0.003 A to 1.500 A 2) or (stage ineffective) 0.00 s to 60.00 s or (no trip) (steps 0.01 A) (steps 0.001 A) (steps 0.01 s) (steps 0.01 A) (steps 0.001 A) (steps 0.01 s)

Current Stages

TI>> Definite time stage I>

TI> Tolerances currents

3 % of set value or 1 % of nominal current at IN = 1 A or 5 A; 5 % of set value or 3 % of nominal current at IN = 0.1 A 1 % of set value or 10 ms

times
The set definite times are pure delay times.
1) 2)

Secondary values based on IN = 1 A; for IN = 5 A they must be multiplied by 5. Secondary values for high-sensitivity current input I7, independent of nominal current.

Operating Times

Pickup time/dropout time Pickup time at frequency minimum typical Dropout time, typical 50 Hz 20 ms 30 ms 30 ms 60 Hz 18 ms 25 ms 27 ms 162/3 Hz 35 ms 80 ms 80 ms

Drop-out Ratios Frequency

Current stages Frequency influence

approx. 0.95 for I/IN 0.5 1 % in the range 0.9 f/fN 1.1

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

273

4 Technical Data

4.8

Unbalanced Load Protection

Definite time stages Inverse time stages (acc. IEC or ANSI) (DT) (IT) I2>>, I2> I2P one of the curves according to Figures 4-7 or 4-8 can be selected see Figure 4-10 0.1 A to 4 A 1) 0.10 A to 3.00 A 1) 0.00 s to 60.00 s or (no trip) 0.10 A to 3.00 A 1) 0.00 s to 60.00 s or (no trip) 0.10 A to 2.00 A 1) 0.05 s to 3.20 s or (no trip) 0.10 A to 2.00 A 1) 0.50 s to 15.00 s or (no trip)

Characteristics

Reset characteristics (IT) (acc. ANSI with disk emulation) Operating range
1

) Secondary values based on IN = 1 A; for IN = 5 A they must be multiplied by 5.

Current Stages

High-current stage

I2>> TI2>>

(steps 0.01 A) (steps 0.01 s) (steps 0.01 A) (steps 0.01 s) (steps 0.01 A) (steps 0.01 s) (steps 0.01 A) (steps 0.01 s)

Definite time stage

I2> TI2>

Inverse time stages (acc. IEC) Inverse time stages (acc. ANSI)

I2P TI2P I2P DI2P

Tolerances definite time currents times Tolerances inverse time currents (acc. IEC times

3 % of set value or 1 % of nominal current 1 % of set value or 10 ms Pickup at 1.05 I2/I2P 1.15; 5 % 15 ms at fN = 50/60 Hz 5 % 45 ms at fN = 162/3 Hz for 2 I2/2IP 20 and TI2P/s 1 5 % 15 ms at fN = 50/60 Hz 5 % 45 ms at fN = 162/3 Hz for 2 I2/2IP 20 and DI2P/s 1

(acc. ANSI)

times

The set definite times are pure delay times. 1) Secondary values based on I = 1 A; for I = 5 A they must be multiplied by 5. N N

Operating Times of the Definite Time Stages

Pickup time/dropout time Pickup time at frequency minimum typical Dropout time, typical 50 Hz 50 ms 55 ms 30 ms 60 Hz 45 ms 50 ms 30 ms 162/3 Hz 100 ms 130 ms 70 ms

Drop-out Ratios Frequency 274

Current stages Frequency influence

approx. 0.95 for I2/IN 0.5 1 % in the range 0.9 f/fN 1.1
7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

4.9 Thermal Overload Protection

4.9
4.9.1

Thermal Overload Protection

Overload Protection Using a Thermal Replica
Factor k acc. IEC 602558 Time constant 0.10 to 4.00 1.0 min to 999.9 min 1.0 to 10.0 (steps 0.01) (steps 0.1 min) (steps 0.1)

Setting Ranges

Cooling down factor at motor stand-still (for motors) Kfactor Thermal alarm stage Current alarm stage Start-up recognition (for motors) alarm/trip Ialarm Istart-up

50 % to 100 % referred to trip temperature rise (steps 1 %) 0.10 A to 4.00 A 1)

1

(steps 0.01 A)

0.60 A to 10.00 A ) (steps 0.01 A) or (no start-up recognition) 10 s to 15000 s (steps 1 s)

Emergency start run-on time (for motors) Trun-on

1)

Secondary values based on IN = 1 A; for IN = 5 A they must be multiplied by 5.

Tripping Characteristics Tripping characteristic for I/(k IN) 8

Meaning of abbreviations:

see Figure 4-12 I pre 2 I ------------ 2 ------------ k I N k I N t = ln -----------------------------------------------I ------------ 2 1 k I N

t I Ipre k IN tripping time heating-up time constant actual load current preload current setting factor IEC 602558 nominal current of the protected object

Dropout Ratios

/trip /alarm I/Ialarm

dropout at alarm approx. 0.99 approx. 0.97 2 % or 10 mA 1); class 2 % acc. IEC 60 2558

Tolerances

Referring to k IN Referring to tripping time

3 % or 1 s at fN = 50/60 Hz 5 % or 1 s at fN = 16 2/3 Hz for I/(kIN) > 1.25 1 % at fN = 50/60 Hz 3 % at fN = 16 2/3 Hz

1)

Secondary values based on IN = 1 A; for IN = 5 A they must be multiplied by 5.

Freq. Influence Referring to k IN

In the range 0.9 f/fN 1.1

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

275

4 Technical Data

100 t [min] 50
Parameter: Setting Value Time Constant

100 t [min] 50

30 [min] 20 1000

30 20

10

500

10

Parameter: Setting Value Time Constant

5
200 3 2 100

[min] 1000

3 2

500

1 50

1 200

0.5 20 0.3 0.2 10

0.5 100

0.3 0.2

50

0.1 5

0.1 20

0.05 1 2 3 4

1 5

2 6 7 8 10 12 I / (kIN)

0.05 1 2

2 3 4

5 5

10 6 7 8 10 12

without preload:
2 I ------------- k I N t = ln ------------------------------- [min] 2 I ------------- 1 k I N

with 90 % preload:
2

I / (kIN)

Figure 4-12

I pre 2 I ------------- ------------- - k I k I N N t = ln --------------------------------------------------- [min] 2 I ------------- 1 k I N Trip time characteristics of the overload protection with thermal replica

276

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

4.10 Thermoboxes for Overload Protection

4.9.2

Hot Spot Calculation and Determination of the Ageing Rate

Number of measuring points from 1 thermobox (up to 6 measuring points) or from 2 thermoboxes (up to 12 measuring points)

Temperature Detectors

For hot-spot calculation one temperature detector must be connected. Cooling Cooling method ON (oil natural) OF (oil forced) OD (oil directed) Y 1.6 to 2.0 22 to 29 98 C to 140 C 208 F to 284 F 98 C to 140 C 208 F to 284 F 0.125 to 128.000 0.125 to 128.000 (steps 0.1) (steps 1) (steps 1 C) (steps 1 F) (steps 1 C) (steps 1 F) (steps 0.001) (steps 0.001)

Oil exponent

Hot-spot to top-oil gradient Hgr Annunciation Thresholds Warning temperature hot-spot or Alarm temperature hot-spot or Warning aging rate Alarm aging rate

4.10

Thermoboxes for Overload Protection

Thermoboxes (connectable) Number of temperature detectors per thermobox Measuring type 1 or 2 max. 6 Pt 100 or Ni 100 or Ni 120

Temperature Detectors

Annunciation Thresholds

For each measuring point: Warning temperature (stage 1) or Alarm temperature (stage 2) or 50 C to 250 C 58 F to 482 F or (no warning) 50 C to 250 C 58 F to 482 F or (no alarm) (steps 1 C) (steps 1 F) (steps 1 C) (steps 1 F)

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

277

4 Technical Data

4.11

Circuit Breaker Failure Protection

Current flow monitoring Dropoff to pickup ratio Pickup tolerance Breaker status monitoring
1

Circuit Breaker Supervision

0.04 A to 1.00 A 1) for the respective side

(steps 0.01 A)

approx. 0.9 for I 0.25 A 1) 5 % of set value or 0.01 A 1) binary input for CB auxiliary contact

) Secondary values based on IN = 1 A; for IN = 5 A they must be multiplied by 5.

Starting Conditions Times

for beaker failure protection Pickup time

internal trip external trip (via binary input) approx. 3 ms with measured quantities present; approx. 20 ms after switch-on of measured quantities, fN = 50/60 Hz; approx. 60 ms after switch-on of measured quantities, fN = 16 2/3 Hz 30 ms at fN = 50/60 Hz, 90 ms at fN = 16 2/3 Hz 0.00 s to 60.00 s; (steps 0.01 s) 1 % of setting value or 10 ms

Reset time (incl. output relay) Delay times for all stages Time tolerance

4.12

External Trip Commands

Number Operating time Dropout time Delay time Expiration tolerance
The set definite times are pure delay times.

Binary Inputs for Direct Tripping

2 approx. 12.5 ms min. approx. 25 ms typical approx. 25 ms 0.00 s to 60.00 s (steps 0.01 s) 1 % of set value or 10 ms

Transformer Annunciations

External annunciations

Buchholz warning Buchholz tank Buchholz tripping

278

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

4.13 Monitoring Functions

4.13

Monitoring Functions
Current symmetry (for each side) BAL. FAKT. I BAL. I LIMIT Phase rotation | Imin | / |Imax | < %$/ )$.7 , if Imax / IN > %$/ , /,0,7 / IN 0.10 to 0.90 (steps 0.01) (steps 0.01 A) 0.10 A to 1.00 A 1) IL1 before IL2 before IL3 (clockwise) or IL1 before IL3 before IL2 (counter-clockwise) if |IL1|, |IL2|, |IL3| > 0.5 IN 1 with 1 binary input or with 2 binary inputs

Measured Quantities

) Secondary values based on IN = 1 A; for IN = 5 A they must be multiplied by 5.

Trip Circuit Supervision

Number of supervised trip circuits Operation of each trip circuit

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

279

4 Technical Data

4.14

Ancillary Functions
Operational measured values of currents 3-phase for each side Tolerance at IN = 1 A or 5 A Tolerance at IN = 0.1 A IL1; IL2; IL3 in A primary and secondary and % of INobj 1 % of measured value or 1 % of IN 2 % of measured value or 2 % of IN

Operational Measured Values

Operational measured values of currents 3I0; I1; I2 3-phase for each side in A primary and secondary and % of INobj Tolerance 2 % of measured value or 2 % of IN Operational measured values of currents I1 to I7; 1-phase for each feeder in A primary and secondary and % of INobj Tolerance 2 % of measured value or 2 % of IN Operational measured values of currents I8 for high-sensitivity input in A primary and mA secondary Tolerance 1 % of measured value or 2 mA Phase angles of currents 3-phase for each side Tolerance Phase angles of currents 1-phase for each feeder Tolerance Operational measured values of frequency Range Tolerance Operational measured values of power with applied or nominal voltage Operational measured values for thermal value Operational measured values (Temperature acc. IEC 60354) Measured values of differential protection (IL1); (IL2); (IL3) in referred to (IL1) 1 at rated current (IL1) to (IL7) in referred to (IL1) 1 at rated current f in Hz and % of fN 10 Hz to 75 Hz 1 % within range fN 10 % at I = IN S (apparent power) in kVA; MVA; GVA primary L1; L2; L3; res referred to tripping temperature rise trip RTD1 to RTD12 in C or F relative aging rate, load reserve IDIFFL1; IDIFFL2; IDIFFL3; IREST L1; IRESTL2; IRESTL3 in % of operational rated current 2 % of meas. value or 2 % of IN (50/60 Hz) 3 % of meas. value or 3 % of IN (162/3 Hz) IdiffREF; IRestREF in % of operational rated current 2 % of meas. value or 2 % of IN (50/60 Hz) 3 % of meas. value or 3 % of IN (162/3 Hz) with a total of max. 200 messages

Tolerance (with preset values) Measured values of restricted earth fault protection Tolerance (with preset values) Fault Event Data Log Storage of the messages of the last 8 faults

280

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

4.14 Ancillary Functions

Fault Recording

Number of stored fault records Storage period (start with pickup or trip) Sampling rate at fN = 50 Hz Sampling rate at fN = 60 Hz Sampling rate at fN = 162/3 Hz

max. 8 max. 5 s for each fault approx. 5 s in total 1.67 ms 1.83 ms 5 ms

Statistics

Number of trip events caused by 7UT612 Total of interrupted currents caused by 7UT612 Operating hours criterion segregated for each pole and each side Up to 7 decimal digits Excess of current threshold (%UHDNHU 6 ,! or %UHDNHU 6 ,!) 1 ms 1 ms 3 V/1 Ah, type CR 1/2 AA Self-discharging time approx. 10 years

Real Time Clock and Buffer Battery

Resolution for operational messages Resolution for fault messages Buffer battery

Time Synchronization

Operation modes: Internal IEC 608705103 Time signal IRIG B Time signal DCF77 Time signal synchro-box Pulse via binary input Internal via RTC External via system interface (IEC 608705103) External via IRIG B External, via time signal DCF77 External, via synchro-box External with pulse via binary input

User-configurable Functions (CFC)

Processing times for function blocks: Block, Basic requirements 5 TICKS Beginning with the 3rd additional input for generic blocks per input 1 TICK Logic function with input margin 6 TICKS Logical function with output margin 7 TICKS In addition to each chart 1 TICK Maximum number of TICKS in sequence levels: 0:B%($5% (processing of meas. values) 3/&B%($5% (slow PLC processing) 3/&B%($5% (fast PLC processing) 6)6B%($5% (switchgear interlocking) 1200 TICKS 255 TICKS 90 TICKS 1000 TICKS

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

281

4 Technical Data

4.15

Dimensions

Housing for Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Installation

29.5

172 Mounting plate

34

29.5

172 Mounting plate

29 30 150 145

266

244

266

244

2
Q

34

Side View (with screwed terminals)

Side View (with plug-in terminals)

Rear View

146 +2

5 or M4

0.3
255.8

245

+1

Dimensions in mm

5.4

13.2 7.3

105

131.5

0.5 0.3

Panel Cut-Out

Figure 4-13

Dimensions 7UT612 for panel flush mounting or cubicle installation

282

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

4.15 Dimensions

Housing for Panel Surface Mounting

165 144
31 46 45 60

10.5

260 29.5

1 16

15 30

280 320 344

71 Front View Side View

266

150

Dimensions in mm

Figure 4-14

Dimensions 7UT612 for panel surface mounting

Thermobox

58 48 25 16.5 3 105

61.8

90

116

45

Side view 3 Locks (Locked) for Snap-on Mounting on Standard Rail Dimensions in mm 140 Front view 3 Locks (Unlocked) for Wall Mounting with Screws Lock Hole 4.2 mm

Figure 4-15

Dimensions Thermobox 7XV5662AD100000

98

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

283

4 Technical Data

284

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

Appendix

A
This appendix is primarily a reference for the experienced user. This Chapter provides ordering information for the models of 7UT612. General diagrams indicating the terminal connections of the 7UT612 models are included. Connection examples show the proper connections of the device to primary equipment in typical power system configurations. Tables with all settings and all information available in a 7UT612 equipped with all options are provided.

A.1 A.2 A.3 A.4 A.5 A.6 A.7 A.8 A.9

Ordering Information and Accessories General Diagrams Connection Examples Assignment of the Protection Functions to Protected Objects Preset Configurations Protocol Dependent Functions List of Settings List of Information List of Measured Values

286 291 293 304 305 307 308 323 340

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

285

A Appendix

A.1

Ordering Information and Accessories

7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Differential Protection
Rated Current IN = 1 A IN = 5 A Auxiliary Voltage (Power Supply, Pick-up Threshold of Binary Inputs) DC 24 V to 48 V, binary input threshold 17 V 2) DC 60 V to 125 V 1), binary input threshold 17 V 2) DC 110 V to 250 V 1), AC 115 to 230 V, binary input threshold 73 V 2) Housing / Number of In- and Outputs BI: Binary Inputs, BO: Binary Outputs Surface mounting housing with two-tier terminals, 1/3 19", 3 BI, 4 BO, 1 life contact Flush mounting housing with plug-in terminals, 1/3 19", 3 BI, 4 BO, 1 life contact Flush mounting housing with screwed terminals, 1/3 19", 3 BI, 4 BO, 1 life contact Region-Specific Default / Language Settings and Function Versions Region GE, 50/60 Hz, 16 2/3 Hz, language German (language can be changed) Region world, 50/60 Hz, 16 2/3 Hz, language English, (language can be changed) Region US, 60/50 Hz, language US-English (language can be changed) Region world, 50/60 Hz, 16 2/3 Hz, language Spanish (language can be changed) System Interface: Functionality and Hardware (Port B) No system interface IEC Protocol, electrical RS232 IEC Protocol, electrical RS485 IEC Protocol, optical 820 nm, ST-plug Profibus FMS Slave, electrical RS485 Profibus FMS Slave, optical, single-ring, ST-connector Profibus FMS Slave, optical, double-ring, ST-connector For further interfaces see additional specification L

7UT612

A0

1 5

2 4 5

B D E

A B C E

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 + L 0

Additional Specification L Profibus DP Slave, RS485 Profibus DP Slave, optical 820 nm, double-ring, ST-connector Modbus, RS485 Modbus, optical 820 nm, ST-connector DNP, RS485 DNP, optical 820 nm, STconnector DIGSI / Modem Interface / Thermobox (Port C) No DIGSI interface on the rear side DIGSI / Modem, electrical RS232 DIGSI / Modem / Thermobox, electrical RS485 DIGSI / Modem / Thermobox, optical 820 nm, ST-connector
1) 2

A B D E G H

0 1 2 3

with plug-in jumper one of 2 voltage ranges can be selected ) for each binary input one of 2 pickup threshold ranges can be selected with plug-in jumpers see page A-3

286

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories

Differential Protection
Functionality Measured Values Basic measured values Basic measured values, transformer monitoring functions (connection to thermobox / hot spot, overload factor) Differential Protection + Basic Functions Differential protection for transformer, generator, motor, busbar (87) Overload protection according to IEC for 1 winding (49) Lock out (86) Time overcurrent protection phases (50/51): I>, I>>, Ip (inrush stabilization) Time overcurrent protection 3I0 (50N/51N): 3I0>, 3I0>>, 3I0p (inrush stabilization) Time overcurrent protection earth (50G/51G): IE>, IE>>, IEp (inrush stabilization)

7UT612

9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16

A0

1 4 A

Differential Protection + Basic Functions + Additional Functions Restricted earth fault protection, low impedance (87G) Restricted earth fault protection, high impedance (87G without resistor and varistor), O/C 1-phase Trip circuit supervision (74TC) Unbalanced load protection (46) Breaker failure protection (50BF) High-sensitivity time overcurrent protection / tank leakage protection (64), O/C 1-phase Ordering example: 7UT61214EA911AA0 +L0A Differential protection here: pos. 11 = 9 pointing at L0A, i.e. version with Profibus-interface DP Slave, RS485

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

287

A Appendix

A.1.1

Accessories
For up to 6 temperature measuring points (at most 2 devices can be connected to 7UT612)
Name Thermobox, UN = 24 to 60 V AC/DC Thermobox, UN = 90 to 240 V AC/DC Order No. 7XV56622AD10 7XV56625AD10

Thermobox

Matching / Summation Transformer

For single-phase busbar connection

Name Matching / summation transformer IN = 1 A Matching / summation transformer IN = 5 A Order No. 4AM51203DA000AN2 4AM51204DA000AN2

Interface Modules

Exchange interface modules

Name RS232 RS485 Optical 820 nm Profibus FMS RS485 Profibus FMS double ring Profibus FMS single ring Profibus DP RS485 Profibus DP double ring Modbus RS485 Modbus 820 nm DNP 3.0 RS485 DNP 3.0 820 nm Order No. C53207A351D6411 C53207A351D6421 C53207A351D6431 C53207A351D6031 C53207A351D6061 C53207A351D6091 C53207A351D6111 C53207A351D6131 C53207A351D6211 C53207A351D6231 C53207A351D6311 C53207A351D6331

Terminal Block Covering Caps

Covering cap for terminal block type 18 terminal voltage block, 12 terminal current block 12 terminal voltage block, 8 terminal current block

Order No. C73334-A1C311 C73334-A1C321

Short-Circuit Links
Short-circuit links for purpose / terminal type Voltage block, 18 terminal, 12 terminal Current block,12 terminal, 8 terminal Order No. C73334-A1C341 C73334-A1C331

288

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories

Plug-in Socket Boxes

For Connector Type 2 pin 3 pin

Order No. C73334A1C351 C73334A1C361

Mounting Bracket for 19"-Racks

Name Angle strip (mounting rail)

Order No. C73165-A63-C200-3

Battery
Lithium battery 3 V/1 Ah, Type CR 1/2 AA VARTA Order No. 6127 101 501

Interface Cable

An interface cable is necessary for the communication between the SIPROTEC device and a computer. Requirements for the computer are Windows 95 or Windows NT4 and the operating software DIGSI 4.
Interface cable between PC or SIPROTEC device Cable with 9-pin male / female connections Order No. 7XV51004

Operating Software DIGSI 4

Software for setting and operating SIPROTEC 4 devices

Operating Software DIGSI 4 DIGSI 4, basic version with license for 10 computers DIGSI 4, complete version with all option packages Order No. 7XS54000AA00 7XS54020AA0

Graphical Analysis Program SIGRA

Software for graphical visualization, analysis, and evaluation of fault data. Option package of the complete version of DIGSI 4
Graphical analysis program DIGRA Full version with license for 10 machines Order No. 7XS54100AA0

Graphic Tools

Software for graphically supported configuration of characteristic curves and provide zone diagrams for overcurrent and distance protection devices. (Option package for the complete version of DIGSI 4)
Graphic Tools 4 Full version with license for 10 machines Order No. 7XS54300AA0

DIGSI REMOTE 4

Software for remotely operating protection devices via a modem (and possibly a star connector) using DIGSI 4. (Option package for the complete version of DIGSI 4).
DIGSI REMOTE 4 Full version with license for 10 machines Order No. 7XS54401AA0

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

289

A Appendix

SIMATIC CFC 4

Software for graphical configuration of interlocking (latching) conditions and creating additional functions in SIPROTEC 4 devices. (Option package for the complete version of DIGSI 4).
SIMATIC CFC 4 Full version with license for 10 machines Order No. 7XS54500AA0

Varistor

Voltage arrester for high-impedance protection

Varistor 125 Vrms; 600 A; 1S/S256 240 Vrms; 600 A; 1S/S1088 Order No. C53207A401D761 C53207A401D771

290

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

A.2 General Diagrams

A.2
A.2.1

General Diagrams
Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Mounting

7UT612D/E
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 F14 F15 F16 F17 F18 IL1S1/I1 IL2S1/I2 BO2 IL3S1/I3 I7 IL1S2/I4 IL2S2/I5 IL3S2/I6 I8 Lifecontact Power supply
+
(~)

BO1

1 2 3 2

F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 F13

1 2 3 2

BO3 BO4

BI1 BI2 BI3

F3 F4 F5 F1 F2

Service interface/ Thermobox System interface

Time synchronization

Operating interface Earthing on the rear wall

Interference suppression capacitors at the relay contacts, Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V

Figure A-1

General Diagram 7UT612*-*D/E (panel flush mounted or cubicle mounted)

Assignment of Pins of Interfaces see Table 3-8 and 3-9 in Subsection 3.1.3

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

291

A Appendix

A.2.2

Panel Surface Mounting

7UT612B
15 30 14 29 13 28 12 27 9 24 8 23 7 22 6 21 48 32 47 31 46 IL1S1/I1 IL2S1/I2 BO2 IL3S1/I3 I7 IL1S2/I4 IL2S2/I5 IL3S2/I6 I8 Life contact Power supply
+
(~)

BO1

1 2 3 2 1 2 3 2

39 54 38 53 35 50 34 49

BO3 BO4

52 36 51 10 11 Earthing terminal (16) 2 17 3 18 4 19 1 IN SYNC IN 12 V COM SYNC COMMON IN 5 V IN 24 V Screen Assignment of Pins of Interfaces seeTable 3-8 in Subsection 3.1.3 Interference suppression capacitors at the relay contacts, Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V 7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

BI1 BI2 BI3

Time synchronization

Service interface/ Thermobox System interface

Operating interface Earthing on the side wall

Figure A-2

General diagram 7UT612B (panel surface mounting)

292

A.3 Connection Examples

A.3

Connection Examples
Side 2 Side 1

L1 L2 L3

P2

P1

P1

P2

L1 L2 L3

S2

S1

S1

S2

Panel surface mounted Flush mounted/cubicle 9 R1 IL1S2 IL1S1 Q1 15

24 8

R2 R3

Q2 Q3

30 14

23 7

R4 R5

IL2S2

IL2S1

Q4 Q5

29 13

22

R6

IL3S2

IL3S1

Q6

28

7UT612

L1 L2 L3

Side 2

P2

P1

P1

P2

Side 1

L1 L2 L3

S2

S1

S1

S2

Panel surface mounted Flush mounted/cubicle 9 R1 IL1S2 IL1S1 Q1 15

24 8

R2 R3

Q2 Q3

30 14

23 7

R4 R5

IL2S2

IL2S1

Q4 Q5

29 13

22

R6

IL3S2

IL3S1

Q6

28

7UT612

Figure A-3

Connection example 7UT612 for a three-phase power transformer without (above) and with (below) earthed starpoint

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

293

A Appendix

L1 L2 L3

Side 2

P2

P1

P1

P2

Side 1

L1 L2 L3

S2

S1 P1 S1

S1

S2

P2

S2

Panel surface mounted 12 Flush mounted/ Q7 cubicle 9 R1 I7 24 8 R2 R3 IL2S2 IL1S2

27 Q8 Q1 IL1S1 15

Q2 Q3

30 14

23 7

R4 R5

IL2S1

Q4 Q5

29 13

22

R6

IL3S2 7UT612

IL3S1

Q6

28

Figure A-4

Connection example 7UT612 for a three-phase power transformer with current transformer between starpoint and earthing point

294

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

A.3 Connection Examples

Side 2

L1 L2 L3

P2

P1

P1

P2

Side 1

L1 L2 L3

S2

S1

S1

S2

P2 S2

P1 S1

Panel surface mounting 12 Flush mounted/ Q7 cubicle 9 R1 I7 24 8 R2 R3 IL2S2 IL1S2

27 Q8 Q1 IL1S1 15

Q2 Q3

30 14

23 7

R4 R5

IL2S1

Q4 Q5

29 13

22

R6

IL3S2 7UT612

IL3S1

Q6

28

Figure A-5

Connection example 7UT612 for a three-phase power transformer with neutral earthing reactor and current transformer between starpoint and earthing point

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

295

A Appendix

L1 L2 L3

Side 2

P2

P1 P1 P2

Side 1

L1 L2
S2 S1 P1 S1 S1 S2

L3

P2

S2

Panel surface mounted 12 Flush mounted/ Q7 cubicle 9 R1 I7 24 8 R2 R3 IL2S2 IL1S2

27 Q8 Q1 IL1S1 15

Q2 Q3

30 14

23 7

R4 R5

IL2S1

Q4 Q5

29 13

22

R6

IL3S2 7UT612

IL3S1

Q6

28

Figure A-6

Connection example 7UT612 for a three-phase auto-transformer with current transformer between starpoint and earthing point

L1 L3

Side 2

P2

P1 P1

Side 1
P2

L1 L3

S2

S1 P1 S1 S1 S2

P2

S2

Panel surface mounted 12 Flush mounted/ Q7 cubicle 9 R1 I7 24 8 R2 R3 IL2S2 IL1S2

27 Q8 Q1 IL1S1 15

Q2 Q3

30 14

23 7

R4 R5

IL2S1

Q4 Q5

29 13

22

R6

IL3S2 7UT612

IL3S1

Q6

28

Figure A-7

Connection example 7UT612 for a single-phase power transformer with current transformer between starpoint and earthing point

296

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

A.3 Connection Examples

L1 L3

Side 2

P2

P1

P1 S1

P2 S2

Side 1

L1 L3

S2

S1

Panel surface mounted Flush mounted/cubicle 9 R1 IL1S2 IL1S1 Q1 15

24 8

R2 R3

Q2 Q3

30 14

23 7

R4 R5

IL2S2

IL2S1

Q4 Q5

29 13

22

R6

IL3S2 7UT612

IL3S1

Q6

28

Figure A-8

Connection example 7UT612 for a single-phase power transformer with only one current transformer (right side)

Side 2

P2

P1

P1

P2

Side 1

L1 L2 L3

S2

S1

S1

S2

Panel surface mounted Flush mounted/cubicle 9 R1 IL1S2 IL1S1 Q1 15

24 8

R2 R3

Q2 Q3

30 14

23 7

R4 R5

IL2S2

IL2S1

Q4 Q5

29 13

22

R6

IL3S2

IL3S1

Q6

28

7UT612

Figure A-9

Connection example 7UT612 for a generator or motor

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

297

A Appendix

Side 2
P2 P1

Side 1P2

P1

L1

L2

S2

S1

L3

S2

S1

Panel surface mounted Flush mounted/cubicle 9 R1 IL1S2 IL1S1 Q1 15

24 8

R2 R3

Q2 Q3

30 14

23 7

R4 R5

IL2S2

IL2S1

Q4 Q5

29 13

22

R6

IL3S2

IL3S1

Q6

28

7UT612

Figure A-10

Connection example 7UT612 as transversal differential protection for a generator with two windings per phase

298

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

A.3 Connection Examples

Side 2

L1 L2 L3

P2

P1

P1

P2

Side 1

L1 L2 L3

S2

S1

S1

S2

P1

S1

P2

S2

Panel surface mounted Flush mounted/ cubicle 9 R1 IL1S2

12 Q7

27 Q8 Q1 I7 IL1S1 15

24 8

R2 R3

Q2 Q3

30 14

23 7

R4 R5

IL2S2

IL2S1

Q4 Q5

29 13

22

R6

IL3S2 7UT612

IL3S1

Q6

28

Figure A-11

Connection example 7UT612 for an earthed shunt reactor with current transformer between starpoint and earthing point

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

299

A Appendix

P1

P2

L1 L2 L3

S1 P1 S1

S2

V
P2 S2

R 27 Q8 Q1 15

Panel surface mounted 12 Flush mounted/ Q7 cubicle 9 R1 IL1S2 I8

24 8

R2 R3

IL1S1

Q2 Q3

30 14

23 7

R4 R5

IL2S2

IL2S1

Q4 Q5

29 13

22

R6

IL3S2 7UT612

IL3S1

Q6

28

Figure A-12

Connection example 7UT612 as high-impedance protection on a transformer winding with earthed starpoint (the illustration shows the partial connection of the high-impedance protection)

300

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

A.3 Connection Examples

L1 L2 L3

Side 2

P2

P1

P1

P2

P1

P2

Side 1

L1 L2 L3

S2

S1 P1 S1

S1

S2

S1

S2

P2 P1

S2 S1

P2

S2

R 27 Q8 6 R7 21 R8 Q1 I7 I8 IL1S1 Q2 Q3 30 14 15

Panel surface mounted 12 Flush mounted/ Q7 cubicle 9 R1 IL1S2

24 8

R2 R3

23 7

R4 R5

IL2S2

IL2S1

Q4 Q5

29 13

22

R6

IL3S2 7UT612

IL3S1

Q6

28

Figure A-13

Connection example 7UT612 for a three-phase power transformer with current transformers between starpoint and earthing point, additional connection for high-impedance protection

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

301

A Appendix

Feeder 1

Feeder 2

Feeder 3

Feeder 4

Feeder 5

Feeder 6

Feeder 7 L1 L2 L3

P1

S1

P1

S1

P1

S1

P1

S1

P1

S1

P1

S1

P1

S1

P2

S2

P2

S2

P2

S2

P2

S2

P2

S2

P2

S2

P2

S2

Panel surface mounted Flush mounted/cubicle 15 Q1 I1 I4 R1 9

30 14

Q2 Q3

R2 R3

24 8

29 13

Q4 Q5

I2

I5

R4 R5

23 7

28

Q6

I3

I6

R6 Q7

22 12

I7 7UT612

Q8

27

Figure A-14

Connection example 7UT612 as single-phase busbar protection, illustrated for phase L1

302

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

A.3 Connection Examples

Feeder 1

Feeder 2

Feeder 7 L1 L2 L3

P1

S1 S2

P1

S1 S2

P1

S1 S2

P2

P2

P2

L1 SCT

L2

L3

L1 SCT

L2

L3

L1 SCT

L2

L3

Panel surface mounted Flush mounted/cubicle 15 Q1 I1 I4 R1 9

30 14

Q2 Q3

R2 R3

24 8

29 13

Q4 Q5

I2

I5

R4 R5

23 7

28

Q6

I3

I6

R6 Q7

22 12

I7 7UT612

Q8

27

Figure A-15

Connection example 7UT612 as busbar protection, connected via external summation current transformers (SCT) partial illustration for feeders 1, 2 and 7

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

303

A Appendix

A.4

Assignment of the Protection Functions to Protected Objects

Not every implemented protection function of 7UT612 is sensible or available for each protected object. Table A-1 lists the corresponding protection functions for each protected object. Once a protected object is configured (according to Section 2.1.1), only the corresponding protective functions specified in the table below will be available and settable.

Table A-1

Overview of protection functions available in protected objects Two-Winding Transformer X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Function available 1-Phase AutoTransformer Transformer X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Generator / Motor X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Busbar 3-phase X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Busbar 1-phase X X X X X X X

Protection Function Differential protection Restricted earth fault protection Time overcurrent protection phases Time overcurrent protection 3I0 Time overcurrent protection earth Time overcurrent protection 1-phase Unbalanced load protection Overload protection IEC 602558 Overload protection IEC 60354 Circuit breaker failure protection Measured value monitoring Trip circuit supervision External trip command 1 External trip command 2 Measured values Legend:

Function not available

304

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

A.5 Preset Configurations

A.5

Preset Configurations

Binary Inputs
Table A-2 Preset binary inputs LCD Text >Reset LED >Buchh. Trip FNo 00005 00392 Remarks Reset of latched indications, Hactive Buchholz protection trip, Hactive No presetting Binary Input BI1 BI2 BI3

Binary Outputs (Output Relays)

Table A-3 Binary Output BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4

Preset binary outputs LCD Text Relay TRIP Relay PICKUP >Buchh. Trip Error Sum Alarm Alarm Sum Event FNo 00511 00501 00392 00140 00160 Remarks Device (general) trip command, non-latched Device (general) pickup, non-latched Buchholz protection trip, non-latched Group alarm of errors and disturbances, non-latched

LED Indicators
Table A-4 LED LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 LED5 LED6 LED7 Preset LED indicators LCD Text Relay TRIP Relay PICKUP >Buchh. Trip Error Sum Alarm Alarm Sum Event Fault Configur. FNo 00511 00501 00392 00140 00160 00311 Remarks Device (general) trip command, latched Device (general) pickup, latched Buchholz protection trip, latched no presetting no presetting Group alarm of errors and disturbances, non-latched Errors during configuration or setting (inconsistent settings), non-latched

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

305

A Appendix

Preset CFCCharts

7UT612 provides worksheets with preset CFC-charts. Figure A-16 shows a chart which changes binary input !'DWD6WRS from single point indication (SP) to internal single point indication (IntSP). According to Figure A-17 an reclosure interlocking will be produced. It interlocks the closure of the circuit breaker after tripping of the device until manual acknowledgement.

"IN: 9rvpr39hhTTQ"

Irth I@B Irth 7PY

QG8 f7@6  `7P

"OUT: 9rvprVypx9UDTQ"

Figure A-16

CFC-chart for transmission block and testing mode

"IN: 3RvBUSQTQ" "IN: SryhUSDQTQ"

PS PS PSBhr 7PY 7PY! 7PPGfUPf', 7PPGfUPf',B

QG8 f7@6 $ `7P

8PH 7PPGfUPfD8 7yDr 0 XPSDBDI 0 XQSPQ 0 DUDH  7PUSDB XW6G

QG8 f7@6 % D@7P

"OUT: BUSQRvD"

0 DrQ 0 TryD W6G

QG8 f7@6 " `

additionally assigned to the trip relays!

Figure A-17

CFC chart for reclosure lockout

306

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

A.6

Protocol Profibus FMS Profibus DP DNP3.0 Modbus ASCII/RTU Additional Service Interface (optional) Yes Yes Yes

IEC 608705103

Function Yes Yes Yes Yes No Only via additional service interface No Only via additional service interface User-defined annunciations in CFC (pre-defined) Via protocol; DCF77/IRIG B; Interface; Binary inputs Yes No No Only via additional service interface User-defined annunciations in CFC (pre-defined) Via DCF77/IRIG B; Interface; Binary inputs No Only via additional service interface Yes Yes Yes Yes

Operational Measured Values

Yes

Metered Values

Yes

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481 Yes No Only via additional service interface

Fault Recording

Yes

Protection Setting from Remote Yes User-defined annunciations in CFC (pre-defined) Via DCF77/IRIG B; Interface; Binary inputs No

No Only via additional service interface

Yes

No Only via additional service interface

Yes Yes

User-specified annunciations and switching objects Via protocol; DCF77/IRIG B; Interface; Binary inputs Yes

Yes

Time Synchronization

Via protocol; DCF77/IRIG B; Interface; Binary inputs

Yes

Yes

Protocol Dependent Functions

Annunciations with Time stamp

Commissioning Aids Yes No No No Yes

Alarm and Measured Value Transmission Blocking Yes No No

Yes

Generate Test Annunciations Asynchronous cyclical / event Up to 1.5 MBaud RS485 Optical fibre Single ring Double ring cyclical Up to 1.5 MBaud RS485 Optical fibre Double ring Asynchronous

Yes

No

Yes

Physical Mode

Asynchronous

Asynchronous cyclical / event 2400 to 19200 RS485 Optical fibre

Asynchronous cyclical 2400 to 19200 RS485 Optical fibre

2400 to 38400 RS232 RS485 Optical fibre

Transmission Mode

cyclical / event

Baudrate

4800 to 38400

Type

RS232 RS485 Optical fibre

A.6 Protocol Dependent Functions

Temperature Measuring Device 7XV565

Yes

307

A Appendix

A.7
Notes:

List of Settings

Depending on the version and the variant ordered some addresses may be missing or have different default settings. The setting ranges and presettings listed in the following table refer to a nominal current value IN = 1 A. For a secondary nominal current value IN = 5 A the current values are to be multiplied by 5. For setting primary values the transformation ratio of the transformer also must be taken into consideration. Addresses which have an A attached to its end can only be changed in DIGSI 4, under Additional Settings.

Addr.
103

Setting Title
Grp Chge OPTION Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled

Setting Options

Default Setting
Disabled

Comments
Setting Group Change Option

103

Grp Chge OPTION

Disabled

Setting Group Change Option

105

PROT. OBJECT

3 phase Transformer 1 phase Transformer Autotransformer Generator/Motor 3 phase Busbar 1 phase Busbar 3 phase Transformer 1 phase Transformer Autotransformer Generator/Motor 3 phase Busbar 1 phase Busbar 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 3 4 5 6 7 not used Side 1 Side 2 not used Side 1 Side 2 Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Side 1 Side 2

3 phase Transformer

Protection Object

105

PROT. OBJECT

3 phase Transformer

Protection Object

106 106 107

NUMBER OF SIDES NUMBER OF SIDES NUMBER OF ENDS

2 2 7

Number of Sides for Multi Phase Object Number of Sides for Multi Phase Object Number of Ends for 1 Phase Busbar

107

NUMBER OF ENDS

Number of Ends for 1 Phase Busbar

108

I7-CT CONNECT.

not used

I7-CT connected to

108

I7-CT CONNECT.

not used

I7-CT connected to

112

DIFF. PROT.

Enabled

Differential Protection

112

DIFF. PROT.

Enabled

Differential Protection

113

REF PROT.

Disabled

Restricted earth fault protection

308

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

A.7 List of Settings

Addr.
113

Setting Title
REF PROT. Disabled Side 1 Side 2 Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Side 1 Side 2 Disabled Side 1 Side 2

Setting Options

Default Setting
Disabled

Comments
Restricted earth fault protection

117

Coldload Pickup

Disabled

Cold Load Pickup

117

Coldload Pickup

Disabled

Cold Load Pickup

120

DMT/IDMT Phase

Disabled

DMT / IDMT Phase

120

DMT/IDMT Phase

Disabled

DMT / IDMT Phase

121

DMT/IDMT PH. CH

Definite Time only Time Overcurrent Curve IEC Time Overcurrent Curve ANSI User Defined Pickup Curve User Defined Pickup and Reset Curve Definite Time only Time Overcurrent Curve IEC Time Overcurrent Curve ANSI User Defined Pickup Curve User Defined Pickup and Reset Curve Disabled Side 1 Side 2 Disabled Side 1 Side 2 Definite Time only Time Overcurrent Curve IEC Time Overcurrent Curve ANSI User Defined Pickup Curve User Defined Pickup and Reset Curve Definite Time only Time Overcurrent Curve IEC Time Overcurrent Curve ANSI User Defined Pickup Curve User Defined Pickup and Reset Curve Disabled unsensitive Current Transformer I7 Disabled unsensitive Current Transformer I7 Definite Time only Time Overcurrent Curve IEC Time Overcurrent Curve ANSI User Defined Pickup Curve User Defined Pickup and Reset Curve Definite Time only Time Overcurrent Curve IEC Time Overcurrent Curve ANSI User Defined Pickup Curve User Defined Pickup and Reset Curve Disabled unsensitive Current Transformer I7 sensitive Current Transformer I8 Disabled unsensitive Current Transformer I7 sensitive Current Transformer I8

Definite Time only

DMT / IDMT Phase Pick Up Characteristic

121

DMT/IDMT PH. CH

Definite Time only

DMT / IDMT Phase Pick Up Characteristic

122

DMT/IDMT 3I0

Disabled

DMT / IDMT 3I0

122

DMT/IDMT 3I0

Disabled

DMT / IDMT 3I0

123

DMT/IDMT 3I0 CH

Definite Time only

DMT / IDMT 3I0 Pick Up Characteristic

123

DMT/IDMT 3I0 CH

Definite Time only

DMT / IDMT 3I0 Pick Up Characteristic

124

DMT/IDMT Earth

Disabled

DMT / IDMT Earth

124

DMT/IDMT Earth

Disabled

DMT / IDMT Earth

125

DMT/IDMT E CHR.

Definite Time only

DMT / IDMT Earth Pick Up Characteristic

125

DMT/IDMT E CHR.

Definite Time only

DMT / IDMT Earth Pick Up Characteristic

127

DMT 1PHASE

Disabled

DMT 1Phase

127

DMT 1PHASE

Disabled

DMT 1Phase

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

309

A Appendix

Addr.
140

Setting Title
UNBALANCE LOAD Disabled Side 1 Side 2 Disabled Side 1 Side 2

Setting Options

Default Setting
Disabled

Comments
Unbalance Load (Negative Sequence)

140

UNBALANCE LOAD

Disabled

Unbalance Load (Negative Sequence)

141

UNBAL. LOAD CHR

Definite Time only Time Overcurrent Curve IEC Time Overcurrent Curve ANSI Definite Time only Time Overcurrent Curve IEC Time Overcurrent Curve ANSI Disabled Side 1 Side 2 Disabled Side 1 Side 2 classical (according IEC60255) according IEC354 classical (according IEC60255) according IEC354 Disabled Side 1 Side 2 Disabled Side 1 Side 2 Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled with 2 Binary Inputs with 1 Binary Input Disabled with 2 Binary Inputs with 1 Binary Input Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Port C Disabled Port C 6 RTD simplex operation 6 RTD half duplex operation 12 RTD half duplex operation 6 RTD simplex operation 6 RTD half duplex operation 12 RTD half duplex operation

Definite Time only

Unbalance Load (Neg. Sequ.) Characteris.

141

UNBAL. LOAD CHR

Definite Time only

Unbalance Load (Neg. Sequ.) Characteris.

142

Therm.Overload

Disabled

Thermal Overload Protection

142

Therm.Overload

Disabled

Thermal Overload Protection

143

Therm.O/L CHR.

classical (according IEC60255)

Thermal Overload Protec. Characteristic

143

Therm.O/L CHR.

classical (according IEC60255)

Thermal Overload Protec. Characteristic

170

BREAKER FAILURE

Disabled

Breaker Failure Protection

170

BREAKER FAILURE

Disabled

Breaker Failure Protection

181

M.V. SUPERV

Enabled

Measured Values Supervision

181

M.V. SUPERV

Enabled

Measured Values Supervision

182

Trip Cir. Sup.

Disabled

Trip Circuit Supervision

182

Trip Cir. Sup.

Disabled

Trip Circuit Supervision

186

EXT. TRIP 1

Disabled

External Trip Function 1

186

EXT. TRIP 1

Disabled

External Trip Function 1

187

EXT. TRIP 2

Disabled

External Trip Function 2

187

EXT. TRIP 2

Disabled

External Trip Function 2

190

RTD-BOX INPUT

Disabled

External Temperature Input

190

RTD-BOX INPUT

Disabled

External Temperature Input

191

RTD CONNECTION

6 RTD simplex operation

Ext. Temperature Input Connection Type

191

RTD CONNECTION

6 RTD simplex operation

Ext. Temperature Input Connection Type

310

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

A.7 List of Settings

Addr .
201

Setting Title
STRPNT->OBJ S1

Function
Power System Data 1

Setting Options
YES NO 1..100000 A 1A 5A YES NO 1..100000 A 1A 5A YES NO 1..100000 A 1A 5A 0.1A YES NO 1..100000 A 1A 5A 0.1A YES NO 1..100000 A 1A 5A 0.1A YES NO 1..100000 A 1A 5A 0.1A YES NO 1..100000 A 1A 5A 0.1A YES NO 1..100000 A 1A 5A 0.1A Terminal Q7 Terminal Q8

Default Setting
YES

Comments
CT-Strpnt. Side1 in Direct. of Object

202 203

IN-PRI CT S1 IN-SEC CT S1

Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1

200 A 1A

CT Rated Primary Current Side 1 CT Rated Secondary Current Side 1

206

STRPNT->OBJ S2

Power System Data 1

YES

CT-Strpnt. Side2 in Direct. of Object

207 208

IN-PRI CT S2 IN-SEC CT S2

Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1

2000 A 1A

CT Rated Primary Current Side 2 CT Rated Secondary Current Side 2

211

STRPNT->BUS I1

Power System Data 1

YES

CT-Starpoint I1 in Direction of Busbar

212 213

IN-PRI CT I1 IN-SEC CT I1

Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1

200 A 1A

CT Rated Primary Current I1 CT Rated Secondary Current I1

214

STRPNT->BUS I2

Power System Data 1

YES

CT-Starpoint I2 in Direction of Busbar

215 216

IN-PRI CT I2 IN-SEC CT I2

Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1

200 A 1A

CT Rated Primary Current I2 CT Rated Secondary Current I2

217

STRPNT->BUS I3

Power System Data 1

YES

CT-Starpoint I3 in Direction of Busbar

218 219

IN-PRI CT I3 IN-SEC CT I3

Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1

200 A 1A

CT Rated Primary Current I3 CT Rated Secondary Current I3

221

STRPNT->BUS I4

Power System Data 1

YES

CT-Starpoint I4 in Direction of Busbar

222 223

IN-PRI CT I4 IN-SEC CT I4

Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1

200 A 1A

CT Rated Primary Current I4 CT Rated Secondary Current I4

224

STRPNT->BUS I5

Power System Data 1

YES

CT-Starpoint I5 in Direction of Busbar

225 226

IN-PRI CT I5 IN-SEC CT I5

Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1

200 A 1A

CT Rated Primary Current I5 CT Rated Secondary Current I5

227

STRPNT->BUS I6

Power System Data 1

YES

CT-Starpoint I6 in Direction of Busbar

228 229

IN-PRI CT I6 IN-SEC CT I6

Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1

200 A 1A

CT Rated Primary Current I6 CT Rated Secondary Current I6

230

EARTH. ELECTROD

Power System Data 1

Terminal Q7

Earthing Electrod versus

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

311

A Appendix

Addr .
231

Setting Title
STRPNT->BUS I7

Function
Power System Data 1

Setting Options
YES NO 1..100000 A 1A 5A 0.1A 1.0..300.0

Default Setting
YES

Comments
CT-Starpoint I7 in Direction of Busbar

232 233

IN-PRI CT I7 IN-SEC CT I7

Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1

200 A 1A

CT Rated Primary Current I7 CT Rated Secondary Current I7

235

Factor I8

Power System Data 1

60.0

Factor: Prim. Current over Sek. Curr. I8 Rated Primary Voltage Side 1 Starpoint of Side 1 is

240 241

UN-PRI SIDE 1 STARPNT SIDE 1

Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1

0.4..800.0 kV Solid Earthed Isolated Y (Wye) D (Delta) Z (Zig-Zag) 0.4..800.0 kV Solid Earthed Isolated Y (Wye) D (Delta) Z (Zig-Zag) 0..11 0.20..5000.00 MVA

110.0 kV Solid Earthed

242

CONNECTION S1

Power System Data 1

Y (Wye)

Transf. Winding Connection Side 1

243 244

UN-PRI SIDE 2 STARPNT SIDE 2

Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1

11.0 kV Solid Earthed

Rated Primary Voltage side 2 Starpoint of side 2 is

245

CONNECTION S2

Power System Data 1

Y (Wye)

Transf. Winding Connection Side 2

246 249

VECTOR GRP S2 SN TRANSFORMER

Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1

0 38.10 MVA

Vector Group Numeral of Side 2 Rated Apparent Power of the Transformer Rated Primary Voltage Generator/ Motor Rated Apparent Power of the Generator Rated Primary Voltage Busbar Primary Operating Current Phase selection

251

UN GEN/MOTOR

Power System Data 1

0.4..800.0 kV

21.0 kV

252

SN GEN/MOTOR

Power System Data 1

0.20..5000.00 MVA

70.00 MVA

261 265 266

UN BUSBAR I PRIMARY OP. PHASE SELECTION

Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1

0.4..800.0 kV 1..100000 A Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 50 Hz 60 Hz 16 2/3 Hz L1 L2 L3 L1 L3 L2 Degree Celsius Degree Fahrenheit 0.01..32.00 sec 0.04..1.00 A 0.04..1.00 A 0.04..1.00 A Group A Group B Group C Group D Binary Input Protocol

110.0 kV 200 A Phase 1

270

Rated Frequency

Power System Data 1

50 Hz

Rated Frequency

271

PHASE SEQ.

Power System Data 1

L1 L2 L3

Phase Sequence

276

TEMP. UNIT

Power System Data 1

Degree Celsius

Unit of temparature measurement

280A 283 284 285 302

TMin TRIP CMD Breaker S1 I> Breaker S2 I> Breaker I7 I> CHANGE

Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1 Change Group

0.15 sec 0.04 A 0.04 A 0.04 A Group A

Minimum TRIP Command Duration Clos. Breaker Min. Current Thresh. S1 Clos. Breaker Min. Current Thresh. S2 Clos. Breaker Min. Current Thresh. I7 Change to Another Setting Group

312

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

A.7 List of Settings

Addr .
401

Setting Title
WAVEFORMTRIGGER

Function
Oscillographic Fault Records

Setting Options
Save with Pickup Save with TRIP Start with TRIP 0.30..5.00 sec

Default Setting
Save with Pickup

Comments
Waveform Capture

403

MAX. LENGTH

Oscillographic Fault Records Oscillographic Fault Records Oscillographic Fault Records Oscillographic Fault Records Differential Protection

1.00 sec

Max. length of a Waveform Capture Record Captured Waveform Prior to Trigger

404

PRE. TRIG. TIME

0.05..0.50 sec

0.10 sec

405

POST REC. TIME

0.05..0.50 sec 0.10..5.00 sec; OFF ON Block relay for trip commands OFF ON OFF ON OFF 3. Harmonic 5. Harmonic OFF ON 0.20..2.00 I/InO; 0 NO YES NO YES 0.05..2.00 I/InO 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.5..35.0 I/InO; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.10..0.50 0.00..2.00 I/InO 0.25..0.95 0.00..10.00 I/InO 0.00..2.00 I/InO 1.0..2.0 0.0..180.0 sec 2.00..15.00 I/InO 2..250 Cycle; 10..80 % 2..1000 Cycle; 0; 10..80 % 2..1000 Cycle; 0;

0.10 sec

Captured Waveform after Event

406

BinIn CAPT.TIME

0.50 sec

Capture Time via Binary Input

1201

DIFF. PROT.

OFF

Differential Protection

1205

INC.CHAR.START

Differential Protection

OFF

Increase of Trip Char. During Start

1206

INRUSH 2.HARM.

Differential Protection

ON

Inrush with 2. Harmonic Restraint

1207

RESTR. n.HARM.

Differential Protection

OFF

n-th Harmonic Restraint

1208

I-DIFF> MON.

Differential Protection

ON

Differential Current monitoring

1210 1211A

I> CURR. GUARD DIFFw.IE1-MEAS

Differential Protection Differential Protection

0.00 I/InO NO

I> for Current Guard Diff-Prot. with meas. Earth Current S1

1212A

DIFFw.IE2-MEAS

Differential Protection

NO

Diff-Prot. with meas. Earth Current S2

1221 1226A 1231 1236A 1241A 1242A 1243A 1244A 1251A 1252A 1253 1256A 1257A 1261 1262A 1271 1272A

I-DIFF> T I-DIFF> I-DIFF>> T I-DIFF>> SLOPE 1 BASE POINT 1 SLOPE 2 BASE POINT 2 I-REST. STARTUP START-FACTOR T START MAX I-ADD ON STAB. T ADD ON-STAB. 2. HARMONIC CROSSB. 2. HARM n. HARMONIC CROSSB. n.HARM

Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection

0.20 I/InO 0.00 sec 7.5 I/InO 0.00 sec 0.25 0.00 I/InO 0.50 2.50 I/InO 0.10 I/InO 1.0 5.0 sec 4.00 I/InO 15 Cycle 15 % 3 Cycle 30 % 0 Cycle

Pickup Value of Differential Curr. T I-DIFF> Time Delay Pickup Value of High Set Trip T I-DIFF>> Time Delay Slope 1 of Tripping Characteristic Base Point for Slope 1 of Charac. Slope 2 of Tripping Characteristic Base Point for Slope 2 of Charac. I-RESTRAINT for Start Detection Factor for Increasing of Char. at Start Maximum Permissible Starting Time Pickup for Add-on Stabilization Duration of Add-on Stabilization 2nd Harmonic Content in I-DIFF Time for Cross-blocking 2nd Harm. n-th Harmonic Content in I-DIFF Time for Cross-blocking n-th Harm.

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

313

A Appendix

Addr .
1273A 1281

Setting Title
IDIFFmax n.HM I-DIFF> MON.

Function
Differential Protection Differential Protection

Setting Options
0.5..20.0 I/InO 0.15..0.80 I/InO

Default Setting
1.5 I/InO 0.20 I/InO

Comments
Limit IDIFFmax of n-th Harm.Restraint Pickup Value of diff. Current Monitoring T I-DIFF> Monitoring Time Delay Restricted Earth Fault Protection

1282 1301

T I-DIFF> MON. REF PROT.

Differential Protection Restricted Earth Fault Protection

1..10 sec OFF ON Block relay for trip commands 0.05..2.00 I / In 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.00..0.95

2 sec OFF

1311

I-REF>

Restricted Earth Fault Protection Restricted Earth Fault Protection Restricted Earth Fault Protection Cold Load Pikkup

0.15 I / In

Pick up value I REF>

1312A

T I-REF>

0.00 sec

T I-REF> Time Delay

1313A

SLOPE

0.00

Slope of Charac. I-REF> = f(I-SUM)

1701

COLDLOAD PIKKUP

OFF ON No Current Breaker Contact No Current Breaker Contact No Current Breaker Contact 0..21600 sec 1..21600 sec 1..600 sec; ON OFF ON OFF I>> instantaneously I> instantaneously Ip instantaneously Inactive 0.10..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.10..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.10..4.00 A 0.05..3.20 sec; 0.50..15.00; Instantaneous Disk Emulation

OFF

Cold-Load-Pickup Function

1702

Start CLP Phase

Cold Load Pikkup

No Current

Start Condition CLP for O/C Phase

1703

Start CLP 3I0

Cold Load Pikkup

No Current

Start Condition CLP for O/C 3I0

1704

Start CLP Earth

Cold Load Pikkup

No Current

Start Condition CLP for O/C Earth

1711 1712 1713 2001

CB Open Time Active Time Stop Time PHASE O/C

Cold Load Pikkup Cold Load Pikkup Cold Load Pikkup Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Phase

3600 sec 3600 sec 600 sec OFF

Circuit Breaker OPEN Time Active Time Stop Time Phase Time Overcurrent

2002

InRushRest. Ph

OFF

InRush Restrained O/C Phase

2008A

MANUAL CLOSE

I>> instantaneously

O/C Manual Close Mode

2011

I>>

Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Phase

2.00 A

I>> Pickup

2012

T I>>

0.00 sec

T I>> Time Delay

2013

I>

1.00 A

I> Pickup

2014

T I>

0.50 sec

T I> Time Delay

2021

Ip

1.00 A

Ip Pickup

2022

T Ip

0.50 sec

T Ip Time Dial

2023

D Ip

5.00

D Ip Time Dial

2024

TOC DROP-OUT

Disk Emulation

TOC Drop-out characteristic

314

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

A.7 List of Settings

Addr .
2025

Setting Title
IEC CURVE

Function
Time overcurrent Phase

Setting Options
Normal Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inverse Long Inverse Very Inverse Inverse Short Inverse Long Inverse Moderately Inverse Extremely Inverse Definite Inverse 1.00..20.00 I / Ip; 0.01..999.00 Time Dial 0.05..0.95 I / Ip; 0.01..999.00 Time Dial 10..45 %

Default Setting
Normal Inverse IEC Curve

Comments

2026

ANSI CURVE

Time overcurrent Phase

Very Inverse

ANSI Curve

2031

I/Ip PU T/Tp

Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent 3I0

Pickup Curve I/Ip - TI/TIp

2032

MofPU Res T/Tp

Multiple of Pickup <-> TI/TIp

2041

2.HARM. Phase

15 %

2nd harmonic O/C Ph. in % of fundamental Maximum Current for Inr. Rest. O/C Phase CROSS BLOCK O/C Phase

2042

I Max InRr. Ph.

0.30..25.00 A

7.50 A

2043

CROSS BLK.Phase

NO YES 0.00..180.00 sec 0.10..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.10..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.10..4.00 A 0.05..3.20 sec; 0.50..15.00; ON OFF ON OFF 3I0>> instantaneously 3I0> instantaneously 3I0p instantaneously Inactive 0.05..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.05..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.05..4.00 A 0.05..3.20 sec; 0.50..15.00;

NO

2044

T CROSS BLK.Ph

0.00 sec

CROSS BLOCK Time O/C Phase

2111

I>>

10.00 A

I>> Pickup

2112

T I>>

0.00 sec

T I>> Time Delay

2113

I>

2.00 A

I> Pickup

2114

T I>

0.30 sec

T I> Time Delay

2121

Ip

1.50 A

Ip Pickup

2122

T Ip

0.50 sec

T Ip Time Dial

2123

D Ip

5.00

D Ip Time Dial

2201

3I0 O/C

OFF

3I0 Time Overcurrent

2202

InRushRest. 3I0

Time overcurrent 3I0

OFF

InRush Restrained O/C 3I0

2208A

3I0 MAN. CLOSE

Time overcurrent 3I0

3I0>> instantaneously

O/C 3I0 Manual Close Mode

2211 2212 2213 2214 2221 2222 2223

3I0>> T 3I0>> 3I0> T 3I0> 3I0p T 3I0p D 3I0p

Time overcurrent 3I0 Time overcurrent 3I0 Time overcurrent 3I0 Time overcurrent 3I0 Time overcurrent 3I0 Time overcurrent 3I0 Time overcurrent 3I0

0.50 A 0.10 sec 0.20 A 0.50 sec 0.20 A 0.20 sec 5.00

3I0>> Pickup T 3I0>> Time Delay 3I0> Pickup T 3I0> Time Delay 3I0p Pickup T 3I0p Time Dial D 3I0p Time Dial

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

315

A Appendix

Addr .
2224

Setting Title
TOC DROP-OUT

Function
Time overcurrent 3I0

Setting Options
Instantaneous Disk Emulation Normal Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inverse Long Inverse Very Inverse Inverse Short Inverse Long Inverse Moderately Inverse Extremely Inverse Definite Inverse 1.00..20.00 I / Ip; 0.01..999.00 Time Dial 0.05..0.95 I / Ip; 0.01..999.00 Time Dial 10..45 %

Default Setting
Disk Emulation

Comments
TOC Drop-out Characteristic

2225

IEC CURVE

Time overcurrent 3I0

Normal Inverse

IEC Curve

2226

ANSI CURVE

Time overcurrent 3I0

Very Inverse

ANSI Curve

2231

I/I0p PU T/TI0p

Time overcurrent 3I0

Pickup Curve 3I0/3I0p - T3I0/T3I0p

2232

MofPU ResT/TI0p

Time overcurrent 3I0

Multiple of Pickup <-> T3I0/T3I0p

2241

2.HARM. 3I0

Time overcurrent 3I0

15 %

2nd harmonic O/C 3I0 in % of fundamental Maximum Current for Inr. Rest. O/C 3I0 3I0>> Pickup T 3I0>> Time Delay 3I0> Pickup T 3I0> Time Delay 3I0p Pickup T 3I0p Time Dial D 3I0p Time Dial Earth Time Overcurrent

2242

I Max InRr. 3I0

Time overcurrent 3I0

0.30..25.00 A 0.05..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.05..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.05..4.00 A 0.05..3.20 sec; 0.50..15.00; ON OFF ON OFF IE>> instantaneously IE> instantaneously IEp instantaneously Inactive 0.05..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.05..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.05..4.00 A 0.05..3.20 sec; 0.50..15.00; Instantaneous Disk Emulation

7.50 A

2311 2312 2313 2314 2321 2322 2323 2401

3I0>> T 3I0>> 3I0> T 3I0> 3I0p T 3I0p D 3I0p EARTH O/C

Time overcurrent 3I0 Time overcurrent 3I0 Time overcurrent 3I0 Time overcurrent 3I0 Time overcurrent 3I0 Time overcurrent 3I0 Time overcurrent 3I0 Time overcurrent Earth Time overcurrent Earth Time overcurrent Earth

7.00 A 0.00 sec 1.50 A 0.30 sec 1.00 A 0.50 sec 5.00 OFF

2402

InRushRestEarth

OFF

InRush Restrained O/C Earth

2408A

IE MAN. CLOSE

IE>> instantaneously

O/C IE Manual Close Mode

2411

IE>>

Time overcurrent Earth Time overcurrent Earth Time overcurrent Earth Time overcurrent Earth Time overcurrent Earth Time overcurrent Earth Time overcurrent Earth Time overcurrent Earth

0.50 A

IE>> Pickup

2412

T IE>>

0.10 sec

T IE>> Time Delay

2413

IE>

0.20 A

IE> Pickup

2414

T IE>

0.50 sec

T IE> Time Delay

2421

IEp

0.20 A

IEp Pickup

2422

T IEp

0.20 sec

T IEp Time Dial

2423

D IEp

5.00

D IEp Time Dial

2424

TOC DROP-OUT

Disk Emulation

TOC Drop-out Characteristic

316

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

A.7 List of Settings

Addr .
2425

Setting Title
IEC CURVE

Function
Time overcurrent Earth

Setting Options
Normal Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inverse Long Inverse Very Inverse Inverse Short Inverse Long Inverse Moderately Inverse Extremely Inverse Definite Inverse 1.00..20.00 I / Ip; 0.01..999.00 Time Dial 0.05..0.95 I / Ip; 0.01..999.00 Time Dial 10..45 %

Default Setting
Normal Inverse IEC Curve

Comments

2426

ANSI CURVE

Time overcurrent Earth

Very Inverse

ANSI Curve

2431

I/IEp PU T/TEp

Time overcurrent Earth Time overcurrent Earth Time overcurrent Earth Time overcurrent Earth Time overcurrent Earth Time overcurrent Earth Time overcurrent Earth Time overcurrent Earth Time overcurrent Earth Time overcurrent Earth Time overcurrent Earth Time overcurrent 1Phase Time overcurrent 1Phase Time overcurrent 1Phase Time overcurrent 1Phase Time overcurrent 1Phase Time overcurrent 1Phase Time overcurrent 1Phase Unbalance Load (Negative Sequence) Unbalance Load (Negative Sequence) Unbalance Load (Negative Sequence)

Pickup Curve IE/IEp - TIE/TIEp

2432

MofPU Res T/TEp

Multiple of Pickup <-> TI/TIEp

2441

2.HARM. Earth

15 %

2nd harmonic O/C E in % of fundamental Maximum Current for Inr. Rest. O/C Earth IE>> Pickup

2442

I Max InRr. E

0.30..25.00 A 0.05..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.05..35.00 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.05..4.00 A 0.05..3.20 sec; 0.50..15.00; OFF ON 0.05..35.00 A; 0.003..1.500 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.05..35.00 A; 0.003..1.500 A; 0.00..60.00 sec; OFF ON 0.10..3.00 A 0.00..60.00 sec;

7.50 A

2511

IE>>

7.00 A

2512

T IE>>

0.00 sec

T IE>> Time Delay

2513

IE>

1.50 A

IE> Pickup

2514

T IE>

0.30 sec

T IE> Time Delay

2521

IEp

1.00 A

IEp Pickup

2522

T IEp

0.50 sec

T IEp Time Dial

2523

D IEp

5.00

D IEp Time Dial

2701

1Phase O/C

OFF

1Phase Time Overcurrent

2702

1Phase I>>

0.50 A

1Phase O/C I>> Pickup

2703

1Phase I>>

0.300 A

1Phase O/C I>> Pickup

2704

T 1Phase I>>

0.10 sec

T 1Phase O/C I>> Time Delay

2705

1Phase I>

0.20 A

1Phase O/C I> Pickup

2706

1Phase I>

0.100 A

1Phase O/C I> Pickup

2707

T 1Phase I>

0.50 sec

T 1Phase O/C I> Time Delay

4001

UNBALANCE LOAD

OFF

Unbalance Load (Negative Sequence)

4002

I2>

0.10 A

I2> Pickup

4003

T I2>

1.50 sec

T I2> Time Delay

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

317

A Appendix

Addr .
4004

Setting Title
I2>>

Function
Unbalance Load (Negative Sequence) Unbalance Load (Negative Sequence) Unbalance Load (Negative Sequence)

Setting Options
0.10..3.00 A 0.00..60.00 sec; Normal Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inverse Extremely Inverse Inverse Moderately Inverse Very Inverse 0.10..2.00 A 0.50..15.00; 0.05..3.20 sec; Instantaneous Disk Emulation OFF ON Alarm Only 0.10..4.00

Default Setting
0.50 A

Comments
I2>> Pickup

4005

T I2>>

1.50 sec

T I2>> Time Delay

4006

IEC CURVE

Extremely Inverse

IEC Curve

4007

ANSI CURVE

Unbalance Load (Negative Sequence)

Extremely Inverse

ANSI Curve

4008

I2p

Unbalance Load (Negative Sequence) Unbalance Load (Negative Sequence) Unbalance Load (Negative Sequence) Unbalance Load (Negative Sequence) Thermal Overload Protection

0.90 A

I2p Pickup

4009

D I2p

5.00

D I2p Time Dial

4010

T I2p

0.50 sec

T I2p Time Dial

4011

I2p DROP-OUT

Instantaneous

I2p Drop-out Characteristic

4201

Ther. OVER LOAD

OFF

Thermal Overload Protection

4202

K-FACTOR

Thermal Overload Protection Thermal Overload Protection Thermal Overload Protection Thermal Overload Protection Thermal Overload Protection Thermal Overload Protection Thermal Overload Protection Thermal Overload Protection Thermal Overload Protection Thermal Overload Protection Thermal Overload Protection Thermal Overload Protection Thermal Overload Protection Thermal Overload Protection Thermal Overload Protection

1.10

K-Factor

4203

TIME CONSTANT ALARM I ALARM

1.0..999.9 min

100.0 min

Time Constant

4204

50..100 %

90 %

Thermal Alarm Stage

4205

0.10..4.00 A

1.00 A

Current Overload Alarm Setpoint

4207A

K-FACTOR

1.0..10.0

1.0

Kt-FACTOR when motor stops

4208A

T EMERGENCY

10..15000 sec 0.60..10.00 A; 1..6 98..140 C 208..284 F 98..140 C 208..284 F 0.125..128.000

100 sec A 1 98 C 208 F 108 C 226 F 1.000

Emergency Time

4209A

I MOTOR START

Current Pickup Value of Motor Starting

4221

OIL-DET. RTD

Oil-Detector conected at RTD

4222

HOT SPOT ST. 1

Hot Spot Temperature Stage 1 Pickup

4223

HOT SPOT ST. 1

Hot Spot Temperature Stage 1 Pickup

4224

HOT SPOT ST. 2

Hot Spot Temperature Stage 2 Pickup

4225

HOT SPOT ST. 2

Hot Spot Temperature Stage 2 Pickup

4226

AG. RATE ST. 1

Aging Rate STAGE 1 Pikkup

4227

AG. RATE ST. 2

0.125..128.000

2.000

Aging Rate STAGE 2 Pikkup

4231

METH. COOLING

ON (Oil-Natural) OF (Oil-Forced) OD (Oil-Directed)

ON (Oil-Natural)

Method of Cooling

318

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

A.7 List of Settings

Addr .
4232

Setting Title
Y-WIND.EXPONENT

Function
Thermal Overload Protection Thermal Overload Protection Breaker Failure Protection Breaker Failure Protection Breaker Failure Protection Device

Setting Options
1.6..2.0

Default Setting
1.6

Comments
Y-Winding Exponent

4233

HOT-SPOT GR

22..29

22

Hot-spot to top-oil gradient

7001

BREAKER FAILURE

OFF ON OFF ON 0.06..60.00 sec; Display Targets on every Pickup Display Targets on TRIP only with V setting with V measuring ON OFF ON OFF 0.10..1.00 A

OFF

Breaker Failure Protection

7004

Chk BRK CONTACT

OFF

Check Breaker contacts

7005

TRIP-Timer

0.25 sec

TRIP-Timer

7110

FltDisp.LED/LCD

Display Targets on every Pickup

Fault Display on LED / LCD

7601

POWER CALCUL.

Measurement

with V setting

Calculation of Power

8101

BALANCE I

Measurement Supervision Measurement Supervision Measurement Supervision Measurement Supervision Measurement Supervision Measurement Supervision Trip Circuit Supervision External Trip Functions External Trip Functions External Trip Functions External Trip Functions RTD-Box

OFF

Current Balance Supervision

8102

PHASE ROTATION

OFF

Phase Rotation Supervision

8111

BAL. I LIMIT S1

0.50 A

Current Balance Monitor Side 1

8112

BAL. FACT. I S1

0.10..0.90

0.50

Balance Factor for Current Monitor S1

8121

BAL. I LIMIT S2

0.10..1.00 A

0.50 A

Current Balance Monitor Side 2

8122

BAL. FACT. I S2

0.10..0.90

0.50

Balance Factor for Current Monitor S2

8201

TRIP Cir. SUP.

ON OFF ON OFF 0.00..60.00 sec; ON OFF 0.00..60.00 sec; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F;

OFF

TRIP Circuit Supervision

8601

EXTERN TRIP 1

OFF

External Trip Function 1

8602

T DELAY

1.00 sec

Ext. Trip 1 Time Delay

8701

EXTERN TRIP 2

OFF

External Trip Function 2

8702

T DELAY

1.00 sec

Ext. Trip 2 Time Delay

9011A

RTD 1 TYPE

Pt 100 Ohm

RTD 1: Type

9012A

RTD 1 LOCATION

RTD-Box

Oil

RTD 1: Location

9013 9014 9015 9016

RTD 1 STAGE 1 RTD 1 STAGE 1 RTD 1 STAGE 2 RTD 1 STAGE 2

RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F

RTD 1: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 1: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 1: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 1: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

319

A Appendix

Addr .
9021A

Setting Title
RTD 2 TYPE

Function
RTD-Box

Setting Options
not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F;

Default Setting
not connected

Comments
RTD 2: Type

9022A

RTD 2 LOCATION

RTD-Box

Other

RTD 2: Location

9023 9024 9025 9026 9031A

RTD 2 STAGE 1 RTD 2 STAGE 1 RTD 2 STAGE 2 RTD 2 STAGE 2 RTD 3 TYPE

RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F not connected

RTD 2: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 2: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 2: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 2: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 3: Type

9032A

RTD 3 LOCATION

RTD-Box

Other

RTD 3: Location

9033 9034 9035 9036 9041A

RTD 3 STAGE 1 RTD 3 STAGE 1 RTD 3 STAGE 2 RTD 3 STAGE 2 RTD 4 TYPE

RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F not connected

RTD 3: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 3: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 3: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 3: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 4: Type

9042A

RTD 4 LOCATION

RTD-Box

Other

RTD 4: Location

9043 9044 9045 9046 9051A

RTD 4 STAGE 1 RTD 4 STAGE 1 RTD 4 STAGE 2 RTD 4 STAGE 2 RTD 5 TYPE

RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F not connected

RTD 4: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 4: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 4: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 4: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 5: Type

9052A

RTD 5 LOCATION

RTD-Box

Other

RTD 5: Location

9053 9054 9055 9056

RTD 5 STAGE 1 RTD 5 STAGE 1 RTD 5 STAGE 2 RTD 5 STAGE 2

RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F

RTD 5: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 5: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 5: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 5: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup

320

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

A.7 List of Settings

Addr .
9061A

Setting Title
RTD 6 TYPE

Function
RTD-Box

Setting Options
not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F;

Default Setting
not connected

Comments
RTD 6: Type

9062A

RTD 6 LOCATION

RTD-Box

Other

RTD 6: Location

9063 9064 9065 9066 9071A

RTD 6 STAGE 1 RTD 6 STAGE 1 RTD 6 STAGE 2 RTD 6 STAGE 2 RTD 7 TYPE

RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F not connected

RTD 6: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 6: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 6: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 6: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 7: Type

9072A

RTD 7 LOCATION

RTD-Box

Other

RTD 7: Location

9073 9074 9075 9076 9081A

RTD 7 STAGE 1 RTD 7 STAGE 1 RTD 7 STAGE 2 RTD 7 STAGE 2 RTD 8 TYPE

RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F not connected

RTD 7: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 7: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 7: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 7: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 8: Type

9082A

RTD 8 LOCATION

RTD-Box

Other

RTD 8: Location

9083 9084 9085 9086 9091A

RTD 8 STAGE 1 RTD 8 STAGE 1 RTD 8 STAGE 2 RTD 8 STAGE 2 RTD 9 TYPE

RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F not connected

RTD 8: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 8: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 8: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 8: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 9: Type

9092A

RTD 9 LOCATION

RTD-Box

Other

RTD 9: Location

9093 9094 9095 9096

RTD 9 STAGE 1 RTD 9 STAGE 1 RTD 9 STAGE 2 RTD 9 STAGE 2

RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F

RTD 9: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 9: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD 9: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD 9: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

321

A Appendix

Addr .
9101A

Setting Title
RTD10 TYPE

Function
RTD-Box

Setting Options
not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F; not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 C; -58..482 F; -50..250 C; -58..482 F;

Default Setting
not connected

Comments
RTD10: Type

9102A

RTD10 LOCATION

RTD-Box

Other

RTD10: Location

9103 9104 9105 9106 9111A

RTD10 STAGE 1 RTD10 STAGE 1 RTD10 STAGE 2 RTD10 STAGE 2 RTD11 TYPE

RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F not connected

RTD10: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD10: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD10: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD10: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD11: Type

9112A

RTD11 LOCATION

RTD-Box

Other

RTD11: Location

9113 9114 9115 9116 9121A

RTD11 STAGE 1 RTD11 STAGE 1 RTD11 STAGE 2 RTD11 STAGE 2 RTD12 TYPE

RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F not connected

RTD11: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD11: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD11: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD11: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD12: Type

9122A

RTD12 LOCATION

RTD-Box

Other

RTD12: Location

9123 9124 9125 9126

RTD12 STAGE 1 RTD12 STAGE 1 RTD12 STAGE 2 RTD12 STAGE 2

RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box RTD-Box

100 C 212 F 120 C 248 F

RTD12: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD12: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup RTD12: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup RTD12: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup

322

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

A.8 List of Information

A.8

List of Information

F.No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

00003 >Synchronize Internal Real Time Clock (>Time Synch) 00004 >Trigger Waveform Capture (>Trig.Wave.Cap.) 00005 >Reset LED (>Reset LED) 00007 >Setting Group Select Bit 0 (>Set Group Bit0) 00008 >Setting Group Select Bit 1 (>Set Group Bit1) 00015 >Test mode (>Test mode) 00016 >Stop data transmission (>DataStop) 00051 Device is Operational and Protecting (Device OK) 00052 At Least 1 Protection Funct. is Active (ProtActive) 00055 Reset Device (Reset Device) 00056 Initial Start of Device (Initial Start) 00060 Reset LED (Reset LED)

Device

SP_Ev

LED BI

BO

135

48

Oscillographic Fault Records Device Change Group

SP

LED BI

BO

135

49

SP SP

* *

* *

LED BI LED BI

BO BO

135 135

50 51

1 1

Change Group

SP

LED BI

BO

135

52

Device Device Device

SP SP OUT

* * ON OFF ON OFF * ON ON

* * *

LED BI LED BI LED

BO BO BO

135 135 135

53 54 81

1 1 1

GI GI

Device

IntSP

LED

BO

176

18

Device Device Device

OUT OUT OUT_ Ev OUT OUT

* * *

LED LED LED

BO BO BO

176 176 176

4 5 19

5 5 1

00067 Resume (Resume) 00068 Clock Synchronization Error (Clock SyncError) 00069 Daylight Saving Time (DayLightSavTime) 00070 Setting calculation is running (Settings Calc.) 00071 Settings Check (Settings Check) 00072 Level-2 change (Level-2 change)

Device Supervision

ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF * ON OFF ON OFF ON

* *

LED LED

BO BO

135

97

Device

OUT

LED

BO

Device

OUT

LED

BO

176

22

Device Device

OUT OUT

* *

LED LED

BO BO

00109 Frequency out of range (Frequ. o.o.r.)

Device

OUT

LED

BO

00110 Event lost (Event Lost)

Supervision

OUT_ Ev OUT OUT

LED

BO

135

130

00113 Flag Lost (Flag Lost) 00125 Chatter ON (Chatter ON)

Supervision Device

ON ON OFF

* *

LED LED

BO BO

135 135

136 145

1 1

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

323

General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A Appendix

F.No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

00126 Protection ON/OFF (via system port) (ProtON/OFF) 00140 Error with a summary alarm (Error Sum Alarm) 00160 Alarm Summary Event (Alarm Sum Event) 00161 Failure: General Current Supervision (Fail I Superv.) 00163 Failure: Current Balance (Fail I balance) 00175 Failure: Phase Sequence Current (Fail Ph. Seq. I) 00177 Failure: Battery empty (Fail Battery)

Power System Data 2 Supervision

IntSP

ON OFF *

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

176

47

Supervision

OUT

LED

BO

176

46

Measurement Supervision Measurement Supervision Measurement Supervision Supervision

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

135

183

OUT

LED

BO

135

191

OUT

LED

BO

135

193

00181 Error: A/D converter (Error A/D-conv.)

Supervision

OUT

LED

BO

135

178

00183 Error Board 1 (Error Board 1)

Supervision

OUT

LED

BO

135

171

00190 Error Board 0 (Error Board 0)

Supervision

OUT

LED

BO

135

210

00191 Error: Offset (Error Offset)

Supervision

OUT

LED

BO

00192 Error:1A/5Ajumper different from setting (Error1A/5Awrong) 00193 Alarm: NO calibration data available (Alarm NO calibr) 00198 Error: Communication Module B (Err. Module B) 00199 Error: Communication Module C (Err. Module C) 00203 Waveform data deleted (Wave. deleted) 00264 Failure: RTD-Box 1 (Fail: RTD-Box 1)

Supervision

OUT

LED

BO

135

169

Supervision

OUT

LED

BO

135

181

Supervision

OUT

LED

BO

135

198

Supervision

OUT

LED

BO

135

199

Oscillographic Fault Records Supervision

OUT_ Ev OUT

LED

BO

135

203

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON

LED

BO

135

208

00265 Failure: Phase Sequence I side 1 (FailPh.Seq I S1) 00266 Failure: Phase Sequence I side 2 (FailPh.Seq I S2) 00267 Failure: RTD-Box 2 (Fail: RTD-Box 2)

Measurement Supervision Measurement Supervision Supervision

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

135

209

00272 Set Point Operating Hours (SP. Op Hours>) 00311 Fault in configuration of the Protection (Fault Configur.)

Set Points (Statistic) Power System Data 2

OUT

LED

BO

135

229

OUT

LED

BO

324

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A.8 List of Information

F.No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

00356 >Manual close signal (>Manual Close)

Power System Data 2 External Annunciations of Transformer

SP

LED BI

BO

150

00390 >Warning stage from gas in oil detector (>Gas in oil)

SP

ON OFF

LED BI

BO

00391 >Warning stage from Buchholz protec- External Annunciation (>Buchh. Warn) tions of Transformer 00392 >Tripp. stage from Buchholz protection (>Buchh. Trip) External Annunciations of Transformer External Annunciations of Transformer Statistics

SP

ON OFF

LED BI

BO

150

41

SP

ON OFF

LED BI

BO

150

42

00393 >Tank supervision from Buchh. protect. (>Buchh. Tank)

SP

ON OFF

LED BI

BO

150

43

00409 >BLOCK Op Counter (>BLOCK Op Count) 00410 >CB1 aux. 3p Closed (>CB1 3p Closed) 00411 >CB1 aux. 3p Open (>CB1 3p Open)

SP

ON OFF on off on off on off on off *

LED BI

BO

Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Measurement Supervision Measurement Supervision Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2

SP

LED BI

BO

150

80

SP

LED BI

BO

150

81

00413 >CB2 aux. 3p Closed (>CB2 3p Closed) 00414 >CB2 aux. 3p Open (>CB2 3p Open)

SP

LED BI

BO

150

82

SP

LED BI

BO

150

83

00501 Relay PICKUP (Relay PICKUP)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

150

151

00511 Relay GENERAL TRIP command (Relay TRIP) 00561 Manual close signal detected (Man.Clos.Detect) 00571 Fail.: Current symm. supervision side 1 (Fail. Isym 1) 00572 Fail.: Current symm. supervision side 2 (Fail. Isym 2) 00576 Primary fault current IL1 side1 (IL1S1:) 00577 Primary fault current IL2 side1 (IL2S1:) 00578 Primary fault current IL3 side1 (IL3S1:) 00579 Primary fault current IL1 side2 (IL1S2:) 00580 Primary fault current IL2 side2 (IL2S2:) 00581 Primary fault current IL3 side2 (IL3S2:)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

150

161

OUT

ON

LED

BO

150

211

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF *

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

150

193

OUT

150

194

OUT

150

195

OUT

150

190

OUT

150

191

OUT

150

192

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

325

General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A Appendix

F.No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

00582 Primary fault current I1 (I1:)

Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Energy

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF BI 133 55 20 5 20 5

00583 Primary fault current I2 (I2:)

OUT

00584 Primary fault current I3 (I3:)

OUT

00585 Primary fault current I4 (I4:)

OUT

00586 Primary fault current I5 (I5:)

OUT

00587 Primary fault current I6 (I6:)

OUT

00588 Primary fault current I7 (I7:)

OUT

00888 Pulsed Energy Wp (active) (Wp(puls))

PMV

00889 Pulsed Energy Wq (reactive) (Wq(puls)) 01000 Number of breaker TRIP commands (# TRIPs=) 01020 Counter of operating hours (Op.Hours=) 01403 >BLOCK Breaker failure (>BLOCK BkrFail) 01431 >Breaker failure initiated externally (>BrkFail extSRC) 01451 Breaker failure is switched OFF (BkrFail OFF) 01452 Breaker failure is BLOCKED (BkrFail BLOCK) 01453 Breaker failure is ACTIVE (BkrFail ACTIVE) 01456 Breaker failure (internal) PICKUP (BkrFail int PU) 01457 Breaker failure (external) PICKUP (BkrFail ext PU) 01471 Breaker failure TRIP (BrkFailure TRIP) 01480 Breaker failure (internal) TRIP (BkrFail intTRIP) 01481 Breaker failure (external) TRIP (BkrFail extTRIP) 01488 Breaker failure Not aval. for this obj. (BkrFail Not av.)

Energy

PMV

BI

133

56

Statistics

OUT

Statistics

OUT

Breaker Failure Protection Breaker Failure Protection Breaker Failure Protection Breaker Failure Protection Breaker Failure Protection Breaker Failure Protection Breaker Failure Protection Breaker Failure Protection Breaker Failure Protection Breaker Failure Protection Breaker Failure Protection

SP

LED BI

BO

166

103

SP

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF *

LED BI

BO

166

104

OUT

LED

BO

166

151

OUT

ON OFF *

LED

BO

166

152

OUT

LED

BO

166

153

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF ON M

LED

BO

166

156

OUT

LED

BO

166

157

OUT

LED

BO

166

171

OUT

ON

LED

BO

166

180

OUT

ON

LED

BO

166

181

OUT

ON

LED

BO

326

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A.8 List of Information

F.No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

01503 >BLOCK Thermal Overload Protection (>BLK ThOverload) 01507 >Emergency start Th. Overload Protection (>Emer.Start O/L) 01511 Thermal Overload Protection OFF (Th.Overload OFF) 01512 Thermal Overload Protection BLOKKED (Th.Overload BLK) 01513 Thermal Overload Protection ACTIVE (Th.Overload ACT) 01515 Th. Overload Current Alarm (I alarm) (O/L I Alarm) 01516 Thermal Overload Alarm (O/L Alarm) 01517 Thermal Overload picked up (O/L Th. pick.up) 01521 Thermal Overload TRIP (ThOverload TRIP) 01541 Thermal Overload hot spot Th. Alarm (O/L ht.spot Al.) 01542 Thermal Overload hot spot Th. TRIP (O/L h.spot TRIP) 01543 Thermal Overload aging rate Alarm (O/L ag.rate Al.)

Thermal Overload Protection Thermal Overload Protection Thermal Overload Protection Thermal Overload Protection Thermal Overload Protection Thermal Overload Protection Thermal Overload Protection Thermal Overload Protection Thermal Overload Protection Thermal Overload Protection Thermal Overload Protection Thermal Overload Protection

SP

LED BI

BO

167

SP

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF *

LED BI

BO

167

OUT

LED

BO

167

11

OUT

ON OFF *

LED

BO

167

12

OUT

LED

BO

167

13

OUT

LED

BO

167

15

OUT

LED

BO

167

16

OUT

LED

BO

167

17

OUT

ON OFF *

LED

BO

167

21

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON

LED

BO

167

41

OUT

LED

BO

167

42

OUT

LED

BO

167

43

01544 Thermal Overload aging rate TRIP (O/ Thermal Overload L ag.rt. TRIP) Protection 01545 Th. Overload No temperature mesured (O/L No Th.meas.) 01549 Th. Overload Not avaliable for this obj. (O/L Not avalia.) 01704 >BLOCK Phase time overcurrent (>BLK Phase O/C) 01714 >BLOCK Earth time overcurrent (>BLK Earth O/C) 01721 >BLOCK I>> (>BLOCK I>>) Thermal Overload Protection Thermal Overload Protection Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Earth Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Earth Time overcurrent Earth

OUT

LED

BO

167

44

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

ON

LED

BO

SP

LED BI

BO

SP

LED BI

BO

SP

LED BI

BO

60

01722 >BLOCK I> (>BLOCK I>)

SP

LED BI

BO

60

01723 >BLOCK Ip (>BLOCK Ip)

SP

LED BI

BO

60

01724 >BLOCK IE>> (>BLOCK IE>>)

SP

LED BI

BO

60

01725 >BLOCK IE> (>BLOCK IE>)

SP

LED BI

BO

60

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

327

General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A Appendix

F.No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

01726 >BLOCK IEp (>BLOCK IEp)

Time overcurrent Earth Cold Load Pickup

SP

LED BI

BO

60

01730 >BLOCK Cold-Load-Pickup (>BLOCK CLP) 01731 >BLOCK Cold-Load-Pickup stop timer (>BLK CLP stpTim) 01741 >BLOCK 3I0 time overcurrent (>BLK 3I0 O/C) 01742 >BLOCK 3I0>> time overcurrent (>BLOCK 3I0>>) 01743 >BLOCK 3I0> time overcurrent (>BLOCK 3I0>) 01744 >BLOCK 3I0p time overcurrent (>BLOCK 3I0p) 01748 Time Overcurrent 3I0 is OFF (O/C 3I0 OFF) 01749 Time Overcurrent 3I0 is BLOCKED (O/C 3I0 BLK) 01750 Time Overcurrent 3I0 is ACTIVE (O/C 3I0 ACTIVE) 01751 Time Overcurrent Phase is OFF (O/C Phase OFF) 01752 Time Overcurrent Phase is BLOCKED (O/C Phase BLK) 01753 Time Overcurrent Phase is ACTIVE (O/C Phase ACT) 01756 Time Overcurrent Earth is OFF (O/C Earth OFF) 01757 Time Overcurrent Earth is BLOCKED (O/C Earth BLK)

SP

LED BI

BO

Cold Load Pickup

SP

ON OFF *

ON OFF *

LED BI

BO

60

243

Time overcurrent 3I0 Time overcurrent 3I0 Time overcurrent 3I0 Time overcurrent 3I0 Time overcurrent 3I0 Time overcurrent 3I0 Time overcurrent 3I0 Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Earth Time overcurrent Earth

SP

LED BI

BO

SP

LED BI

BO

60

SP

LED BI

BO

60

10

SP

LED BI

BO

60

11

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF *

LED

BO

60

151

OUT

ON OFF *

LED

BO

60

152

OUT

LED

BO

60

153

OUT

LED

BO

60

21

OUT

ON OFF *

LED

BO

60

22

OUT

LED

BO

60

23

OUT

LED

BO

60

26

OUT

ON OFF *

LED

BO

60

27

01758 Time Overcurrent Earth is ACTIVE (O/ Time overcurrent C Earth ACT) Earth 01761 Time Overcurrent picked up (Overcur- General O/C rent PU) 01762 Time Overcurrent Phase L1 picked up (O/C Ph L1 PU) 01763 Time Overcurrent Phase L2 picked up (O/C Ph L2 PU) 01764 Time Overcurrent Phase L3 picked up (O/C Ph L3 PU) 01765 Time Overcurrent Earth picked up (O/ C Earth PU) 01766 Time Overcurrent 3I0 picked up (O/C 3I0 PU) Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Earth Time overcurrent 3I0

OUT

LED

BO

60

28

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF M

LED

BO

60

69

OUT

LED

BO

60

112

OUT

LED

BO

60

113

OUT

LED

BO

60

114

OUT

LED

BO

60

67

OUT

LED

BO

60

154

328

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A.8 List of Information

F.No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

01791 Time Overcurrent TRIP (OvercurrentTRIP) 01800 I>> picked up (I>> picked up)

General O/C

OUT

ON

LED

BO

60

68

Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Earth Time overcurrent Earth Time overcurrent Earth Time overcurrent Earth Time overcurrent Earth Time overcurrent Earth Time overcurrent Earth Time overcurrent Earth Time overcurrent Earth Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Phase

OUT

ON OFF *

LED

BO

60

75

01804 I>> Time Out (I>> Time Out)

OUT

LED

BO

60

49

01805 I>> TRIP (I>> TRIP)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

60

70

01810 I> picked up (I> picked up)

OUT

ON OFF *

LED

BO

60

76

01814 I> Time Out (I> Time Out)

OUT

LED

BO

60

53

01815 I> TRIP (I> TRIP)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

60

71

01820 Ip picked up (Ip picked up)

OUT

ON OFF *

LED

BO

60

77

01824 Ip Time Out (Ip Time Out)

OUT

LED

BO

60

57

01825 Ip TRIP (Ip TRIP)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

60

58

01831 IE>> picked up (IE>> picked up)

OUT

ON OFF *

LED

BO

60

59

01832 IE>> Time Out (IE>> Time Out)

OUT

LED

BO

60

60

01833 IE>> TRIP (IE>> TRIP)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

60

61

01834 IE> picked up (IE> picked up)

OUT

ON OFF *

LED

BO

60

62

01835 IE> Time Out (IE> Time Out)

OUT

LED

BO

60

63

01836 IE> TRIP (IE> TRIP)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

60

72

01837 IEp picked up (IEp picked up)

OUT

ON OFF *

LED

BO

60

64

01838 IEp Time Out (IEp TimeOut)

OUT

LED

BO

60

65

01839 IEp TRIP (IEp TRIP)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

60

66

01843 Cross blk: PhX blocked PhY (INRUSH X-BLK) 01851 I> BLOCKED (I> BLOCKED)

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

LED

BO

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF

LED

BO

60

105

01852 I>> BLOCKED (I>> BLOCKED)

OUT

LED

BO

60

106

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

329

General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A Appendix

F.No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

01853 IE> BLOCKED (IE> BLOCKED)

Time overcurrent Earth Time overcurrent Earth Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Earth Time overcurrent 3I0 Time overcurrent 3I0 Time overcurrent 3I0 Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent 3I0 Time overcurrent 3I0 Time overcurrent 3I0 Time overcurrent 3I0 Time overcurrent 3I0 Time overcurrent 3I0 Time overcurrent 3I0 Time overcurrent 3I0 Time overcurrent 3I0 Time overcurrent 3I0 Cold Load Pickup

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF *

LED

BO

60

107

01854 IE>> BLOCKED (IE>> BLOCKED)

OUT

LED

BO

60

108

01855 Ip BLOCKED (Ip BLOCKED)

OUT

LED

BO

60

109

01856 IEp BLOCKED (IEp BLOCKED)

OUT

LED

BO

60

110

01857 3I0> BLOCKED (3I0> BLOCKED)

OUT

LED

BO

60

159

01858 3I0>> BLOCKED (3I0>> BLOCKED)

OUT

LED

BO

60

155

01859 3I0p BLOCKED (3I0p BLOCKED)

OUT

LED

BO

60

163

01860 O/C Phase Not avali. for this objekt (O/C Ph. Not av.) 01861 O/C 3I0 Not avali. for this objekt (O/C 3I0 Not av.) 01901 3I0>> picked up (3I0>> picked up)

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

ON

LED

BO

OUT

ON OFF *

LED

BO

60

156

01902 3I0>> Time Out (3I0>> Time Out)

OUT

LED

BO

60

157

01903 3I0>> TRIP (3I0>> TRIP)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

60

158

01904 3I0> picked up (3I0> picked up)

OUT

ON OFF *

LED

BO

60

160

01905 3I0> Time Out (3I0> Time Out)

OUT

LED

BO

60

161

01906 3I0> TRIP (3I0> TRIP)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

60

162

01907 3I0p picked up (3I0p picked up)

OUT

ON OFF *

LED

BO

60

164

01908 3I0p Time Out (3I0p TimeOut)

OUT

LED

BO

60

165

01909 3I0p TRIP (3I0p TRIP)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

60

166

01994 Cold-Load-Pickup switched OFF (CLP OFF) 01995 Cold-Load-Pickup is BLOCKED (CLP BLOCKED) 01996 Cold-Load-Pickup is RUNNING (CLP running) 01998 Dynamic settings O/C Phase are ACTIVE (I Dyn.set. ACT)

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

LED

BO

60

244

Cold Load Pickup

OUT

ON OFF *

LED

BO

60

245

Cold Load Pickup

OUT

LED

BO

60

246

Cold Load Pickup

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

60

248

330

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A.8 List of Information

F.No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

01999 Dynamic settings O/C 3I0 are ACTIVE (3I0 Dyn.set.ACT) 02000 Dynamic settings O/C Earth are ACTIVE (IE Dyn.set. ACT) 04523 >Block external trip 1 (>BLOCK Ext 1)

Cold Load Pickup

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF *

ON OFF ON OFF *

LED

BO

60

249

Cold Load Pickup

OUT

LED

BO

60

250

External Trip Functions External Trip Functions External Trip Functions External Trip Functions External Trip Functions External Trip Functions External Trip Functions External Trip Functions External Trip Functions External Trip Functions External Trip Functions External Trip Functions External Trip Functions External Trip Functions Unbalance Load (Negative Sequence) Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1 Unbalance Load (Negative Sequence)

SP

LED BI

BO

04526 >Trigger external trip 1 (>Ext trip 1)

SP

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF *

LED BI

BO

51

126

04531 External trip 1 is switched OFF (Ext 1 OFF) 04532 External trip 1 is BLOCKED (Ext 1 BLOCKED) 04533 External trip 1 is ACTIVE (Ext 1 ACTIVE) 04536 External trip 1: General picked up (Ext 1 picked up) 04537 External trip 1: General TRIP (Ext 1 Gen. TRIP) 04543 >BLOCK external trip 2 (>BLOCK Ext 2) 04546 >Trigger external trip 2 (>Ext trip 2)

OUT

LED

BO

51

131

OUT

ON OFF *

LED

BO

51

132

OUT

LED

BO

51

133

OUT

ON OFF ON

LED

BO

51

136

OUT

LED

BO

51

137

SP

LED BI

BO

SP

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF *

LED BI

BO

51

146

04551 External trip 2 is switched OFF (Ext 2 OFF) 04552 External trip 2 is BLOCKED (Ext 2 BLOCKED) 04553 External trip 2 is ACTIVE (Ext 2 ACTIVE) 04556 External trip 2: General picked up (Ext 2 picked up) 04557 External trip 2: General TRIP (Ext 2 Gen. TRIP) 05143 >BLOCK I2 (Unbalance Load) (>BLOCK I2)

OUT

LED

BO

51

151

OUT

ON OFF *

LED

BO

51

152

OUT

LED

BO

51

153

OUT

ON OFF ON

LED

BO

51

156

OUT

LED

BO

51

157

SP

LED BI

BO

70

126

05145 >Reverse Phase Rotation (>Reverse Rot.) 05147 Phase Rotation L1L2L3 (Rotation L1L2L3) 05148 Phase Rotation L1L3L2 (Rotation L1L3L2) 05151 I2 switched OFF (I2 OFF)

SP

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

LED BI

BO

71

34

OUT

LED

BO

70

128

OUT

LED

BO

70

129

OUT

LED

BO

70

131

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

331

General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A Appendix

F.No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

05152 I2 is BLOCKED (I2 BLOCKED)

Unbalance Load (Negative Sequence) Unbalance Load (Negative Sequence) Unbalance Load (Negative Sequence) Unbalance Load (Negative Sequence) Unbalance Load (Negative Sequence) Unbalance Load (Negative Sequence) Unbalance Load (Negative Sequence) Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection

OUT

ON OFF

ON OFF

LED

BO

70

132

05153 I2 is ACTIVE (I2 ACTIVE)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

70

133

05159 I2>> picked up (I2>> picked up)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

70

138

05165 I2> picked up (I2> picked up)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

70

150

05166 I2p picked up (I2p picked up)

OUT

ON OFF

LED

BO

70

141

05170 I2 TRIP (I2 TRIP)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

70

149

05172 I2 Not avaliable for this objekt (I2 Not avalia.)

OUT

ON

LED

BO

05603 >BLOCK differential protection (>Diff BLOCK) 05615 Differential protection is switched OFF (Diff OFF) 05616 Differential protection is BLOCKED (Diff BLOCKED) 05617 Differential protection is ACTIVE (Diff ACTIVE) 05620 Diff: adverse Adaption factor CT (Diff Adap.fact.) 05631 Differential protection picked up (Diff picked up) 05644 Diff: Blocked by 2.Harmon. L1 (Diff 2.Harm L1) 05645 Diff: Blocked by 2.Harmon. L2 (Diff 2.Harm L2) 05646 Diff: Blocked by 2.Harmon. L3 (Diff 2.Harm L3) 05647 Diff: Blocked by n.Harmon. L1 (Diff n.Harm L1) 05648 Diff: Blocked by n.Harmon. L2 (Diff n.Harm L2) 05649 Diff: Blocked by n.Harmon. L3 (Diff n.Harm L3) 05651 Diff. prot.: Blocked by ext. fault L1 (Diff Bl. exF.L1)

SP

LED BI

BO

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON

LED

BO

75

15

OUT

ON OFF *

LED

BO

75

16

OUT

LED

BO

75

17

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

LED

BO

75

31

OUT

LED

BO

75

44

OUT

LED

BO

75

45

OUT

LED

BO

75

46

OUT

LED

BO

75

47

OUT

LED

BO

75

48

OUT

LED

BO

75

49

OUT

LED

BO

75

51

332

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A.8 List of Information

F.No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

05652 Diff. prot.: Blocked by ext. fault L2 (Diff Bl. exF.L2) 05653 Diff. prot.: Blocked by ext. fault.L3 (Diff Bl. exF.L3) 05657 Diff: Crossblock by 2.Harmonic (DiffCrosBlk2HM) 05658 Diff: Crossblock by n.Harmonic (DiffCrosBlknHM) 05662 Diff. prot.: Blocked by CT fault L1 (Block Iflt.L1) 05663 Diff. prot.: Blocked by CT fault L2 (Block Iflt.L2) 05664 Diff. prot.: Blocked by CT fault L3 (Block Iflt.L3) 05666 Diff: Increase of char. phase L1 (Diff in.char.L1) 05667 Diff: Increase of char. phase L2 (Diff in.char.L2) 05668 Diff: Increase of char. phase L3 (Diff in.char.L3) 05670 Diff: Curr-Release for Trip (Diff IRelease) 05671 Differential protection TRIP (Diff TRIP)

Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF *

LED

BO

75

52

OUT

LED

BO

75

53

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF *

LED

BO

75

62

OUT

LED

BO

75

63

OUT

LED

BO

75

64

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

176

68

05672 Differential protection: TRIP L1 (Diff TRIP L1) 05673 Differential protection: TRIP L2 (Diff TRIP L2) 05674 Differential protection: TRIP L3 (Diff TRIP L3) 05681 Diff. prot.: IDIFF> L1 (without Tdelay) (Diff> L1) 05682 Diff. prot.: IDIFF> L2 (without Tdelay) (Diff> L2) 05683 Diff. prot.: IDIFF> L3 (without Tdelay) (Diff> L3) 05684 Diff. prot: IDIFF>> L1 (without Tdelay) (Diff>> L1) 05685 Diff. prot: IDIFF>> L2 (without Tdelay) (Diff>> L2) 05686 Diff. prot: IDIFF>> L3 (without Tdelay) (Diff>> L3) 05691 Differential prot.: TRIP by IDIFF> (Diff> TRIP)

OUT

LED

BO

176

86

OUT

LED

BO

176

87

OUT

LED

BO

176

88

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON M

LED

BO

75

81

OUT

LED

BO

75

82

OUT

LED

BO

75

83

OUT

LED

BO

75

84

OUT

LED

BO

75

85

OUT

LED

BO

75

86

OUT

LED

BO

75

91

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

333

General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A Appendix

F.No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

05692 Differential prot.: TRIP by IDIFF>> (Diff>> TRIP) 05701 Diff. curr. in L1 at trip without Tdelay (Dif L1 :) 05702 Diff. curr. in L2 at trip without Tdelay (Dif L2 :) 05703 Diff. curr. in L3 at trip without Tdelay (Dif L3 :) 05704 Restr.curr. in L1 at trip without Tdelay (Res L1 :) 05705 Restr.curr. in L2 at trip without Tdelay (Res L2 :) 05706 Restr.curr. in L3 at trip without Tdelay (Res L3 :) 05803 >BLOCK restricted earth fault prot. (>BLOCK REF) 05811 Restricted earth fault is switched OFF (REF OFF) 05812 Restricted earth fault is BLOCKED (REF BLOCKED) 05813 Restricted earth fault is ACTIVE (REF ACTIVE) 05816 Restr. earth flt.: Time delay started (REF T start) 05817 Restr. earth flt.: picked up (REF pikked up) 05821 Restr. earth flt.: TRIP (REF TRIP)

Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Restricted Earth Fault Protection Restricted Earth Fault Protection Restricted Earth Fault Protection Restricted Earth Fault Protection Restricted Earth Fault Protection Restricted Earth Fault Protection Restricted Earth Fault Protection Restricted Earth Fault Protection Restricted Earth Fault Protection Restricted Earth Fault Protection Restricted Earth Fault Protection Restricted Earth Fault Protection Time overcurrent 1Phase Time overcurrent 1Phase Time overcurrent 1Phase

OUT

ON

LED

BO

75

92

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF * LED BI BO

75

101

OUT

75

102

OUT

75

103

OUT

75

104

OUT

75

105

OUT

75

106

SP

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF *

LED

BO

76

11

OUT

ON OFF *

LED

BO

76

12

OUT

LED

BO

76

13

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF ON M

LED

BO

76

16

OUT

LED

BO

76

17

OUT

LED

BO

176

89

05826 REF: Value D at trip (without Tdelay) (REF D:) 05827 REF: Value S at trip (without Tdelay) (REF S:) 05830 REF err.: No starpoint CT (REF Err CTstar) 05835 REF err: Not avaliable for this objekt (REF Not avalia.) 05836 REF: adverse Adaption factor CT (REF Adap.fact.) 05951 >BLOCK Time Overcurrent 1Phase (>BLK 1Ph. O/C) 05952 >BLOCK Time Overcurrent 1Ph. I> (>BLK 1Ph. I>) 05953 >BLOCK Time Overcurrent 1Ph. I>> (>BLK 1Ph. I>>)

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF * LED BO

76

26

OUT

76

27

OUT

ON

OUT

ON

LED

BO

OUT

ON

LED

BO

SP

LED BI

BO

SP

LED BI

BO

SP

LED BI

BO

334

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A.8 List of Information

F.No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

05961 Time Overcurrent 1Phase is OFF (O/C 1Ph. OFF) 05962 Time Overcurrent 1Phase is BLOKKED (O/C 1Ph. BLK) 05963 Time Overcurrent 1Phase is ACTIVE (O/C 1Ph. ACT) 05966 Time Overcurrent 1Phase I> BLOKKED (O/C 1Ph I> BLK) 05967 Time Overcurrent 1Phase I>> BLOKKED (O/C 1Ph I>> BLK) 05971 Time Overcurrent 1Phase picked up (O/C 1Ph PU) 05972 Time Overcurrent 1Phase TRIP (O/C 1Ph TRIP) 05974 Time Overcurrent 1Phase I> picked up (O/C 1Ph I> PU)

Time overcurrent 1Phase Time overcurrent 1Phase Time overcurrent 1Phase Time overcurrent 1Phase Time overcurrent 1Phase Time overcurrent 1Phase Time overcurrent 1Phase Time overcurrent 1Phase

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF *

LED

BO

76

161

OUT

ON OFF *

LED

BO

76

162

OUT

LED

BO

76

163

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON

LED

BO

76

166

OUT

LED

BO

76

167

OUT

LED

BO

76

171

OUT

LED

BO

76

172

OUT

ON OFF ON M

LED

BO

76

174

05975 Time Overcurrent 1Phase I> TRIP (O/ Time overcurrent C 1Ph I> TRIP) 1Phase 05977 Time Overcurrent 1Phase I>> picked up (O/C 1Ph I>> PU) 05979 Time Overcurrent 1Phase I>> TRIP (O/C1Ph I>> TRIP) 05980 Time Overcurrent 1Phase: I at pick up (O/C 1Ph I:) 06851 >BLOCK Trip circuit supervision (>BLOCK TripC) 06852 >Trip circuit supervision: trip relay (>TripC trip rel) 06853 >Trip circuit supervision: breaker relay (>TripC brk rel.) 06861 Trip circuit supervision OFF (TripC OFF) 06862 Trip circuit supervision is BLOCKED (TripC BLOCKED) 06863 Trip circuit supervision is ACTIVE (TripC ACTIVE) 06864 Trip Circuit blk. Bin. input is not set (TripC ProgFail) 06865 Failure Trip Circuit (FAIL: Trip cir.) Time overcurrent 1Phase Time overcurrent 1Phase Time overcurrent 1Phase

OUT

LED

BO

76

175

OUT

ON OFF ON M

LED

BO

76

177

OUT

LED

BO

76

179

OUT

ON OFF * LED BI BO

76

180

Trip Circuit Supervi- SP sion Trip Circuit Supervi- SP sion Trip Circuit Supervi- SP sion Trip Circuit Supervi- OUT sion Trip Circuit Supervi- OUT sion Trip Circuit Supervi- OUT sion Trip Circuit Supervi- OUT sion Trip Circuit Supervi- OUT sion Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Earth OUT

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF *

LED BI

BO

170

51

LED BI

BO

170

52

LED

BO

170

53

ON OFF *

LED

BO

153

16

LED

BO

153

17

LED

BO

170

54

LED

BO

170

55

07551 I> InRush picked up (I> InRush PU)

ON OFF ON OFF

LED

BO

60

80

07552 IE> InRush picked up (IE> InRush PU)

OUT

LED

BO

60

81

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

335

General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A Appendix

F.No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

07553 Ip InRush picked up (Ip InRush PU)

Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Earth Time overcurrent Earth Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent 3I0 Time overcurrent 3I0 Time overcurrent 3I0 Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent 3I0 Time overcurrent Earth Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Phase Time overcurrent Phase RTD-Box

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF *

LED

BO

60

82

07554 IEp InRush picked up (IEp InRush PU)

OUT

LED

BO

60

83

07564 Earth InRush picked up (Earth InRush PU) 07565 Phase L1 InRush picked up (L1 InRush PU) 07566 Phase L2 InRush picked up (L2 InRush PU) 07567 Phase L3 InRush picked up (L3 InRush PU) 07568 3I0 InRush picked up (3I0 InRush PU)

OUT

LED

BO

60

88

OUT

LED

BO

60

89

OUT

LED

BO

60

90

OUT

LED

BO

60

91

OUT

LED

BO

60

95

07569 3I0> InRush picked up (3I0> InRush PU) 07570 3I0p InRush picked up (3I0p InRush PU) 07571 >BLOCK time overcurrent Phase InRush (>BLK Ph.O/C Inr) 07572 >BLOCK time overcurrent 3I0 InRush (>BLK 3I0O/C Inr) 07573 >BLOCK time overcurrent Earth InRush (>BLK E O/C Inr) 07581 Phase L1 InRush detected (L1 InRush det.) 07582 Phase L2 InRush detected (L2 InRush det.) 07583 Phase L3 InRush detected (L3 InRush det.) 14101 Fail: RTD (broken wire/shorted) (Fail: RTD) 14111 Fail: RTD 1 (broken wire/shorted) (Fail: RTD 1) 14112 RTD 1 Temperature stage 1 picked up (RTD 1 St.1 p.up) 14113 RTD 1 Temperature stage 2 picked up (RTD 1 St.2 p.up) 14121 Fail: RTD 2 (broken wire/shorted) (Fail: RTD 2) 14122 RTD 2 Temperature stage 1 picked up (RTD 2 St.1 p.up) 14123 RTD 2 Temperature stage 2 picked up (RTD 2 St.2 p.up)

OUT

LED

BO

60

96

OUT

LED

BO

60

97

SP

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF *

LED BI

BO

60

98

SP

LED BI

BO

60

99

SP

LED BI

BO

60

100

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

LED

BO

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

LED

BO

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

336

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A.8 List of Information

F.No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

14131 Fail: RTD 3 (broken wire/shorted) (Fail: RTD 3) 14132 RTD 3 Temperature stage 1 picked up (RTD 3 St.1 p.up) 14133 RTD 3 Temperature stage 2 picked up (RTD 3 St.2 p.up) 14141 Fail: RTD 4 (broken wire/shorted) (Fail: RTD 4) 14142 RTD 4 Temperature stage 1 picked up (RTD 4 St.1 p.up) 14143 RTD 4 Temperature stage 2 picked up (RTD 4 St.2 p.up) 14151 Fail: RTD 5 (broken wire/shorted) (Fail: RTD 5) 14152 RTD 5 Temperature stage 1 picked up (RTD 5 St.1 p.up) 14153 RTD 5 Temperature stage 2 picked up (RTD 5 St.2 p.up) 14161 Fail: RTD 6 (broken wire/shorted) (Fail: RTD 6) 14162 RTD 6 Temperature stage 1 picked up (RTD 6 St.1 p.up) 14163 RTD 6 Temperature stage 2 picked up (RTD 6 St.2 p.up) 14171 Fail: RTD 7 (broken wire/shorted) (Fail: RTD 7) 14172 RTD 7 Temperature stage 1 picked up (RTD 7 St.1 p.up) 14173 RTD 7 Temperature stage 2 picked up (RTD 7 St.2 p.up) 14181 Fail: RTD 8 (broken wire/shorted) (Fail: RTD 8) 14182 RTD 8 Temperature stage 1 picked up (RTD 8 St.1 p.up) 14183 RTD 8 Temperature stage 2 picked up (RTD 8 St.2 p.up) 14191 Fail: RTD 9 (broken wire/shorted) (Fail: RTD 9) 14192 RTD 9 Temperature stage 1 picked up (RTD 9 St.1 p.up) 14193 RTD 9 Temperature stage 2 picked up (RTD 9 St.2 p.up) 14201 Fail: RTD10 (broken wire/shorted) (Fail: RTD10)

RTD-Box

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

LED

BO

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

337

General Interrogation

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A Appendix

F.No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

14202 RTD10 Temperature stage 1 picked up (RTD10 St.1 p.up) 14203 RTD10 Temperature stage 2 picked up (RTD10 St.2 p.up) 14211 Fail: RTD11 (broken wire/shorted) (Fail: RTD11) 14212 RTD11 Temperature stage 1 picked up (RTD11 St.1 p.up) 14213 RTD11 Temperature stage 2 picked up (RTD11 St.2 p.up) 14221 Fail: RTD12 (broken wire/shorted) (Fail: RTD12) 14222 RTD12 Temperature stage 1 picked up (RTD12 St.1 p.up) 14223 RTD12 Temperature stage 2 picked up (RTD12 St.2 p.up) 30607 Accumulation of interrupted curr. L1 S1 (IL1S1:) 30608 Accumulation of interrupted curr. L2 S1 (IL2S1:) 30609 Accumulation of interrupted curr. L3 S1 (IL3S1:) 30610 Accumulation of interrupted curr. L1 S2 (IL1S2:) 30611 Accumulation of interrupted curr. L2 S2 (IL2S2:) 30612 Accumulation of interrupted curr. L3 S2 (IL3S2:) 30620 Accumulation of interrupted curr. I1 (I1:) 30621 Accumulation of interrupted curr. I2 (I2:) 30622 Accumulation of interrupted curr. I3 (I3:) 30623 Accumulation of interrupted curr. I4 (I4:) 30624 Accumulation of interrupted curr. I5 (I5:) 30625 Accumulation of interrupted curr. I6 (I6:) 30626 Accumulation of interrupted curr. I7 (I7:) >Back Light on (>Light on)

RTD-Box

OUT

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

LED

BO

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

RTD-Box

OUT

LED

BO

Statistics

OUT

Statistics

OUT

Statistics

OUT

Statistics

OUT

Statistics

OUT

Statistics

OUT

Statistics

OUT

Statistics

OUT

Statistics

OUT

Statistics

OUT

Statistics

OUT

Statistics

OUT

Statistics

OUT

Device

SP

ON OFF

LED BI

BO

338

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

General Interrogation

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A.8 List of Information

F.No.

Description

Function

Ground Fault Log On/Off

Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

>Quitt Lock Out: General Trip (>QuitG-TRP) Clock Synchronization (SynchClock)

Power System Data 2 Device

IntSP

LED BI

FK

BO

IntSP_ Ev IntSP

LED

BO

Control Authority (Cntrl Auth)

Control Authorization Control Authorization Control Authorization Supervision

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF *

LED

101

85

Controlmode LOCAL (ModeLOCAL)

IntSP

LED

101

86

Controlmode REMOTE (ModeREMOTE) Error FMS FO 1 (Error FMS1)

IntSP

LED

OUT

LED

BO

Error FMS FO 2 (Error FMS2)

Supervision

OUT

LED

BO

Error Systeminterface (SysIntErr.)

Supervision

IntSP

LED

BO

Fault Recording Start (FltRecSta)

Oscillographic Fault Records Change Group

IntSP

LED

BO

Group A (Group A)

IntSP

LED

BO

176

23

Group B (Group B)

Change Group

IntSP

LED

BO

176

24

Group C (Group C)

Change Group

IntSP

LED

BO

176

25

Group D (Group D)

Change Group

IntSP

LED

BO

176

26

Hardware Test Mode (HWTestMod)

Device

IntSP

LED

BO

Lock Out: General TRIP (G-TRP Quit)

Power System Data 2 Device

IntSP

LED

BO

Stop data transmission (DataStop)

IntSP

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF *

LED

BO

176

20

Test mode (Test mode)

Device

IntSP

LED

BO

176

21

Threshold Value 1 (ThreshVal1)

Threshold-Switch

IntSP

LED BI

FK

BO

CB

Unlock data transmission via BI (UnlockDT)

Device

IntSP

LED

BO

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

339

General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI

Event Log On/Off

Data Unit (ASDU)

Type of Information

Log-Buffers

Configurable in Matrix

IEC 60870-5-103

Chatter Blocking

Information-No

Binary Output

Function Key

Binary Input

Type

LED

A Appendix

A.9
F.No.

List of Measured Values

Description Function IEC 60870-5-103 Data Unit (ASDU) Configurable in Matrix Control Display Default Display DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD

Information-No

Function type

Compatibility

Position 1 5 3 2 6 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

00644 00645 00721 00722 00723 00724 00725 00726 00801 00802 00803 00804 01060 01061 01062 01063 01066 01067 01068 01069 01070 01071 01072 01073 01074 01075 01076 01077 01078 01079 07740 07741 07742

Frequency (Freq=) S (apparent power) (S =) Operat. meas. current IL1 side 1 (IL1S1=) Operat. meas. current IL2 side 1 (IL2S1=) Operat. meas. current IL3 side 1 (IL3S1=) Operat. meas. current IL1 side 2 (IL1S2=) Operat. meas. current IL2 side 2 (IL2S2=) Operat. meas. current IL3 side 2 (IL3S2=) Temperat. rise for warning and trip ( /trip =) Temperature rise for phase L1 ( /tripL1=) Temperature rise for phase L2 ( /tripL2=) Temperature rise for phase L3 ( /tripL3=) Hot spot temperature of leg 1 ( leg 1=) Hot spot temperature of leg 2 ( leg 2=) Hot spot temperature of leg 3 ( leg 3=) Aging Rate (Ag.Rate=) Load Reserve to warning level (ResWARN=) Load Reserve to alarm level (ResALARM=) Temperature of RTD 1 ( RTD 1 =) Temperature of RTD 2 ( RTD 2 =) Temperature of RTD 3 ( RTD 3 =) Temperature of RTD 4 ( RTD 4 =) Temperature of RTD 5 ( RTD 5 =) Temperature of RTD 6 ( RTD 6 =) Temperature of RTD 7 ( RTD 7 =) Temperature of RTD 8 ( RTD 8 =) Temperature of RTD 9 ( RTD 9 =) Temperature of RTD10 ( RTD10 =) Temperature of RTD11 ( RTD11 =) Temperature of RTD12 ( RTD12 =) Phase angle in phase IL1 side 1 (IL1S1=) Phase angle in phase IL2 side 1 (IL2S1=) IDiffL1(I/Inominal object [%]) (IDiffL1=)

Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Thermal Measurement Thermal Measurement Thermal Measurement Thermal Measurement Thermal Measurement Thermal Measurement Thermal Measurement Thermal Measurement Thermal Measurement Thermal Measurement Thermal Measurement Thermal Measurement Thermal Measurement Thermal Measurement Thermal Measurement Thermal Measurement Thermal Measurement Thermal Measurement Thermal Measurement Thermal Measurement Thermal Measurement Thermal Measurement Measurement Measurement Diff- and Rest. Measurement 134 134 134 134 134 134 134 134 134 134 134 134 146 146 146 146 146 146 146 146 146 146 146 146 priv priv priv priv priv priv priv priv priv priv priv priv 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 134 134 134 134 134 134 139 139 139 139 139 139 priv priv priv priv priv priv 9 9 9 9 9 9

340

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

CFC

CFC CD CFC CD CFC CD CFC CD CFC CD CFC CD CFC CD CFC CD CFC CD CFC CD CFC CD CFC CD CFC CD CFC CD CFC CD CFC CD CFC CD CFC CD CFC CD CFC CD CFC CD CFC CD CFC CD CFC CD CFC CD CFC CD CFC CD CFC CD CFC CD CFC CD CFC CD CFC CD CFC CD

A.9 List of Measured Values

F.No.

Description

Function

IEC 60870-5-103 Data Unit (ASDU)

Configurable in Matrix Control Display CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD Default Display DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD

Information-No

Function type

Compatibility

Position

07743 07744 07745 07746 07747 07749 07750 07759 07760 30633 30634 30635 30636 30637 30638 30639 30640 30641 30642 30643 30644 30645 30646 30647 30648 30649 30650 30651 30652 30653 30654 30655 30656

IDiffL2(I/Inominal object [%]) (IDiffL2=) IDiffL3(I/Inominal object [%]) (IDiffL3=) IRestL1(I/Inominal object [%]) (IRestL1=) IRestL2(I/Inominal object [%]) (IRestL2=) IRestL3(I/Inominal object [%]) (IRestL3=) Phase angle in phase IL3 side 1 (IL3S1=) Phase angle in phase IL1 side 2 (IL1S2=) Phase angle in phase IL2 side 2 (IL2S2=) Phase angle in phase IL3 side 2 (IL3S2=) Phase angle of current I1 (I1=) Phase angle of current I2 (I2=) Phase angle of current I3 (I3=) Phase angle of current I4 (I4=) Phase angle of current I5 (I5=) Phase angle of current I6 (I6=) Phase angle of current I7 (I7=) 3I0 (zero sequence) of side 1 (3I0S1=) I1 (positive sequence) of side 1 (I1S1=) I2 (negative sequence) of side 1 (I2S1=) 3I0 (zero sequence) of side 2 (3I0S2=) I1 (positive sequence) of side 2 (I1S2=) I2 (negative sequence) of side 2 (I2S2=) Operat. meas. current I1 (I1=) Operat. meas. current I2 (I2=) Operat. meas. current I3 (I3=) Operat. meas. current I4 (I4=) Operat. meas. current I5 (I5=) Operat. meas. current I6 (I6=) Operat. meas. current I7 (I7=) Operat. meas. current I8 (I8=) Idiff REF (I/Inominal object [%]) (IdiffREF=) Irest REF (I/Inominal object [%]) (IrestREF=) Operat. meas. voltage Umeas. (Umeas.=) Operating hours greater than (OpHour>)

Diff- and Rest. Measurement Diff- and Rest. Measurement Diff- and Rest. Measurement Diff- and Rest. Measurement Diff- and Rest. Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Diff- and Rest. Measurement Diff- and Rest. Measurement Measurement

CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

341

A Appendix
n

342

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

Index
A
Accessories 288 Acknowledgement of commands 194 Additional support ii Ageing rate 136 Alternating voltage 249 Ambient temperatures 256 Applicability of manual i Applications 5 Auto-transformers 15, 46 Auxiliary contacts of the CB 108, 153, 163, 203, Command sequence 190 Command types 189 Commissioning 222 Communication interfaces 250 Configuration 14 Scope of functions 14 Conformity i Connection examples 293 Construction 257 Control and numeric keys 4 Copyright ii Cubicle mounting 199 Current balance supervision 161 Current comparison 33 Current grading 82 Current guard 51, 56 Current restraint 34 Current transformer data 23, 25, 26, 27, 118 Current transformer requirements 248

229
Auxiliary voltage supervision 160

B
Backup battery 160 Battery 160, 281, 289 Binary inputs 3, 249 Binary outputs 3, 175, 249 Block data transmission 223 Branch-points 15, 22, 50, 262 Breaker failure protection 152, 228, 278 Buffer battery 281, 289 Busbar protection 50, 52, 81 Busbars 15, 22, 23, 50, 52, 262

D
Danger (definition) ii DCF77 281 Definite time overcurrent protection 73, 97 Differential current monitoring 51, 56 Differential protection 33, 258 for branch-points 50, 262 for busbars 50, 52, 262 for generators 48, 261 for lines 50, 262 for mini-busbars 50, 262 for motors 48, 261 for reactors 48, 49, 261 for series reactors 48 for short lines 50, 262 for shunt reactors 49 for transformers 42 restricted earth fault protection 64, 263 Differential protection values 181 DIGSI 4 289 DIGSI REMOTE 4 289 Dimensions 282

C
Caution (definition) ii CFC 10, 281, 290 Changeover of setting groups 202 Circuit breaker auxiliary contacts 108, 153, 163,

203, 229
Circuit breaker failure protection 152, 228, 278 Circuit breaker status 27, 108 Climatic tests 256 Cold load pickup 108, 272 Command acknowledgement 194 Command duration 27 Command processing 189

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

343

Index

Direct trip 278 Direct voltage 248 Disassembling the device 207 Disk emulation 78, 100, 124 Display of measured values 179 Dynamic cold load pickup 108, 272

Hardware structure 2 Harmonic restraint 37 High-current trip 37 High-impedance differential protection 115 High-impedance principle 115 High-impedance protection 118 Hot-spot calculation 135, 277 Humidity 256

E
Earthing reactor (starpoint former) 15, 44, 45, 49,

64
Electrical tests 253 EMC tests 254, 255 Emergency starting 132 Event log 177 External signals 278 External trip 278

I
IBS-tool 181 Increase of pickup value on startup 38, 108 Information list 323 Inrush current 37, 79, 101 Inrush restraint 37, 79, 101 Installation 198 in cubicles 199 in panels (flush) 198 in racks 199 on panels (surface) 200 Insulation tests 253 Interface cable 289 Interface modules 213, 288 Interlocking 191 Inverse time overcurrent protection 76, 99 IRIG B 281

F
Fault detection 39, 171 Fault detection logic 171 Fault messages 177 Fault reactions 165 Fault recording 183, 281 Features 7 Feeder current guard 51, 56 Flush mounting 198 Front elements 4 Function control 171

L
LCD 4 LED 4 Lines 15, 22, 42, 50, 262 List of information 323 List of measured values 340 List of settings 308 Lock-out 172

G
General diagrams 291 General fault detection 171 General interrogation 178 General pickup 171 General protection data 32 General tripping 172 Generators 15, 22, 48, 261 Graphic tools 289 Graphical analysis program SIGRA 289 Graphical symbols iii Group alarms 166

M
Manual close 79, 101 Measured quantities supervision 161 Measured values 179, 180, 280 Mechanical tests 255 Memory modules 160 Mini-busbars 15, 22, 50, 262 Modem interface 250 Monitoring functions 160, 279 Motors 15, 22, 48, 261 Mounting brackets 289

H
Hardware modifications 205 Hardware monitoring 160

344

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

Index

N
No trip no flag 173 Nominal current 23, 24, 25, 26, 248 Nominal currents, alteration 205, 211 Nominal frequency 20 Note (definition) ii

R
Rack mounting 199 Rated current 23, 24, 25, 26, 248 Rated currents, alteration 205, 211 Rated frequency 20 Reactions to fault 165 Reactors 15, 22, 48, 49, 261 Reassembling the device 217 Reclosure interlocking 172 Relative ageing 136 Reset time curves time overcurrent protection (ANSI) 269 unbalanced load protection (ANSI) 269 user defined 16, 87 Resistance stabilization 116 Resistance temperature detector 17 Restraint add-on stabilization 36 current stabilization 34 differential protection 34 harmonic restraint 37 inrush restraint 37, 79, 101 resistance stabilization 116 restricted earth fault protection 67 Restricted earth fault protection 64, 263 Reverse interlocking 81 RTD 17

O
Operating interface 4, 250 Operating measured values 180 Operating messages 177 Operating software DIGSI 289 Ordering code 286 Ordering information 286 Ordering number 286 Output relays 175, 249 Overload protection 131, 275

P
Panel flush mounting 198 Panel surface mounting 200 Parameter names iii Parameter options iii Phase sequence 20, 162 Phase sequence supervision 162 Pickup of the entire device 171 Plug-in socket boxes 289 Power supply 4, 205, 248 Power system data 1 20 Power system data 2 32 Power transformers 15, 20, 42, 259 auto-transformers 15, 46 single-phase transformers 15, 46 with isolated windings 15 Preset configurations 305 Processing of commands 189 Processing of messages 175 Protection function control 171 Protocol dependent functions 307

S
Sampling frequency 161 SCADA interface 4, 251 Scope of functions 7, 14 Serial interfaces 4 Series reactors 15, 22, 48, 261 Service conditions 256 Service interface 4, 250 Set-points 182 Setting consistency 167, 227 Setting errors 167 Setting groups 30 Changeover 202 Setting list 308 Shock and vibration 255 Short lines 15, 22, 50, 262 Short-circuit links 288 Shunt reactors 15, 22, 49, 261 SIGRA 4 289 Single-phase differential protection 52 Single-phase time overcurrent protection 113, 273 Single-phase transformers 15, 46

Q
Qualified personnel (definition) ii

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

345

Index

Software monitoring 161 Spare parts 206 Spontaneous annunciations 178 Spontaneous displays 171, 177 Standard interlocking 192 Starpoint condition 21, 26, 42, 46, 47, 57 Starpoint former (earthing reactor) 15, 44, 45, 49,

64
Startup 38, 108, 132 Statistics 173, 178, 281 Sudden pressure relays 157 Summation CTs 52 Support ii Surface mounting 200 Symbol conventions iii System interface 4, 251

T
Tank leakage protection 117, 121 Target audience of manual i Temperature unit 20 Temperatures 256 Terminal block covering caps 288 Termination variants 201 Test operation 223 Test recordings 243 Thermal differential equation 131 Thermal overload protection 131, 275 Thermal replica 131, 275 Thermal set-points 143 Thermal time constant 131 Thermal values 181 Thermobox 17, 143, 250, 277, 288 Time overcurrent protection cold load pickup 108 for earth current 97 for phase currents 73 for residual current 73 for starpoint current 97 single-phase 113, 273 Time synchronization 4, 253 Traction transformers 15, 46 Transformer messages 157 n

Transformers 15, 20, 42, 259 auto-transformers 15, 46 power transformers 42 single-phase transformers 15, 46 with isolated windings 15 Transmission blocking 223 Transmission of measured values 179 Transverse differential protection 48 Trip circuit supervision 162, 203 Trip command duration 27 Trip log 177 Tripping characteristic differential protection 39, 258 restricted earth fault protection 69, 263 thermal overload protection 276 time overcurrent protection (ANSI) 267, 268 time overcurrent protection (IEC) 266 unbalanced load protection (ANSI) 267 unbalanced load protection (IEC) 266 Tripping logic 172 Types of commands 189 Typographic conventions iii

U
Unbalanced load protection 123, 274 User defined functions 10, 281 User defined reset time curves 16, 87 User defined set-points 182 User specified curves 86, 105

V
Vibration and shock 255 Voltage measurement 179

W
Warning (definition) ii Watchdog 161

346

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

Corrections
To Siemens AG Dept. PTD PA D DM D13623 Berlin Germany Dear reader, printing errors can never be entirely eliminated: therefore, should you come across any when reading this manual, kindly enter them in this form together with any comments or suggestions for improvement that you may have. Corrections/Suggestions Address: Company/Dept.: From Name:

Phone no.:

Fax no.:

7UT612 Manual C53000G1176C1481

Subject to technical alteration

Copying of this document and giving it to others and the use or communication of the contents thereof, are forbidden without express authority. Offenders are liable to the payment of damages. All rights are reserved in the event of the grant of a patent or the registration of a utility model or design. Order-no.: C53000G1176C1481 Available from: LZF Frth-Bislohe Printed in Germany/Imprim en Allemagne AG 0202 0.3 FO 358 En

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft